Construct Addition to Building 90020 - Green

Construct Addition to Building 90020 - Green
MS0114
PROJECT NO: FTEV 15-1069
DATE: 6 May 2016
DEPARTMENT OF THE AIR FORCE
SPECIAL OPERATIONS COMMAND
1 SPECIAL OPERATIONS WING
Construct Addition to
Building 90020
HURLBURT FIELD, FLORIDA
MS0114
INDEX
DIVISION 01
01 00 00
01 09 00
01 10 00
01 33 00
01 41 00
01 56 00
01 58 00
01 60 00
01 65 00
01 70 00
01 81 13
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Requirements
Reference Standards
Summary of Work
Submittals
Testing Laboratory Services
Environmental Protection
Project Identification Sign
Material and Equipment
Starting of Systems
Contract Closeout
Green Procurement
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19
Selective Structure Demolition
DIVISION 03
03 10 00
03 20 00
03 30 00
03 35 00
03 39 00
CONCRETE
Concrete Forming and Accessories
Concrete Reinforcement
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Concrete Finishing
Concrete Curing
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
04 05 03
Masonry Mortaring and Grouting
04 20 00
Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05
05 12 00
05 21 00
05 31 13
05 40 00
DIVISION 06
Not Used
METALS
Structural Steel Framing
Steel Joist Framing
Steel Decking
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
DIVISION 07
07 21 13
07 21 16
07 52 19
07 54 23
07 61 00
07 62 00
07 90 00
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Board Insulation
Blanket Insulation
Self-Adhering Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing (UFGS Section)
Preformed Roofing, Wall Siding and Accessories
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Joint Protection
DIVISION 08
08 13 14
08 14 16
08 41 13
08 71 00
OPENINGS
Standard Steel Doors and Frames
Flush Wood Doors
Aluminum-Framed Entrance and Storefronts
Door Hardware
DIVISION 09
09 21 16
09 22 16
09 51 13
09 65 00
09 68 00
FINISHES
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Non-Structural Metal Framing
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Resilient Flooring
Carpeting
I-1
MS0114
09 69 00
09 90 00
Access Flooring
Painting and Coating
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10 14 00
Signage
10 44 00
Fire Protection Specialties
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
Not Used
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
Not Used
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 00
Wet- and Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
21 13 00z
Wet and Dry Backflow Preventer Testing Form
DIVISION 22
22 05 03
22 07 00
22 11 19
22 11 19z
PLUMBING
Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Plumbing Insulation
Plumbing Specialties
Plumbing Specialties Backflow Preventer Testing Form
DIVISION 23
23 05 00
23 05 01
23 05 29
23 05 53
23 05 93
23 07 00
23 09 23
23 21 13
23 21 16
23 21 16z
23 31 00
23 33 00
23 36 00
23 37 00
23 73 00
23 81 23
HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Common Work Results for HVAC
Mechanical Demolition
Hangars and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
HVAC Insulation
Direct Digital Control System for HVAC
Hydronic Piping
Hydronic Piping Specialties
Hydronic Piping attachment Backflow Preventer Testing Form
HVAC Ducts and Casings
Air Duct Accessories
Air Terminal Units
Air Outlets and Inlets
Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units
Computer Room Air Conditioning Units
DIVISION 26
26 05 00
26 05 19
26 05 26
26 05 29
26 05 33
26 05 34
26 05 53
26 24 16
26 27 26
26 28 19
26 35 33
26 41 00
26 51 00
26 56 00
ELECTRICAL
Basic Electrical Requirements
Building Wire and Cable
Grounding and Bonding
Supporting Devices
Conduit
Boxes
Electrical Identification
Panelboards
Wiring Devices
Disconnect Switches
Surge Suppressors
Lightning Protection Systems
Interior Luminaires
Exterior Lighting
I-2
MS0114
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
27 00 00
Telephone and LAN System
27 51 16
Public Address and Mass Notification Systems
DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00
Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
DIVISION 31
31 10 00
31 23 16
31 23 23
31 31 16
EARTHWORK
Site Clearing
Excavation
Fill
Termite Control
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 92 23
Sodding
DIVISION 33 UTILITIES
33 31 00
Sanitary Utility Sewage Piping
33 41 00
Storm Utility Drainage Piping
APPENDIX
Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation
END OF INDEX
I-3
MS0114
SECTION 01 00 00:
PART 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
1.01
INTENT:
A. The intent of this project is to provide the Government with a fully complete and useable building meeting
all the requirements for its intended use, constructed to high standards and the requirements of the
Contract Documents. A fully complete and useable building is defined as one that is constructed to meet
the aesthetic, functional and structural properties required by the drawings, specifications, amendments
issued prior to receipt of bids/proposals, and modifications issued after award of the contract. All work
shall be constructed to meet or exceed industry or government standards, whichever is more stringent.
All construction shall be executed in a professional manner resulting in a finished product of highest
quality. All materials, equipment, and other products used in the construction shall be new or approved
recyclable materials from an approved source. All new work shall be maintained in a clean condition, and
shall be installed plumb, square, true to line and grade, and shall conform to the stated dimensions,
notes, schedules, etc. The work shall be properly secured, consistent in quality, fit and finish, and
installation, etc.
1.02
APPLICABILITY:
A. This section of the specification is applicable to all sections that follow.
1.03
INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
A. Prospective bidders desiring further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract documents
shall forward a written request to the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer is the sole authority
for interpretation of intent of work and for approval of quality of materials and workmanship.
Failure to request the above shall not be the basis for a change order. DO NOT ASSUME THAT
YOUR INTERPRETATION IS CORRECT.
1.04
CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR AMBIGUITIES:
A. Prior to submittal of a bid or proposal by the prime/general contractor, it is expected that each
subcontractor, equipment and/or material supplier, and others associated with the project, shall have
carefully examined as necessary, the drawings, specifications, and all addenda issued prior to the date of
submission of the bid or proposal. Any and all conflicts, discrepancies or ambiguous language reasonably
ascertainable from an inspection of the above and the project site that will affect the cost, quality, fit,
finish, labor specified or required, equipment and/or materials specified or required, etc., necessary to
fully complete the project and make it operational for it’s intended use, must immediately be
brought to the attention of the prime/general contractor. The prime/general contractor must
immediately notify the Contracting Officer in writing prior to submitting a bid or proposal and
request written clarification of the conflict and/or discrepancy.
B. Conflicts, discrepancies and ambiguous language that are inconsistent with the intent as stated above
include but are not limited to:
1. Ambiguous notes or statements or drawings or details.
2. Conflicting information on the drawings and/or in the specifications.
3. Errors or inconsistencies in schedules.
4. Dimensional errors.
5. Incomplete notes or dimensions or schedules.
6. Extraneous notes, dimensions or schedules that conflict with the drawings or specifications.
C. Conflicts, discrepancies or ambiguities brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer AFTER
award of contract WILL NOT be considered as a basis for a change in the work.
D. The intent of the above paragraphs is to increase the involvement of all persons associated with the project,
particularly during the bid or proposal phase. Increased involvement during this phase will enhance the
accuracy of the bid or proposal and reduce the potential for issuance of change orders during the construction
phase.
1.05
DEFINITIONS:
01 00 00 - 1
MS0114
A. “Contract Documents": Contract Documents consist of the Contract, drawings and specifications, all
addenda issued prior to submission of the bid/proposal and all modifications and/or other directives issued
after the award/execution of the contract. The intent of the Contract Documents is to provide the Contractor
with all items of work necessary for the proper execution and completion of the project. The items listed are
complementary, what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. In the event of a conflict
between the drawings and the specifications, the specifications shall take precedence over the drawings,
unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The Contractor shall perform all work consistent with and
reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents as necessary to produce the intended results.
B. “Government”: The government is the United States of America. The government is the owner of the
project.
C. “Prime Contractor”: The Prime/General Contractor is the person or entity who is qualified, bonded and
insured, and who is responsible for preparing the bid/proposal and submitting it to the government. If the
bid/proposal is accepted, the prime contractor will enter into a contract with the government to construct the
work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The term “contractor” is used throughout the contract
documents, and is synonymous with Prime/General Contractor, and means the contractor or the contractor’s
authorized representative.
D.
“Subcontractor”: A Subcontractor is a person or entity who prepares and submits a bid/proposal for a
portion of the work to the contractor for his use in preparing his bid/proposal. During the construction phase,
the subcontractor has a direct contract with the contractor to perform a portion of the work.
E. “Material/Equipment Suppliers”: Material/equipment suppliers are person(s) or entities who prepare and
submit a bid/proposal to the contractor for his use in preparing his bid/proposal. During the construction
phase, the material equipment supplier has a direct contract with the contractor to provide certain materials or
equipment to be incorporated into the work.
F. “Project”: The project is the total construction of the work to be performed under the contract documents and
may be the whole or part and which may include construction by the government.
G. “Work”: The term work means the providing of construction services required by the contract documents,
and includes all labor, materials, equipment and other incidentals necessary to fulfill the contractor’s
obligations. The work constitutes the whole project.
H. “Changes in the Work”: Changes in the work may be accomplished after award of contract without
invalidating the contract. Changes in the work shall be based upon a mutual agreement between the
contractor and the government. Changes in the work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the
contract documents unless otherwise provided for in the change. The time to complete the additional work
shall also be a part of the agreement.
1.06
COORDINATION:
A. The prime contractor is responsible for the overall coordination of the project during the bid and or
the proposal phase and the construction phase.
1. Coordinate bid and or the proposal phase to assure that all materials, labor, equipment, etc., to be used
in the construction of the project and necessary for the completion of the prime contractor’s bid/proposal,
as defined in 1.01 above, are included in the bids of the respective suppliers and/or subcontractors work,
i.e., civil, architectural, plumbing, HVAC, or electrical.
2. Coordinate construction phase to assure efficient and orderly progression of the work. Coordination
shall include, but is not limited to, periodic meetings between the contractor and subcontractors to
coordinate the work of each trade one with the other, installation of one part of the work that is dependent
on the installation of other components either before or after it's own installation, the materials and
equipment needed to properly complete the work and ordering of those materials and equipment,
preparation of schedules, layouts and phasing of the work as required to meet the government's stated
needs, installation of and removal of temporary facilities, preparation and delivery of submittals including
shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, etc., scheduling of construction activities in the sequence
required to obtain the best results, installation of different components within the allotted space to assure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance or repair, periodic inspections of the work to assure
compliance with the Contract Documents, visual inspections of the work to assure compliance with
aesthetic requirements, maintenance and completion of all contract closeout documents including the
01 00 00 - 2
MS0114
coordination of supporting closeout documents by all subcontractors, maintenance and completion of
Construction Data Worksheet, verification of new utility connections to each item of existing and new
equipment, verify measurements of existing and new work prior to installation of various components,
proper storage of materials at the site particularly items requiring specific environmental conditions,
protection of completed new work to minimize damage by other trades, cleaning, correction of punch list
items of work after the final inspection, correction of warranty items during the warranty period, etc.
3. The prime contractor, each subcontractor, each equipment or material supplier and others who may be
affiliated with the project are individually responsible for field verification of existing and new conditions
that will affect their work, including the work of associated trades. Do not order, fabricate or install new
items without field verification. Any discrepancy between the actual field dimension(s) and the size shown
on the drawings, specifications, shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, etc. must immediately be
brought to the attention of the prime contractor, project inspector and Contracting Officer. The prime
contractor shall request written direction from the Contracting Officer.
4. Prior to performing any Site work or work below grade, the Contractor must obtain a completed and
signed copy of AF FORM 103, Base Civil Engineering Work Clearance Request.
5. Prior to bringing any lasers on Hurlburt Field, the contractor shall notify the Bio Environmental office 8811822 and the Safety Office 884-2610.
B. Individual sections of this specification are taken from the Base Master Specification. Therefore, not all
products (materials, equipment, etc.) specified may be required to complete the construction of this project.
In accordance with 1.05 above, the contractor, each subcontractor, equipment and/or material supplier, and
others associated with the project, must carefully examine the drawings to determine which products are
required to fully complete the work. See paragraph 1.04 Discrepancies.
1.07
CONSTRUCTION DATA WORKSHEET
A. The contractor must complete the checklist attached at the end of this section.
1. Section 1.a. General Data Required: The government will complete Category Code and Facility number.
2. Section 1.b. Systems in Building: All.
1.08
METHODS:
A. The site shall be prepared, maintained, and operated by the contractor throughout the Work.
Such preparation, maintenance, and operation include but are not limited to:
1. Preparation: Prevent damage to all existing construction, existing equipment and furnishings, existing
utilities and paved areas, and new items such as recently installed materials and equipment, new stored
materials, trees/shrubs/landscape features identified to remain at the site, and privately owned vehicles in
and around the work site. The contractor responsible for the damage will be held liable for the repair or
replacement of the damaged item as directed by the Contracting Officer.
2. Safety and Security: Occupied and unoccupied facilities must be maintained in a safe manner to prevent
the possibility of injury to the occupants and workmen. Upon completion of the days work, the contractor
is responsible for securing the facility to prevent unlawful entry to the facility. If the interior of the facility or
any equipment or furnishings are damaged due to the contractor's failure to properly secure the facility,
the prime contractor and/or the subcontractor responsible for securing the facility will be held liable for the
repair of the facility and replacement of the damaged equipment or furnishings as directed by the
Contracting Officer.
3. Maintenance: Maintain the site in a neat and orderly manner to include daily trash/debris removal,
stacking of material, control of surface drainage, mowing, and road sweeping.
4. Operation: Follow Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements, US Army Corps of
Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual EM 385-1-1, base law enforcement and base fire
marshal requirements.
5. Trailers used for storage and/or temporary field offices shall be clean and well maintained and display
only the name of the contractor or subcontractor.
1.09
CONSTRUCTION:
A. All work will be of professional quality. Intent of construction includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Utility connections shall be clean and complete. Contractor must request a utility outage from the
Contracting Officer no less than 3 working days prior to a scheduled outage for a single facility, and 14
days for outages affecting multiple facilities.
2. Backfilling and compaction will be performed so settling shall not occur.
01 00 00 - 3
MS0114
3. All disturbed areas and all new graded areas shall be graded smooth and sodded. Seeding will be
permitted only if indicated on the drawings and/or approved by the Contracting Officer. Also, see other
applicable sections(s) of the specification.
4. Construction shall be built to minimum industry tolerances unless otherwise noted and shall be square,
true to line and grade, plumb and straight. Construct to the dimensions and elevations given on the
drawings.
5. Finishes shall be consistent in color and texture, and shall cover all exposed surfaces, including obscure
surfaces.
6. All work shall be constructed and/or installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions, copies of which must be included with submittal documents.
7. Road/pavement cuts are not permitted unless approved by the Contracting Officer. If approved,
road/pavement cuts must be submitted to the 1Special Operations Civil Engineering Squadron, Programs
Flight (1 SOCES/CEP) in writing, two weeks prior to the scheduled road/pavement cut.
8. Under no circumstances will a utility outage or road cut be permitted without the required notification
unless the Base Civil Engineer deems it an emergency.
9. Any contractor that connects to a Hurlburt Field fire hydrant for water usage must use an approved
backflow preventer and provide proof to the 1 SOCES/CEAN (ASSETT Management Flight) through the
Contracting Officer that they are using a certified backflow prevention device. The certificate must be
current to within 12 months of the date of connection and through the duration of water usage.
Certification must be by a Certified Backflow Tester certified by the State.
10. Temporary electric power, natural gas and water used by the contractor during construction shall be
provided by the government at no cost to the contractor. The contractor shall provide temporary meters
for each utility. Each temporary meter shall be read by the contractor monthly on the last
working day of the month and submitted to the Hurlburt Field Energy Manager on that same day. At the
completion of the project and acceptance by the government, the contractor shall remove the temporary
meters and make the final connections to the utility.
1.10
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS:
A. This project shall be constructed to conform to the latest edition of the following standards.
1. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
2. ACI: American Concrete Institute
3. International Code Council
a. International Building Code
b. International Fuel Gas Code
c. International Mechanical Code
d. International Plumbing Code
e. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
f. NEC: National Electric Code
g. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings.
h. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 3-600-01, Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities.
i. Americans with Disabilities Act
j. ASCE 7-98
k. 1 Special Operations Civil Engineer Squadron Design & Construction Standards. (Copy in 1 SOCES
Engineering Flight office)
l. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 3-210-10, Low Impact Development.
B. The contractor is required to comply with all aspects of the Federal Aviation Regulation (FAR), Part 77,
Objects Affecting Navigable Airspace, for all work associated with this contract. This includes, but is not
limited to, the use of any and all equipment used to construct the facility and the facility itself. The contractor
is required to obtain all necessary permits including FAA form 7460-1 (latest edition) and provide all
necessary notices associated with this requirement. All work within the following areas must be coordinated
in writing with the Contracting Officer 21 days in advance of commencement of the work:
1. LATERAL CLEARANCE AREA: A line 1000 feet from and parallel to the centerline of the runway.
2. TAXIWAY SETBACK: A line 200 feet from and parallel to the centerline of any taxiway.
3. APRON SETBACK: A line 125 feet from and parallel to the edge of the aircraft-parking apron.
4. CLEAR ZONE: A line 1500 feet from and parallel to the centerline of the runway beginning at the runway
threshold and continuing for a distance of 3000 feet north and south of the ends of the runway.
C. A copy of FAR Part 77, and permit applications may be obtained from:
ARP Division ASO-600
01 00 00 - 4
MS0114
Federal Aviation Administration
P. O. Box 20636
Atlanta, Georgia 30320
Phone 404-3056700
1.11
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Throughout these specifications and/or on the drawings one or more "Trade Names" for a product may be
listed. When this occurs, all parties agree that the phrases: "or equal," "or approved equal," and "or equal
as approved," follow each "Trade Name" listed. The contractor may submit substitute products, meeting
the identified salient characteristics (physical and functional), to the Contracting Officer for review and
approval. The term “Trade Names” includes Acceptable Manufacturers listed under PART 2 PRODUCTS of
the specifications.
B. Approval Required:
1. The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents.
2. All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes and performance shall
require approval by the Contracting Officer before being incorporated into the work.
3. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been
specifically reviewed and approved for this Contract by the Contracting Officer.
4. Refer to section 01 60 00 for substitution submittal requirements.
C. Do not assume that materials, equipment or methods submitted, as a substitution, will be approved
as equal. The Contracting Officer is the sole interpreter of the Contract Documents.
1.12
ASBESTOS:
A. See section 01 56 00, Environmental Protection
1.13
LEAD BASED PAINT
A. See section 01 56 00, Environmental Protection
1.14
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. See section 01 56 00, Environmental Protection
1.15
CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORT
A. Contractor progress reports shall be made in a timely manner and in accordance with the contract
documents.
B. Contractor shall use the Contract Progress Report form at the end of this section. As indicated on the form, all
listed items of work may not be applicable to this project. Contractor shall submit completed form to include
only those items of work applicable to this project.
C. Item 73, “Close-Out Documents” has been assigned a value of 3%:
1. This amount will be withheld from final payment until such time as all project record documents; "As-Built"
drawings, operation & maintenance manuals & data, spare parts & maintenance products, warranties,
maintenance service, etc., have been turned over to the government. The withholding of payment is not a
penalty but is being done to assure compliance with specification Section 01 70 00 CONTRACT
CLOSEOUT.
2. The government will not provide a final inspection or accept Beneficial Occupancy of the building
until all the above documents have been turned over to the government. The contractor and
subcontractors are advised to prepare these documents as the work progresses and not wait until the end
of the project.
1.16
CONTRACT PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. The contractor must provide a copy of the Contract Progress Schedule for review by the Contracting Officer
and the Construction Manager no later than 5 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. If
disapproved, the contractor shall resubmit the revised Contract Progress Schedule within 2 days of the date
of the disapproval. The Contract Progress Schedule must be approved within 10 days of the date of the
disapproval. No construction work shall start without an approved Contract Progress Schedule.
B. The Contract Progress Schedule must be based on the data in the Contract Progress Report attached to the
01 00 00 - 5
MS0114
end of the section.
C. In order to satisfy the contract requirements that work commence within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, the
contractor may commence the submittal process in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 00 00 - 6
MS0114
CONSTRUCTION DATA WORKSHEET
1. GENERAL DATA REQUIRED:
A. PROJECT INFORMATION:
Project No.: Contract No.:
,
Completion Date:
_____
Category Code: ___________, Facility No.: ____________,
Total Cost: ___________________
Liquidated Damages______________________________.
Number of Floors: ______________
General Description: ___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
B. SYSTEMS IN BUILDING:
Category
Code
Unit of
Nomenclature
Measure
880-211
Closed Head Auto Sprinkler
HD/SF
880-217
880-221
880-232
872-841
811-147
821-115
821-116
890-125
890-121
826-122
826-123
890-126
824-464
844-368
852-261
852-262
132-133
132-134
890-272
812-223
812-224
812-225
812-226
812-926
812-928
831-157
831-169
832-266
832-267
842-245
843-314
843-315
851-143
AFFF PA Sprink Sys
HD/SF
Auto Fire Detection System
SF/EA
(Include Pull Stations)
Foam Fire System
EA
Security Alarm System
EA
Electric Emergency Power
Generator
KW
Storage Tank for Heating
GA
Or Generator Fuel (Type Fuel)
Storage Tank for Heating
GA
Heating Plt 750/3500 MB
MB
Heating Plt over 3500 MB
MB
Storage Tank for Heating
GA
A/C Plt less 5 TN
TN
A/C Plt 5 to 25 TN
TN
A/C Plt 25 to 100 TN
TN
A/C Plt Over 100 TN
TN
A/C Window Units
SF/TN
Gas Mains
LF
Water Supply, Non-Potable
KG
Veh. Parking (Ops)
SY
Veh. Parking (Non-Org)
SY
Pad, Equip
SY
Ant. Spt Stru
EA
EMCS Field Equip
EA
Prim Dist Line OH
LF
Transformers
KV
Sec Dist Line OH
LF
Prim Dist Line UG
LF
Sec Dist Line UG
LF
Exterior Lighting
EA
(Street or Parking area Lights)
Traffic Lights
EA
Industrial Waste Fuel
Spill Collection (Oil/Fuel)
KG
Sewage Septic Tank
KG
(Facility # it supports)
Sanitary Sewer Main
LF
Sanitary Sewage Pump Station
SF
Water Dist Mains
LF
Fire Protection Water Main
LF
Fire Hydrants
EA
Curbs & Gutters
SY
(Transition between Road & Parking lot)
Amount
Cost
Description (If Required)
____/___
_______
______________________
____/ ___
____/ ___
_______
_______
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
_______
________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
____/ ___
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
________
________
01 00 00 - 7
________
________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
MS0114
C. RELATED FACILITIES:
Category
Code
Nomenclature
851-145
Driveway
147
Road
871-183
Storm Drain Disposal
872-245
Fence, Boundary
872-247
Fence, Security
872-248
Fence, Interior
852-289
Sidewalk
890-269
Cathodic Protection Sys
890-181
Utility Line Duct-Elec
890-181
Utility Line Duct-Comm
890-158
Load and Unload Platform
832-255
Industrial Waste Main
UM
SY
SY
LF
LF
LF
LF
SY
EA
LF
LF
EA
LF
Amount
Cost
_
________ ________
________
________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
Description (If Reqd.)
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
_________________
__________________
This checklist includes only the basic general construction category codes. More detailed category code listing information is
available through the Real Property office, 884-6167.
01 00 00 - 8
851-
MS0114
CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORT
CONTRACTOR
ADDRESS
REPORT PERIOD COVERED
NO.
FROM
PROJECT NO. / TITLE
TO
CONTRACT AMOUNT
CONTRACT NO.
COMPLETION DATE
$
NOTE:
ALL ITEMS LISTED MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETED FORM TO
INCLUDE ONLY THOSE ITEMS THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT.
LINE
NO.
WORK ELEMENTS
1
MOBILIZATION
2
DEMOLITION - ARCHITECTURAL
3
ASBESTOS / LEAD ABATEMENT
4
SITE PREPARATION
5
SITE UTILITIES
6
SITE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
7
SITE FINISH GRADING
8
SITE LANDSCAPING
9
ASPHALT PAVING / BASE
10
CONCRETE CURB / GUTTER
11
CONCRETE BUILDING SLAB / VAPOR BARRIER
12
CONCRETE WALKS / LANDINGS
13
CONCRETE FOOTINGS
14
CONCRETE BEAMS / COLUMNS
15
MASONRY FOUNDATIONS
16
MASONRY SCREENWALLS
17
MASONRY VENEER
18
STRUCTURAL STEEL
19
MISCELLANEOUS METALS / HANDRAILS / GRATES
20
WOOD AND PLASTICS
21
WALL INSULATION
22
ROOF INSULATION
23
EIFS
24
WINDOWS
25
EXTERIOR DOORS
26
STOREFRONT
27
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
28
INTERIOR DOORS
29
HARDWARE
30
EXTERIOR METAL STUDWALLS / SHEATHING
31
INTERIOR METAL STUDWALLS / SHEATHING
32
PAINTING
33
WALL COVERING
34
TOILET ACCESSORIES
35
TOILET PARTITIONS / URINAL SCREEN
36
SIGNAGE
37
RAISED ACCESS FLOOR
% OF TOTAL
JOB
01 00 00 - 9
% COMPLETED
THIS PERIOD
% COMPLETE
CUMULATIVE
MS0114
LINE
NO.
38
WORK ELEMENTS
39
PEMB ROOF / FASCIA
% OF TOTAL
% THIS PERIOD
% CUMULATIVE
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING (PEMB)
41
ELEVATORS / CONVEYING SYSTEMS
42
DEMOLITION - MECHANICAL / PLUMBING
43
NEW WATER / SEWER / NATURAL GAS SERVICE
44
PLUMBING ROUGH-IN UNDER SLAB
45
HVAC ROUGH-IN UNDER SLAB
46
PLUMBING ROUGH-IN ABOVE SLAB
47
PLUMBING FIXTURE / TRIM-OUT
48
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
49
PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION
50
DUCTWORK
51
HYDRONIC PIPING
52
FIRE SUPPRESSION
53
HVAC EQUIPMENT
54
GRILLES / DIFFUSERS/ TRIM-OUT
55
CONTROLS
56
TEST AND BALANCE
57
DEMOLITION - ELECTRICAL
58
ELECTRIC SERVICE TEMPORARY
59
TRANSFORMER
60
PRIMARY OVERHEAD ELECTRIC SERVICE
61
PRIMARY UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE
62
SECONDARY OH ELECTRIC SERVICE
63
SECONDARY UG ELECTRIC SERVICE
64
ELECTRIC ROUGH-IN
65
COMM / LAN ROUGH-IN
66
FIRE DETECTION ROUGH-IN
67
FIRE DETECTION EQUIPMENT / TRIM-OUT
68
COMM / LAN TRIM-OUT
69
ELECTRIC FIXTURES / TRIM-OUT
70
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
71
BONDING
72
DEMOBILIZATION
73
CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS
3%
TOTAL
SCHEDULED AMOUNT THIS BILLING
TOTAL BID AMOUNT:
SCHEDULED:
INSPECTOR SIGNATURE:
ACTUAL:
CONCUR
NOT CONCUR
(CIRCLE)
PROGRESS OR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS SATISFACTORILY COMPLETED THE INDICATED PERCENTAGE OF THE CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
SUBMITTED BY OR FOR
CONTRACTOR:
BASE CIVIL ENGINEER:
TYPE OR PRINT NAME AND TITLE
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVIEWED BY OR FOR CONTRACTING OFFICER
TYPE OR PRINT NAME AND TITLE
SIGNATURE
01 00 00 - 10
DATE
MS0114
01 00 00 - 11
MS0114
SECTION 01 09 00
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Applicability of Reference Standards.
B. Provision of Reference Standards at site.
C. Source and acronyms used for Reference Standards in Contract Documents.
1.02
APPLICABILITY OF REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements
of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. The publications listed in the various specification sections form a part of the specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
C. Use the latest standard, except when a specific date is specified.
D. Disregard payment provisions contained in any portion of the referenced specifications and standards.
E. If the specified reference standard(s) conflicts with the Contract Documents, request clarification from the
Contracting Officer before proceeding.
1.03
PROVISION OF REFERENCE STANDARDS AT SITE
A. When required by individual specifications sections, obtain a copy of the standard. Maintain a copy at the
jobsite during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work until completion.
1.04
ABBREVIATIONS & NAMES
A. Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the
recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, and authority having jurisdiction
or other entity applicable. Refer to “Encyclopedia of Associations” published by Gale Research Co., available
in most libraries.
1.05
SOURCE FOR REFERENCE STANDARDS
AAMA
American Architectural Manufactures Association
1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
444 N. Capital St., NW, Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
ACI
American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 19150
Detroit, MI 48219
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
8300 Boone Blvd., #400
Vienna, VA 22182
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
AF&PA
American Forest and Paper Association
01 09 00 - 1
MS0114
111 Nineteenth Street, NW, Suite 800
Washington, DC 20036
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
25 Massachusetts Avenue, NW Suite 800
Washington, DC 20001
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700
Chicago, IL 60601-1802
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
7012 S. Revere Parkway Suite 140
Centennial, CO 80112
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875-0210
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
11 West 42nd St.
New York, NY 10036
APA/EWA
APA – The Engineered Wood Association
Order From:
http://www.apawood.org
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191-4400
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, N. E
Atlanta, GA 30329
ASNT
American Society for Non-destructive Testing
4153 Arlingate Plaza
Columbus, OH 43228-0518
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120
Potomac Falls, VA 20165-5874
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
AWS
American Welding Society
P.O. Box 351040
Miami, FL 33135
AWWA
American Water Works Association
6666 West Quincy
Denver, CO 80235
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
01 09 00 - 2
MS0114
355 Lexington Avenue, 15th Floor
New York, NY 10017
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402-9371
CISCA
Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association
405 Illinois Avenue, 2B
St. Charles, IL 60174
CRI
The Carpet and Rug Institute
P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 No. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
CS
United States Department of Commerce Standard
Order from:
National Technical Information Service
5285 Port Royal Rd.
Springfield, VA 22161
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
14150 Newbrook Dr.
Chantilly, VA 20151
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
2600 N.W. Lake Rd.
Camas, WA 98607-8542
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402-9371
For documents offered at no cost, order from:
Dept. of Transportation
ATTN: M443.2
400 Seventh St., SW
Washington, DC 20590
FDOT
Florida Department of Transportation
Order from:
http://www.dot.state.fl.us/mapsandpublications/
FM
FM Global
270 Central Avenue
P.O. Box 7500
Johnston, RI 02919-4923
FS
Federal Specifications
Order from:
Standardization Documents Order Desk
01 09 00 - 3
MS0114
Bldg 4, Section D
700 Robbins Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
212 Third Avenue North, Suite 504
Minneapolis, MN 55401
FTM-STD
Federal Test Method Standards
Order from:
Standardization Documents Order Desk
Bldg 4, Section D
700 Robbins Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
GA
Gypsum Association
6525 Belcrest Road, Suite 480
Hyattsville, MD 20782
GC
Green Seal
1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Suite 827
Washington, DC 20036-5525
MS
Military Specifications (MILSPEC)
Standardization Documents Order Desk
Bldg 4, Section D
700 Robbins Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
MSS
Manufacturers’ Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
127 Park St., NE
Vienna, VA 22180
NAAMM
NBS
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
800 Roosevelt Rd, Bldg. C, Suite 312
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
National Bureau of Standards
(U. S. Department of Commerce)
Gaithersburg, MD 20234
NEMA
National Fire Protection Association
1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy , MA 02169-7471
NFPA
American Wood Protection Association
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
NIOSH
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
(Centers for Disease Control and Prevention)
Order From:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/203-154/method-cas1.html
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(U.S. Department of Labor)
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
01 09 00 - 4
MS0114
Washington, DC 20402-9371
SCAQMD
South Coast Air Quality Management District
21865 Copley Drive
Diamond Bar, CA 91765
SCS
Scientific Certification Systems
2000 Powell Street, Suite 600
Emeryville, CA 94608
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, IL 60021
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
234 W. Cheves Street
Florence, SC 29501
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151-1219
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
P.O. Box 10915
Pensacola, FL 32524-0915
SSMA
The Steel Stud Manufacturers Association
35 East Wacker Drive, Suite 850
Chicago, IL 60601-2106
SSPC
The Society for Protective Coatings
40 24th Street
6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222
TCNA
Tile Council of North America
100 Clemson Research Blvd.
Anderson, SC 29625
UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
2600 N.W. Lake Rd.
Camas, WA 98607-8542
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION: NOT USED.
END OF SECTION
01 09 00 - 5
MS0114
SECTION 01 10 00: SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A. The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, supervision and equipment and perform all
operations necessary to accomplish all work complete in place, as shown on the drawings, specified
herein, or as needed to construct FTEV 15-1069 Construct Addition to Bldg 90020.
1.02
JOB DESCRIPTION:
A. The work to be performed includes, but is not necessarily limited to construction of an addition to the
southeast corner of the existing 505th TRS Building 90020. The approx. 2,850 SF addition will include a 12seat classroom and a 21-seat classroom with adjacent computer rack room. A mechanical room to support
the addition will also be provided in the addition. An adjacent existing lab room in the existing facility will be
reconfigured to provide an access corridor to the new addition, and adjacent new storage space.
General construction systems will include concrete slab-on-grade, structural steel framing, light-gauge metal
stud partitions, concrete masonry veneer, standing seam metal roof, and the extension of all other existing
infrastructure and utilities to support the new addition.
Specialized, new exterior installations consisting of a retractable 75’ tall antenna mast with elevated cable
tray will be constructed as part of the new work scope. The installation of these components shall be
coordinated with the new mechanical equipment yard currently under construction.
1.03
CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Limit use of site to allow Owner visitation and inspection.
B. The contractor and subcontractors are permitted to use existing utilities available at the site. Use is subject to
approval by the Contracting Officer. The 1 Special Operations Civil Engineering Squadron must approve all
connections. Connection to existing water mains must utilize a backflow preventer, certified within the 12
months prior to use on base.
1.04
DISPOSAL
A. All scrap materials and debris shall be disposed of in an on- site dumpster. When full, it shall be emptied
at a legally approved dumpsite off- base. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide the
dumpster and for the selection of the dumpsite. Provide Contracting Officer with name(s) of waste
disposal company and approved dumpsite.
1.05
STORAGE AREA
A. Contractor lay-down/materials storage site shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by the
Contracting Officer.
B. A minimum of a 6 foot high temporary visual barrier shall surround the area.
C. The area must be maintained in a reasonably clean manner. All empty boxes, paper and trash must be
deposited in the on-site construction dumpster.
1.06
SAFETY
A. The pertinent sections of the following publications are applicable to all work on this project.
1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: EM 385-1-1, Safety and Health Requirements Manual.
2. Air Force Instruction (AFI) 91-202.
3. AFOSH Standard 48.139. See Specification Section 01 00 00 General Requirements paragraph 1.06.A.5.
1.07
HAUL ROUTE AND LITTER
A. The Contractor shall utilize only the designated haul route for the project for access to and from the site
as shown on the Drawings.
01 10 00 - 1
MS0114
1.08
USE OF BARGE AREA
A. Use of the barge off loading area is not allowed except as approved, in writing, by the Contracting Officer.
Contractor must request usage of the barge site, in writing, to the Contracting Officer a minimum of 30
days prior to expected deliveries. Contractor must also submit a schedule of all deliveries. Under no
circumstances should the contractor assume such requests will be approved. Contractor should plan to
have materials delivered by other means.
B. If usage of the barge site is approved, the contractor must meet the following requirements:
1. Crane boom height cannot exceed eighty (80) feet from mean water elevation.
2. Crane boom must have a red flag and an operational blinking obstruction light.
3. Contractor will be responsible for surrounding water quality per the State of Florida Regulations.
Prior to delivery of any barge/crane or tug, contractor must install full-depth turbidity barriers both east
and west of the site to extend beyond limits of off loading operations.
4. Off loading operations will be during daylight hours only. Operations will not start before 0700 (7:00
AM) and boom must be lowered to deck height by 1700 hours (5:00 PM) each day.
5. Contractor is required to provide the name and number of a responsible party, and contact
information of the tug/crane operator at site to both of the following:
a. The Contracting Officer.
b. Hurlburt Tower: Hurlburt Tower – 884-4795. (If tower cannot be contacted notify the Airfield
Manager – 884-4491.
6. Upon notification of inclement weather, off loading operations must cease and the boom lowered to
deck height. Do not raise boom until cleared by the Hurlburt Tower. All barges and equipment must
be secured. Upon notification of Hurcon conditions, the contractor must remove all barges, cranes,
tugs, and associated equipment from the site. The government will not be responsible for any delays
or costs associated to weather.
7. If notified to do so by the Contracting Officer or Hurlburt Tower, operations must cease and the boom
lowered to deck height. Under no circumstances should the boom be raised until cleared by the
notifying authority. The government will not be responsible for any associated delays or costs.
C. If these requirements cannot be met, the contractor is prohibited from using the barge site. Failure to
adhere to these requirements during operations will result in immediate revocation of site use at no
expense to the government. Site must be maintained per specifications and contractor will be
responsible for any and all clean-up after operations.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. The contractor shall accomplish work in an orderly progression of steps to satisfy the performance
requirements of this specification.
3.02
HOURS OF WORK
A. The normal hours of a workday shall be between 7:00 A.M. and 4:00 P.M., Monday through Friday, except
holidays and observed holidays. The contractor may elect, at his option, to work hours other than normal duty
hours if approved by the Contracting Officer. All work time, other than normal working days, shall be
requested in writing, 3 days in advance.
3.03
PHOTOGRAPHS
A. The contractor will take before and after photographs of the work. "Before" photos will be submitted before the
start of work. "After" photos will be submitted before the acceptance of the work. A minimum of 24 photos of
each will be required. Photos must show exterior and interior areas of the building that are to receive the new
work. The intent is to show the amount of change. Photos may be submitted by the Air Force for design and
construction awards. All photos taken shall be in digital format and submitted on CD. Submit one copy of
before and after photos.
3.04
QUALITY CONTROL
A. The contractor shall establish and maintain quality control to assure compliance with Contract Documents,
and maintain records of his quality control for materials, equipment and construction operations.
01 10 00 - 2
MS0114
3.05
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT & VERIFICATION:
A. The contractor shall employ a Florida Registered Land Surveyor to layout the building and other site features
in accordance with the drawings. Potential problems that will affect the site geometry shall immediately be
brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer.
B. Horizontal and Vertical Control shall conform to Hurlburt Field Datum: Horizontal NAD-83; Vertical NAVD-88.
C. Upon completion of the project and prior to the submission of the "As-Built" drawings (See Section 01 70 00
Contract Closeout), the contractor shall employ a Florida Registered Land Surveyor to perform the following
Horizontal Control by use of Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) to sub-meter accuracy, and Vertical Control
using the above datum.:
1. Location of building corners.
2. Buried water mains, sanitary and/or storm water sewers including all valves, cleanouts, horizontal turns,
etc.
3. Elevations at top of manhole(s), lift stations, storm water structures or similar above ground structures.
4. Invert elevations of all manholes and stub-outs intended for future connections to the system.
3.06
WARRANTY INSPECTION
A. A warranty inspection will be held thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the contractor’s one-year warranty.
The inspection will be held at the project site. Those in attendance shall include the contractor, the
Contracting Officer, the project inspector, and the occupant. The purpose of this inspection will be to identify
current or re-occurring problems associated with the project and past warranty calls and corrective action
taken to remedy them. The contractor shall contact the Contracting Officer to determine the date of the
inspection. The Contracting Officer shall contact the appropriate government agencies and confirm the date
the inspection is to take place.
B. A list of problems identified at the inspection will be provided to all those in attendance. All problems must be
corrected to the satisfaction of the government prior to the expiration of the warranty
END OF SECTION
01 10 00 - 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
01 10 00 DD Form 1354
01 10 00 Photos
01 56 00 Environment Protection
02 41 19 Selective Structure Demo
03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 35 00 Concrete Finishing
03 39 00 Concrete Curing
04 05 03 Masonry Mortaring & Grouting
04 20 00 Unit Masonry
07 21 16 Blanket Insulation
07 90 00 Joint Protection
08 13 14 Standard Steel Doors & Frames
08 71 00 Door Hardware
09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 22 16 Metal Framing
09 90 00 Painting and Coating
10 14 00 Signage
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialities
23 05 93 Test Adjusting & Balancing
23 34 00 HVAC Fans
23 37 00 Air Outlets & Inlets
23 81 26 Split System Heat Pump
26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements
26 05 19 Building Wire and Cable
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
26 05 34 Boxes
26 24 16 Panel Boards
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 28 19 Disconnect Switches
26 51 00 Interior Lighting
SOLICITATION/CONTRACT #
FINAL APPROVAL
CONTRACTOR RESUBMITTAL
DISAPPROVED
APPROVED
SUBMITTAL NUMBER
DATE TO CIVIL ENGINEERING
DATE RECEIVED
SCHEDULES & PLANS
TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR
MANF. / INSTALLER QUAL.
O & M MANUAL & LEGAL REQ'S
EXTRA STOCK
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FTEV 15-1056
MIX DESIGN
PROJECT TITLE
SOF Construct 23 STS Mobility Storage
Facility - Building 90353
WARRANTY FORM/FORMS
DELIVERY TICKETS
SAMPLE FOR TESTING
PERF. TEST REPORTS
PRODUCT COST DATA
SUSTAINABLE CERTIFICATES
CERTIFICATE/CERTIFICATION
SAMPLES
SHOP DRAWINGS
ITEM OR DESCRIPTION OF ITEM, CONTRACT
REFERENCE, TYPE OF SUBMITTAL
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
LINE NUMBER
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
TO BE COMPLETED BY PROJECT ENGINEER
PROJECT NO.
REMARKS
1 digital copy on CD
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
X
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
FINAL APPROVAL
CONTRACTOR RESUBMITTAL
DISAPPROVED
APPROVED
SUBMITTAL NUMBER
DATE TO CIVIL ENGINEERING
4
4
DATE RECEIVED
X
SCHEDULES & PLANS
4
SOLICITATION/CONTRACT #
TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR
MANF. / INSTALLER QUAL.
O & M MANUAL & LEGAL REQ'S
MIX DESIGN
WARRANTY FORM/FORMS
DELIVERY TICKETS
SAMPLE FOR TESTING
PERF. TEST REPORTS
PRODUCT COST DATA
SUSTAINABLE CERTIFICATES
CERTIFICATE/CERTIFICATION
4
4
4
SAMPLES
4
4
4
FTEV 15-1056
EXTRA STOCK
26 56 00 Exterior Lighting
27 00 00 Telephone and LAN System
28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm
31 23 16 Excavation
31 23 16A Excavation/ Sidewalks, Curbs
31 23 23 Fill
31 31 16 Termite Control
32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses
32 13 13 Concrete Paving
32 92 23 Sodding
33 11 16 Site Water Utility Distribution
PROJECT TITLE
SOF Construct 23 STS Mobility Storage
Facility - Building 90353
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
SHOP DRAWINGS
ITEM OR DESCRIPTION OF ITEM, CONTRACT
REFERENCE, TYPE OF SUBMITTAL
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
LINE NUMBER
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
TO BE COMPLETED BY PROJECT ENGINEER
PROJECT NO.
REMARKS
MS0114
SECTION 01 33 00:
PART l
SUBMITTALS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A. Throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has
been defined by manufacturer's name and catalog number, reference to recognized industry and
Government standards, or description of required attributes and performance.
B. Make all submittals required by the Contract Documents in a timely manner to allow construction of the
building within the allotted performance time.
1. Long lead items such as pre-engineered metal building systems, electrical and mechanical systems,
special equipment, etc. must be submitted within 15 days of Notice to Proceed.
2. All submittals must be made within 45 days of Notice to Proceed.
3. Late submittals that result in delayed delivery of materials and equipment, which will affect the
completion and acceptance of the building by the government, will not be a justification for a
time extension.
4. Revise, submit and/or resubmit (submittals) as necessary to establish compliance with the specified
requirements.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Coordination of Submittals: Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item
being submitted and verify that each item and the submittal for it conforms in all respects with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. By affixing his signature to each submittal, the contractor
certifies that this coordination and verification has been performed.
B. Certificates of Compliance:
1. Certify that all materials used in the work comply with all specified provisions thereof. Certification shall
not be construed as relieving the contractor from furnishing satisfactory materials if, after tests are
performed on selected samples' the material is found to not meet specific requirements.
2. Show on each certification the name and location of the work, name and address of contractor, quantity
and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificate applies, and name of the manufacturing
or fabricating company. An officer of the manufacturing or fabrication company shall sign certificates.
3. In addition to the above information, all laboratory test reports submitted with Certificates of Compliance
shall show the date or dates of testing, the specified requirements for which testing was performed, and
results of the test or tests.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SHOP DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS:
A. Shop Drawings: Make all shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects
of the item and its method of connection to the work.
2.02
MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE:
A. Where contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to the submittal, clearly
indicate which portion of the contents is being submitted for review.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Consecutively number all submittals.
B. Internal Identifications: On at least the first page of each copy of each submittal and elsewhere as required for
positive identification, clearly indicate the submittal number in which the item was included.
C. Indicate FTEV Number, Project Title and Contract Number
01 33 00 - 1
MS0114
3.02
COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Prior to submittal for approval, use all means necessary to fully coordinate all material including,
but not necessarily limited to:
1. Determine and verify all interface conditions, catalog numbers and similar data.
2. Coordinate with other trades as required.
3. Clearly indicate all deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Grouping of submittals: Unless otherwise specified, make all submittals in groups containing all associated
items to ensure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. Partial submittals will
be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents and the contractor shall be strictly
liable for all delays so occasioned.
C. Interior Finish Materials/Colors/Samples: All interior finish materials/colors/samples, includIng but not
limited to, flooring, base, paint/stain, wall coverings, acoustic ceiling/suspension system, acoustical treatment,
window treatment, laminated plastic for base/wall cabinets/countertops, interior signage, etc., shall be
submitted as a group (one submittal) to allow the government to review/approve/disapprove and
select/coordinate the interior finish materials/colors prior to being incorporated into the work. Upon receipt of
the government's approved selections, the contractor shall provide the government with actual samples of
each item for the record, minimum size 4"x4", except laminate plastic chips shall be manufacturer's standard
size.
D. Exterior Finish Materials/Colors/Samples: All exterior finish materials/colors/samples, including but not
limited to, brick, concrete masonry, exterior insulation finish system, stucco, paint/stain, roofing/flashing,
exterior signage, pavers, windows, doors, etc., shall be submitted as a group (one submittal) to allow the
government to review/approve/disapprove and /select/coordinate the exterior finish materials/colors prior to
being incorporated into the work. Upon receipt of the government's approved selections, the contractor shall
provide the government with actual samples of each item for the record, minimum size 4"x4".
3.03
SUBMITTAL APPROVAL:
A. General: Approval by the Contracting Officer shall not be construed as a complete check, but only that the
general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review and approval by government shall
not relieve the contractor from responsibility for errors that may exist, or from liability for failure to
comply with the intent of the Contract Documents.
B. Revisions After Approval: When a submittal has been approved, a re-submittal by the contractor for the
purpose of substitution of materials or equipment, will not be considered unless accompanied by an
acceptable explanation as to why the substitution is necessary.
C. Unnecessary Submissions: When the contractor elects to provide the materials, equipment, etc., that was
used as the basis for the design and is the exact: Manufacture's name, catalog number, size, and finish as
shown in the drawings or specified herein, no submittal is required. The contractor however shall submit a
letter to the Contracting Officer stating that he will use the specified product. All field-testing associated with
the material or equipment, etc. must be performed and submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval.
3.04
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS.
A. Assign numbers to these items to be submitted, beginning with the number 1 and continuing through the last
submittal. Items that are disapproved and require resubmittal shall be numbered with the original submittal
number followed by R1 if the first resubmittal of the item, R2 if the second resubmittal, and so on, until final
approval is given.
END OF SECTION
01 33 00 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 01 41 00:
PART 1
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES:
A. ASTM D3740 – Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or
Inspection of Soil and Rock as used in Engineering Design and Construction.
B. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Special Inspection, or
Testing Materials Used in Construction.
1.02
SELECTION AND PAYMENT:
A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified
inspection and testing. One laboratory shall perform all tests for project.
B. The Government will employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
inspection and testing deemed to be in the best interest of the Government. The contractor will be
responsible for the cost of all inspections, testing and replacement of Work not meeting the Contract
Documents.
C. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740.
B. Laboratory: Licensed and authorized to operate in State of Florida.
C. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) or accepted values of natural physical constants.
D. Certification: Current Certification by Construction Materials Council, Inc.
1.04
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS:
A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address and telephone number, and the name or
names of the Professional Engineer(s), currently registered in the state of Florida, who will be certifying
the reports or tests and a responsible officer of the company
B. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) during most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of
remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
1.05
LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. Provide qualified personnel at site.
B. Perform specified inspection, sampling, making cylinders, etc., and testing of all products in accordance with
Contract Documents.
C. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Provide certified copies of the reports or tests as per 1.06 below. The Professional Engineer shall affix his
name and date to all reports or tests before affixing his impression seal over both.
1.06
LABORATORY REPORTS:
A. After each inspection and test and prior to providing copies to the contractor, the Testing Laboratory
shall promptly forward one (1) copy of each laboratory report directly to the Contracting Officer for
record purposes. Mail to Contracting Officer, 1 SOCONS, 350 Tully St., Hurlburt Field, FL 32544.
01 41 00 - 1
MS0114
B. Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of each laboratory report as per Section 01 33 00 to the Contracting
Officer for review and approval.
C. Include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name of inspector.
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications section.
6. Location in the project.
7. Type of inspection or test.
8. Date of test.
9. Results of test.
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
D. When requested by Contracting Officer, provide interpretation of test results.
1.07
LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY:
A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of the contractor.
D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.08
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. Notify laboratory of the location of the construction site and samples of materials proposed to be used,
which require testing.
B. Provide laboratory all proposed mix designs.
C. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to the Work, to manufacturer's literature and
other pertinent data.
D. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle
samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and
curing of test samples.
E. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection, sampling,
and testing services.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 41 00 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 01 56 00
PART 1
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. The environmental protection required for this contract.
1.02. REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication Standard
40 CFR 110, Discharge of Oil
40 CFR 112, Oil Pollution Prevention
40 CFR 122, EPA administered permit programs
40 CFR 125, National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)
40 CFR 260-271, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
40 CFR 260-279, Hazardous Waste and Used Oil Management
40 CFR 300, National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan
40 CFR 355, Emergency Planning and Notification
40 CFR 403, General Pretreatment Regulations for Existing and New Sources of Pollution
49 CFR 171-172, General Information, Regulations and Definitions, and Hazardous Waste
2. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA PL 96-510, Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation & Liability Act
3. FLORIDA ADMINISTRATION CODE (FAC)
FAC 62-25, Regulation of Stormwater Discharge
FAC 62-150, Hazardous Substance Release Notification
FAC 62-210, Stationary Sources – General Requirements
FAC 62-212, Stationary Sources – Preconstruction Review
FAC 62-621.300(2), Discharge of Groundwater From Any Non-Contaminated Site
FAC 62-330, Environmental Resource Permitting in Northwest Florida
FAC 62-555, Permitting, Construction, Operation, and Maintenance of Public Water Systems
FAC 62-604, Collection Systems and Transmission Facilities
FAC 62-730, Hazardous Waste
FAC 62-762, Aboveground Storage Tank Systems
FAC 62-770, Petroleum Contamination Site Cleanup Criteria
4. HURLBURT FIELD INSTRUCTIONS AND DIRECTIVES
Hurlburt Field Directive for Mercury and Fluorescent Lamps
Hurlburt Field Ozone Depleting Management Plan
Hurlburt Field Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) Plan
Hurlburt Field Installation Restoration Program (IRP) Management Action Plan
Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Management Plan
Hurlburt Field Asbestos Management and Operations Plan
Hurlburt Field Lead Based Paint and Lead Hazard Plan
Hurlburt Field Landscape Development Plan
Hurlburt Field Environmental Policy
5. AIR FORCE INSTRUCTIONS AND DIRECTIVES
AFI 23-204 Organizational Fuel Tanks
AFI 32-7001 Environmental Management
AFI 32-7042 Waste Management
AFI 32-7044 Storage Tank Compliance
AFI 32-7064 Natural Resources
AFI 32-7086 Hazardous Materials Management
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for environmental protection of all items set
forth herein. The Contractor shall record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws,
regulations, permit requirements, ordinances, and corrective action taken. The Contractor shall
immediately inform the Contracting Officer of any environmental problem.
1.04
CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE
01 56 00 - 1
MS0114
A. Permits: The contractor shall ensure that all required environmental permits are in their
possession prior to start of construction and/or installing or operating any new or modified
equipment or processes or disturbing or clearing any land area.
B. The contractor shall be responsible for operating within permit limits and abiding by all permit
conditions. 1 SOCES/CEIE shall be notified immediately of any exceedances of permit limits or
violation of permit conditions. The contractor shall immediately notify 1 SOCES/CEIE of any
unforeseen environmental conditions, which may conflict with approved permits. Any
certifications required by permits shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Copies of all
permits and certifications shall be submitted to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEIE in
electronic format (.dwg, pdf, or .doc).
C. All certifications, notices and documentation required by environmental permits shall be the
responsibility of the contractor, but must be coordinated through the contracting office and 1
SOCES/CEIE prior to submittal to regulatory agencies.
1. Sanitary Sewer Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit to the contractor
prior to start of construction. After construction, the line will not be put into use until the permit
clearance has been applied for and obtained. All necessary paperwork (Certification of
Completion Form, as-builts, etc.) will be submitted to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEIE. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work is not considered
complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
2. Potable Water Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit to the contractor
prior to start of construction. After construction, the line will not be put into use until the permit
clearance has been applied for and obtained. For phased projects a permit clearance can be
obtained for each phase by submitting a certification of completion package for each phase
as a partial completion on the entire permitted project. All necessary paperwork (Certification
of Completion Form, as-builts, bacteriologicals, pressure test results, etc) will be submitted to
the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEIE. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work
is not considered complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
3. Irrigation Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit to the contractor prior to
start of construction. After construction, the system will not be put into use until the permit
clearance has been applied for and obtained. All necessary paperwork (Certification of
Completion Form, as-builts, etc) will be submitted to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEIE. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work is not considered
complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
4. Wetland Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit application to the
contractor prior to start of construction. Prior to start of any construction in a wetland, a Joint
Application for Environmental Resource Permit must be completed by the contractor.
Completion of the application package to include site plan, and signed/sealed drawings must
be submitted to the 1 SOCES/CEIE for coordination. The application must note all best
management practices (BMP's) such as silt screens and must show locations.. The
regulatory agency has 30 days to request additional information. All necessary paperwork
(Certification of Completion Form, as-builts, etc) will be submitted to the contracting office for
1 SOCES/CEAN. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work is not considered
complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
5. Generic Stormwater Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large and Small Construction
Activities, F.A.C. 62-621; and Environmental Resource Permit F.A.C. 62-330 if applicable :
a. Prior to start of Construction:
1. Prior to start of any site work the contractor shall submit to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEIE in electronic format; 1 copy of the Notice of Intent (NOI) Form 62621.300(4)(b); proof of fee payment; 1 copy of the signed Stormwater Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and map; 1 copy of the letter from the regulatory agency
issuing the permit for the project;
2. If F.A.C. 62-330 is applicable, in electronic format: 1 copy of application package
signed and sealed with Form 62-330.060(1) or 10-2 General Permit certification
record; ; 1 copy of the drainage delineation, 1 copy of the supporting engineering
calculations, 1 copy of the geotechnical report (where applicable), 1 copy of the
survey (where applicable), 1 copy regulatory agency letter issuing permit number; 1
copy of the proof of submittal to regulatory agency of the Construction
Commencement Notice Form 62-330.350(1) at least 48 hours prior to start of
construction.
01 56 00 - 2
MS0114
b. During Construction::
1. The contractor shall provide to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEIE at the end of
each month, in electronic format, signed weekly and storm event inspection reports;
and the Notice of Termination (NOT) Form 62-621.300(6) within 14 days of final
stabilization of the site. Copies of the reports must also be kept on-site.
2. If F.A.C. 62-330 is applicable: 1 copy of Form 62-330.310(1) As-Built Certification by
the Engineer of record within 30 days after completion of construction.
6. Copies of all required forms and guidance can be found at http://www.dep.state.fl.us/ .
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit an Environmental Protection Plan within 15 days after receipt of the
notice to proceed. Approval of the Contractor's plan will not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for adequate and continuing control of pollutants and other environmental protection
measures. The contractor shall obtain approval by the Contracting Officer prior to the start of
construction, modification, or demolition for all project facilities and/or equipment. The plan shall
include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Legal Requirements: A list of Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, and permits
concerning environmental protection, pollution control and abatement that are applicable to
the Contractor's proposed operations and the requirements imposed by those laws,
regulations, and permits. Whenever there is a conflict between Federal, State, or local laws,
regulations, and permit requirements, the more restrictive provisions shall apply.
2. Environmental Protection Procedures: Procedures to be implemented to provide the required
environmental protection, to comply with the applicable laws and regulations, and to correct
pollution due to accident, natural causes, or failure to follow the procedures of the
environmental protection plan.
3. Drawings: Drawings showing locations of any proposed temporary excavations or
embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary
facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials shall be included.
4. Solid Waste Management Plan: See paragraph titled Solid Waste.
5. Emergency Response and Spill Prevention Plan: See paragraph titled Emergency Response
and Spill Prevention.
6. Hazard Material List: See paragraph titled Hazardous Materials.
7. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan: See paragraph titled Water Resources.
8. Hazard Waste Management and Disposal Plan: See paragraph titled Hazardous Waste.
9. Summary of Solid Waste Generated: See paragraph titled Solid Waste Implementation.
3.02
NATURAL RESOURCES
A. ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES: The environmental resources within the project boundaries
and those affected outside the limits of permanent work under this contract shall be protected
during the entire period of this contract. The Contractor shall confine activities to areas defined
by the drawings and specifications except where tree replacement is required. Environmental
protections shall be as stated in the following subparagraphs:
1. The contractor shall confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and specifications.
In areas indicated on the drawing or specified to be cleared, the Contractor shall not remove,
cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil,
and land forms without permission. Trees, shrubs and other vegetation not identified for
removal shall be protected against removal, injury, defacing and scarring-no ropes, cables, or
guys shall be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless specifically
authorized. Where such emergency use is permitted, the Contractor shall provide effective
protection for land and vegetation resources at all times.
2. The Contractor shall not park vehicles or equipment within the drip line of trees. Prior to
trimming or removal of trees, contractor shall coordinate with 1 SOCES/CEIE. All verified
merchantable timber that is removed shall be limbed and stacked butt to butt in an out of the
way location. Trees that are damaged or removed shall be replaced according to guidance
found in the Hurlburt Field 2009 Landscape Development Plan
01 56 00 - 3
MS0114
3. Prior to any construction, the Contractor shall mark the areas not to be disturbed under this
contract. Isolated areas within the general work area, which are to be saved and protected,
shall also be marked or fenced. The Contractor's personnel shall be knowledgeable of the
purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects.
4. All earthwork shall be planned and conducted to minimize the duration of exposure of
unprotected soils. Side and back slopes shall be protected as soon as practicable upon
completion of rough grading. Earthwork brought to final grade shall be finished as indicated.
5. The Contractor shall construct or install temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation
control features as indicated on the drawings. Erosion control measures on drawings shall be
augmented if necessary to ensure effectiveness. Berms, dikes, drains, sedimentation basins,
grassing, and mulching shall be maintained until permanent drainage and erosion control
facilities are completed and operative.
6. The Contractor's field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and temporary buildings shall
be placed in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the Contracting Officer.
Temporary movement or relocation of Contractor facilities shall be made only when
approved. Borrow areas shall be managed to minimize erosion and to prevent sediment from
entering nearby waters. Spoil areas shall be managed and controlled to limit spoil intrusion
into areas designated on the drawings and to prevent erosion of soil or sediment from
entering nearby waters. Spoil areas shall be developed in accordance with the grading plan
indicated on the drawings. Temporary excavation and embankments for plant and/or work
areas shall be controlled to protect adjacent areas from despoilment.
7. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all construction equipment previously used at other
sites before it is brought into the work areas, ensuring that soil residuals are removed and
that egg deposits from plant pests are not present; the Contractor shall consult with the
USDA jurisdictional office for additional cleaning requirements.
B. Protection of Fish and Wildlife Resources: All species of wildlife are protected on Hurlburt Field,
Florida. Feeding, possessing, capturing, and attempting to capture, kill or otherwise harass
wildlife is prohibited.
C. Black Bear and American Alligator: Black bear and American alligator sightings are common on
Hurlburt Field. It is against the law to feed, possess, capture or attempt to capture, kill or
otherwise harass these species. Feeding, possession, or harassment of an alligator is a seconddegree misdemeanor. If a bear is sighted or if an alligator is found to be in an enclosed area,
posing immediate threat or is affecting traffic, contact the 1 SOCES/CEIE (884-4651) as soon as
possible. Construction sites must be cleared of any food or drink items at the end of each
workday. Any items that could attract wildlife must be carried off the base or placed in a
dumpster. Ensure all dumpster doors and lids are securely closed at the end of the day to deter
bears or other wildlife from entering and feeding.
3.03
CULTURAL RESOURCES
A. Historical, Archaeological, and Cultural Resources: Existing historical, archaeological, and
cultural resources within the Contractor's work area will be so designated by the Contracting
Officer if any has been identified. The Contractor shall take precautions to preserve all such
resources as they existed at the time they were first pointed out. The Contractor shall provide
and install protection measures for these resources and be responsible for their preservation
during the life of the contract. Protection measures will be provided by 1 SOCES/CEIE after
consultation with the State Historic Preservation Officer on a case-by-case basis.
B. Artifacts Discovered During Construction: If during excavation or other construction activities any
previously unidentified or unanticipated resources are discovered or found, all activities that may
damage or alter such resources shall be temporarily suspended. Resources covered by this
paragraph include but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or burials; artifacts; shell,
bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rocks or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed
features; and any indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery or find,
the Contractor shall immediately stop work and notify the Contracting Officer and
1 SOCES/CEIE.
3.04
WATER RESOURCES
A. The Contractor shall keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control
implementing “good house-keeping” practices to avoid pollution of surface and ground waters.
01 56 00 - 4
MS0114
The contractor shall ensure that all employees and subcontractors are aware that dumping of any
substance to ground, storm systems,wetlands or water bodies is prohibited, unless express
written approval is provided from the contracting office and 1 SOCES/CEIE. All spills of
hazardous materials, hazardous waste, petroleum, toxic substances, wastewaters, or materials
that generate an oxygen demand in water bodies must be properly cleaned up immediately. Toxic
or hazardous chemicals shall not be applied to soil or vegetation when such application may
cause contamination. Monitoring of water areas affected by construction shall be the Contractor's
responsibility.
B. Wetlands: Monitoring of wetland and water resources affected by construction activities shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor and performed in accordance with the Clean Water Act and all
Federal and State rules, laws, and standards. During construction, best management practices
(BMP’s) will be required to maintain soil erosion measures and a minimum distance of 15 feet
and average of 25 feet from jurisdictional wetlands and water areas that could be adversely
affected by construction activities. Contractor shall ensure that all erosion control products are
free of invasive species. Contractor should plan for all events which will cause extreme conditions
that may result in failure of BMP’s. All fines and penalties assessed for wetlands violations
affected by construction activities shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
C. Stormwater: The contractor shall use proper control and management techniques to ensure
stormwater criteria are met in accordance with Federal, State, and local stormwater regulations.
The contractor must comply with the Hurlburt Field Stormwater Management Plan.
D. Where erodible soils or other erodible materials are present, no matter the total size of the
affected area, erosion control measures must be installed/implemented prior to start of
construction and in accordance with the Floirda Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control
Inspector’s Manual available at www.dep.state.fl.us/. This applies to construction areas, storage
areas, and laydown areas. Erosion control measures must remain in place and be properly
maintained until the site is properly stabilized. .
E. In some cases where severe erosion results in waters becoming turbid despite control measures,
regular turbidity monitoring and documentation shall be necessary. Any such documentation
shall be forwarded to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEIE review..
F. Stream Crossings shall allow movement of materials or equipment without violating water
pollution control standards of the Federal, State or local government.
G. Landscaping: All new landscaping will be watered in accordance with the current stage of the
Hurlburt Field Water Conservation Policy. All irrigation work will need to be coordinated with 1
SOCES/CEIE & 1SOCES/CEC. The use of potable water for irrigation systems is prohibited.
New plantings should follow guidance utlined in the Hurlburt Field Landscape Development Plan.
H. Contractor is not authorized sewage holding tanks on base and must procure a portable toilet
service contract. The contract must include the correct removal of sewage and maintenance of
the portable toilet.
I.
Projects that construct facilities with a footprint greater than 5,000 gross square feet, or expand
the footprint of existing facilities by more than 5,000 gross square feet must maintain or restore to
the maximum extent technically feasible the project predevelopment hydrology per section 438 of
the Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA).
J.
Dewatering: The requirements stated in Ch. 62-621.300(2), F.A.C. must be met before the
commencement of any discharge of produced groundwater from a non-contaminated site activity
to surface waters of the state (e.g. wetlands, stormwater systems). Any reportable documents
associated with the compliance of this regulation shall be sent to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEIE review prior to the submittal to the Florida Department of Environmental Protection
(FDEP). For dewatering operations that discharge to groundwaters of the state, a site-specific
exemption letter must be obtained from the FDEP. In order for the contractor to obtain this
exemption letter, a letter must be submitted stating the scope of the operation, estimated amount
of water to be discharged during the operation, as well as best management practices that will be
used during the dewatering operation to ensure no produced groundwater will be discharged to
01 56 00 - 5
MS0114
surface waters of the state. This letter shall be sent to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEIE
review prior to the submittal to the FDEP.
3.05
AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT
A. Per Executive Order 13101, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requires that all
government purchases of designated items shall contain at least the minimal amount of postconsumer and/or total recovered materials. EPA-designated items fall into the following
categories:
 Bio-based Products
 Miscellaneous Products
 Park and Recreation
Products
 Construction Products  Non-Paper Office Products
 Transportation Products
 Landscape Products
 Paper and Paper Products
 Vehicular Products
Specific requirements can be found at the EPA’s website: http://www.epa.gov/cpg/products.htm.
Also, see section 01 54 00: Green Procurement.
3.06
AIR RESOURCES
A. Equipment operation and activities or processes performed by the Contractor in accomplishing
the specified construction shall be in accordance with the State rules and all Federal emission
and performance laws and standards. Ambient Air Quality Standards set by the Environmental
Protection Agency shall be maintained. The Contractor shall monitor all air areas affected by the
construction activities. Monitoring results will be periodically reviewed by 1 SOCES/CEIE to
ensure compliance.
B. Ozone Depleting Substances: The contractor shall adhere to Air Force and HFLD policies
regarding halons and chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs). The contractor shall not introduce any Class I
Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) to Hurlburt Field during the course of this contract. The
contractor shall be responsible for the recovery and recycling of all Class II ODS, including any
necessary sampling marking, labeling, and disposal. The contractor may access the Hurlburt
Field ODS Management Plan for guidance. However, the contractor shall remain ultimately
responsible for any ODS work related to these tasks. Any work performed on equipment
containing ODS used as refrigerants shall only be done by EPA certified technicians. Certification
cards shall be on their person at all times. Intentional venting of ODS is strictly prohibited. Any
work performed on equipment containing ODS used as refrigerants should only be done by EPAcertified technicians. Certification cards should be on their person at all times.
C. Particulates: Dust particles; aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction activities; and
processing and preparation of materials, shall be controlled at all times, including weekends,
holidays and hours when work is not in progress. The Contractor shall maintain excavations,
stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow
areas, and other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which
would cause the air pollution standards to be exceeded or which would cause a hazard or a
nuisance. All reasonable precautions shall be taken during earthmoving and grading activitiesto
control small particulate matter from becoming airborne. Water or other dust suppressants shall
be used as necessary on unpaved surfaces, open stockpiles and conveyor systems to reduce
emissions of dust. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent the deposition of “dragout” dirt on paved surfaces, and all drag dirt shall be removed from paved roadways at the end of
each shift. The Contractor must have sufficient, competent equipment available to accomplish
these tasks. Particulate control shall be performed as the work proceeds and whenever a
particulate nuisance or hazard occurs by employing BMP’s.
D. Employ the following BMP’s to minimize air pollutants:
1. Limit the entry/exit of vehicles to the site to minimize track-in and track-out of aggregate and
construction materials.
2. Apply water or other dust suppressants to unpaved roads..
3. Keep stock piles and open containers covered when not in use.
4. Landscape or vegetate as soon as practical.
5. Use water-based paints and low VOC surface coatings as per section 09 90 00.
3.07
SOLID WASTE
A. The contractor shall make every attempt to reduce the generation of solid and hazardous waste
to the maximum extent possible. The contractor shall utilize the Base Recycling Center (88401 56 00 - 6
MS0114
7577) for any office paper, cardboard, plastic, or metal wastes related to a project whenever
possible. All wastes, whether recycled or landfilled, shall be weighed prior to disposal. Detailed
disposition, to include; manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices , information shall be
reported by the fifth day of each quarter to 1 SOCES/CEIE. Solid wastes (excluding clearing
debris) shall be placed in containers and emptied, recycled or land-filled, on a regular schedule.
Containers used for solid waste shall be kept covered and closed at all times and shall be leakproof. Solid waste, including refuse and construction and demolition debris, shall not be stored
within 200 feet of jurisdictional wetlands or water bodies in accordance with FDEP regulation 62701.300. Design for pads that will house solid waste dumpsters must reflect the 200 feet set-back
from jurisdictional wetlands, water bodies and any stormwater conveyance structure. Segregation
measures shall be employed so that no hazardous or toxic waste is co-mingled with solid waste.
The Contractor shall transport solid waste (items not utilized by Base Recycling Center) off
Government property and dispose of it in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements
for solid waste disposal. Vehicles used in transporting refuse shall be covered and enclosed to
prevent spillage. Expense and cleanup of any spills on or off base are always the responsibility
of the contractor.
B. Solid Waste Management Plan: The Solid Waste Management Plan, refer to paragraph titled
Submittals, shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Description and estimated quantities of the proposed job-site waste to be generated.
2. Landfill Options: The name of the landfill(s) where trash will be disposed of, applicable landfill
tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project waste in the landfill(s).
3. Waste Diversion: A list of the waste materials from the project that will be separated for
reuse, salvage, or recycling, associated weights and estimated cost savings shall be reported
to 1 SOCES/CEIE by the 5th day of each quarter.
4. Handling Procedures: A description of the means by which any waste materials identified in
item 3 above will be stored and a description of the means to be employed in recycling the
above materials consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities.
5. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the waste and recycled
materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated center, or
whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site).
Request manufacturers to use the minimum packaging required for protection and
identification of project products, and to use packaging materials with recycled content where
economically feasible in accordance with FAR, Executive Order 13101, and the Hurlburt Field
Affirmative Procurement Plan.
6. Submit cost information on the Solid Waste Management Plan for Solid Waste Disposal,
Recycling, Cost savings for wastes diverted from the landfill to the Contracting Officer
by 5th day of each quarter.
C. Solid Waste Management Plan Implementation
1. The Contractor shall designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers
and overseeing and documenting results of the Solid Management Plan for the project.
2. The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Solid Management Plan to key personnel and
submit the plan to the Contracting Officer as part of the Environmental Protection Plan (see
Submittals section).
3. The Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and
recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties.
4. The Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for
potential recycling, salvage, reuse, and return. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept
neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.
5. The Contractor shall submit with each Application for Progress Payment, a Summary of
Solid Waste Generated by the project to 1 SOCES/CEIE. Failure to submit this information
shall render the Application for Payment incomplete and shall delay Progress Payment. The
Summary shall be submitted on a form acceptable to the Owner and shall contain the
following information:
a. The amount (in tons) of material land-filled from the project, the identity of the landfill, the
total amount of tipping fees paid at the landfill, and the total disposal cost. Include
manifests, weight tickets, receipt, and invoices.
b. For each material recycled, reused or salvaged from the project, the amount (in tons),
the date removed from the job-site, the receiving party, the transportation cost, the
amount of any money paid or received for the recycled or salvaged material, and the net
01 56 00 - 7
MS0114
c.
3.08
total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. Attach manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
Any serviceable or salvageable items not accepted by DRMO or Base Supply will
become the property of the Contractor and will be properly handled, transported, and
disposed of off-base by the Contractor in conformance with the Solid Management Plan
and with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations.
HAZARDOUS WASTE (Includes Special and Universal Waste)
A. The contractor shall be considered the primary co-generator for all hazardous wastes generated
throughout the duration of the contract. All hazardous waste management activities shall be
coordinated and approved by 1 SOCES/CEIE.
B. The contractor’s key personnel must attend the Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Awareness
briefing prior to starting work on base. For reservations, contact Randy Trent at (850) 884-7923
or email [email protected]
C. The contractor is responsible for the management and disposal of all hazardous wastes he/she
generates on base. All cost for labor, equipment, materials, transportation, and other services
required to comply with federal, state and local laws governing hazardous/special waste
management and disposal are the responsibility of the contractor.
D. The contractor shall characterize their waste streams using specific and technical knowledge,
MSDS,s and/or sampling and analysis. This responsibility also includes preparation of waste
profile sheets, manifests (regulated and non regulated) packaging, marking and labeling of
wastes containers.
E. The contractor shall manage all hazardous waste, special waste, and universal waste IAW the
HFLD Hazardous Waste Management Plan. The contractor shall ensure that all employees,
including their subs, comply with the rules and procedures outlined in the Hurlburt Field
Hazardous Waste Management Plan.
F. The contractor shall be familiar with and have immediate access to the following publications and
regulations:
1. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 260279
2. Department of Transportation (DOT): Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 171-177
3. Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Management Plan
G. If transportation of Hazardous Wastes is required, the contractor shall possess or ensure the
transportation company used for transportation of hazardous waste has a valid state and federal
EPA identification number and all DOT requirements are met.
H. The contractor shall prepare profiles and manifests for all waste transported off base for disposal.
A designated representative from 1 SOCES/CEIE, Environmental Element, must approve and
sign the hazardous waste/non-hazardous waste manifest. Contractor shall ensure the signed
manifest is returned to 1 SOCES/CEAN within 45 days from the time it’s received at the disposal
facility.
I.
The Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Storage Facility may accept contractor’s hazardous, special
and universal waste (that was generated on base) depending on type of waste, quantities
generated and provisions of the contract. 1 SOCES/CEIE must approve acceptance of the waste
before it’s generated.
3.09
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. For the purposes of the document, Hazardous Materials (HM) are defined as any product
material, chemical or substance listed in 49 CFR 172.101 (revised) and 40 CFR 302-304
(revised). Specifically, a HM is any substance or material, in any quantity or form that has the
potential to harm human health or the environment or displays specific characteristics (reactive,
corrosive, ignitable, and toxic).
01 56 00 - 8
MS0114
B. Absolutely no HM shall be brought onto Hurlburt Field until that material is coordinated with Base
Hazardous Material Program Manager per AFI 32-7086, Hazardous Materials Management . This
requirement shall apply for all HM that the contractor intends to bring onto government property
for any/all processes or applications. The contractor shall submit a complete hazardous material
inventory list including manufacturer specific (Material) Safety Data Sheets (preferred electronic
copy), part number/trade name, container size, estimated usage quantities, and any other
supporting documentation for each HM used prior to contract start or introduction of that material
to Hurlburt Field. The HM inventory shall include the contract number, performance period, and a
contractor point of contactfor HM matters. Upon completion the Contractor shall provide actual
usage quantities in writing to the HM Project Manager. All excess material and empty containers
are the responsibility of the contractor and shall be removed accordingly at the end of the
contract. Should contractor HM requirements change during the performance period, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the HM Program Manager of such changes in writing.
C. Storage of Hazardous Materials: All HM shall be stored at Hurlburt Field with approval and
coordination from 1 SOCES/CEIE, the base Fire Department (1 SOCES/CEF), and Wing Safety.
The contractor shall observe HM storage practices in accordance with regulations, policies, plans
and procedures employed by the base. HM storage shall be in a manner that limits exposure to
rainfall and prevents releases to the environment.
D. All contractor personnel shall immediately report to the Contracting Officer and 1 SOCES/CEIE
any hazardous materials, substances (including suspect asbestos containing materials),
chemicals, or contaminated areas encountered. Further, the contractor personnel shall
immediately cease work in the area unless the work is of an emergency nature and the risk of
exposure can be mitigated by the use of personal protective equipment (PPE) or clothing. The
government will determine the best means of sampling and corrective action and will notify the
contractor accordingly.
E. The contractor shall not use, store, or handle any Class I ODS during the course of this contract.
F. All hazardous materials and waste resulting from construction projects (including
renovation/repair and demolition) shall be managed in accordance with local, state, federal and
Hurlburt Field rules and regulations.
3.10
TOXIC WASTE
A. Asbestos: All asbestos work must be accomplished in accordance with federal, state, and local
laws and the Hurlburt Field Asbestos Management Plan. See Section 02 82 16.00 20.
1. Notice of Asbestos Renovation or Demolition, DEP Form 62-257.900(1) must be submitted to
Florida Department of Environmental Protection at least 10 working days prior to any
demolition and/or renovation regardless of whether asbestos is present or not. A copy of this
notification and all asbestos surveys conducted must be provided to 1 SOCES/CEIE prior to
performing any work. Upon completion of any asbestos abatement, the contractor will provide
copies of all disposal waste manifests to 1 SOCES/CEIE, Toxic Substance Program
Manager.
2. A copy of all submittals must be provided to 1 SOCES/CEIE with adequate time built in for
review.
3. The use of materials, products or equipment containing asbestos will not be allowed in the
construction of this project. See sample list below.
4. Prior to the commencement of construction, the prime contractor, each subcontractor and
material/equipment supplier shall provide the Contracting Officer and 1 SOCES/CEIE with a
Notarized statement that to the best of their knowledge, no asbestos will be used in the
construction of this project. Additionally, the contractor must have available the most current
Material Data Safety Sheet proving the materials contain no asbestos.
5. Sample list of Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM):
Note: The following list does not include every product/material that may contain asbestos. It
is intended as a general guide to show which types of material may contain asbestos.





Cement pipes
Asphalt floor tile
Flooring backing
Decorative plaster
Spray-applied





Cement wallboard
Vinyl floor tile
Construction mastics
Textured paints/coatings
Blown-in insulation
01 56 00 - 9





Cement siding
Vinyl sheet flooring
Acoustical plaster
Ceiling tiles & lay-in-panels
Fireproofing materials
MS0114


insulation
Taping compounds
(thermal)
Laboratory hoods
Fire curtains


HVAC duct insulation
Ductwork flexible fabric






Heating and electrical

Spackling compounds

Roofing felt

Fire doors

Wallboard

Electrical wiring insulation






Packing materials (for
wall/floor penetrations)
Laboratory gloves
Elevator equipment
panels
Boiler insulation
Cooling towers

High temperature gaskets


Fire blankets & table tops
Elevator brake shoes
Electrical panel partitions
Chalkboards
Base flashing
Caulking/putties
Joint compounds







Breeching insulation
Pipe insulation (corrugated
connections air cell, block, etc.)
Electrical cloth ducts
Roofing shingles
Thermal paper products
Adhesives
Vinyl wall coverings
Caution needs to be taken to ensure materials purchased do not contain one or more % asbestos
by volume.
B. Lighting Ballast: When fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures are removed, the ballast must be
examined for PCB labeling. Ballast is presumed to contain PCBs unless they are clearly labeled “NO
PCBs”. Suspected ballast must be removed and disposed IAW Hurlburt Field directives.
C. Lead Based Paint: No paint containing lead shall be used during the course of this contract. The
Occupational Health and Safety Act (OSHA) Lead Construction Standard, 29 CFR 1926.62 is in effect
whenever materials are disturbed that contain any amount of lead. This will require contractors
disturbing lead-based paint to institute medical surveillance, training, engineering controls, worker
protection measures and employee monitoring until monitoring results per the lead paint standard
demonstrate that employee exposure is below the action level and permissible exposure limit. The
contractor on site must maintain all documentation regarding lead exposure by either historical data
or project data. This data shall also be made available to 1 SOCES/CEIE upon completion of
the project.
1. Prior to the commencement of construction, the prime contractor, each subcontractor and
material/equipment supplier shall provide to the Contracting Officer and 1 SOCES/CEIE with
a Notarized statement that to the best of their knowledge, no lead based paint will be used in
the construction of this project. Additionally, the contractor must have available the most
current Material Data Safety Sheet proving that the paint does not have any lead content. If
lead based paint has been identified, copies of surveys must be forwarded to 1
SOCES/CEIE, Toxic Substance Program Manager.
2. The contractor shall be responsible for collection and disposal of all lead paint chips and lead
paint-contaminated materials, and for accumulation of these chips/materials on site. The
contractor shall test the paint materials, provide containers for proper disposal, and transport
any resulting hazardous waste to an appropriate hazardous waste accumulation area should
it test positive as hazardous waste. All necessary accumulation, disposal activities and
documentation shall be coordinated with the 1 SOCES/CEIE flight.
3. A copy of contractor’s exposure assessment data shall be provided to 1 SOCES/CEIE.
4. Copies of all lead paint-related documentation generated from this project, including lead
testing, air monitoring and hazardous waste manifests, shall be provided by the Contractor to
the Contracting Officer. A copy shall be forwarded to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEIE within 10 working days of task completion.
5. On Military Family Housing Projects, there shall be in-depth coordination with the
1SOCES/CEAN flight to allow for resident notification and necessary arrangements. The
contractor is strongly encouraged to coordinate closely with 1SOCES/CEIE for any
required guidance on this critical issue.
6. Contractors performing renovation, repair and painting projects that disturb lead-based paint
in homes, child care facilities, and schools built before 1978, must be certified and must
follow specific work practices to prevent lead contamination (40 CFR Part 745). Upon
completion of any lead base paint abatement, the contractor will provide copies of all disposal
waste manifests to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEIE, Toxic Substance Program
Manager.
01 56 00 - 10
MS0114
3.11
SPILL PREVENTION:
A. The contractor is required to familiarize their employees with spill procedures, fire suppression
systems and Material Safety Data Sheets for all materials used and/or stored at the project site.
In the event of an oil, fuel or chemical spill, the contractor shall immediately notify the Hurlburt
Field Fire Department by calling 911. The contractor shall also notify the Contracting Officer (CO)
and provide a detailed, written spill report to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEIE within 24
hours describing the events of the release. Costs incurred from contractor related spills are the
responsibility of the contractor. The contractor shall reimburse any government cost associated
with spill response and clean-up.
B. The contractor shall provide and maintain spill containment equipment, sufficient in both type and
quantity, at all sites involving the storage, use or handling of hazardous waste and hazardous
materials. The type of spill equipment and quantity required will be identified in the contractor’s
site specific contingency plan. Equipment and materials must be adequate to contain any release
and secondary containment must be in use as required.
C. If the contractor is required to stockpile contaminated soil for testing prior to disposal, the CO will
inform the contractor of the stockpile location after consultation with 1 SOCES/CEIE.
D. Contractor vehicle and heavy equipment maintenance (including oil changing, lubrication, and
vehicle washing) is not authorized on base.
E. All fuel, oil, and chemical spills that occur on Hurlburt Field (regardless of amount) must
be immediately reported to the base Fire Department by calling 911.
3.12
LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The contractor shall as required use a laboratory capable of performing all analysis required to
determine Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) characteristics such as, but not
limited to, Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) metals, TCLP volatile and semivolatile organic, flashpoint, reactivity, and pH. The laboratory shall also be capable of performing
any analysis required to determine the applicability of the used oil criteria detailed in 40 CFR, Part
279. The contractor shall ensure that all analytical work is performed IAW the methods and
procedures, including QA/QC requirements, detailed in EPA SW-8467. The analytical laboratory
shall be capable of providing accurate, complete data within eight (8) working days. Field
analysis and portable instrumentation shall not be used to fulfill laboratory requirements.
Thecontractor shall retain all data on file for a minimum of three years and keep it readily
available for inspection by any authorized agency, including 1 SOCES/CEIE Asset Management
Flight. Chain-of-custody documents shall be included with these records. At the end of the
contract, all of these data files may be transferred to 1 SOCES/CEIE.
3.13
POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
A. The Contractor shall clean up all areas affected by construction and restore them back to their
original condition to include landscaping, planting of trees, grass, and shrubs damaged by
construction; and raking and disposal of debris such as roof shingles, paper, nails, glass, sheet
metal, bricks, and waste concrete. Backfilled areas shall be compacted properly and replanted
with grass.
3.14
INSTALLATION RESTORATION PROGRAM (IRP)
A. Contractors and Project Managers (PM) planning projects on Hurlburt Field should be aware of
the potential to encounter soil/groundwater contamination throughout many areas of the base.
The following guidance has been developed to assist in the planning, designing and construction
of projects in possibly contaminated areas (IRP sites). The first set of guidance is the most
stringent and involves projects planned in an area that has known contamination and regulatory
Land Use Controls. The second set of guidance applies to projects planned near a known IRP
site with suspected contamination. The last set of guidance is general and applies to any areas
of the base where contamination has not been confirmed. It is imperative that planners,
designers and contractors involve 1 SOCES/CEIE early and often in the planning, designing, and
construction process to minimize the impact that contaminated soils/groundwater may have on
their project.
01 56 00 - 11
MS0114
B. Projects located on a site with known soil and/or groundwater contamination with land use
controls:
1. There are land use controls on this area imposed by an environmental regulatory agency
designed to protect public health.
2. Project Manager should investigate and plan to ensure all monitor wells/cleanup systems are
avoided.
3. Project Manager should submit detailed work plans to 1 SOCES/CEIE early in planning
stages so 1 SOCES/CEIE can obtain concurrence from the regulatory agencies on project
details.
4. Project Manager should educate workers on potential to encounter contamination and also
should ensure workers are adequately protected with personal protective equipment.
5. If unusual soil or groundwater color/odor is encountered during subsurface work, contact
1 SOCES/CEIE.
C. Projects located near a site with known or suspected soil and/or groundwater contamination
without land use controls:
1. If unusual soil or groundwater color/odor is encountered during subsurface work, contact
1 SOCES/CEIE.
2. Project Manager should investigate and plan to ensure all monitor wells/cleanup systems are
avoided.
3. Project Manager should educate workers on potential to encounter contamination and also
should ensure workers are adequately protected with personal protective equipment.
D. Sites without land use controls and not in close proximity to known contamination or IRP site:
1. If unusual soil or groundwater color/odor is encountered during subsurface work, contact
1 SOCES/CEIE.
2. Project Manager should educate workers on potential to encounter contamination and also
should ensure workers are adequately protected with personal protective equipment.
E. Be aware that the regulatory agency can halt the project for long periods of time due to the
discovery of contamination. 1 SOCES/CEIE is committed to expediting projects with IRP
compliance related issues.
3.15
STORAGE TANKS
A. 1 SOCES/CEAN must approve the use of fuel storage tanks on base, and the contractor
must ensure adequate spill containment (spill kits) for any tanks approved for use on
Hurlburt Field. The contractor must have written spill procedures for tanks and heavy
equipment that they use on base. Temporary gasoline storage is NOT permitted on base.
B. POL/Storage Tanks: Storage tanks and POL can be a source of contamination if not managed
appropriately. Contractor personnel obtaining fuels from Storage Tanks agree to follow all 62-762
FAC and the following list of Air Force Technical Order’s to ensure compliance: 37-1-1, 37A-1101, 42B-1-1, 42B-1-1S-2, 42B-1-16, 42B-1-22, 42B-1-23, and 42C-1-12.
C. Contractor must contact 1SOCES/CEIE for a copy of Hurlburt Field’s Integrated Contingency
Plan (ICP), if storage tank use is approved. A number of Federal and State agencies have
regulations pertaining to pollution prevention and emergency response requirements of oil and
hazardous storage and transfer facilities. The Hurlburt Field ICP has been developed to address
the issues of spill prevention, discharge containment / cleanup, and emergency response actions.
END OF SECTION
01 56 00 - 12
MS0114
SECTION 01 58 00
PART 1
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Project Identification Sign.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Design sign and structure in accordance with drawing shown on page 2 of this specification.
B. Use experienced professional sign painter.
C. Finishes shall be adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping, for duration of construction.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SIGN MATERIALS:
A. Structure and Framing: New, pressure-treated 4 x 4 x 12' support posts.
B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood, A-C, 1/2" thick, 4'-0" x 8'-0".
C. Paint and Primers: Exterior professional quality, high-gloss alkyd enamel.
D. Lettering: Exterior quality paint as per above, or pre-cut vinyl self-adhesive products, in accordance with
attached drawing.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. Install project identification sign within 15 days after Notice to Proceed.
1. Install at a location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site.
2. Erect sign surface plumb and level. Anchor securely.
3. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.
3.02
MAINTENANCE:
A. Maintain sign and supports clean.
B. Repair deterioration and damage.
3.03
REMOVAL:
A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of project and restore the area.
01 58 00 - 1
F
G
H
E
D
01 58 00 - 2
HEIGHT
5"
1"
1"
6"
3"
6"
1"
5"
LINE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LETTER
HEIGHT STROKE
3/16"
2"
3/16"
2"
3/16"
2"
1/2"
5"
1/2"
5"
3/16"
2"
3/16"
2"
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
NAME OF CONTRACTOR
7
5
4
6
1
2
3
1. USE 1/2" GRADE A-C EXTERIOR PLYWOOD
2. PAINT WITH EXTERIOR GLOSS ENAMEL:
a. 1 COAT PRIMER
b. 2 COATS COLOR #20122, FED. STANDARD 595B
c. WHITE LETTERS
3. MOUNT SECURELY ON PRESSURE TREATED 4x4s,
WITH BOTTOM 4' FROM GRADE
4. REMOVE SIGN AFTER COMPLETION OF
CONSTRUCTION
ARCHITECT-ENGINEER
1 SOCES/CEPM
PROJECT TITLE
PROJECT TITLE
U.S. AIR FORCE PROJECT
1 SPECIAL OPERATIONS CIVIL ENGINEER SQUADRON IN
PARTNERSHIP WITH 1 SPECIAL OPS CONTRACTING SQUADRON
4'-0"
SPACE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
C
A
B
8'-0"
MS0114
END OF SECTION
MS0114
SECTION 01 60 00
PART 1
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
GENERAL
1.01
PRODUCTS
A. Products means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and systems forming the
Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and
erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.
B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises except as specifically permitted by
the Contract Documents and approved by the Contracting Officer.
C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer for similar components.
1.02
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING:
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and
products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or
damage.
1.03
STORAGE AND PROTECTION:
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact
and legible. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate controlled enclosures.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
C. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid
condensation.
D. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign
matter.
E. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or
damage.
F. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are
undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
1.04
PRODUCT OPTIONS:
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those
standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for substitutions: Submit a
request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
1.05
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Substitutions will be considered under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents.
C. A request constitutes a representation that the contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the
specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
01 60 00 - 1
MS0114
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the work to be
complete with no additional cost to the Government.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.
5. Will reimburse Government for redesign services associated with the request.
D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision
to the Contract Documents.
E. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit four (4) copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop Drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product
equivalence.
3. Submit one (1) copy of the material specification, product data, and a physical sample of each finish
material (carpet, rubber/vinyl base, wall covering, vinyl composition tile, ceramic tile, acoustical
ceiling, etc.) of the specified material for which a substitution is proposed. This information will be
used to compare the proposed substitution to the specified material to assure compliance with the
contract requirements.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 60 00 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 01 65 00
PART l
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.01
STARTING SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Notify project inspector 7 days prior to start-up of each item.
C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt
tension, control sequence, or other conditions, which may cause damage.
D. Verify that tests, meter readings and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the
equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative if required by
manufacturer or contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior
to
start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
H. Submit a written report in accordance with applicable Section of Specifications that equipment or system
has been properly installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and is functioning
correctly.
1.02
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Government personnel 7 days prior to date of
final inspection.
B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for demonstration. Review contents of manual with
government personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and
shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times, at equipment designated location.
D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data
becomes apparent during instruction.
1.03
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A. Contractor will appoint, employ and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting
and balancing.
B. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Contracting Officer indicating observations and
results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 65 00 - 1
MS0114
SECTION 01 70 00
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Closeout procedures.
B. Final cleaning.
C. Adjusting.
D. Project record documents.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Spare parts and maintenance products.
G. Warranties.
H. Maintenance service.
1.02
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and
that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for final inspection.
B. Upon completion of final inspection, correct punch list items to the satisfaction of the government, and
submit all closeout documents, the Government shall take beneficial occupancy of building (BOD). All
warranties will start when government takes BOD.
C. Provide closeout submittals to Government as required by contract documents. Complete and submit
attached closeout checklist.
1.03
FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign
substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum and remove any stains from carpeted and
soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface
and material being cleaned.
D. Replace filters of operating equipment.
E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
1.04
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
01 70 00 - 1
MS0114
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Specifications.
Addenda.
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. Do not put extraneous marks or
other information on these documents. Maintain documents in good, clean condition free from tears or
damage.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed,
including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each construction change on the respective drawing
sheet or sheets to record actual construction including:
1. Addenda issued prior to receipt of bid or proposal.
2. Change orders issued during the construction phase.
3. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.
4. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to
permanent surface improvements.
5. Measured locations of external and internal utilities, and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
6. Field changes of dimension and detail.
7. Details not on original Contract drawings.
8. Field changes related to materials.
G. Prior to final inspection the contractor shall:
1. Submit original record documents to Contracting Officer. Contractor is advised to have a reproduced
copy of the original record documents made for their records.
2. Obtain Disc copies of the contract drawings in current version of AUTOCAD used by 1SOCES/CEP.
Verify with the project inspector. Correct drawing files (sheets) to reflect all as-built conditions based
on the changes made as per item F. above. Add the words “AS BUILT” to the revision block of each
sheet title block, the date the drawings were changed and the initials of the person making the
change.
3. Submit one set of prints of the corrected contract drawing files to allow Base Civil engineer to verify
accuracy of the corrected drawings against the record documents.
4. Upon review and approval of the corrected contract drawing files, provide disc copies to the
government for their records.
5. Completed Construction Data Worksheet. See Section 01 00 00, paragraph 1.07
6. Project Closeout Check List. See end of section.
7. See Section 01 00 00, paragraph 1.15.C referencing 3% payment retention until receipt and
approval of Closeout Documents.
8. See Section 01 10 00, paragraph 3.05. referencing location of buildings, etc. to be
submitted with As-Built documents.
H. Upon acceptance of the building, project record documents and the “As Built” drawings by the Contracting
Officer and the Base Civil Engineer, final payment will be made to the contractor
1.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 70 00 - 2
MS0114
A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three ring binders with durable plastic covers and digital
electronic copy. General contractor shall assemble all O & M data required on project and submit as a
single submittal.
B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of
project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described
below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description
identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors,
and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification
section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and
suppliers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and
materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Air and water balance reports.
c. Certificates.
d. Photocopies of manufacturer's warranties.
E. Submit 1 draft copy of completed volumes 5 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and
returned after final inspection, with comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to
final submission.
F. Submit two sets of revised final volumes, within 10 days after final inspection.
G. DIGITAL COPY: Contents of digital copy shall match those described for printed materials. Organize the
digital copy, per Volume, with a Table of Contents (digital file folder structure) for Parts 1-3. Designated
sections in file folders and subfolders shall be arranged by system and subdivided by specification section
and information required. For example:
A. Part 3 – Project Documents
1. HVAC System
a. Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units
i.
Shop drawings
ii.
Reports
iii.
Certifications
iv.
Warrantiies
1.07
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification
sections.
B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.08
CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR WARRANTIES
A. Provide triplicate notarized copies.
01 70 00 - 3
MS0114
B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers.
C. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
D. All warranties shall be submitted within 10 days from BOD with warranty start dates printed on warranties.
1.09
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of components where indicated in specification sections during the
warranty period.
B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and
lubricate as required.
C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts
whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subcontractor without prior
written consent of the Government
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED);
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 70 00 - 4
MS0114
PROJECT CLOSEOUT CHECK LIST
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR (mark n/a next to those items that are not applicable for this project)
________
TEST AND BALANCE REPORT SUBMITTED, APPROVED AND INCLUDED IN THE O&M
MANUALS. REPORT SHALL BE SUBMITTED PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION.
________
HAVE O&M MANUALS BEEN SUBMITTED AND APPROVED. MANUALS ARE TO BE
ASSEMBLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND SUBMITTED UNDER A SINGLE
COVER PER SECTION 01700. (SEE ATTACHED LIST). MANUALS SHALL BE SUBMITTED
PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION.
________
PUNCH LIST COMPLETED.
________
HAS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION BEEN COMPLETED.
________
HAS COMPLETED CONSTRUCTION DATA WORKSHEET.
________
HAVE THE RECORD DOCUMENTS AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS BEEN SUBMITTED AND
APPROVED PER SECTION 01700.
________
HAS THE DDC PROGRAMMING FOR THE HOST COMPUTER BEEN DOWN LOADED TO
THE CONTROLS SHOP.
________
HAS FINAL CLEANING BEEN COMPLETED.
________
HAVE SPARE PARTS BEEN TURNED OVER TO THE GOVERNMENT. (SEE ATTACHED
LIST)
________
HAVE WARRANTIES BEEN SUBMITTED AND APPROVED. (SEE ATTACHED LIST)
________
HAVE DIGITAL RECORD DRAWINGS BEEN SUBMITTED (SECTION 02811 LANDSCAPE
IRRIGATION AND 15330 FIRE SUPPRESSION)
________
HAS ALL REQUIRED TRAINING BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. (SEE ATTACHED LIST)
________
HAS ALL REQUIRED TESTING BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. (SEE ATTACHED LIST).
________
HAVE ITEMS TO BE TURNED OVER TO GOVERNMENT BEEN TURNED OVER.
________
HAVE REPLACEMENT TREES BEEN PLANTED IN AUTHORIZED LOCATION
________
IS CONSTRUCTION SITE STABLE, NO EROSION
________
HAS ALL CONTRACTOR HAZMAT BEEN REMOVED FROM PROJECT SITE
________
HAS CONTRACTOR SUBMITTED THE TOTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS USED DURING
CONTRACT
________
HAS CONTRACTOR PROVIDED WITNESSED AND NOTARIZED STATEMENT THAT
PROJECT WAS CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
INCLUDING ALL CHANGES MADE DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE.
________
WARRANTY FORM
01 70 00 - 5
MS0114
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
INSPECTORS
________
HAVE THE ABOVE ITEMS BEEN COMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR.
________
HAS 100% COMPLETION LETTER AND BLUE BOOKS BEEN SENT TO CONTRACTING.
________
HAS FINAL PAYMENT BEEN APPROVED.
________
HAS WARRANTY DATE BEEN ESTABLISHED. DATE:__________________
________
HAVE RECORD DRAWINGS AND ORGINALS BEEN TURNED OVER TO DRAFTING FOR DOING
AS-BUILTS AND FILING.
________
HAVE O&M MANUALS BEEN TURNED OVER THE SHOPS.
________
HAS 1354 BEEN COMPLETED AND TURNED OVER TO REAL PROPERTY ALONG WITH
INPECTORS AND ENGINEERS FOLDERS. **
________
HAS CONTRACTOR’S WRITTEN, WITNESSED AND NOTARIZED STATEMENT RE COMPLETION
OF THE PROJECT BEEN TURNED OVER TO THE GOVERNMENT.
SEE SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, PARAGRAPH 1.15.
________
HAS PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS BEEN RECEIVED, COMPLETED AND RETURNED.
________
HAVE ASBESTOS RECORDS BEEN RECEIVED FROM CONTRACTOR AND TURNED OVER TO
CEV.
________
HAVE ENVIRONMENTAL PERMIT CERTIFICATIONS ISSUED FOR POTABLE WATER,
SANITARY SEWER, OR STORMWATER BEEN CLOSED OUT.
** 1354 SHOULD BE COMPLETED PRIOR TO TURNING IN O&M MANUALS, AS-BUILTS DRAWINGS AND BLUE
BOOKS.
01 70 00 - 6
MS0114
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
SPARE PARTS
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 09 51 13 ceiling tile
________ Section 09 65 00 flooring base
Section 12 21 13 blinds
________ Section 21 13 13 fire sup. heads
Section 23 54 00 filters
________ Section 23 73 00 filters
Section 26 24 16 keys
________ Section 26 28 26 keys
Section 26 52 00 lamps
________ Section 28 16 00 intrusion detection
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
O&M MANUALS
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 32 84 00 irrigation sys
________ Section 09 30 00 ceramic tile
Section 09 68 00 carpet
________ Section 10 44 00 fire extinguishers
Section 22 13 43 lift stations
________ Section 21 13 18 high expansion foam system
Section 21 13 13 fire suppr.
________ Section 22 10 00 plumbing piping
Section 22 11 19 plumbing spec.
________ Section 22 40 00 plumbing fixtures
Section 22 30 00 pluming eq.
________ Section 23 21 16 hydronic spec.
Section 23 21 23 pumps
________ Section 23 52 34 boilers
Section 23 54 00 furn. & a/c
________ Section 23 55 00 unit heaters
Section 23 64 00 chillers
________ Section 23 73 00 air handlers
Section 23 34 23 ventilators
________ Section 23 36 00 terminal units
Section 23 09 23 controls
________ Section 26 12 00 transformers
Section 26 28 26 transfer switch
________ Section 26 24 27 bypass switch
Section 26 51 00 interior lights
________ Section 26 56 00 site lighting
Section 26 33 00 emer. power
________ Section 26 32 13 generators
Section 28 31 00 fire alarm
________ Section 28 13 00 intrusion detection
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 23 72 00 enthalpy and desiccant wheel systems
WARRANTIES
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 31 31 16 termite control
________ Section 07 42 13 metal roofing
Section 07 90 00 joint sealers
________ Section 07 52 00 bituminous roofing
Section 08 14 16 wood doors
________ Section 13 34 19 metal bldg. roofing
Section 13 34 19 metal bldgs
________ Section 22 40 00 water cooler
Section 22 30 00 water heater
________ Section 23 52 34 boiler
Section 23 54 00 compressor
________ Section 23 55 00 unit heater
Section 23 64 00 chiller
________ Section 23 36 00 terminal units
Section 26 55 50 ballfield lighting
________ Section 26 33 00 emer. power supply
Section 26 32 13 generator
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 21 13 18 high expansion foam system
TRAINING
________
________
________
________
________
Section 23 52 34 boilers
________ Section 23 64 00 chillers
Section 23 09 23 controls
________ Section 26 32 13 generators
Section 28 31 00 alarm system
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 21 13 18 high expansion foam system
01 70 00 - 7
MS0114
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
TESTING
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 31 23 23 backfill
________ Section 31 23 16 trenching
Section 32 12 16 paving
________ Section 32 84 00 irrigation sys
Section 03 30 00 concrete
________ Section 04 05 03 mortar
Section 22 13 43 lift stations
________ Section 21 13 13 fire suppression
Section 22 10 00 plumbing piping
________ Section 22 15 00 compressed air
Section 23 21 13 hydronic piping
________ Section 23 52 34 boilers
Section 23 64 00 chillers
________ Section 23 81 26 heat pumps
Section 23 81 26 OA Units
________ Section 23 31 00 ductwork
Section 23 09 23 controls
________ Section 26 05 13 med-voltage cable
Section 26 27 26 wiring devices
________ Section 26 05 26 grounding
Section 26 32 13 generators
________ Section 28 31 00 alarm system
Section 28 16 00 detection sys
________ Section 27 00 00 LAN systems
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 23 72 00 enthalpy and desiccant wheel systems
01 70 00 - 8
MS0114
PR O J E C T
W A R R A N T Y
F O R M
BUILDING NUMBER & STREET ADDRESS: ____________________________________________________
PROJECT NUMBER & TITLE: ____________________________________________________
CONTRACT NUMBER: _____________________________________________________________________
PROJECT MANAGER & PHONE NO: _______________________________________________
CONTRACT SPECIALIST & PHONE NO. _______________________________________________________
DATE OF GOVERNMENT ACCEPTANCE: ______________________________________________________
GENERAL 0NE YEAR WARRANTY EXPIRATION DATE: __________________________________________
ONE YEAR WARRANTY INPSECTION DATE (30 days prior to expiration)___________________________
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
PRIME KTR, PHONE NO. & FAX NO. __________________________________________________________
HVAC SUBKTR, PHONE & FAX NO. __________________________________________________________
PLUMBING SUBKTR, PHONE & FAX NOS. _____________________________________________________
ELECTRICAL SUBKTR. PHONE & FAX NO'S ___________________________________________________
E X T E N D E D
W A R R A N T I E S
SPEC.
ITEM & WARRANTY -
RESPONSIBLE PARTY (IES)
31 31 16
Termite Treatment, 5 yrs,
Prime ktr & installer
32 84 00
Irrigation System, 2 yr,
Prime ktr & subktr
04 20 00
Masonry, 2 yr,
Prime ktr & subktr
07 42 13
Preformed Metal Roofing, general, 2 yr
Prime ktr & subktr
Panel finish, 20 year,
Manufacturer
Leaking, 20 yr,
Manufacturer
07 52 00
Modified Bitumen Roofing, 10 yr,
Manufacturer
07 62 00
Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim, finish 20 yr,
Manufacturer
08 33 23
Overhead Rolling Doors, one year plus warranty,
Manufacturer
13 34 19
Pre-Engineered Building Systems, general, 2 yr,
Prime ktr & installer
Siding finish, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
Panel finish, 20 yr,
Manufacturer
Leaking, 20 yr,
Manufacturer
22 40 00
Plumbing, water cooler compressor, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
22 30 00
Plumbing, water heater tank, 6 yr,
Manufacturer
22 15 00
Compressed Air Systems, air compressor, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
23 52 34
Finned Water Tube Boilers, boiler heat exchanger, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
01 70 00 - 9
MS0114
E X T E N D E D
W A R R A N T I E S, continued.
SPEC.
ITEM & WARRANTY -
RESPONSIBLE PARTY (IES)
23 54 00
Forced Air Furnaces &Split System Air Conditioning,
5 yr compressor, 10 yr heat exchanger,
Manufacturer
23 55 00
Fuel Fired Unit Heaters, unit heat exchanger, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
23 64 00
Air Cooled Water Chillers, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
26 55 50
Ballfield Lighting, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
26 33 00
Emergency Power Supply, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
G E NE R A L
I N F O R M A T I O N
SPEC
ITEM DESCRIPTION; MANUFACTURER, SPEC #, STYLE, TYPE, COLOR, ETC.
04 20 00
Brick, __________________________________________________________________________
04 20 00
Concrete Masonry _______________________________________________________________
04 20 00
Glass Masonry __________________________________________________________________
06 41 00
Custom Casework _______________________________________________________________
07 24 00
EIFS ___________________________________________________________________________
07 42 13
Prefrmd. Roofing & Access. _______________________________________________________
07 52 00
Modif'd Bitumen Memb. Roofing ___________________________________________________
08 13 14
Steel Doors & Frames ____________________________________________________________
08 14 16
Wood Doors ____________________________________________________________________
08 41 13
Alum. Entry & Storefront __________________________________________________________
08 51 13
Alum. Windows, Oper. & Fixed _____________________________________________________
08 71 00
Door H'dware Latchsets __________________________________________________________
Locksets _______________________________________________________________________
Closers ________________________________________________________________________
Exit Devices ____________________________________________________________________
09 30 00
Cer. Tile Floor & Wall _____________________________________________________________
09 51 13
Susp. Acoust. Ceiling ____________________________________________________________
09 65 00
Resilient Floor __________________________________________________________________
09 68 00
Carpet _________________________________________________________________________
09 90 00
Painting ________________________________________________________________________
10 21 14
Plas. Lam. Toil. Part's ____________________________________________________________
10 26 00
Bumper, Corner & Wall Prot. ______________________________________________________
10 14 00
Interior Signage _________________________________________________________________
10 28 00
Toil. & Bath Access. _____________________________________________________________
12 21 13
Mini & Vert. Blinds _______________________________________________________________
13 34 19
Pre-Engr. Bldg. Systems __________________________________________________________
26 12 00
Distribution Transfmers. __________________________________________________________
26 24 16
Panelboards ____________________________________________________________________
26 24 17
Load Centers ___________________________________________________________________
01 70 00 - 10
MS0114
G E NE R A L
I N F O R M A T I O N, continued.
SPEC
ITEM DESCRIPTION; MANUFACTURER, SPEC #, STYLE, TYPE, COLOR, ETC.
26 28 26
Transfer Switch _________________________________________________________________
26 28 27
By-pass Isolation Switch _________________________________________________________
26 51 00
Interior Luminaires ______________________________________________________________
26 56 00
Site Lighting ____________________________________________________________________
26 32 13
Pkg. Engine Generator Syst. ______________________________________________________
28 31 00
Fire Detect. & Alarm Syst. _________________________________________________________
28 16 00
Intrusion Detect. Syst. ____________________________________________________________
I N S T R U C T I O N S
1. The prime contractor shall complete this form and provide it with the close out documentation.
2. Extended warranties; Provide name, phone and fax number for the responsible party (ies).
3. General Information; Provide name, phone and fax number, and pertinent information indicated for each item
listed.
4. It may not be required to use all of the items listed under Extended Warranties and General Information, in the
construction of this project. Should this occur, simply line through the item to indicate it was not used on this
project.
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Prime Contractor (See note below)
Date
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Mailing Address
City, State and Zip Code
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Phone Number
Fax Number
____________________________________
E-mail Address
If prime contractor is a corporation, affix the corporate seal below and provide signature of responsible party who can
legally obligate the corporation.
01 70 00 - 11
MS0114
SECTION 01 81 13:
PART 1
GREEN PROCUREMENT
GENERAL
1.01
GREEN PROCUREMENT & POLLUTION PREVENTION
A. Green Procurement is a mandatory component of the Air Force pollution prevention program. The
AF Installation Pollution Prevention Program Guide includes this goal for Green Procurement: “100% of
all products purchased each year in each of U.S. EPA’s ‘Guideline Item’ categories shall contain recycled
materials meeting U.S. EPA’s Guideline Criteria.”
B. Currently, reporting of green procurement purchases is limited to contracts having a total value greater
than $100,000.00, which includes the purchase of any amount of U.S. EPA-designated items.
C. This document contains guidelines for implementing the RCRA, EO, DOD, and Air Force requirements
1.02
AUTHORITY & REFERENCES:
A. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), section 6002 (42 U.S.C. 6962)
B. Executive Order (EO) 13101, Greening the Government through Waste Prevention, Recycling, and
Federal Acquisition.
C. Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 247, Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for
Products containing Recovered Material.
D. Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR)
1.03
REGULATORY BACKGROUND
A. Section 6002 of RCRA requires federal agencies to give preference in the acquisition process to products
and practices that conserve and protect natural resources and the environment. EO 13101 requires
federal agencies to expand waste prevention and recycling programs, implement affirmative procurement
programs for the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) -designated items, and procure
other environmentally preferable products and services. The stated purpose of the Green Procurement
Program is to stimulate the market for recovered materials. As a result of EO 13101, the EPA issued the
Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG’s) that have established the mandatory procurement by
federal agencies of 36 items produced with recovered materials. The EPA has also issued Recovered
Material Advisor Notices (RMANs) to accompany the CPGs and provide detailed information on the
designated items.
B. Please direct all questions regarding the plan to the Contracting Officer for forwarding to the 1 SOCES/CEAN
Environmental Flight, 8844651.
1.04
DOD AND AIR FORCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Green Procurement programs are required of all Air Force (USAF) installations. Department of Defense
(DOD) Instruction 4715.4, Pollution Prevention, calls for program establishment in accordance with RCRA
and EO 12873. Green Procurement is also addressed in Air Force Instruction (AFI) 32-7080, Pollution
Prevention Program, and the 24 July 1995 Air Force Pollution Prevention Strategy. The Strategy sets
program goals, and the AFI provides program guidance.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Sections 01 00 00, 01 33 00 and 01 60 00.
B. Each contractor as defined in paragraph 1.08 Definitions must complete the form attached at the end of
this section, indicating which products containing recycled or recovered products are going to be
incorporated in the construction of this project. In accordance with paragraph 1.09 Exemptions, provide
which exemption is applicable to each listed product.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s material specifications, installation instructions, physical
characteristics,
01 81 13 - 1
MS0114
D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed the specified requirements.
E. Sample: Submit sample for record.
1.06
RECYCLED OR RECOVERED PRODUCTS
A. Those construction materials identified on the Form at the end of this section.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Companies specializing in the manufacture of products that comply with the requirements
of this section with a minimum of three (3) years documented experience.
1.08
DEFINITIONS:
A. GREEN PROCUREMENT: The purchase of environmentally preferable products manufactured from
recycled and reclaimed materials.
B. ACQUISITION: The acquiring by contract with appropriated funds for supplies or services (including
construction) by and for the use of the Federal Government through purchase or lease, whether the
supplies or services are already in existence or must be created, developed, demonstrated, and
evaluated. Acquisition begins at the point when agency needs are established and includes the
description of requirements to satisfy agency needs, solicitation and selection of sources, award of
contracts, contract financing, contract performance, contract administration, and those technical and
management functions directly related to the process of fulfilling agency needs by contract.
C. CONTRACTOR (S): The prime contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and equipment suppliers
who provide the products that will be used in the construction of this project.
D. ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE: Products or services having a lesser or reduced effect on human
health and the environment when compared to competing products or services, serving the same
purpose. This comparison may consider raw materials acquisition, production, manufacturing, packing,
distribution, reuse, operation, maintenance, or product or service disposal. (EO 13101)
E. EPA DESIGNATED ITEM: An item that is or can be made with recovered material; that is listed by the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in a procurement guideline (40CFR, part 427); and for which
EPA has advised purchasing recommendations in a related Recovered materials Advisory Notice
(RMAN). (FAR 23.402)
F. EXECUTIVE AGENCY OR AGENCY: An executive agency as defined in 5 U.S.C. 105. For the purpose
of this order, military departments, as defined in 5 U.S.C. 102 are covered under the auspices of the
Department of Defense.
G. FORM: The Affirmative Procurement Reporting Form found at the end of this section.
H. POLLUTION PREVENTION: Source reduction as defined in the Pollution Prevention Act of 1990 (42
U.S.C. 13102), and other practices that reduce or eliminate the creation of pollutants through (a)
increased efficiency in the use of raw materials, energy, water, or other resources; or (b) protection of
natural resources by conservation.
I.
PRODUCT: Materials and equipment that will be used in the construction of this project.
J.
POST CONSUMER MATERIAL: A material or finished product that has served its intended use and has been
discarded for disposal or recovery, having completed its life as a consumer item. “Postconsumer material” is a
part of the broader category of “recovered material”.
K. PROCUREMENT: The purchase and providing of products to be used in the construction of this project.
L. RECOVERED MATERIALS: Waste materials and by-products which have been recovered or diverted from
solid waste, but such term does not include those materials and by-products generated from, and commonly
reused within, an original manufacturing process. (EO 13101, 42 U.S.C. 6903 (19) and FAR 23.402)
01 81 13 - 2
MS0114
M. RECYCLABILITY: The ability of a product or material to be recovered from or otherwise diverted from the
solid waste stream for the purpose of recycling. (EO 13101)
N. RECYCLING: The series of activities, including collection, separation, and processing by which products or
other materials are recovered from the solid waste steam for use in form of raw materials in the manufacture
of new products other than fuel for producing heat or power by combustion. (EO 13101)
O. RECYCLED MATERIAL: A material utilized in place of raw or virgin material in product manufacturing
consisting of materials derived from postconsumer waste, industrial scrap, material derived from agricultural
wastes, and other items, all of which can be used in new product manufacturer. (EPA Guidelines & OFPP
Policy Letter 92-4)
P. RECYCLED PRODUCT: A recycled product is one made completely or partially from waste materials or byproducts recovered or diverted from the solid waste stream.
Q. SOLID WASTE: Garbage, refuse, sludges and other discarded materials including those from industrial,
commercial, and agricultural operations, and from community activities. This excludes solids or dissolved
materials in domestic sewage or other significant pollutants in water resources, such as silt, dissolved or
suspended solids in industrial waste water effluents, dissolved materials in irrigation return flow, etc. (EPA
Guidelines)
R. SPECIFICATION (S): A clear and accurate description of the technical requirements for materials, products,
or services including the minimum requirement for materials’ quality and construction and any equipment
necessary for an acceptable product. In general, specifications are in the form of written descriptions,
drawings, prints, commercial designations, industry standards, and other descriptive references.
S. UNREASONABLE PRICE: If the cost of the recycled content product exceeds the cost of a non-recycled item,
the Air Force considers the cost to be unreasonable. (Air Force Affirmative Procurement Plan)
T. VERIFICATION: Procedures used by procuring agencies to confirm both vendor estimates and certifications
of the percentages of recovered materials contained in the products supplied to them or to be used in the
performance of a contract. (EPA Guidelines)
U. WASTE PREVENTION: Any change in the design, manufacturing, purchase, or use of materials or products
(including packaging) to reduce their amount or toxicity before they are discarded. Waste prevention also
refers to the reuse of products or materials.
V. WASTE REDUCTION: Preventing or decreasing the amount of waste being generated through waste
prevention, recycling, or purchasing recycled and environmentally preferable products.
1. 09 EXEMPTIONS
A. U.S. EPA recommends minimum content levels for those items listed at paragraph 1.10. The minimum
content levels are indicated in the Form. These levels are mandatory for Air Force procurements unless one
of the following exemptions applies. RCRA provides the following exemptions from the requirement to
purchase EPA-designated items:
1. The product is not available from a sufficient number of sources to maintain a satisfactory level of
competition (i.e., available from two or more sources).
2. The product is not available within a reasonable period of time.
3 The product does not meet the performance standards in applicable specifications or fails to meet
reasonable performance standards of the procuring agency.
4. The product is not available at a reasonable price. For Air Force purposes, “unreasonable price” is
defined as follows: If the price of the recycled-content product exceeds the cost of a non-recycled item,
then the price is considered unreasonable.
B. Each contractor is responsible for completion of the Form with respect to his or her work and products being
provided. Each contractor shall provide written documentation to support his/her decision not to acquire items
meeting the minimum content levels. This documentation shall be forwarded to the Contracting Officer for
review and approval. In the event the documentation fails to support the contractor’s findings, the Contracting
Officer shall return the documentation to the contractor citing the reason(s) for disapproval. The contractor
shall resubmit and address the deficiencies.
01 81 13 - 3
MS0114
1.10
U.S. EPA-DESIGNATED ITEMS
A. The 54 U.S. EPA-designated items are listed below. Not all of these items and the products listed under
each item may be required in the construction of this project. Please refer to the drawings and
specifications. The executed Form shall be used to demonstrate compliance with the stated procurement
requirements.
1. PAPER PRODUCTS
Item 1:
All paper and paper products, excluding building and construction paper grades.
2. VEHICULAR PRODUCTS
Item 2:
Lubricating oils containing re-refined oil, including engine lubricating oils, hydraulic fluids, and
gear oils, but excluding marine and aviation oils.
Item 3:
Tires, excluding airplane tires.
Item 4:
Reclaimed engine coolants, excluding coolants used in non-vehicular applications
3. CONSTRUCTION PRODUCTS
Item 5:
Building insulation products.
Item 6:
Structural fiberboard products for applications other than building insulation.
Item 7:
Laminated paperboard products for applications other than building insulation.
Item 8:
Cement and concrete, including products such as pipe and block, containing fly ash.
Item 9:
Cement and concrete, including concrete products such as pipe and block, containing
ground-granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag.
Item 10:
Carpet made of polyester fiber for use in low- and medium-wear applications.
Item 11:
Floor tiles containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 12:
Patio blocks containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 25:
Shower and restroom dividers/partitions containing recovered steel or plastic.
Item 26:
Reprocessed and consolidated latex paint for specific uses.
Item 37:
Carpet cushion
Item 38:
Flowable fill.
Item 39:
Railroad grade crossing surfaces.
4. TRANSPORTATION PRODUCTS
Item 13:
Traffic barricades used in controlling or restricting vehicular traffic.
Item 14:
Traffic cones used in controlling or restricting vehicular traffic.
Item 27:
Parking stops.
Item 28:
Channelizers used as temporary traffic control devices.
Item 29:
Delineators used as temporary traffic control devices.
Item 30:
Flexible delineators used as temporary traffic control devices.
5. PARK AND RECREATION PRODUCTS
Item 15:
Playground surfaces containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 16:
Running tracks containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 31:
Plastic fencing.
Item 40:
Park benches and picnic tables.
Item 41:
Playground equipment.
6. LANDSCAPING PRODUCTS
Item 17:
Hydraulic mulch products containing recovered paper or recovered wood.
Item 18:
Compost made from yard trimmings, leaves, and/or grass clippings.
Item 32:
Garden and soaker hoses containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 33:
Lawn and garden edging containing recovered rubber or plastic.
Item 42:
Food waste compost.
Item 43:
Plastic lumber landscaping timbers and posts.
7. NON-PAPER OFFICE PRODUCTS
Item 19:
Office recycling containers.
Item 20:
Office waste receptacles.
Item 16:
Plastic desktop accessories.
Item 22:
Toner cartridges.
Item 23:
Binders.
Item 24:
Plastic trash bags.
Item 34:
Printer ribbons (re-inked ribbons or re-inking equipment/service for ribbons).
Item 35:
Plastic envelops.
Item 44:
Solid plastic binders.
Item 45:
Plastic clipboards.
01 81 13 - 4
MS0114
Item 46:
Plastic file folders.
Item 47:
Plastic clip portfolios.
Item 48:
Plastic presentation folders.
8. MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
Item 36:
Pallets
Item 49:
Sorbents.
Item 50:
Industrial drums.
Item 51:
Awards and plaques.
Item 52:
Mats
Item 53:
Signage, including supports and posts.
Item 54:
Manual grade strapping.
1.11
APPLICABILITY
A. These procedures apply to all contractors employed in the construction of this project.
B. Please direct all questions regarding the plan to the Contracting Officer for forwarding to the 1 SOCES/CEAN
Environmental Flight, 884-4651.
1.12
INTENT
A. The intent of this section is to increase the awareness of all contractors as to the availability of products
manufactured from or that contain recycled materials, thereby increasing the use of these products in the
construction of this project.
B. The various sections of the specifications contain references to products to be used in the construction of this
project. The listed product may or may not be manufactured from or contain recycled materials. Therefore
all contractor(s), subcontractors, equipment suppliers and material suppliers are responsible for
compliance with this specification and those items/products listed on the Form. Recycled products
shall be used wherever possible subject to the exemptions as per paragraph 1.09.
C. Substitution of recycled materials or recycled products for specified products are subject to the provisions of
paragraph 1.05 Submittals (above) and Section 01 00 00, paragraph 1.11.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PARTIAL LIST OF PRODUCT SOURCES AND INFORMATION
A. GENERAL DATA:
1. GreenSpec Binder, Environmental Building News, www.ebuild.com
2. Certified Forest Products Council, www.certifiedwood.org/
3. Wiley Series in Sustainable Design, www.wiley.com/
4. The Carpet and Rug Institute, www.carpet-rug.com/
5. Information, McGraw-Hill, [email protected]
6. Florida Directory of Recycled Product Vendors,
www.2.dep.state.fl.us/waste/programs/rbac/downloads/rbac_dir.pd
7. Oikos Green Building Source, News, searchable products data base, library, www.oikos.com
8. Green Design Network, News, publications, databases, www.greendesign.net
9. Green Works Recycled Content7 Product Guide, detailed vendors directory,
www.metrokc.gov/greenworks/recycontent.htm>
B. DIVISION 03 00 00, CONCRETE
1. GranCem, granulated blast-furnace slag, www.grancem.com/
2. Syndesis, cement-based, pre-cast product workable with wood tools, www.syndesisinc.com/
C. DIVISION 04 00 00, MASONRY
1. Heble Building Systems, autoclaved aerated concrete blocks, www.heble.com/
2 Ytong Florida Ltd., autoclaved aerated concrete blocks, www.ytong-usa.com/
D. DIVISION 06 00 00, WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
1. Avonite, solid surfacing, www.avonite.com/
2. Chemical Specialties, wood treatment, www.treatedwood.com/
01 81 13 - 5
MS0114
3. Homasote Company, structural fiberboard, www.homasote.com/
4. Isoboard, fiberboard composed of straw fibers and non-toxic resins, www.isoboard.com/
5. TrusJoist Mac Millan, engineered wood products, www.homasote.com/
E. DIVISION 07 00 00, Thermal & Moisture Protection
1. Duro-Last Roofing, recycled PVC walkway pads, 1-800-2480280
2. Johns Manville, Insulation products, www.jm.com/
3. Majestic Skylines, rubber-based slate-look roofing for steep roofs, www.majesticskylines.com/
4. Owens-Corning, insulation products, www.owenscorning.com/
F. DIVISION 08 00 00, OPENINGS
1. Marvin Window & Door, windows, some meeting “Energy Star Label”, www.marvin.com/
2. Pella, energy efficient windows, www/pella.com/
G. DIVISION 09 00 00, FINISHES
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.-Flooring Systems, www.armstrong-floors.com/
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.-Ceiling Systems, www.ceilings.com/
3. Benjamin Moore & Co., VOC free acrylic interior latex paint, www.benjaminmoore.com/
4. CanFibre Group Ltd., all-green medium-density fiberboard, www.canfibre.com
5. Chemrex Inc., low-e interior paint, www.chemrex.com/
6. Collins & Aikman Floor coverings, carpet with 100% post-consumer backing, www.powerbond.com/
7. DesignTex, Inc., polyester panel fabric made from 100% PET fiber, www.dtex.com/
8. Dodge-Regupol, Inc., 100% recycled rubber-flooring, www.regupol.com/
9. Eco-sensitive modular tile, vinyl tile with 100% recycled carpet-backing, www.powerbond.com/
10. Environmental Stone Products, stone manufactured from 100% recycled glass,
www.environmentalstone.com/
11. Glidden: residential interior latex paints 100% free of VOC, www.icipaintstores.com/
12 Homasote Inc., sound barrier, www.homasote.com/
13. Isoboard Enterprises, Inc. panel made from wheat straw and non-toxic resins, 1-503-2427345
14. Marley-Flexco Co., flooring made form 95% recycled truck and bus tires, www.marleyflexco.com/
15. The Mat Factory, Inc., interlocking roll-up tiles made from 100% postconsumer tire rubber and PVC plastic
from electric cable covers, 1-949-6453122
16. Permafirm Pad Co., carpet pads made from almost 100% recycled content, 1-800-3446977
17. Sherwin Williams, VOC compliant paints and enamels, www.sherwin.com/
18. SierraPine Limited, formaldehyde-free particleboard and medium density fiberboard containing
recycled/recovered wood fiber, www.sierrapine.com/
19. Summittville Tiles, impervious porcelain tiles using feldspar tailings, www.summitville.com/
20 Tectum, natural-fiber acoustical ceiling and wall panels, www.tectum.com/
21. Tiles with natural fibers, tiles made of a bio-alloy material and natural fibers, www.maderatile.com
22. USG Interiors, Inc., synthetic gypsum board, www.usg.com/
23. Decorative Architectural Tiles, floor, counter & wall tile made from 100 % postconsumer glass, 1-8088857812
24. Forbo, linoleum-flooring utilizing renewable resources, www.forbo.com/
H. DIVISION 10 00 00, SPECIALTIES
1. The Access Store, modular ramping system made from 100% recycled rubber, www.accessstoe.com/
2. BP Solar, photovoltaic modules and systems, www.bp.com/bpsolar/index
3. Mecho Shade Systems, interior shadecloths, www.mechoshade.com/
4. R Control, structural insulated panel (SIP), www.mechoshade.com/
I.
DIVISION 12 00 00, FURNISHINGS
1. Guilford of Maine, fabric from 100% recycled materials, www.terratex.com/
2. Phenix Biocomposites, tabletops made from soy based products free of petrochemicals, 1-800-3248187
3. Safe Solutions, LLC, furniture manufactured from waste wood, 1-970-2473333
J.
DIVISION 14 00 00, CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
1. Montgomery KONE, AC girlies elevators, www.montgomery-kone.com/
K. DIVISION 26 00 00, ELECTRICAL
1. Advance Transformer Company, linear reactor ballast, www.advancetransformer.com/
01 81 13 - 6
MS0114
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
7.
8.
PART 3
Artemide Inc., energy efficient cold-cathode lighting, www.artemide.com/
Edison Price Lighting, track mounted metal-halide PAR 30 &38 lamps, 1-212-5216995
Leviton Manufacturing Corporation, Inc., occupancy sensors, www.leviton.com/
Phillips Lighting, energy efficient compact fluorescent lamps, www.phillips.com/lighting
Osram Sylvania, mercury-free lamps and energy efficient fluorescent lamps, www.osramsylvania.com/
Sensor Switch, lighting control occupancy sensors, www.sensorswitch.com/
Venture Lighting, pulse-start high performance lamp and ballast system, www.venturelighting.com/
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittals.
Install materials and systems in proper relation to adjacent construction and with uniform appearance.
B. Coordinate with work of other sections.
C. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper function.
D. Clean and protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION
01 81 13 - 7
MS0114
GREEN PROCUREMENT REPORTING FORM
(PER EXECUTIVE ORDER 13101)
PROJECT NUMBER:___________________________________
BLDG NUMBER:_______________________________________
PROJECT MANAGER___________________________________
PROJECT INSPECTOR:_________________________________
CONTRACTOR:________________________________________
This form is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted through 1 SOCONS to 1 SOCEC. It is the responsibility
of the 1 Special Operations Civil Engineering Squadron construction inspector to submit this data to 1
SOSCES/CEAN who in-turn reports it to AFSOC MAJCOM IAW E.O. 13101, Federal Acquisition, Recycling, and
Waste Prevention.
RECYCLED OR RECOVERED
PRODUCT
% REQUIRED
(MINIMUM)
-ROCK WOOL INSUL
-FIBERGLASS INSUL
-LOOSE FILL/SPRAY ON INSUL
-PERLITE COMP BOARD INSUL
-PLASTIC RIGID FOAM INSUL
-GLASS FIBER REINF FOAM INSUL
-PHENOLIC RIGID FOAM INSUL
-STRUCTURAL FIBER BD
-LAMINATED PAPER BD
-CEMENT/CONCRETE (FLYASH)
-CARPET (PET)
-PATIO BLOCKS/RUBBER
-PATIO BLOCKS/PLASTIC
-FLOOR TILES/RUBBER
-FLOOR TILES/PLASTIC
-TRAFFIC CONES
-TRAFFIC BARRICADES
-PLAYGROUND SURFACES
-RUNNING TRACKS
-COMPOST
-WOOD-BASED HYDRAULIC
MULCH
-PAPER-BASED HYDRAULIC
MULCH
REPROCESSED LATEX PAINT
WHITE, OFF-WHITE & PASTEL
COLORS
REPROCESSED LATEX PAINT
GREY, BROWN, EARTHTONES &
OTHER DARK COLORS
CONSOLIDATED LATEX PAINT
75%
20-25%
75%
23%
9%
6%
5%
80-100%
100%
SEE SPEC
25-100%
90-100%
90-100%
90-100%
90-100%
50-100%
80-100%
90-100%
90-100%
100%
100%
PLASTIC/RUBBER PARKING
STOPS
CONCRETE CONTAINING COAL
FLY ASH PARKING STOPS
CONCRETE CONTAINING GGBF
PARKING STOPS
PLASTIC SHOWER & RESTROOM
DIVIDERS/PARTITIONS
100%
100%
20%
50-99%
100%
20-40%
25-70%
20-100%
01 81 13 - 8
%
AVAIL
(ACTUAL)
QUANTITY
USED/UI
EXEMPTED
1,2,3,4
MS0114
CERTIFICATION
I hereby certify the Statement of Work/Specifications for the requisition/procurement of all materials listed on this form
comply with EPA standards for recycled/recovered materials content.
_______________
Contractor
_______________
Inspector
_______________
Environmental Flight
The following exemptions may apply to the non-procurement of recycled/recovered content materials:
1) The product does not meet appropriate performance standards
2) The product is not available within a reasonable time frame
3) The product is not available competitively (from two or more sources)
4) The product is only available at an unreasonable price (compared with a comparable non-recycled content
product.)
01 81 13 - 9
MS0114
SECTION 02 41 19:
PART 1
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Provide all demolition as required by the Contract Documents.
1. Demolish interior and exterior portions of structures including but not limited to, walls, partitions,
windows, doors, roofing, paving/curb/guttering, site furniture, shrubs, trees, interior finishes, etc., and
associated components.
2. Demolish plumbing, mechanical, and electrical equipment and associated components
3. Demolished materials shall become the property of the Contractor unless otherwise noted on the
Drawings or in the Specifications.
4. Remove and dispose of demolished materials at a legally approved dumpsite off base.
5. Notify Contracting Officer prior to shut-off of existing utilities. Cap off utilities that are to remain in use.
6. Where fasteners, bolts, piping, wiring, ductwork and/or equipment that is/are to be removed are
attached to or pass through walls, floors, ceilings or roofs, the Contractor shall patch all holes or
openings under 1(one) square foot in size to match adjacent construction. Patch holes or openings in
fire rated walls as required to maintain fire rating.
7. Existing fire suppression systems, fire detection systems, and intrusion systems must remain
active unless approved by the Contracting Officer and the responsible agency (Fire
Department/Security Forces). Required deactivation of systems, or portions thereof, during
demolition/construction must be requested and approved 72 hours in advance. Contractor will be
responsible for protection of premises during periods of deactivation. If necessary, provide temporary
protection or services.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval selective demolition schedule, including schedule and methods for capping and
continuing utility service, and clearing & grubbing schedule.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use experienced workmen.
1.04
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Government personnel will not occupy areas of Work during demolition.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
DEMOLITION
A. Do not damage building elements and improvements indicated to remain. Items of salvage value and not
included on schedule of salvage items to be returned to Government may be removed from structure.
Storage or sale of items at Project site is prohibited.
B. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, drives or other occupied or used spaces or facilities without the
written permission of the Contracting Officer and the authorities having jurisdiction. Do not interrupt
utilities serving occupied or used facilities without the written permission of the Contracting Officer and
authorities having jurisdiction. If necessary, provide temporary utilities
C. Cease operations if public safety or remaining structures are endangered. Perform temporary corrective
measures until operations can be continued properly. Complete closure of Air Force roads will not be
authorized.
END OF SECTION
02 41 19 - 1
MS0114
SECTION 03 10 00
PART 1
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
1.02
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. See applicable section of the specifications.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
B. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
D. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork.
E. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.04
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing in accordance with ACI 318 to conform to
the design and all applicable building code requirements to achieve concrete shape, line and dimension
as indicated on the construction documents.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties.
1.06 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
c. Certify lumber is harvested from Forest Stewardship Council Certified well managed forest.
C.
Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
c. Certified wood products.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 318.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.08
QUALIFICATIONS
03 10 00 - 1
MS0114
A. Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of
this work and licensed in the State of Florida.
1.09
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork.
1.10
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture.
1.11
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this section with other sections of work, which require attachment of components to formwork.
B. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement,
request instructions from the Contracting Officer before proceeding.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site
3. Certified Wood Materials: Furnish wood materials certified in accordance with FSC Guidelines
2.02
WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: APA/EWA PS1, C Grade.
2.03
FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap-off type, galvanized metal, adjustable length, 1 inch back break dimension, free of
defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil, which will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture.
C. Corners: Chamfered type, 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch size.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with
Drawings.
3.02
EARTH FORMS
A. Earth forms are not permitted.
3.03
ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of
ACI 318.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by
construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during
stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
03 10 00 - 2
MS0114
E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members, which are not indicated on Drawings.
F. Provide chamfer strips on exposed external corners of concrete edge.
3.04
APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes, which are effected
by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to
placement of concrete.
3.05
INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work.
B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses. chases,
sleeves, bolts. anchors, and other inserts.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure
items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
3.06
FORM CLEANING
A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and
debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
D. During cold weather, remove ice from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts or water to clean out forms,
unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or
other means to remove foreign matter.
3.07
FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301 and ACI 117.
3.08
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork
design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not
patch formwork.
3.09
FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and
imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces
scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged.
Discard damaged forms.
END OF SECTION
03 10 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 03 20 00
PART 1
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast in place concrete.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
C. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.
D. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
E. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice.
F. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars.
G. ACI SP-66 – ACI Detailing Manual.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric,
bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices and anchor bolt layout.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a.
Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b.
Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a.
Products with recycled material content.
b.
Regional products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.05
A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP-66.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
D. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
03 20 00 - 1
MS0114
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
2.02
REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel:
1. ASTM A615, 60-ksi yield grade
2. Deformed billet steel bars.
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 Plain Type; in flat sheets; plain finish: (Sidewalk Reinforcement)
C. Slab on Grade Reinforcement shall be:
1. #3 rebar at 12” o/c each way.
2.03
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gauge annealed type.
B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement
during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier
puncture. Brick or CMU may not be used for support except as permitted by references in paragraph 1.02
above.
2.04
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Conform to ACI 318 for concrete cover over reinforcement.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 41 00.
END OF SECTION
03 20 00 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 03 30 00
PART 1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Slabs on grade, slabs on grade including integral footings, foundations, beams, columns, and elevated
floor and roof slabs.
B. Equipment pads and thrust blocks.
C. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
B.
ACI 304R – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete
C.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
D.
ACI 306R - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
E.
ACI 308R - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete.
F.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
G.
ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
H.
ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
I.
ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
J.
ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
K.
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
L.
ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
M.
ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric
Method.
N.
ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method.
O.
ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
P.
ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
Q.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use
as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
R.
ASTM C685 - Standard Specification for Concrete Made By Volumetric Batching and Continuous
Mixing.
S.
ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous
Type).
T.
ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
03 30 00 - 1
MS0114
U.
ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or
Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
V.
ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
W.
ASTM D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and
Asphalt Pavements
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, sealants, attachment accessories and admixtures.
C. Concrete mix design.
D. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
E. Provide 12-inch long sample of expansion joint and control joint.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components, which are concealed from view.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
D. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
E. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.07
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form
accessories.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal or Type III - High Early Strength Portland type.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. Course aggregate shall be washed and shall consist of
crushed stone. Particle shape of coarse shall be generally cubicle in shape.
03 30 00 - 2
MS0114
C. Water: ACI 318; potable, Clean and not detrimental to concrete with no chloride ions.
2.02
ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.
B. Chemical: ASTM C494, Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding or Type E - Water Reducing and
Accelerating Admixture.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618. Type C or Type F (Loss on ignition for type F shall not exceed 6%). If an approved
pozzolanic material is used, the weight of flyash used shall not exceed 10% determined by
dividing the weight of flyash by the weight of Portland cement.
D. Use of all admixtures must be approved by the Contracting Officer. The use of ‘plastisizers’ is
prohibited unless approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion or two component modified epoxy resin.
B. Vapor Barrier: ASTM E1745, Class “B” reinforced, multi-ply vapor retarder (Water vapor resistance 0.3
perms, Tensile strength 30.0 lbf/in, Puncture resistance 1700 grams). Install in strict compliance with
manufacturer’s written instructions including filed taping of seams and installation of pipe boots
penetrating through the slab.
C. Non-shrink Grout: ASTM C1107: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,
water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400
psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.
2.04
JOINT TYPES, DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS (Identify Type on Structural Drawings)
A. Isolation Joint (IJ): Asphalt impregnated glass fiber filler Type A: ASTM D994, minimum 1/2" inch thick or
as indicated on drawings.
B. Exterior Construction Joint (ECJ): Integral galvanized steel, formed to tongue and groove profile, with
removable top strip exposing sealant trough, and ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.
C. Exterior Tooled Contraction Joint (ETC): Tool formed joint located between isolation joints.
C. Interior Transverse Construction Joint (ITC): Integral galvanized steel, formed to tongue and groove
profile, with ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge with removable cap for sealant pocket.
D. Interior Longitudinal Contraction Joint (ILC): Joint that is saw cut into the surface of the concrete as soon
as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates from becoming dislodged by the cutting
process (usually 4-12 hours after the concrete hardens) and completed before drying shrinkage causes
cracking. Initial cut shall be 1/3 the thickness of the slab. After concrete has cured, joints shall be re-cut to
½” width x ½” depth. Provide foam backer rod and fill joint with sealant flush with top of slab.
E. All joint material shall match the thickness of the slab.
F. Sealant:
1. ASTM D6690: Hot applied synthetic rubber compound.
2. Cold applied two-part liquid neoprene.
2.05
CONCRETE MIX
A. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301. Mix concrete in accordance
with ACI 304R. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather ONLY when approved by Contracting Officer. Use of
admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
C. Accelerating admixtures shall not contain more than 0.1% calcium chloride.
D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Contracting Officer.
03 30 00 - 3
MS0114
E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions.
B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately
placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials.
3.03
SCHEDULE - JOINT CONTROL
A. Floor Slab Perimeter and Exterior/Interior Isolation Joints: Joint filler Type A set 1/8 inch below floor slab
elevation.
B. Exterior/Interior Construction Joints: Set joints to line and grade.
C. Contraction Joints: Saw-cut joints to dimensions shown on the drawings.
D. See 2.04. above.
3.04
PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318.
B. Notify Contracting Officer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.
C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers and joint devices are not disturbed
during concrete placement.
D. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 8 inches and seal watertight by
taping edges and ends.
E. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier
material; lap over damaged areas minimum 8 inches and seal watertight.
F. Install joint fillers, primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Install construction joint device in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to
required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
H. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover flush with floor finish.
I.
Deposit concrete at final position. Prevent segregation of mix.
J.
Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken.
K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
L. Do not interrupt successive placements; do not permit cold joints to occur.
M. Saw cut joints within 12 hours of placing using 3/16-inch thick blade. Depth of cut shall not be less than
one-third (1/3) the thickness of the slab.
N. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
03 30 00 - 4
MS0114
3.05
CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Monolithic Foundation and Slab-on-Grade: 6” thick, 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, formed to line and grade.
Steel trowel finishes surface of slab. Vertical surfaces shall be repaired/patched and finished no later
than one day after form removal. Wet and rub surface with a carborundum brick or other approved
abrasive, producing a satisfactory finish, smooth and uniform in color and texture. Seal all joints with an
approved joint sealer.
C. Beams, Columns, Elevated Floor and Roof Slabs Exposed to View: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete.
Patch/repair surfaces after form removal, wet and rub surface with a carborundum brick or other approved
abrasive after patching/repair, producing a satisfactory finish, smooth and uniform in color and texture.
D. Exposed Exterior Sidewalks, Aprons, Landings, Steps: 4” thick, 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, air entrained,
and non-slip broom finish.
E. Below Grade Footings, Single-Story Structures: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, form finish.
F. Below Grade Footings, Multi-Story Structures: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, form finish.
3.06
CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for
hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Cure concrete floor surfaces to requirements of Section 03 39 00.
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section
01 41 00.
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to testing firm for review and approval prior to
commencement of work.
D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 40 or less cubic yards of each class of concrete
placed. Perform one compression test each at 7 days and 28 days, and one spare to be tested when
directed by Contracting Officer.
F. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. Slump shall be within 3”-5” range except
monolithic foundation and slab-on-grade shall be within 2”-4” range.
3.08
PATCHING
A. Allow Contracting Officer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.
B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Contracting Officer upon
discovery.
C. Patch imperfections as directed in accordance with ACI 301.
3.09
DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements. Concrete not conforming to specified strength in 28 days will be considered
defective.
03 30 00 - 5
MS0114
B. Defective concrete will be removed and replaced. Removal will be to the nearest construction joint in all
directions. Repair of defective concrete will be permitted only upon approval from the Contracting Officer.
C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Contracting Officer for each individual area.
END OF SECTION
03 30 00 - 6
MS0114
SECTION 03 35 00:
PART 1
CONCRETE FINISHING
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1.
SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.
1.02
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface treatment with concrete hardener-sealer coating.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Manufacturer's Data and Installation Instructions: Indicate criteria for preparation and application.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1.
Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2.
Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1.
Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1.
Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2.
Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles
(800 km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1.
Interior Concrete, Wood, Bamboo, and Cork Floor Finishes: Maximum volatile organic compound
content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113, including sealers and stains.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: HARDENERS AND SEALERS
A. Hardener & Sealers: "Crystaloid" liquid hardener as manufactured by Concrete Service Materials Co.,
"Sealco 800" by Cormix Construction Chemicals, "Clear Bond" by Guardian Chemical Co., "Sonosil" by
Sonneborn Building Products.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
03 35 00 - 1
MS0114
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
CLEANING AND EXAMINATION
A. Upon completion of the interior of the building, including but not limited to, painting, acoustical ceilings,
electrical, etc., the contractor shall thoroughly clean the concrete floor slab using materials recommended
by the manufacturer of the hardener and sealer. Upon completion of the cleaning, verify that floor
surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this Section.
3.02
FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT
A. Apply hardener and sealer (number of coats as required by manufacturer to be qualified as a
"heavy-duty" coating) in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions on interior floor surfaces.
END OF SECTION
03 35 00 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 03 39 00
PART 1
CONCRETE CURING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
B. ACI 302.1 – Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
C. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete.
D. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
E. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
F. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
G. ASTM D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, product characteristics, compatibility and limitations.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate criteria for preparation and application.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Maintain one copy of document on site.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compound Type A: ASTM C309, white pigmented Type 2, Class B, free of paraffin.
B. Absorptive Mats Type B: ASTM C171.
03 39 00 - 1
MS0114
C. Waterproof Paper Type C: ASTM C171, treated to prevent separation during handling and placing,
standard color.
D. Polyethelene Film Type D: ACTM C171, 6 mil. thick, clear.
E. Water: Potable and not detrimental to concrete.
2.02 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured.
3.02
EXECUTION - HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
B. Membrane Curing Compound at Exterior Exposed Concrete Only: Apply curing compound in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions in 2 coats with second coat at right angles to first.
C. All Floor Slabs shall be cured with Polyethylene Film (Optional for other horizontal surfaces): Spread
polyethylene film over floor slab areas, lapping edges and sides and sealing with pressure sensitive tape;
maintain in place for 7 days. Other wet-cure methods may be used if approved by the Contracting
Officer.
3.03
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
END OF SECTION
03 39 00 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 04 05 03:
PART 1
MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mortar for masonry.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.
B. ASTM C91 – Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
C. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
D. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
E. ASTM C387/C387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and
Concrete.
F. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain
and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
G. International Building Code (Latest Edition), Chapter 21 Masonry.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1.
Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1.
Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Provide design mix, Proportion method (by volume), required environmental conditions, and Forrer
admixture limitations. Base volume on cubic foot measurements. See table 2103.7(1) 2000 International
Building Code. The use of the Forrer admixture requires a reduction in the volume of water. Include
volume of water required in gallons. Do not use hydrated lime or lime putty in the design mix.
C. Submit premix mortar manufacturer's certificate indicating conformance to ASTM C270 and installation
instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect products at site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. Maintain packaged
materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Cold Weather Construction.
B. Hot Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Hot Weather Construction.
04 05 03 - 1
MS0114
1.07
MIX TESTS
A. Test mortar in accordance with Section 01 41 00 and in accordance with ASTM C780.
B. Test mortar mix for compressive strength, consistency and slump. Provide 4 copies of test results to
Contracting Officer for review and approval prior to commencement of work. Mix design for all masonry
units exposed to the weather, standard CMU and face brick must include Forrer Dry Block II or Forrer
Dry Brick Admixture, in the proportions recommended by the manufacturer for the type of mortar
specified. See 2.04 Mortar Mixes below. The use of Forrer Dry Block II or Dry Brick is not required in mix
design for masonry units not exposed to the weather.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
MATERIALS:
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type M or Type S.
B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.
C. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387, Type S, white cement, for glass unit masonry.
D. Admixtures: Forrer Dry Block or Dry Brick Admixture.
2.03
MORTAR MIXES
A. Mortar for Non-load Bearing Walls and Partitions and Glass Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S utilizing
the Proportion Method to achieve 1800 psi strength.
B. Mortar for load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type M, utilizing the Proportion Method to
achieve 2500 psi strength.
2.04
MORTAR MIXING
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM
C270. Mortar shall be mixed between 3-5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer with the required amount
of water to provide the required consistency. Hand mixing is not permitted. See 1.03.B above.
B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
C. Mortars that have become stiffened may be re-tempered by adding the minimum amount of water to
achieve the required consistency.
D. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after mixing. Discard mortar beyond 2-1/2 hours.
2.05
TEST PANEL:
A. Provide 4’ x 4’ test panel to illustrate laying of masonry units including width and tooling of mortar joints.
Do not lay any masonry units until the Inspector has approved the test panel. The approved test panel
shall be the standard of quality for the project.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
04 05 03 - 2
MS0114
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar to requirements of the specific masonry Section.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM C780 and under provisions of
Section 01 41 00.
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each type of mortar to testing firm for review and approval prior to
commencement of work.
D. Tests of mortar, aggregates and admixtures may be performed to ensure conformance with specified
requirements.
E. Three undisturbed samples of molded mortar test cylinders will be taken as follows:
1. For every 1000 s.f. of gross wall area or fraction thereof.
END OF SECTION
04 05 03 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 04 20 00
PART 1
UNIT MASONRY
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete masonry units.
B. Brick masonry units.
C. Glass masonry units.
D. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
E. Parged masonry surfaces.
F. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1.02
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. See applicable sections of the Specifications and the Drawings.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
B. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Brick.
C. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
D. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
E. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
F. ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
G. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
H. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
I.
ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale).
J.
ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
K. ASTM C744 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units.
L. ASTM D1056 – Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge or Expanded Rubber
M. ASTM D2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness.
N. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
O. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
P. International Building Code (Latest Edition), Chapter 21 Masonry.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit one sample of each masonry unit to be used in the construction to illustrate type, texture, range,
etc. under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
04 20 00 - 1
MS0114
B. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01 33 00 that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
C. Submit product data and manufacturer's written installation instructions of all products used in the
construction under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
D. Submit copy of UL Design for fire-rated wall assemblies.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
1.05 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.06
OUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer / Subcontractor: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 3
years documented experience.
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the successful manufacture of many different styles and colors of
masonry units as specified in this Section with minimum of 3 years documented experience.
1.07
MOCK-UP
A. Prior to start of work, provide 4' x 4' mock-up of each type of exposed masonry unit except glass masonry
units. Provide 16” x 16” mock-up of glass units. Mock-up shall be constructed from approved CM units.
When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate the minimum standard for the work. Mock-up may not remain
as part of the work. Do not start masonry work until mock up has been approved.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products at site on pallets to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and
damage to the products by weather, water or breakage. Products shall be delivered and stored in original
plastic packages until ready for use. Damaged packages will be rejected. Products must be kept dry.
Delivery, storage and handling shall also be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.09
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Cold Weather Construction.
B. Hot Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Hot Weather Construction.
1.10
WARRANTY
A. The prime contractor and masonry subcontractor shall warrant the materials and installation for two years
from the date of acceptance by the Contracting Officer. Warranty shall include cleaning of efflorescence
from the Brick and Concrete Masonry Units, and repair of damaged BM / CMU due to efflorescence. Presealer and water repellant sealer shall be re-applied after repair or cleaning of the Brick / CMU.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
04 20 00 - 2
MS0114
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
2.02
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type II - Non-Moisture Controlled, normal weight.
B. Solid Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type II - Non-Moisture Controlled, normal weight.
C. Hollow Non-Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Type II - Non-Moisture Controlled, normal weight.
D. Fire Rated Concrete Masonry Units: CM units produced in accordance with the Standard for Concrete
Masonry Units, UL-618, are classified without further fire tests. Other CM Units are classified on the basis
of fire tests conducted in accordance with the Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials, UL-263. Supplier shall provide the appropriate Underwriters Laboratories Certificate indicating
the correct classification, in hours, for the unit to be incorporated into the construction. Construction of
fire-rated wall assemblies shall be in strict accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL Design
(Number) listed on the drawing. A copy of the UL design is available form the Base Civil Engineer's
office, Engineering Flight.
E. Concrete Brick Units: ASTM C55, of same Grade, Type, and weight as block units.)
F. Shape & Size: Nominal modular size of 8-inch x 8 inch x l6 inch, 4-inch x 8-inch x l6- inch and as
indicated on the Drawings. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels, and
bullnosed corners where indicated on the Drawings.
1. Back-up Wythe, interior partitions to receive additional finish, and below grade: Plain/standard CMU.
2. Exposed to view, above grade: Split Face, Split Face/Split Ribbed or Smooth or plain as indicated on
the drawings.
G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
BRICK MASONRY UNITS
A. Face Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBX, Grade MW; color as selected.
B. Common Brick: ASTM C62, Grade MW; solid units.
C. Size & Shape: Nominal modular size of 4 inches x 2-2/3 inches x 8 inches. Provide special units for 90degree corners, lintels, and bull-nosed corners as indicated on drawings.
1. Back-up Wythe, interior partitions to receive additional finish, and below grade: Common brick.
2. Exposed to view, above grade: Face Brick color and texture as per 2.03.G below.
3. Color shall match similar units used on base and must be approved by the Contracting Officer or his
representative.
D. Special Brick Shape: Shaped to profile indicated, surface texture on face, sides or ends as indicated on
the drawings.
E. Size and Shape of Giant Brick Units: As indicated on the drawings. Provide special units for 90-degree
corners, lintels, and bull-nosed corners as indicated on drawings.
F. Modular Brick Units: All brick units must be produced at one time for color/shade consistency.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Cunningham Brick Company, Lexington KY, Winestone Rockface
2. Cunningham Brick Company, Lexington KY, Winestone
G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
GLASS MASONRY UNITS:
A. Hollow Glass Units: Permanently sealed hollow units by heat fusing joint with joint key and factory coating
at units edges to assist mortar bond. Provide special corner units, curved units, end units etc., as required
04 20 00 - 3
MS0114
and indicated on the drawings. Nominal size 8 inches x 8 inches x 4 inches. Color and pattern as
indicated on the drawings.
B. Solid Glass Units: Factory coated edges to assist mortar bond. Provide special corner units, curved units,
end units etc., as required and indicated on the drawings. Nominal size 8 inches x 8 inches x 3 inches.
Color and pattern as indicated on the drawings.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Pittsburgh Corning Inc., 800 Presque Isle Road, Pittsburgh, PA 15239, phone1-800-9925769
2. Weck, Glashaus Inc., 450 Congress Parkway Suite “E”, Crystal Lake, IL, phone 1-815-356-8440
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.05
GROUT
A. Fine Grout: Ready mixed concrete fill at small spaces of CM units shall be 3000 psi concrete without
coarse aggregate. Use at spaces at least 0.75” wide horizontally but less than 3”. Spaces smaller than
0.75” shall be filled with mortar. Slump shall be between 8”-10”, about 8” for units with low water
absorption and about 10 “for units with high water absorption. Limit fly ash to 15% of the weight of
cement.
B. Coarse Grout: Ready mixed concrete fill at cell(s) of CM units shall be 3000 psi concrete with pea gravel
aggregate or smaller depending on job conditions. Use at spaces greater than 3 “ wide horizontally.
Slump shall be between 8”-10”, about 8” for units with low water absorption and about 10 “ for units with
high water absorption. Limit fly ash to 15% of the weight of cement.
2.06
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Joint Reinforcement: Truss type hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, high tensile cold-drawn steel
conforming to ASTM A82; manufactured by Dur-o- Wall or equal.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60-ksi-yield grade; deformed billet steel bars sized and located as shown
on the Drawings.
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A. Through-Wall Flashing Assembly:
1. 5 ounce copper-fabric type; full sheet copper, asphalt coated both sides, laminated under pressure
between two layers (one each side) of treated glass fabric.
2. Termination bar, 1" x 1/8" stainless steel bar with pre-punched holes, top of bar 16" above weeps (at
foundation or steel angle lintel). Secure bar to each stud wall with stainless steel self-tapping screws.
Apply sealant to screw heads.
3. Steel Lintel Drip Edge: 26 gauge stainless steel, width to equal horizontal leg of lintel with 3/4" vertical
leg up and down. Place on top of lintel and install copper-fabric flashing on top of drip edge.
B. Preformed Control Joints: Polyvinylchloride material, regular, wide flange or “tee” design as required.
Provide with corner and tee accessories, cement fused joints. Must meet ASTM D-2240.
C. Preformed Joint Filler: Neoprene filler strip used at veneer control joints. Must meet ASTM D-1056, Class
RE41 or 2A1.
D. Veneer Wall Ties, Studwall Backup: 3/4" x 5" x 12 gauge hot galvanized steel screwed to studs with hot
galvanized 3/16" wire ties. (Dur-O-Wal #D/A 207 & D/A 703 or 750 trapezoid wire ties or equal)
E. Building Paper: No. 15 or 30 asphalt saturated felt as indicated on the drawings.
F. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry
joints.
G. Veneer Wall Ties, Masonry Backup: Rectangular adjustable wall ties, hot dipped galvanized 3/16” wire,
double pintel and double eye rod, at 16” o.c. vertically and 24” o.c. horizontally. Maximum vertical
adjustment 1.25”. (Dur-O-Eye D/A 3700 or approved equal)
04 20 00 - 4
MS0114
H. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement, Single Wythe: Hot dipped galvanized deformed bars, 3/16” side rods with
#9 truss rod bracing, @ 16” o.c. vertically. Stagger with corrugated metal ties.
I.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement, Glass Masonry Units: Hot dipped galvanized deformed bars, 9 gauge
side rods @ 1.625-1.75” o.c. to suite GMU, @ 16” o.c. 9 gauge ladder type bracing @ 8” o.c.
J.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement, Double Wythe: Hot dipped galvanized deformed bars, 3/16” side rods
with 3/16” truss rod bracing, hot dipped galvanized 3/16” welded double eye rod at and double pintel @
16” o.c. vertically.
K. Expansion strips, Glass Masonry Units: Dense glass fiber7/16 inch x 4-inch nominal size.
L. Panel Anchors, Glass Masonry Units: Steel strips, 20 gauge x 1-3/4 inch wide, punched with three
rows of elongated holes, pattern staggered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to 1.25 ounce per square
foot.
M. Perimeter channel, Glass Masonry Units:
Extruded aluminum, channel profile, size as required to fit
GM unit, one piece per length installed (no joints/splices), anodized to match color as indicated on the
drawings.
N. Glass Masonry Units Grid System: Extruded anodized aluminum grid block system to accept Glass
Masonry Units. Manufacturer, Innovative Building Products Inc., phone 1-800-923-2263.
O. Z Bar Wall Ties: 0.25” thickness x length required @ 16” o.c., galvanized steel wire with moisture drip.
P. Weep Holes-Wicks: Cotton rope, 0.375” diameter x 7” in length at 16” o.c. horizontally at veneer
applications. On single wythe walls, install weep holes in center of each cell of CM units.
Q. Rigid Steel Partition Anchors: 0.25” thick x 1.25” (w) x length required @ 16” o.c.vertically.
R. Dovetail Anchors and Slots: Dovetail slot with dovetail anchors (corrugated ties, triangular wire-ties, and
stone anchors) as required to secure masonry to structure.
S. Mortar Net: High density polyethylene or nylon strands woven into a minimum 90% open mesh, installed
on top of through-wall flashing at the inside of the cavity. Thickness of materials shall match the depth of
the cavity. Material must not react with common building materials (PVC, polystyrene, polyethylene,
copper, lead, asphalt, etc. Must be a minimum of 16" above the top of the flashing and designed to
last the life of the building.
T. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, as recommend by masonry manufacturer for masonry to be painted, not
harmful to masonry work or adjacent material.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized a located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing condition.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors and accessories supplied in this section and other
sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure
provides permanent bracing
3.03
COURSING
04 20 00 - 5
MS0114
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and on mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
Joints shall be struck flush and tooled concave.
3.04
PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints uniformly jointed with other work.
B. Lay first course of hollow masonry units with full mortar bedding. Lay subsequent units with face shell
bedding on head and bed joints.
C. Buttering corners of joint or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
E. Interlock intersections and external corners.
F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made,
remove mortar and replace.
G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges.
Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
H. Protect all CMU, the air space on veneer construction, and the air space in cavity wall construction, from
water intrusion during construction by covering with plastic sheeting. CMU must be kept dry at all times.
I.
Glass Masonry Units: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
J.
It is extremely important that the air space between the back of the unit and sheathing be kept free
of mortar to allow for drainage of water and free air circulation. The contractor must use
moveable wood strips or other methods approved by the Contracting Officer, to prevent mortar
accumulation within the air space.
3.05
WEEPS AND MORTAR NET
A. Install weep hole-wicks as per 2.06.P. horizontally above through-wall flashing at first course above grade
and above shelf angles to allow for drainage and air circulation. Extend wick to the full depth of the air
space and under mortar net. Weeps at cored units shall be installed at the center of each cell to allow
drainage of water and air circulation within the masonry unit. Leave approximately 1” of rope extending
beyond the exterior face of the wall. Upon completion of all masonry work and prior to sealing the
masonry, carefully remove wick from the wall
B. Install mortar net above flashing and shelf angles as per manufacturer’s written instructions and
paragraph 2.07.
3.06
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches o.c. vertically.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings.
Extend minimum 16 inches each aide of opening.
C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings.
E. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with steel partition anchors 16 inches o.c.
alternating courses with horizontal reinforcement.
F. Install vertical wall reinforcement in accordance with the drawings.
3.07
LINTELS
A. Install lintels as scheduled on Drawings.
04 20 00 - 6
MS0114
B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where precast concrete lintels are not scheduled.
C. Use single piece reinforcing bars only.
D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned
position.
E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. Rod grout to insure full and complete filling
of each cell, free of voids.
F. Allow masonry lintel to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.
G. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.
3.08
GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Reinforce bond beam as indicated on the drawings. If not indicated on the drawings, provide a minimum
of 2, No. 5 bars, and 1 inch from bottom web.
B. Lap rebar splices a minimum 24”.
C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned
position.
D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. Rod grout to insure full and complete filling
of each cell, free of voids.
E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cells with grout for a minimum 16 inches either side of opening.
F. Maximum height of CMU wall(s) prior to grouting cells is 4’-8”. Grout cells in accordance with the
drawings. After grout has been placed, continue CMU walls in 4’-8” increments until wall reaches full
height.
3.09
CONTROL JOINTS (Brick and CMU only)
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. Provide corrugated metal ties at 8”
o/c (vertically) at each portion of wall at each side of control joint.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner-joints in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. In lieu of preformed control joints, contractor may field construct control joints by providing ½” clear space
free of mortar between ends of masonry units. Provide backer rod and sealant.
D. Provide control joints:
1. Location and size of control joint as indicated on the drawings. If not shown on the drawings, see E.
below.
2. Where masonry meets dissimilar construction materials and remains in the same plane.
3. Where control or expansion joints occur in the structure.
E. Maximum control joint spacing measured horizontally:
1. 20-feet in either direction for walls up to 10 feet high.
2. 28-feet in either direction for walls 10 feet plus-14 feet in height.
3. 36-feet in either direction for walls 14 feet plus-18 feet in height.
4. Placement of the above shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer or his designated Civil
Engineering representative.
3.10
BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build in metal door and glazed frames, anchor bolts, plates and other items
furnished by other Sections.
B. Build in items plumb and level.
04 20 00 - 7
MS0114
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout.
3.11
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch.
B. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more.
C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more.
D. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet.
E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.
3.12
CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for pipes, conduit, cleaves and other items as may be required.
B. Obtain Contracting Officer for approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.13
CLEANING
A. Cleaning shall be in strict accordance with each manufacturer’s written instructions. Using cleaning
solution recommended by manufacturer. Provide two copies of each to Contracting Officer prior to
commencement of cleaning. If the manufacturer’s instructions conflict with the following procedure, notify
Contracting Officer immediately.
B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.
C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.14
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation without damaging completed work; provide protective boards at exposed
external corners, which may be damaged by construction activities.
3.15
FINISH
A. See section 09 90 00 PAINTING.
END OF SECTION
04 20 00 - 8
MS0114
SECTION 05 12 00
PART 1
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural steel framing members, and support members.
B. Base plates, and miscellaneous steel including 12 Ga. shells and 18 Ga. Studs.
C. Grouting under base plates.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
C. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength.
D. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength.
E. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs.
F. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength.
G. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
H. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing.
I.
ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
J.
ASTM A992 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
K. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength.
L. ASTM F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon
and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners.
M. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination.
N. AWS Dl.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
O. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
P. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
Q. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
R. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
S. GC-03 (Green Seal) Anti-Corrosive Paints
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings:
05 12 00 - 1
MS0114
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, attachments,
fasteners and handrails.
2. Connections.
3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
4. Shear Stud Connectors
C. Mill Test Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 01 41 00 Testing Laboratory Services, indicating
structural strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis.
D. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01 41 00 Testing Laboratory Services,
certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months.
1.04 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC specification for the Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
B. Perform Work in accordance with AISC - Specification for Architectural Exposed Structural Steel.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. Submit three copies to the Contracting Officer.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years
experience.
B. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience.
C. Design connections not detailed on the Drawings shall be prepared under the direct supervision of a
Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and currently licensed in the State of
Florida. Shop drawing submittals shall be signed/sealed by the same Professional Structural Engineer.
D. Welders and Welding Procedures: AWS D1.1 qualified within previous 12 months.
1.07
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings prior to preparation of the shop drawings.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
05 12 00 - 2
MS0114
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC-03
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36.
B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B or ASTM A501.
C. Structural W-Shapes: ASTM A992, Grade 50
D. Pipe: ASTM A63, Grade B.
E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325.
F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307.
G. Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel;
AWS D1.1, Type B.
H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
I.
Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, and water
reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi
at 28 days.
J.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint IS, Type l, red oxide.
K. Exterior Exposure: See Section 09 90 00 for primer and surface prep.
2.03
FABRICATION
A. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
2.04
FINISH
A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC.
B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded or in contact with
concrete.
2.05
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. Testing and analysis of components will be performed under provisions of Section 01 41 00.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.02
ERECTION
A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true
alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
B. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
C. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic and welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer’s
written instructions.
05 12 00 - 3
MS0114
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of the Contracting Officer.
E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact
with concrete.
F. Grout under base plates.
3.03
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01 41 00.
B. Shear Connectors: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and
inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree
flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connector
already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.
END OF SECTION
05 12 00 - 4
MS0114
SECTION 05 21 00:
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Open web steel joists, with bridging, attached seats and anchors.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.
B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
C. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished.
D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
E. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
F. ASTM A992 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
G. ASTM F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon
and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners.
H. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
I.
SJI K-1.1 - Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-series. (“Specifications”)
J.
SJI LH/DLH-1.1 - Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel
Joists, DLH-Series.
K. SJI JG-1.1 - Standard Specification for Joist Girders.
L. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1.
Indicate standard designations, configuration, sizes, spacing, locations of joists, joist leg
extensions.
2.
Joist coding, bridging, connections, attachments.
3.
Cambers.
4.
Connection details.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work,
verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.
1.04 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1.
Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
05 21 00 - 1
MS0114
2.
Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1.
Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following:
1.
SJI K-1.1, SJI LH/DLH-1.1, and SJI JG-1.1, including headers and other supplementary framing.
2.
AISC 341 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.
B. Perform Work in accordance with SJI – Steel Joist Institute’s “Standard Specifications, Load Tables and
Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joists Girders” that are applicable to the types of joists indicated.
C. Welding: Quality procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel”
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. Submit three copies to the Contracting Officer.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years experience.
B. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years experience.
C. Design connections not detailed on drawings under direct supervision of Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Florida.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle joists as recommended in SJI’s “Specifications”
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer List:
1.
Butler Manufacturing Co.
2.
New Columbia Joist Co.
3.
Vulcraft Steel Joist
4.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for substitutions for other manufacturers
and products.
2.02 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1.
Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2.
Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles
(800 km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1.
Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with
GC-03.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Open Web Joists Members: Comply with SJI’s “Specifications” for web and steel-angle chord members.
05 21 00 - 2
MS0114
B. Bolts: ASTM A325; carbon-steel, plain-uncoated, heavy hex bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel
nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
C. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A36 / ASTM A992
D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
E. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.
F. Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Furnish bottom and top chord extensions as indicated on drawings.
B. Fabricate to achieve end bearing of:
1.
2-1/2 inches on steel.
2.
4 inches on masonry.
C. Frame special sized openings in joist web framing as detailed.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Prepare joist component surfaces in accordance with SSPC.
B. Shop prime joists and supplementary framing members. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded.
C. Leave joists and supplementary framing members unprimed.
D. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M; hot dip galvanize after fabrication.
E. Galvanizing for Bolts, Connectors, and Anchors:
1.
Hot-Dipped Galvanizing:
a.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F2329.
b.
Connectors and Anchors: ASTM A153/A153M.
2.
Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 41 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.
B. Furnish shop testing and analysis of steel sections.
C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating
Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents.
1.
Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination.
B. Verify bearing plates are set to required location and elevation.
C. Verify bearing surfaces are ready to receive joists.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Erect and bear joists on supports.
B. Allow for erection loads. Install sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in
alignment.
05 21 00 - 3
MS0114
C. Coordinate placement of anchors in concrete or masonry construction for securing bearing plates or
angles.
D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seat to bearing plates or angles.
E. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments as detailed.
F. Frame floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches with supplementary framing.
G. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured or until completion of
erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.
H. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of the Contracting Officer.
I. After erection, prime all welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 41 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 41 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.
B. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
C. Field inspect members, connections, welds, and tightening of high strength bolts in slip-critical
connections.
END OF SECTION
05 21 00 - 4
MS0114
SECTION 05 31 13:
STEEL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel roof deck and accessories.
2. Steel composite floor deck and accessories including formed steel deck end forms to contain wet
concrete.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers: ASCE 3 - Standard Practice for the Construction and Inspection of
Composite Slabs.
B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
C. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished.
D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
E. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, HighStrength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Baked
Hardenable.
F. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
G. SDI 29 - Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks.
H. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:
1. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint.
2. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, Projections, openings and reinforcement, pertinent
details, and accessories.
C. Product Data: For each deck type, submit deck profile characteristics and dimensions, structural
properties, finishes and accessories.
D. Product Certificates.
E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: for steel decks.
G. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
H. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
I.
Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous
12 months.
1.04 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
05 31 13 - 1
MS0114
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASCE 3 for composite decks. Perform Work in accordance with SDI
standard for roof decks.
B. SDI Specifications: SDI 29 - Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, “Structural Welding Code – Sheet
Steel.”
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for
fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings; Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
2. Steel deck units shall be indentified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site. Submit three copies to the Contracting Officer.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years experience.
B. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Florida.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation and other damage during deliver, storage and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering
and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Butler Manufacturing Co.
2. ASC Profiles, Inc.
3. Canam Steel Corp.; The Canam Manac Group.
4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
5. DACS, Inc.
6. D-Mack Industries Inc.
7. Epic Metals Corporation.
8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.
05 31 13 - 2
MS0114
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
Nucor corp.; Vulcraft Division.
Roof Deck, Inc.
United Steel Deck, Inc.
Valley Joist; Division EBSCO Industries, Inc.
Verco Manufacturing Co.
Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.
B. Metal Deck: Sheet steel, configured as follows:
1. ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33 Structural Quality; with G90 galvanized coating.
2. See plans for deck profile and thickness.
3. Side Joints: lapped.
4. Flute Sides: plain vertical face.
C. Composite Metal Deck: Sheet steel, configured as follows:
1. ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33 Structural Quality; with G90 galvanized coating.
2. See plans for deck profile and thickness.
3. Side Joints: lapped.
4. Flute Sides: diagonally ribbed for improved concrete bond.
D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.
E. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.
F. Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber; match thickness and profiled to fit tight to deck.
B. Fasteners: Stainless or Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping. Size and spacing of fasteners indicated
on plan.
C. Related Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, cover plates, cant strips,
galvanized; of profile and size to match steel deck.
2.03 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC03.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI
Publication No. 30, manufacturer’s written instructions, requirements in this Section and as indicated.
B. Bear deck on masonry or concrete support surfaces with 1-1/2 inch minimum bearing. Align and level.
05 31 13 - 3
MS0114
C. Bear deck on steel supports with 1-1/2 inch minimum bearing. Align and level.
D. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of
deck and support of other work.
E. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.1.
F. Mechanically fasten male/female side laps as indicated on the plans.
G. Roof sump pans and sump plates: install over openings provided in roof deck and mechanically fasten
flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one
fastener at each corner.
1.
Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and mechanically fasten.
H. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and
reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer’s written instructions. Mechanically fasten to
substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
1.
Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Pour Stops and Girder Fillers; Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure
according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according
to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.
K. Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below.
L. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and
damaged surface coating, with touch-up prime paint.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in wiring to the Contracting Officer.
D. Remove and Replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected
work with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
05 31 13 - 4
MS0114
SECTION 05 40 00
PART 1
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed metal stud framing at exterior and interior locations.
B. Framing accessories.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AISI General - Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions.
B. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
C. ANSI/ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Structural Quality, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated.
D. ASTM C 754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard,
Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.
E. FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc-Chromate, Alkyd Type.
F. AISI NAS - North American Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
G. SSMA – Product Technical Information.
H. GC-03 – (Green Seal) Anti-Corrosive Paints
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Metal stud framing system for exterior load bearing and non-load bearing walls and infill of existing
exterior walls
B. Metal stud framing system for interior load bearing and non-load bearing walls.
C. Roof truss system.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings of prefabricated and panelized work for all exterior and interior load bearing and
non-load bearing walls, including but not limited to, component details, stud layout, framed openings,
headers and jambs, anchorage to structure and track, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or
items required of other related work.
B. Describe method of field construction of all exterior and interior load bearing and non-load bearing walls
including but not limited to, component details, stud layout, framed openings, headers and jambs,
anchorage to structure and track, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of
other related work.
C. Submit shop drawings of roof truss system: show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of coldformed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices,
accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
D. For all roof truss framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Product data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts,
limitations, steel sheet, expansion anchors, power-actuated anchors, mechanical fasteners, vertical
deflection clips, horizontal drift deflection clips, miscellaneous structural clips and accessories,
manufacturer's installation instructions, etc. under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
05 40 00 - 1
MS0114
B.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design
requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed
Steel Framing - General Provisions."
B. Install all anchoring devise in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data
by a qualified professional engineer.
D. For Roof Trusses, Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of coldformed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.07
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate work required under this section with other work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, METAL STUDS, TRACKS AND JOISTS
A. Dale/Incor, Dietrich, Marino, Unimast.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, ANCHORAGE DEVICES
A. Conventional steel anchor bolts with washers/nuts, embedded in the concrete.
B. Mushroom head spike by Powers Fastening, Inc.
C. Dome head powder driven pins by Hilti Anchoring & Powder Actuate Systems.
D. Type, size and spacing of anchoring devices are shown on the drawings.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
STUD FRAMING MATERIALS
A. See Drawings for location. Gage and weight are minimum acceptable. Larger sizes may be used where
required to meet design loads.
B. Exterior Stud walls (Load Bearing)
05 40 00 - 2
MS0114
1. 8" x 16 gage, CEE 1-5/8" flange, galvanized studs, 16" o. c. Physical Properties; Wt/ft.= 2.313#,
Area= .6623 in2; I= 5.6294 in4; S= .1.3470 in3; R = 2.9154 in.
2. 6" x 16 gage, CEE 1-5/8" flange, galvanized studs, 16" o. c. Physical Properties; Wt/ft.= 1.919#,
Area= .5487 in2; I= 2.8033 in4; S= .08872 in3; R = 2.2602 in.
C. Interior Stud walls (Load Bearing), 3-5/8" x 16 gage, CEE 1-5/8" flange, galvanized, studs, 16" o.c.
Physical Properties; Wt/ft.= 1.452#, Area= .4138 in2, I= .8549 in4, S= .4388 in3, R= 1.4373 in.
D. Interior Stud walls (Fire-rated), 3-5/8" x 20 gage, DWS 1-1/4" flange, galvanized, studs, 16" o.c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= .611#, Area= .180 in2, I= .342 in4, S= .171 in3, R= 1.595 in.
E. Interior Stud walls (Drywall)
1. 3-5/8" x 22 gage, DWS 1-1/4" flange, galvanized, studs, 24" o.c.
Physical Properties; Wt/ft.= .415#, Area= .122 in2, I= .216 in4, S= .105 in3, R= 1.601 in.
2. 1-5/8" x 22 gage, DWS 1-1/4" flange, galvanized, studs, 24" o.c.
Physical Properties; Wt/ft.= .293#, Area= .086 in2, I= .034 in4, S= .035 in3, R= .746 in.
F. Runners: Of same material and finish as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs.
G. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material and finish as studs, thickness to suit purpose.
H. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws as recommended by manufacturer.
I.
Metal Backing: 20 gage galvanized steel for reinforcement.
J.
Anchorage Devices:
1. Powder actuated pins at interior walls.
2. Anchor bolts, mushroom head spikes or dome head powder actuated pins at exterior walls. See 2.02.
above.
K. Primer: FS TT-P-645, for touch-up of galvanized surfaces.
2.03
ROOF TRUSS FRAMING MEMBERS
A. ASTM A 653 steel, G90 galvanized. Provide manufacturer’s standard chord and web member profiles
with mechanical properties as required by structural design calculations. Shop fabrication required.
1. Design trusses in accordance with AISI RG-9518.
2. Determine mechanical properties by testing in accordance with ASTM A 370.
3. Configure web members as required by structural design calculations.
B. Framing Accessories: ASTM A 653 steel, Class 1, 50 ksi minimum yield strength, 65 ksi minimum tensile
strength, G90 hot-dipped galvanized coating, except as otherwise noted.
1. Stamp manufacturer’s name on each accessory item.
2. Provide screws with accessories designated for screw attachment.
C. Roof Ties: Fabricate for screw or weld attachment of truss to structural frame. Size and thickness as
required by structural design calculations.
D. Bridging and Cross Bridging: Requirements vary according to manufacturer. Fabricate members for
specific truss depth and spacing with connection to each truss flange and to each truss web. Provide
bridging sized to truss depth and spacing and connections as required by structural design calculations.
E. Cold Rolled Channel: Width and thickness as required by structural design calculations.
F. Flat Strap: Width and thickness as required by structural design calculations. Rigid attachment to stud
flange.
G. Solid Bridging: Channel shaped bridging with lipped flanges and integral formed clips. Screw attachment
to stud. Size as required by structural design calculations.
H. Web Stiffeners: Channel shaped stiffener. Screw attachment to truss or stud webs. Provide size and
thickness as required by structural design calculations.
05 40 00 - 3
MS0114
I.
Fasteners: Screws: Corrosion resistant coated, self-drilling, pan or hex washer head. Provide screw type
and size and size as required by structural design calculations.
2.05
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance..
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC-03.
PART 3
FABRICATION
3.01
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI’s specifications and standards,
manufacturer’s written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting
as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating
joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening,
according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses.
Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
D. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable
tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1.
Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other
finishing materials.
2.
Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square
tolerance of 1/8 inch.
PART 4
EXECUTION
4.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
4.02
ERECTION
A. Align and secure bottom runners (tracks) with approved anchoring devices.
B. Install studs vertically at spacing indicated above. Connect studs to runners using fastener method
recommended by stud manufacturer.
C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs.
05 40 00 - 4
MS0114
D. Install top runner and brace to pre-engineered metal building system and cross-brace to adjacent stud
wall for rigid installation.
E. Splicing of studs is not permissible.
F. Construct corners using minimum three studs.
G. Double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs, and not more than 2 inches each side of
openings.
H. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door and window frame openings, supports and
attachments.
I.
Align stud web openings.
J.
Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, and blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed
in or behind stud framing.
K. Blocking: Secure steel channels to studs.
L. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural
building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs.
M. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection.
N. Truss Framing Installation:
1. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position
at spacings indicated.
2. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections.
3. Align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing supports to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses
securely at all bearing points.
4. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on the shop drawings and
designed according to LGSEA’s Technical Note 551e, “Design Guide for Permanent Bracing of ColdFormed Steel Trusses.”
5. Install trusses at spacing as shown on drawings.
6. Do not remove, cut, or otherwise alter truss members or connections.
7. Install accessories as required by structural design calculations. Provide appropriate fasteners in all
predrilled holes backed by another framing member.
4.03
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From True Position (plumb, level, and true to line): 1/8 inch.
E. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/4 inch.
F. Member Spacing: Not more than 1/8 inch plus or minus from spacing indicated.
END OF SECTION
05 40 00 - 5
MS0114
SECTION 07 21 13:
PART 1
BOARD INSULATION
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
a. ASTM D 41: Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing
b. ASTM D 312: Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing
c. ASTM D 4586: Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free
d. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
e. ASTM C1289: Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board.
2. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)
a. UL BMD: (1995) Building Materials Directory
1.02
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design
requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with section entitled "Submittal Procedures."
1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a. Fasteners
b. Insulation
2. Drawings
a. Tapered roof insulation system: Show a complete description of the procedures for the
installation of each phase of the system indicating the type of materials, thicknesses, identity
codes, sequence of laying insulation, location of ridges and valleys, special methods for cutting
and fitting of insulation, and special precautions. The drawings shall be based on field
measurements.
3. Instructions
a. Nails and fasteners
b. Roof insulation, including field of roof and perimeter attachment requirements.
4. Statements
a. Installer qualifications
1) Requirement: Submit certificate from the insulation manufacturer attesting that the installer
has the proper qualifications for installing tapered roof insulation systems.
5. Test Reports
a. Flame spread and smoke developed ratings: Submit in accordance with ASTM E 84.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Insulation on Decks: Roof insulation shall have a flame spread rating not greater than 75 and a smoke
developed rating not greater than 150, exclusive of covering, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Insulation bearing the UL label and listed in the UL BMD as meeting the flame spread and smoke
developed ratings will be accepted in lieu of copies of test reports.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
07 21 13 - 1
MS0114
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's unopened and undamaged standard commercial
containers bearing the following legible information:
1. Name of manufacturer;
2. Brand designation;
3. Specification number, type, and class, as applicable, where materials are covered by a referenced
specification; and
4. Asphalt's flashpoint (FP), equiviscous temperature (EVT), and finished blowing temperature (FBT).
5. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of the work.
B. Storage and Handling: Store and handle materials in a manner to protect from damage, exposure to
open flame or other ignition sources, and from wetting, condensation or moisture absorption. Mark and
remove damaged, crushed, or wet materials from the project site. Store in an enclosed building or trailer
that provides a dry, adequately ventilated environment. Store felt rolls on ends. For the 24 hours
immediately before application of felts, store felts in an area maintained at a temperature no lower than
50 degrees F. Replace damaged material with new material.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not install roof insulation during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F or
when there is ice, frost, or moisture visible on the roof deck.
1.07
PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
A. Provide protection as specified.
1. Flame-Heated Equipment: Locate and use flame-heated equipment so as not to endanger the
structure or other materials on the site or adjacent property. Do not place flame-heated equipment on
the roof. Provide and maintain a fire extinguisher near each item of flame-heated equipment.
2. Protective Coverings: Install protective coverings at paving and building walls adjacent to hoist and
kettles prior to starting the work. Lap protective coverings at least 6 inches, secure them against
wind, and vent them to prevent collection of moisture on the covered surfaces. Keep protective
coverings in place for the duration of the work with asphalt products.
3. Special Protection: Provide special protection approved by the insulation manufacturer, or avoid
heavy traffic on completed work when ambient temperature is above 80 degrees F.
4. Drippage of Bitumen: Seal joints in and at edges of deck as necessary to prevent drippage of asphalt
into building or down exterior walls.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
INSULATION
A. Insulation Types: Roof insulation shall be the following materials and compatible with attachment
methods for the specified insulation and roof membrane:
1. Polyisocyanurate Board: ASTM C1289 (Felt-faced) Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 or (Foil-faced) Type I,
Class 1, except minimum compressive strength shall be 20 pounds per square inch (psi).
2. Composite Boards: ASTM C1289 (Polyisocyanurate-perlite), Type III.
B. Insulation Thickness:
1. Air-conditioned buildings. As necessary to provide a thermal resistance (R value) of 30 or more
for average thickness of tapered system. Thickness shall be based on the "R" value for aged
insulation.
2. Non-airconditioned buildings. As necessary to provide a thermal resistance (R value) of 12 or more
for average thickness of tapered system. Thickness shall be based on the "R" value for aged
insulation.
C. Tapered Roof Insulation: One layer of the tapered roof insulation assembly shall be factory tapered to a
slope of not less than 1/4 inch per foot. Provide starter and filler blocks as required providing the total
07 21 13 - 2
MS0114
thickness of insulation necessary to meet the specified slope and thermal conductance. Mitered joints
shall be factory fabricated and shall consist of two diagonally cut boards or one board shaped to provide
the required slopes. Identify each piece of tapered insulation board by color or other identity coding
system, allowing the identification of different sizes of tapered insulation board required to complete the
roof insulation system.
D. Cants and Tapered Edge Strips: Provide preformed cants and tapered edge strips of the same material
as the roof insulation; or, when roof insulation material is unavailable, provide pressure-preservative
treated wood, wood fiberboard, or rigid Perlite board cants and edge strips as recommended by the
roofing manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Face of cant strips shall have incline of 45 degrees
and vertical height of 4 inches. Taper edge strips at a rate of 3/4 to 1 1/2 inch per foot down to
approximately 1/8 inch thick.
2.03
BITUMENS
A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.
B. Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type III or IV.
C. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I for horizontal surfaces, Type II for vertical and sloped
surfaces.
2.04
FASTENERS
A. Flush-driven through flat round or hexagonal steel or plastic plates. Steel plates shall be zinc-coated, flat
round not less than 1-3/8 inch diameter or hexagonal not less than 28 gage. Plastic plates shall be highdensity, molded thermoplastic with smooth top surface, reinforcing ribs and not less than 3 inches in
diameter. Fastener head shall recess fully into the plastic plate after it is driven. Plates shall be formed
to prevent dishing. Do not use bell-or cup-shaped plates. Minimum withdrawal resistance of fasteners
from deck shall be 40 pounds (lbs) each.
2.05
WOOD NAILERS AND BLOCKING
A. Pressure-preservative-treated.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Surface Inspection: Surfaces shall be clean, smooth, and dry. Check roof deck surfaces, including
surfaces sloped to roof drains and outlets, for defects before starting work. The Contractor shall inspect
and approve the surfaces immediately before starting installation. Prior to installing insulation, perform
the following:
1. In the presence of the Contracting Officer perform the following surface-dryness test on concrete
substrates:
a. Foaming: When poured on the deck, one pint of asphalt when heated in the range of 350 to 400
degrees F, shall not foam upon contact
b. Strippability: After asphalt used in the foaming test application has cooled to ambient
temperatures, test coating for adherence. Should a portion of the sample be readily stripped
clean from surface, do not consider surface to be dry and do not start application. Should rain
occur during application, stop work and do not resume until surface has been tested by method
above and found dry.
B. Surface Preparation: Correct defects and inaccuracies in roof deck surface to eliminate poor drainage
and hollow or low spots and perform the following:
1. Install wood nailers the same thickness as insulation at eaves, edges, curbs, walls, and roof openings
for securing cant strips, gravel stops, and flashing flanges.
3.02
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Apply insulation in two layers with staggered joints when total required thickness of insulation exceeds
1/2 inch. Lay insulation so that continuous longitudinal joints are perpendicular to direction of felts for the
built-up roofing and end joints of each course are staggered with those of adjoining courses. When using
multiple layers of insulation, joints of each succeeding layer shall be parallel and offset in both directions
with respect to layer below. Keep insulation 1/2 inch clear of vertical surfaces penetrating and projecting
from roof surface.
07 21 13 - 3
MS0114
1. Installation Using Asphalt: Firmly embed each layer in solid asphalt mopping; mop only sufficient
area to provide complete embedment of one board at a time. Provide 20 to 35 lbs of asphalt per 100
square feet of roof deck for each layer of insulation. Apply asphalt when temperature is within plus or
minus 25 degrees F of EVT. Do not heat asphalt above asphalt's FBT or 525 degrees F, whichever
is less, for longer than 4 consecutive hours. Use thermometers to check temperatures during heating
and application.
2. Installation Using Only Mechanical Fasteners; Secure total thickness of insulation with penetrating
type fasteners.
3. Special Precautions for Installation of Foam Insulation
a. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: Where Polyisocyanurate foam board insulation is provided, install
3/4 inch thick expanded Perlite board insulation over top surface of foam board insulation.
Stagger joints of insulation with respect to foam board insulation below.
4. Cant Strips: Where indicated, provide cant strips at intersections of roof with walls, parapets, and
curbs extending above roof. Wood cant strips shall bear on and be anchored to wood blocking. Fit
cant strips flush against vertical surfaces. Where possible, nail cant strips to adjoining surfaces.
Where cant strips are installed against non-nailable materials, install in heavy mopping of asphalt or
set in a heavy coating of asphalt roof cement.
5. Tapered Edge Strips: Where indicated, provide edge strips in the right angle formed by junction of
roof and wood nailing strips that extend above level of roof. Install edge strips flush against vertical
surfaces of wood nailing strips. Where possible, nail edge strips to adjoining surfaces. Where
installed against non-nailable materials, install in heavy mopping of asphalt or set in heavy coating of
asphalt roof cement.
PROTECTION
3.03
A. Protection of Applied Insulation: Completely cover each day's installation of insulation with the finished
roofing specified on same day. Do not permit phased construction. Protect open ends of each day's
work with temporary water cutoffs, and remove when work is resumed. Protect open spaces between
insulation and parapets or other walls and spaces at curbs, scuttles, and expansion joints, until
permanent roofing and flashing are applied. Do not permit storing, walking, wheeling, or trucking directly
on insulation or on roofed surfaces. Provide smooth, clean board or plank walkways, runways, and
platforms near supports, as necessary, to distribute weight to conform to a 20-psf live load limit.
B. Damaged Work and Materials: Restore work and materials that become damaged during construction to
original condition or replace with new materials.
END OF SECTION
07 21 13 - 4
MS0114
SECTION 07 21 16:
PART 1
BLANKET INSULATION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Batt insulation and vapor barrier in exterior wall and ceiling construction.
B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in exterior wall and roof.
C. Batt or roll insulation (un-faced) for sound control at interior wall and ceiling spaces.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM C665 – Standard Specification Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
B. ASTM E-84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. ASTM C991 – Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Insulation for Metal Buildings
D. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier and vapor barrier at building enclosure
elements.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, tested “R” values,
and other pertinent data.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with other trades. Take care to prevent damage to other work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
07 21 16 - 1
MS0114
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Batt and Roll Insulation:
1. Celotex, Certain Teed, Manville Building Products Group, Owens-Corning Fiberglass, Schuller.
B. Metal Building Roof & Wall Insulation:
1. Energy Miser by Insulation Corporation of America, Simple Saver by Thermal Design, Suspend-R by
Schuller.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
MATERIALS
A. Batt and Roll Insulation: Unfaced, preformed glass fiber bat/roll used for sound control, ASTM C665,
Type 1.
B. Metal Building Wall Insulation: Combination roll/batt installation (ASTM C991, Type I) with highly reflective
white, heavy-duty reinforced, facing/vapor barrier. Facing/vapor barrier perm rating shall be not more than
0.025 grains per hour per square foot based on ASTM E96, procedure B. Special applications that
require that the facing not function as a vapor barrier shall be perforated with 3/16" minimum diameter
holes spaced no greater than 4" on center in each direction. UL flame spread classification of 25 or less
and smoke density of index of 50 or less based on ASTM E84. An insulation system specifically designed
for application between the wall girts of a pre-engineered metal building. System provides for full width
and thickness of insulation between girts without voids, gaps or sags. (Standard metal building roof
insulation does not qualify for this application)
C. Metal Building Roof Insulation: Combination roll/batt installation (ASTM C991, Type I) with highly
reflective white, heavy-duty reinforced, facing/vapor barrier. Facing/vapor barrier perm rating shall be not
more than 0.025 grains per hour per square foot based on ASTM E96, procedure B. UL flame spread
classification of 25 or less and smoke density of index of 50 or less based on ASTM E-84. An insulation
system specifically designed for application between or below the roof purlins of a pre-engineered metal
building. System provides for full width and thickness of insulation between or below purlins, without
voids, gaps or sags. (Standard metal building roof insulation does not qualify for this application)
D. Tape: Polyester self-adhering type or as required by insulation manufacturer, 2 inch wide.
2.04
THERMAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Overall thermal resistance (insulation only):
1. Interior Walls: R-13 (3.5”-4” wall thickness), Sound-Control @ Offices see Room Finish Schedule.
2. Exterior Stud Walls: R-19 (6” wall thickness), Admin/Office Facilities
3. Exterior Walls: R-19, Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings (PEMB).
4. Roof: R-30, Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings (PEMB).
5. Ceilings Under Vented Attic Spaces: R-38.
2.05
SOUND CONTROL
A. Sound control @ interior studwalls, see drawings Room Finish Schedule. Fiction-fit & un-faced fiberglass
batt or roll insulation, full thickness of studwall.
B. Sound control @ ceiling of rooms, see drawings Room Finish Schedule. Un-faced fiberglass batt or roll
insulation, 12” thick.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Exterior Walls: Install in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions without gaps or voids.
B. Interior Walls: Install in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions without gaps or voids.
C. Exterior Wall PEMB: Install horizontally between the girts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
without gaps or voids. Facing/vapor barrier shall be installed over the face of the girts before or after
07 21 16 - 2
MS0114
installation of insulation. (If installed after insulation, secure insulation to girts in a manner acceptable to
the Construction Inspector) Secure facing to girts with metal straps @ 4 feet o/c maximum spacing.
Screw straps to face of girts.
D. Roof PEMB: Install horizontally between the purlins in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
without gaps or voids. Facing/vapor barrier shall be installed over the face of the girts before installation
of insulation. Secure facing to girts with metal straps @ 4 feet o/c maximum spacing. Screw straps to face
of girts.
E. Vented Attic Spaces: Install batt or roll insulation between framing members prior to installation of
gypsum board ceiling. Vapor barrier to warm side of building.
F. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical
and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids.
G
Install with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and sides flanges of
membrane over framing members.
H. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
END OF SECTION
07 21 16 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 07 52 19
PART 1
SELF-ADHERING MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Self-sealing, self-healing, fully adhered air and vapor barrier.
1.02
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate detail at openings and base of wall. Provide product data for membrane, mastic
and surface conditioner.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Verify compatibility with sealants to be used.
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in flashing work with three years experience.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Material shall be delivered in original, unopened containers with the product information clearly visible.
C. Materials shall be stored such that the material shall remain dry and temperatures shall not exceed 100
degrees.
D. Do not double stack pallets of cartons.
1.07
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
MATERIALS
07 52 19 - 1
MS0114
A. Manufacturer’s standard composite flashing product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive
rubberized asphalt compound, minimum 26 mils thick, bonded completely and integrally to a high-density,
cross-laminated polyethylene film, minimum 4 mils thick, to produce an overall thickness of minimum 30
mils.
B. Surface Conditioner/Primer: Provide manufacturer’s standard product or product recommended by
manufacturer for bonding membrane flashing to concrete or masonry.
C. Termination mastic: Provide manufacturer’s standard rubberized asphalt-based mastic for sealing
membrane terminations and punctures.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing: Grace: W.R. Grace & Co.
2. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc.
3. Miradri 400VB; Mirafi Moisture Protection Products.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other specific conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Remove all deleterious materials from surfaces to receive adhered membrane vapor barrier and flashing.
B. After precipitation, allow a minimum of 24 hours drying time before installation.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Apply surface conditioner by spray, brush or roller at rate recommended by manufacturer. Allow
conditioner to dry completely before installation of membrane. Let dry until conditioner cannot be rubbed
off. If conditioned areas are not covered that day, recondition area.
B. Precut pieces of membrane to largest easily handled lengths for each location.
C. Remove release paper and position carefully before placing against the surface.
D. When properly positioned, place the membrane against the substrate using a hand roller. Fully adhere
flashing to substrate to prevent water from migrating under the flashing.
E. Overlap adjacent pieces of membrane two inches and roll all overlaps with a steel hand roller.
F. Trim bottom edge of flashing pieces 1/2 inch back from the exposed face of building.
G. At heads, sills and other horizontal terminations of membrane, turn up ends a minimum of two inches, cut
and make careful folds to form a pan and seal with mastic.
H. Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along top edges, seams, cuts and penetrations.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to verify compliance with specified
requirements.
3.05
CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of work, remove all trash, shipping cartons. construction debris, etc. and dispose of offsite.
B. Clean all membrane flashing and make minor repairs to damaged surfaces.
07 52 19 - 2
MS0114
END OF SECTION
07 52 19 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 07 54 23
PART 1
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) sheet roofing adhered to roof deck.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General sustainable design documentation requirements: 01 81 13 “Green Procurement”.
B. Roof Insulation: Section 07 21 13 “Board Insulation”.
C. Sheet metal components and wind uplift requirement for roof-edge design: Section 07 62 00
“Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”
1.03
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications
are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. Editions of applicable publications
current on date of issue of bidding documents apply unless otherwise indicated.
B. American National Standards Institute/Single-Ply Roofing Institute (ANSI/SPRI):
ANSI/SPRI ES-1-03 Wind Design Stand for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing
Systems.
C. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (ASCE/SEI):
ASCE/SEI-7-10
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
D6878-01
Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing.
E108-10
Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer to perform work under warranty
requirements of this Section.
2. Employ full-time supervisors knowledgeable and experienced in roofing of similar types and
scopes, and able to communicate with owner and workers.
B. Inspector Qualifications:
Inspection of work by third-party technical inspector or technical representative of
manufacturer experience in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system,
qualified to perform roofing observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control
Article, to determine Installer’s compliance with the requirements of this Project, and
07 54 23 - 1
MS0114
approved by the manufacturer to issue warranty certifications. The Roofing Inspector shall
be one of the following:
1. An authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer, not engaged in the sale
of products.
2. An independent party certified as a Registered Roof Observer by the Roof Consultants
Institute (RCI), retained by the Contractor or the Manufacturer and approved by the
Manufacturer.
C.
Product/Material Requirements:
1. Obtain products from single manufacturer or from sources recommended by
manufacturer for use with roofing system and incorporated in manufacturer’s warranty.
D.
Roofing system design standard requirements
1. Recommendations of ANSI/SPRI ES-1 for roof edge design.
2. Roofing System Design: Provide roofing system that is identical to systems that have
been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressures indicated on the drawings. Provide wind load calculations and submit signed
and sealed engineering calculations and substantiating data to validate wind resistance
of any non-rated roof system. Base wind uplift calculations design wind speeds
indicated on the drawings in accordance with ASCE7. Submit engineering calculations
validating the wind resistance of roof system.
E.
Pre-Roofing Meeting:
1. Upon completion of roof deck installation and prior to any roofing application, hold a preroofing meeting arranged by the Contractor and attending by the Roofing Inspector,
Material Manufacturer’s Technical Representative, Roofing Applicator, Contractor, and
Contracting Officer.
2. Discuss specific expectations and responsibilities, construction procedures, specification
requirements, application, environmental conditions, job and surface readiness, material
storage, and protection.
3. Inspect roof deck at this time to:
a. Verify that work of other trades which penetrates roof deck is completed.
b. Determine adequacy of deck anchorage, presence of foreign material, moisture and
unlevel surfaces, or other conditions that would prevent application of roofing
system from commencing or cause a roof failure.
c. Examine samples and installation instructions of manufacturer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, “Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples”.
B. Product Data:
1. Adhesive materials.
2. Membrane sheet roofing and flashing membrane.
3. Roofing cement.
4. Fastening requirements.
5. Application instructions.
6. Engineering calculations, signed/sealed.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments.
07 54 23 - 2
MS0114
1. Base flashing and terminations.
D. Warranty: As specified.
E. Documentation of supervisors’ and inspectors’ qualifications.
F. Field reports of roofing inspector.
G. Contract Close-out Submittals:
1. Maintenance Manuals.
2. Warranty signed by installer and manufacturer.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with the recommendations of the NRCA “Roofing and Waterproofing Manual” applicable
to single ply membrane roofing for storage, handling and installation.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer’s written instructions
and warranty requirements.
B. Environmental Controls: Refer to Section 01 56 00, “Environmental Protection”
C. Protection of interior spaces: Refer to Section 01 00 00, “General Requirements”.
1.09
WARRANTY
Roofing work subject to the terms of the Article “Warranty of Construction”, FAR clause 52.24621, except extend the warranty period to 10 years.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. TPO Sheet: ASTM D6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, 1.5 mm (60 mils) thick, no
backing.
1. Color: White.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer’s standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement,
thickness, and color as TPO sheet membrane.
B. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard, water based.
C. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer’s standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 25 by 3 mm (1 by 1/8 inch) thick; with anchors.
D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with FM
Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate.
E. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide sealers, preformed flashings, preformed inside and
outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other
accessories acceptable to manufacturer.
07 54 23 - 3
MS0114
2.03 ADHESIVE AND SEALANT MATERIALS:
A. General: Adhesive and sealant materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use, identical to materials utilized in approved listed roofing system, and compatible
with roofing membrane.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions with roofing Installer and roofing Inspector to verify
compliance with project requirements and suitability to accept subsequent roofing work. Correct
unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with roofing work.
B. Do not apply roofing if roof surface will be used for subsequent work platform, storage of
materials, or staging or scaffolding will be erected thereon unless system is protected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Complete roof deck construction prior to commencing roofing work:
1. Install curbs, blocking, edge strips, nailers, cants, and other components where insulation,
roofing, and base flashing is attached to, in place ready to receive insulation and roofing.
2. Complete deck and insulation installation to provide designed drainage to working roof
drains.
3. Document installation of related materials to be concealed prior to installing roofing work.
B. Dry out surfaces, including the flutes of metal deck that become wet from any cause during
progress of the work before roofing work is resumed. Apply materials to dry substrates.
C. Sweep decks to broom clean condition. Remove all dust, dirt, or debris.
D. Remove projections that might damage materials.
3.03 TEMPORARY PROTECTION
A. Install temporary protection at the end of day’s work and when work is halted for an indefinite
period or work is stopped when precipitation is imminent. Comply with approved temporary
protection plan.
B. Install temporary cap flashing over the top of base flashings where permanent flashings are not
in place to provide protection against moisture entering the roof system through or behind the
base flashing. Securely anchor in place to prevent blow off and damage by construction
activities.
C. Provide for removal of water or drainage of water away from the work.
D. Provide temporary protection over installed roofing by means of duckboard walkways, plywood
platforms, or other materials, as approved by Resident Engineer, for roof areas that are to
remain intact, and that are subject to foot traffic and damage. Provide notches in sleepers to
permit free drainage.
3.04
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
07 54 23 - 4
MS0114
A. Manufacturer Recommendations: Comply with roofing system manufacturer’s written
installation recommendations.
B. Coordination with related work: Coordinate roof operations with roof insulation and sheet metal
work so that insulation and flashings are installed concurrently to permit continuous roofing
operations.
C. Installation Conditions:
1. Apply dry roofing materials. Apply roofing work over dry substrates and materials.
2. Apply materials within temperature range and surface and ambient conditions
recommended by manufacturer.
3. Except for temporary protection, do not apply materials during damp or rainy weather, during
excessive wind conditions, nor while moisture (dew, snow, ice, fog or frost) is present in any
amount in or on the materials to be covered on installed:
a. Do not apply materials when the temperature is below 4 deg. C (40 deg. F).
b. Do not apply materials to substrate having temperature of 4 deg. C (40 deg. F) or less.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TPO ROOFING
A. Do not allow the membrane to come in contact with surfaces contaminated with asphalt, coal
tar, oil, grease, or other substances which are not compatible with TPO.
B. Install the membrane so the sheets run perpendicular to the long dimension of the insulation
boards.
C. Commence installation at the low point of the roof and work towards the high point. Lap the
sheets so the flow of water is not against the edges of the sheet.
D. Position the membrane so it is free of buckles and wrinkles.
E. Roll sheet out on deck; inspect for defects as being rolled out and remove defective areas.
Allow for relaxing before proceeding.
1. Lap edges and ends of sheets 50 mm (two inches) or more as recommended by the
manufacturer.
2. Heat weld laps. Apply pressure as required. Seam strength of laps as required by ASTM
D4434.
3. Check seams to ensure continuous adhesion and correct defects.
4. Finish edges of laps with a continuous beveled bead of sealant to sheet edges to provide
smooth transition.
5. Finish seams as the membrane is being installed (same day).
6. Anchor perimeter to deck or wall as specified.
F. Repair areas of welded seams where samples have been take or marginal welds, bond voids,
or skips occur.
G. Repair fishmouths and wrinkles by cutting to lay flat and installing patch over cut area extending
100 mm (four inches) beyond cut.
H. Adhered System:
1. Apply adhesive in quantities required by roof membrane manufacturer.
2. Fold sheet back on itself after rolling out and coat the bottom side of the membrane and the
top of the deck with adhesive. Do not coat the lap joint area.
07 54 23 - 5
MS0114
3. After adhesive has set according to adhesive manufacturers application instruction, roll the
membrane into the adhesive in a manner that minimizes voids and wrinkles.
4. Repeat for other half of sheet. Cut voids and wrinkles to lay flat and clean for repair patch
over cut area.
3.06
INSTALLATION OF FLASHING
A. Install flashing as the membrane is being installed. If the flashing cannot be completely
installed in one day, complete the installation until the flashing is in a watertight condition and
provide temporary covers or seals.
B. Flashing Roof Drains:
1. Install roof drain flashing as recommended by the membrane manufacturer, generally as
follows:
a. Coordinate to set the metal drain flashing in asphalt roof cement, holding cement back
from the edge of the metal frame.
b. Do not allow the roof cement to come in contact with the TPO roof membrane.
c. Adhere the TPO roof membrane to the metal flashing with the membrane manufacturer’s
recommended adhesive.
2. Turn down the metal drain flashing and TPO roof membrane into the drain body and install
clamping ring and strainer.
C. Installing TPO Base Flashing and Pipe Flashing:
1. Install TPO flashing membranes to pipes, wall or curbs to a height not less than eight-inches
above roof surfaces and 100 mm (four inches) on roof membrane.
a. Adhere flashing to pipe, wall or curb with adhesive.
b. Form inside and outside corners of TPO flashing membrane in accordance with NRCA
manual. Form pipe flashing in accordance with NRCA manual use pipe boot.
c. Lap ends not less than 100 mm (four inches).
d. Heat weld flashing membranes together and flashing membranes to roof membranes.
Finish exposed edges with sealant as specified.
2. Anchor top of flashing to walls or curbs with fasteners spaced not over 200 mm (eight
inches) on centers. Use fastening strip on ducts. Use pipe clamps on pipes or other round
penetrations.
3. Apply sealant to top edge of flashing.
D. Repairs to membrane and flashings:
1. Remove sections of TPO sheet roofing or flashing that is creased, wrinkled, or fishmouthed.
2. Cover removed areas, cuts and damaged areas with a patch extending 100 mm (four
inches) beyond damaged, cut, or removed area. Heat weld to roof membrane or flashing.
Finish edge of lap with sealant as specified.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Roofing Inspector: Contractor shall engage a qualified roofing inspector for a minimum of 5 fulltime days on site to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare start up, interim, and final
reports.
1. Examine and probe seams in the membrane and flashing in the presence of Resident
Engineer and Membrane Manufacturer’s Inspector.
2. Probe edge of welded seams with a blunt tipped instrument. Use sufficient hand pressure to
detect marginal welds, voids, skips, and fishmouths.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer’s technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion.
1. Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
07 54 23 - 6
MS0114
C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing work where test results or inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine if
replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.08 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remained of construction
period.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of acceptance by Owner.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction. Clean membrane and restore surface
to like-new condition meeting solar reflectance requirements.
END OF SECTION
07 54 23 - 7
MS0114
SECTION 07 61 00 PREFORMED ROOFING, WALL SIDING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preformed, prefinished "Galvalume" roofing and aluminum roofing, wall siding and associated integral
flashings, trim and underlayment. The completed roof installation shall meet UL 90 Uplift as a minimum.
B. Prefinished "Galvalume" and aluminum counterflashings.
C. Prefinished "Galvalume" and aluminum gutters and downspouts.
D. Preformed, prefinished "Galvalume" and Aluminum Fascia Panels.
E. Light-gauge galvanized steel, sloped retrofit roof structure over existing roof structure.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
B. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
C. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
D. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
E. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
F. ASTM A386 - Zinc-coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
G. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical)
Quality.
H. ASTM A490 - Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
I.
ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes.
J.
ASTM A501 - Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
K. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, General Requirements.
L. ASTM A529 - Structural Steel with 42,000 psi (290 MPa) Minimum Yield Point.
M. ASTM A572 - High Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality.
N. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Coated "Galvalume".
O. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
P. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
Q. FS HH-I-558 - Insulation, Blocks, Boards, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving (Pipe and Tube Covering), and Pipe
Fitting Covering, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, Industrial Type).
R. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
S. ASTM E1592 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding
Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure.
T. ASCE 7-98 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
07 61 00 - 1
MS0114
U. AISC-MB Certification
V. ASTM E 1637 – Aluminum Panel Systems
W. CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council – www.coolroof.org
X. USGBC LEED V3.0 – www.usgbc.org/leed
Y. ASTM E1980 - 11 Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and LowSloped Opaque Surfaces
Z. ASTM E903-96 Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmittance of
Materials Using Integrating Spheres
AA. ASTM E408 - 71(2008) Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using
Inspection-Meter Techniques
BB. ASTM E1918 - 06 Standard Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and LowSloped Surfaces in the Field
CC. ASTM C1371 - 04a(2010)e1 Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of Materials Near
Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Soffit System: Preformed and factory prefinished galvanized steel or aluminum sheet, perforated soffit
panels of manufacturers standard profile, with required framing/anchorage assembly, insulation, and
accessory components. (Manufacturer’s standard perforated metal siding is not acceptable.)
B. Wall Siding System: Preformed and factory prefinished "Galvalume" steel sheet panels or aluminum
panels of manufacturers standard profile, with required framing/anchorage assembly, insulation, and
accessory components.
C. Roof and Fascia System: Preformed and factory prefinished "Galvalume" steel sheet or aluminum sheet,
standing seam roof/fascia panels, metal gutters with exposed downspouts as shown on the drawings, low
profile screened venting ridge or low profile non-venting ridge, insulation and thermal blocking between
roof sheets and structural elements, and accessory components. Roof and fascia panels that are field
formed at the construction site are not acceptable unless the manufacturer of the rolling machine
provides a warranty meeting the requirements of 1.13.B below.
D. Roof Slope: 3 inches in 12 inches, unless shown otherwise.
E. Thermal Insulation, see Section 07 21 13 & 07 21 16.
1.04
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Roof system, wall system, etc., shall be designed to withstand dead loads and design loads due to
pressure and suction (uplift) of wind, 140 mph, in accordance with ASCE 7-98, and the above references.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Load Calculations: Submit load calculations for the following verifying that the system supplied meets
the design loads indicated. Coordinate calculations with the manufacturer’s test results.
a. Wind load uplift design pressure at roof locations specified.
b. Clip spacing and allowable load per clip calculations.
c. The fastening of clips to structure or intermediate support spacing.
d. Intermediate support spacing and fastening to structure when required.
e. Allowable panel span at anchorage spacing indicated.
f. Safety factor used in determining loading.
07 61 00 - 2
MS0114
C. Exterior roof system and wall system shall withstand imposed loads with maximum allowable deflection of
span: 1/180.
D. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140. Provide
drainage to exterior for water entering or condensation occurring within roof system.
E. Assembly to permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on
fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to temperature range of 100 degrees F.
F. Size and fabricate roof system and wall system free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or
performance.
G. Cool Roof requirements: Metal roof systems shall be designed to meet or exceed the minimum
requirements:
1. Solar Reflectance three year aged value per CRRC: 32
2. Thermal Emittance three year aged value per CRRC: 90
3. Solar Reflective index SRI) per USGBC LEED V3.0 Credit
a. Low slope roof equal or greater than 2:12 roof pitch: SRI = 78
b. Steep slope roof greater than 2:12 roof pitch: SRI = 29.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Roofing and Siding:
a. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, all
flashing conditions, terminations, installation details, component dimensions, trim shapes, and
manufacturer's written installation instructions. The roofing manufacturer must prepare the shop
drawings.
b. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on metal types, finishes, characteristics, roof and siding
panel certification and other information as may be requested by the Contracting Officer.
c. Submit one sample 12” x 12” size illustrating metal finishes color.
d. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation requirements, assembly sequence, etc.
e. CRRC Rated Product ID and certificate.
C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, based on input from installers of the items involved.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with energy
performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
E. Product test reports.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Maintenance data.
H. Warranties: Samples of warranties specified.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide preformed roof, fascia and siding panel systems, which have been pretested and certified by the
manufacturer to provide resistance to air and water infiltration and structural deflection and failure in
accordance with paragraph 1.04 Design Requirements.
B. Prior to issuance of the warranties, the roofing manufacturer’s representative shall inspect the installation
and provide the Contracting Officer a written report as to the quality of the installation. All work identified
as being not acceptable to the manufacturer’s representative, shall be corrected. Upon completion of the
corrected work and acceptance by the manufacturer’s representative, the representative shall provide the
Contracting Officer a written report indicating that all defective work has been corrected and that the
warranties will be issued. The written report shall be attached to the roof system warranty.
1.07
QUALIFICATIONS
07 61 00 - 3
MS0114
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Subcontractor specializing in erection of pre-engineered metal building systems with a minimum
of three years documented experience and approved by the metal building manufacturer.
C. Design Work under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this
work. Structural design drawings and documents shall be signed, sealed and dated by a Professional
Structural Engineer currently licensed in the State of Florida.
1.08
STORAGE BUILDINGS IN THE MUNITIONS STORAGE AREA:
A. Storage buildings in the Munitions Storage Area to receive new roofing and siding shall comply with this
specification with the following exceptions:
a. Roof, wall and fascia colors shall be selected from the manufacturer's standard range of colors. The
color shall be "Light Tan".
b. Overhangs are not required.
c. Provide manufacturer's standard gutters, rake trim, downspouts, etc. Provide pre-cast concrete
splash blocks at each downspout.
d. Roof Slope: Existing.
1.09
WARRANTIES
A. General Warranty Kynar Finish (Roof, Fascia and Wall Siding): Submit three copies of manufacturer's
written warranty providing twenty (20) year guarantee that exterior pre-finished color coated surfaces of
wall siding, fascia, or roof panels will not chip, crack, craze, blister, or peel, and without chalking in
excess of 8 (ASTM D659) and without fading (color change) in excess of 5 NBS units for the same time
period. Include coverage for weather-tightness of building enclosure after installation. Warranty shall
commence on the date of acceptance by the Contracting Officer.
1.10
ROOF SYSTEM PERFORMANCE WARRANTY
A. Submit two copies of the manufacturer’s written warranty providing twenty (20) year guarantee,
commencing on the date of acceptance by the Government, that the entire roofing system including but
not limited to sub-framing, roof panels, fascia panels, flashings, gutters and downspouts, curb, etc. will
not
leak for the same time period. Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. The warranty shall be issued directly to
the Government.
B. Roof and fascia panels that are rolled and formed at the construction site must be warranted for a period
of twenty years as per the above paragraph. The manufacturer of the rolling machine must provide the
Roof System Warranty. In lieu of the warranty provided by the rolling machine manufacturer, the warranty
may be provided by an independent entity that routinely provides warranties of this type. The form of the
warranty must be acceptable to the government.
C. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair
finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Government acceptance of the
work. The warranty shall be issued directly to the Government.
1.11
PRIME CONTRACTOR / INSTALLER WARRANTY
A. Submit two copies of written warranty providing two (2) year guarantee against defects in the installation,
workmanship and materials, leaking (see paragraph 1.12 & 1.13) and further guarantee the installation to
be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Warranty shall commence on the date of acceptance
by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS: WALL SIDING SYSTEM
A. Sheet Steel Stock: ASTM A792 Galvalume AZ55 coating, factory pre-finished.
07 61 00 - 4
MS0114
B
Pre-finished wall panels, corner trim, sill flashing, etc., within one-half mile of Santa Rosa Sound shall
be 0.040 aluminum, factory pre-finished. Verify location of building with Base Civil Engineer.
C. Joint Seal Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard type.
D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, stainless steel, finishes to match adjacent surfaces when
exposed to the exterior/weather. Fasteners not exposed to the exterior/weather shall be manufacturer’s
standard type, galvanized to ASTM A386 2.0 oz/sf finish.
E. Bituminous Paint asphaltic type.
F. Sealant: One or two-part high performance urethane type, non-staining, elastomeric, skinning.
2.02
MATERIALS: FASCIA AND ROOF SYSTEM
A. Sheet Steel Stock: ASTM A792 Galvalume AZ55 coating, factory pre-finished.
B. Pre-finished roofing panels, flashings, fascia panels, soffit panels, ridge caps, etc., within one-half mile
of Santa Rosa Sound shall be 0.040 aluminum, factory pre-finished. Verify location of building with Base
Civil Engineer.
C. Joint Seal Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard type.
D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, stainless steel, finishes to match adjacent surfaces when
exposed to the exterior/weather. Fasteners not exposed to the exterior/weather may be manufacturer’s
standard type, galvanized to ASTM A386 2.0 oz/sf finish.
E. Clips: Clips shall be heavy duty stainless steel, and able to accommodate simultaneous horizontal and
vertical movement due to thermal and wind loading.
F. Underlayment: ASTM D226, asphalt saturated felt as indicated on the drawings, or if not indicated on the
drawings, a minimum of # 15; or spray applied waterproof membrane as indicated on the drawings..
G. Bituminous Paint asphaltic type.
H. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard gun grade, one or two part high performance urethane type,
non-staining elastomeric, skinning; or silicone sealant as indicated on the drawings.
I.
Equipment Curbs. Factory pre-formed one piece curbs, welded construction, with integral water deflecting
cricket, minimum 3” attachment flanges, minimum 8” high curbs and built-in rib configurations designed to
fit the specific panel to which they will mount. . Curbs must be fabricated from galvalume coated steel
sheet compatible with the roof panels. They must provide a watertight seal.
2.03
FABRICATION
A. FASCIA, WALL SIDING AND ROOF SYSTEMS, STEEL
1. Fascia: Same panel as standing seam roofing below. Roof seams and fascia seams shall be in
alignment. (Gable end wall panels same as fascia.)
2. Standing Seam Roofing: Structural architectural panel, steel minimum 24 gage metal thickness;
mechanically seamed to adjacent panels and roof clips, manufacturer's standard profile not to exceed
18" center to center of seams, lapped edges fitted with continuous gaskets. Roofing shall be
continuous lengths from eave edge to ridge. (Trapezoidal structural standing seam panels are not
acceptable)
3. Soffit Panels: Minimum 26 gage metal thickness, manufacturer's standard soffit panel profile,
perforated for ventilation. (Perforated wall siding is not acceptable.)
4. Wall Siding Panels/Girts: Minimum 26 gauge metal thickness, manufacturer's standard profile. Flush
girts required at buildings to receive pre-formed metal wall siding and/or liner panels.
5. Purlins, Eave Struts and other Miscellaneous Structural Shapes: Rolled formed structural shape to
receive siding, standing seam roofing sheet.
6. Internal and external Corners: Same material thickness and finish as adjacent material, profile brake
formed with hemmed edges, factory mitered to required angles.
7. Expansion Joints: Same material and finish as adjacent material, manufacturer's standard brake
formed type, of profile to suit system.
07 61 00 - 5
MS0114
8. CRRC Rated Product ID and certificate.
B. FASCIA, WALL SIDING AND ROOF SYSTEMS, ALUMINUM
1. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper
as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
2. Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch.
3. Surface: Smooth with raised intermediate ribs for added stiffness.
4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. 3-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent
PVDF
resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Minimum total dry film nominal thickness of 2.0
mils.
5. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
C. Miscellaneous Flashings, Valley Flashings, Closure Pieces, In-fills, Vents, Stacks, Caps, and
Special Trim Shapes.
1. Same material and finish as adjacent material, profile to suit system or formed as detailed. Gauges
of metals shall be as recommended by SMACNA for the specific application, and/or manufacturer’s
written recommendations.
D. Fasteners: To maintain load requirements, and weathertight installation, same finish as cladding,
non-corrosive type. (See above)
E. Ridge Vent: Same material and finish as adjacent material, manufacturer's standard low profile to suit
roof system, complete with insect screen.
F. Ridge Cap: Same material and finish as adjacent material, manufacturer's standard low profile to suit roof
system.
G. Gutters & downspouts:
1. Exposed gutters and downspouts on Storage Buildings in Munitions Storage Area. See 1.11. above.
a. Fabricate gutters of same material and finish as roofing metal.
b. Form gutters to profile and size indicated, or as required to safely collect and remove water. Size
of gutter based on 3.5" per hour rainfall intensity, 60-minute duration, 10-year frequency.
c. Exposed downspouts shall be constructed from the same materials as roofing metal. Terminate
downspouts at pre-cast concrete splash blocks. Number and size of downspouts shall be
adequate to dispose of roof runoff without overflowing the gutter.
d. Form sections in maximum possible lengths. Hem exposed edges. Allow for expansion and
provide expansion at joints.
e. Fabricate downspout support straps of same material and finish as roofing metal.
2. Exposed gutters and downspouts. (Not required on one-story buildings except as noted on the
drawings).
1. Fabricate gutters of same material and finish as roofing metal.
2. Form gutters to profile and size indicated, or as required to safely collect and remove water. Size
of gutter based on 3.5" per hour rainfall intensity, 60-minute duration, 10-year frequency.
3. Construct concealed downspouts from 6" minimum diameter PVC. Number of downspouts shall
be adequate to dispose of roof runoff without overflowing gutter. Attach flanged PVC fittings, etc.
to the bottom of the gutter and connect to the downspout(s). Route concealed downspouts to
exterior enclosure. See drawings for location of concealed downspouts. Terminate downspouts at
pre-cast concrete splash blocks.
4. Form sections in maximum possible lengths. Hem exposed edges. Allow for expansion and
provide expansion at joints.
5. Line interior of built-in gutters with elastomeric roofing membrane.
H.
Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as
required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
1. Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch.
2. Surface: Smooth with raised intermediate ribs for added stiffness.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 3-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not
07 61 00 - 6
MS0114
less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Minimum total dry
film
nominal thickness of 2.0 mils.
4. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
I.
2.04
A.
B.
Panel Sealants:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.
Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
2.05
A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film
thickness per coat.
Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components,
and other deleterious impurities.
1. Profile: Vertical-rib, snap-joint or rolled joint, as indicated on Drawings.
2. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.040 inch thick.
3. Exterior Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer.
a. Color: As selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's full range.
b. Clips: Stainless Steel floating to accommodate thermal movement.
c. Joint Type: As standard with manufacturer. Rolled joint type.
4. Panel Coverage: 12 -18 inches
5. Panel Length: One piece with no joints except at ridges.
2.06
A.
a
ACCESSORIES
Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for
complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal
roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.
2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell
laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match
metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight
construction.
3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum
0.018 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings,
ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof
panels.
2.07
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
C.
Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide
a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize
noise from movements within panel assembly.
07 61 00 - 7
MS0114
D.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
2.08
FINISHES
A. Wall Siding Components and Accessories:
1. Provide factory finished full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked on for 15 minutes at 450 degree
F (232 degree C), 30% reflective gloss (ASTM D523), over minimum 0.3 mil baked on epoxy primer
at exterior (weather) side. Total dry film thickness of 1.0 minimum.
B.
Roof and Fascia Roof Components and Accessories:
1. Factory finished full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked on for 15 minutes at 450 degree F (232
degree C), 30% reflective gloss (ASTM D523), over minimum 0.3 mil baked on epoxy primer. Total
dry film thickness of 1.0 minimum.
2.09
COLORS: (See 1.11 for exception)
A. The following colors shall be applied to the various components to be incorporated into the project. Items
to be field finished shall conform to colors indicated or to the actual color of the prefinished item(s)
supplied by the manufacturer.
1. Roof panels, fascia, gutters, soffits, low profile ridge vents, or low profile ridge cap, flashings, vents,
equipment, trim and miscellaneous shapes in the plane of the roof; color "Medium Bronze".
2. Exterior personnel doors and door frames; “Dark Bronze" at Main Entry, match wall siding at other
doors.
3. Exterior windows and frames; “Dark Bronze".
4. Louvers and louver frames; "Match Color of Wall".
5. Wall siding/components/accessories shall be selected from the manufacturer's standard colors, and
shall match as close as possible, Devoe 2M54E, “Tortoise Shell”. If a custom color is indicated on the
drawings, supplier shall provide in his proposal, the cost difference if any, between the "standard"
color and the 'custom" color.
B. Interior Surfaces of Wall Siding, Fascia, Roof Components and Accessories: Pre-coated enamel steel,
modified silicone finish, color white.
C. Vinyl Vapor Barrier at Exposed Interior Face of Insulation: White. (See Section 07213)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions, including but not limited to, all dimensions, field conditions that my affect the
installation, etc., prior to commencement of work. Commencement of work will be interpreted that
contractor has verified all field conditions and is responsible for all corrective work that may be required. .
3.02
ERECTION, ROOFING, FASCIA, AND WALL SYSTEM
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on the drawings.
B. Exercise care when cutting prefinished material to minimize damage to the prefinished surface and
ensure cuttings does not remain on finish surface.
C. Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb.
D. Locate end laps over supports. End laps shall be the minimum recommended by the manufacturer but in
no event less than 2". Place sidelaps over bearing.
E. Provide expansion joints where required or indicated.
F. Use concealed fasteners at roof panels except as may be required at eave. Use exposed fasteners at
siding.
G. Install insulation and vinyl vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions utilizing framing
members for attachment.
07 61 00 - 8
MS0114
H. Install sealant and gaskets to prevent weather penetration.
I.
System: Free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement and wind whistles.
J.
Existing plumbing vents exhaust fans and ductwork, flues, stacks, roof mounted exhaust fans/curbs and
other items that penetrate or on top of the existing roof must be extended up to and through the new roof.
Provide new curbs, support framing, flashings, electrical, etc. as needed to complete the installation.
Notify Contracting Officer immediately of inoperative equipment.
3.03
ERECTION, GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT
A. Rigidly support and secure components. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and
seal gutters to downspouts.
B. Apply bituminous paint on surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
C. Slope gutters minimum 1/16 inch/ft.
D. Terminate downspouts at pre-formed concrete splash blocks.
3.04
INSTALLATION, ACCESSORIES
A. Seal wall and roof accessories watertight and weather tight with sealant.
3.05
TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from level; 1/8 inch from plumb.
B. Fascia and Roofing: 1/8 from true position.
3.06
CLEANING
A. The exterior walls, doors, windows, etc., shall be cleaned of dirt, stains and other foreign matter.
Scratches or other defects, considered minor by the Contracting Officer, shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. Major defects shall be replaced with new material to match that of
the defective item.
B. The interior of the building shall be swept broom clean and left in such a condition as to allow the
government ready access to the building and capable of completing their portion of the work.
3.07
A.
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
Felt Underlayment: Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2
inches.
B.
Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.
C.
Install flashings to cover underlayment.
3.08
A.
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each
standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3. Snap or Rolled Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely
engaging factory-applied sealant.
3.09
A.
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide
for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge
closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
2. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
07 61 00 - 9
MS0114
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams
that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3.10
A.
CLEANING
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof
panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain
in
a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION
07 61 00 - 10
MS0114
SECTION 07 62 00
PART 1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Coping, parapet, cap, sill, lintel, shingle edge, and other flashing.
B. Counterflashings over bituminous, base flashing.
C. Counterflashings for roof hatches, skylights.
D. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks.
1.02
PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. See applicable sections of the Specifications and the Drawings.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
B. ASTM A792 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip
Process,("Galvalume")
C. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
D. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
E. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
F. ASTM D4214 – Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films
G. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
H. FS A-A 51145D - Flux, Soldering, Non-Electronic, Paste and Liquid.
I.
SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashing,
terminations, and installation details.
C. Submit one sample 12" x 12" size illustrating metal finish color.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
07 62 00 - 1
MS0114
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements.
B. Maintain one copy of the document at the site.
1.07
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with three years experience.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide
ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C. Prevent contact with materials, which may cause discoloration or staining.
1.09
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
1.10
GENERAL WARRANTY:
A. Submit two copies of the manufacturer's written warranty providing twenty (20) year guarantee that finish
will not chip, crack, craze, blister, or peel and without chalking in excess of 8 (ASTM D4214) and without
fading (color change) in excess of 5 NBS units for the same time period. Include coverage for weathertightness of building enclosure after installation. Warranty shall commence on the date of acceptance by
the Contracting Officer.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel Stock: ASTM A792 Galvalume AZ55 coating, factory pre-finished.
B. Pre-finished flashings, trim, etc., within one-half mile of Santa Rosa Sound shall be 0.032 aluminum,
factory pre-finished. Verify location of building with Base Civil Engineer.
C. Fasteners and Clips: Manufacturer's standard type, galvanized to ASTM A123 2.0 oz/sq finish. Finish to
match adjacent surfaces.
D. Underlayment: ASTM D226, asphalt saturated felt as indicated on the drawings, or if not indicated on the
drawings, a minimum of # 15.
E. Bituminous Paint: Asphaltic Type.
F. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard gun grade, one or two-part high performance urethane type, nonstaining, elastomeric, skinning.
G. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.
H. Primer: Zinc Chromate type.
I.
Protective Backing Paint: Asphaltic Type.
J.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
07 62 00 - 2
MS0114
K. Reglets: Surface Mounted or recessed type, as indicated on the drawings, galvanized steel.
L. Gutter and Downspout Anchorage Devices: Fabricate downspout support straps of same material and
finish as roofing material. Follow SMACNA requirements.
M. Gutter Supports: Brackets or Straps as indicated on the drawings. Follow SMACNA requirements.
N. Solder: ASTM B32.
O. Flux: FS A-A-51145D.
P. Equipment Curbs. Factory pre-formed, and pre-finished, one piece curbs, welded construction, with
integral water deflecting cricket, minimum 3” attachment flanges, minimum 8” high curbs and built-in rib
configurations designed to fit the specific panel to which they will mount. Curbs must be fabricated
from galvalume coated steel sheet compatible with the roof panels. They must provide a watertight seal.
Field fabricated curbs will not be accepted.
2.03
COMPONENTS
A. Gutters: Rectangular profile as indicated on the drawings.
1. Downspouts: Rectangular profile as indicated on the drawings.
2. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and Downspouts.
3. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, 12' x 24" size, placed at end of each downspout.
2.04
FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 2" wide x 22 gauge (minimum), interlockable with
sheet.
C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2".
E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18-inch long legs, seam or solder for rigidity, seal with
sealant.
F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/2 inch and hemmed to form drip.
G. Fabricate flashing to allow toe to extend 2 inches over, roofing surface. Return and brake edges.
H. Back paint concealed metal surfaces and dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry
film thickness of 15 mil.
2.05
FINISHES
A. Factory finished full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked on for 15 minutes at 450 degree F (232
degree C), 30% reflective gloss (ASTM D523), over minimum 0.3 mil baked on epoxy primer. Total dry
film thickness of 1.0 minimum.
B. Provide coating which has been field tested under normal range of weathering conditions for minimum of
20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack or check in finish, and without chalking in
excess of 8 (ASTM D4214), and without fading in excess of 5 NBS units.
C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces and dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry
film thickness of 15 mil.
2.06
COLORS:
A. The following colors shall be applied to the various components to be incorporated into the project
07 62 00 - 3
MS0114
1. Roof panels, fascia, gutters, soffits, low profile ridge vents, or low profile ridge cap, flashings, vents,
trim and miscellaneous shapes in the plane of the roof; color "Medium Bronze".
2. Plumbing stacks, vents, or other similar products that are not available in a factory finish as specified
in 2.06.A.1 above, shall be field painted. Conform to colors indicated or to the actual color of the
prefinished item(s) supplied by the manufacturer. Field finished items shall receive a prime coat plus
two finish coats of exterior oil paint conforming to Military Specification, MIL-P-52324, Class 2. Paint
shall be as recommend by the manufacturer for the specific material to receive the finish.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place,
and nailing strips located. Verify roofing termination and base flashing are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Conform to drawing details and/or details included in the SMACNA manual.
B. Insert flashing into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Pack remaining spaces
with lead wool. Seal flashing into reglets with sealant.
C. Secure flashing in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted.
D. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashing and felt flashing.
E. Fit flashing tight in place. Make corners square surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to
profiles.
F. Seal metal joints watertight.
G. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using fasteners.
H. Slope gutters 1/16” inch per foot minimum.
I.
Set splashes pads under downspouts.
J.
Perform flood testing and note any area that is not watertight. Repair and retest until no leaks are visible.
K. Existing plumbing vents, exhaust fans and ductwork, flues, stacks, roof mounted exhaust fans/curbs and
other items that penetrate or on top of the existing roof must be extended up to and through the new roof.
Provide new curbs, support framing, flashings, electrical, etc. as needed to complete the installation.
Notify Contracting Officer immediately of inoperative equipment.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to verify compliance with specified
requirements.
3.05
CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of work, remove all trash, shipping cartons. Construction debris, etc. and dispose of offsite.
B. Clean all flashing and make minor repairs to damaged surfaces.
07 62 00 - 4
MS0114
END OF SECTION
07 62 00 - 5
MS0114
SECTION 07 90 00
PART 1
JOINT PROTECTION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and backing.
1.02
REFERENCES:
A. ASTM D1056 – Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
B. ASTM C1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
C. FS A-A-272B –Caulking Compounds.
D. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color
availability.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with a
minimum of three years experience.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.07
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all related work referenced by other applicable sections and the
drawings.
1.08
WARRANTY:
A. Provide three-year warranty.
07 90 00 - 1
MS0114
B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and air
tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance
with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
2.02
SEALANTS:
A. Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C920, Type II, Class A, color as selected.
B.
Butyl Sealant: FS A-A-272B, color as selected.
C. Polysulphide Sealant: ASTM C920, Type II, non-sag, class A, color as selected.
2.03
ACCESSORIES:
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible
with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056, round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod, oversized 30-50 percent larger
than joint width.
D. Bond Braker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION:
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and filed measurements are as shown on the Drawings and
recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.02
PREPARATION:
A. Clean joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for latex base sealants.
E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.03
INSTALLATION:
A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
07 90 00 - 2
MS0114
C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G. Tool joints concave.
3.04
CLEANING AND REPAIRING:
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
3.05
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK:
A. Protect finished installation.
B. Protect sealants until cured.
3.06
SCHEDULE:
LOCATION
A. Exterior Door/Window
Frames/Walls
TYPE
COLOR*
Polysulphide
To be selected.
B. Interior Door/Window
Frames/Walls
Acrylic,
Solvent Cure
To be selected.
C. Under Thresholds
Butyl
To be selected.
D. Exterior Insulation
Finish System
As recommended
by EIFS manufacturer
To be selected.
*By Contracting Officer
END OF SECTION
07 90 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 08 13 14:
PART 1
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-rated, thermally insulated, steel doors and frames.
B. Rated, thermally insulated steel doors and frames.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/SDI- A205.8 – SDI – 100 – Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
B. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) the Hot-Dip Process.
C. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames,
Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
D. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and locations for
glazing, louvers, and finish.
C. Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cutouts for hardware reinforcement.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-A250.8 and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with
minimum 3 years documented experience.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
1.08
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, doorframe and door hardware installation.
08 13 14 - 1
MS0114
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE DOOR MANUFACTURERS
A. Amweld, Ceco, Curries, Fenestra, Steelcraft.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
MATERIALS
A. Exterior Doors: SDI-100 Grade III, Model 1, 16 gage, galvanized. Exterior doors at conditioned spaces
shall be filled with polyurethane insulation.
B. Exterior Door Frames: SDI-100, Grade III, 16 gage, galvanized with welded corners.
C. Interior Doors: SDI-100 Grade I, Model 1, 20 gage.
D. Interior Door Frames: SDI-100, Grade I, 18 gage, knockdown frames.
E. Door Accessories: Door jamb anchors, floor anchors, door silencers, etc., as required to fully complete
the work.
F. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper
proof screws.
G. Sealant: Sealant and backer rod as specified.
2.04
FABRICATION
A. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel T shaped, specifically for double doors.
B. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.
C. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with inverted steel channel flush end closure. Seal joints
watertight.
2.05
FINISH
A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653 G60.
B. Primer: Baked.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and DHI.
B. Coordinate installation of fixed glass and louvers.
C. Upon completion of concrete masonry units, seal perimeter of frame where it abuts CMU with sealant.
Use backer rod if required.
3.03
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
08 13 14 - 2
MS0114
3.04
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
08 13 14 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 08 14 16:
PART 1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Wood doors and panels, fire rated and non-rated.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/WDMA I.S.1A – Architectural Wood Flush Doors
B. ASTM E90 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss
of Building Partitions and Elements.
C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.
D. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
E. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.03
ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
A. Acoustic Rating for Door and Frame Assembly: ASTM E90, minimum STC 31. See Door
Schedule on drawings for doors that are acoustical rated.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of AWI Quality Standard Section 1300 and 1400 Custom Grade.
B. Fire Door and Panel Construction: Conform to NFPA 252.
C. Installed Doors and Panels: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated on drawings.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for fire rated doors and panels.
1.06
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
d. Certify lumber is harvested from Forest Stewardship Council Certified well managed forest.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify each composite wood product contains no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
d. Certified wood products.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Indicate door elevations, internal blocking for hardware attachment, and cutouts for glazing and/or
louvers.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
08 14 16 - 1
MS0114
D. Submit one sample 6 x 6 inches in size illustrating door construction.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
F. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01 33 00 that doors meet or exceed
specified acoustic and/or fire rated requirements.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Break seal on site to permit
ventilation.
C. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with AWI or ANSI/WDMA requirements.
1.09
WARRANTY
A. Provide life of installation warranty.
B. Warranty: Warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Government may have
under the Contract Documents.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
3. Certified Wood Materials: Furnish wood materials certified in accordance with FSC Guidelines.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Composite Wood Products: Contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc., Weyerhauser Company.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
DOOR AND PANEL TYPES
A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction, wood veneer faces, acoustical and/or fire
rated as indicated.
B. Panels: To match door construction; face veneer to end match, acoustical and/or fire rated as indicated
on the drawings.
2.04
DOOR AND PANEL CONSTRUCTION (AWI QUALITY STANDARD)
A. Solid, Non-Rated Core: AWI Section 1300, PC-Particleboard.
B. Solid, Fire Rated Core: AWI Section 1300, Type FD 1-1/2. See Door Schedule on drawings for fire-rated
doors/frames.
C. Solid, Special Function Core: AWI Section 1300, Type SR - Sound Retardant (Acoustical). See Door
Schedule on drawings for acoustical-rated doors/frames.
2.05
DOOR AND PANEL CONSTRUCTION (ANSI/WDMA - I.S.1A STANDARD)
A. Solid, Non-Rated Core: ANSI/ WDMA I.S.1A; solid particleboard mat formed wood flake or mat-formed
wood chip core.
08 14 16 - 2
MS0114
B. Solid, Special Function Core: ANSI/ WDMA I.S.1A; labeled fire performance as indicated on the drawings
and/or sound resistant (acoustical) type.
2.06
FLUSH DOOR AND PANEL FACING
A. Facing Quality: AWI custom grade.
B. Flush Interior Door Veneer: Birch species wood, rotary sliced with random matched grain, for transparent
finish.
2.07
ADHESIVES
A. Interior Doors: AWI or ANSI/ WDMA, Type II.
2.08
ACCESSORIES
A. Glass Stops: Wood type for non-fire rated doors; rolled metal type designed to conform to UL
requirements for fire rated doors.
2.09
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards or ANSI/ WDMA I.S.1A
requirements.
B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards or ANSI/ WDMA I.S.1A and to UL
requirements. Attach fire-rating label to door edge.
C. Provide flush doors with 1/2-inch thick edge strips of wood species to match face veneer.
D. Pre-machine doors for finish hardware.
E. Provide "Z" or "T" shaped metal astragal in one piece to UL requirements for double fire doors to rating
required.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Machine cut relief for hinges and closers and coring for handsets and cylinders.
C. Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. Trim fire door width from lock edge only, to a
maximum of 3/16 inch.
D. Trim door height by cutting equally on top and bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door
height at bottom edge only, to a maximum of one inch.
E. Drill pilot hole for screw and boltholes. Use threaded through bolts for half surface hinges.
F. Prepare doors to receive finish hardware in accordance with AWI or ANSI/ WDMA requirements.
G. Conform to AWI or ANSI/ WDMA requirements for fit tolerances.
H. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
I.
Install door louvers.
3.02
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.03
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
08 14 16 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 08 41 13:
PART 1
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum doors and frames.
B. Vision glass and insulated metal infill panels.
C. Door hardware.
D. Integral air and vapor barrier.
E. Perimeter sealant.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AAMA CW-DG-1 Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual.
B. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site.
C. AAMA 501.1 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Using
Dynamic Pressure.
D. AAMA 611 – Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
E. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual.
F. ICC/ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities.
G. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
H. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
I.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
J.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
K. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rod, Wires,
Profiles, and Tube.
L. ASTM C1048 – Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass
M. ASTM C864 – Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers
N. ASTM D2287 – Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Poymer and Copolymer Molding and
Extrusion Compounds
O. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
P. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
Q. ASTM E331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
R. Green Seal:
1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.
08 41 13 - 1
MS0114
S. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:
1. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic).
2. SSPC Paint 25 - Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil, and Alkyd Primer.
3. Steel Structures Painting Manual
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes shop fabricated, factory pre-finished, tubular
aluminum sections with supplementary internal support framing as required, swinging door(s), vision
glass, insulated metal panel infill, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind
pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-98, and in accordance
with ANSI/ASTM E330.
B. Storefront Systems used in the Explosive Ordnance Disposal Area (EOD) shall be designed to a
minimum of 50-psf-wind load.
C. Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials.
D. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within
system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads,
deflection of structural support framing.
E. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06-cfm/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential
pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283.
F. Vapor Seal with Interior Atmospheric Pressure of 1 inch (25 mm) sp, 72 degrees F, 40 Percent RH: No
failure.
G. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of
2.86-lbf/sq ft.
H. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass
and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound.
I.
System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling
temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12hour period without causing detrimental affect to system
components.
J.
Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring
within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network.
1.05
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
08 41 13 - 2
MS0114
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, location of
anchoring devices as required to meet all superimposed loads, affected related work and expansion and
contraction joint location and details.
C. Product Data: Provide component dimensions; describe components within assembly, anchorage and
fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, and internal drainage details.
D. Submit one sample 6 inches x 6 inches in size illustrating pre-finished aluminum surface, glass units, infill
panels, glazing materials.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1.
B. Conform to requirements of ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.08
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing or installing aluminum glazing
systems with minimum three years documented experience.
1.09
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Handle work of this section in accordance with AAMA – CW-10.
C. Protect pre-finished aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings, which bond when, exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.10
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F during and 48 hours after
installation.
1.11
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC03.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Amaralite Architectural Products, Inc., CMI-Cronstoms, Inc., Kawneer Company, Inc., PPG Industries,
Inc., Tubelite Architectural Products Division
B. Substitutions in accordance with Section 01 00 00.
2.03
MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper.
08 41 13 - 3
MS0114
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209.
C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
D. Steel Sections: ASTM A36, shaped to suit mullion sections.
E. Anchors, Fasteners, Supports, etc.: Compatible with aluminum; aluminum; non-magnetic stainless steel,
or other non-corrosive, non-corrodible material.
F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC 20, zinc rich type.
2.04
COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Door/Storefront Frames: 1.75 inch x 4.5 inch nominal dimension extruded tube or channel with
either mechanical or welded joints; flush glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system,
anodized finish.
B. Aluminum Stile and Rail Doors: 1.75 inches nominal thickness extruded tube with mechanical or welded
joints; medium width stile and rail with intermediate mullion; beveled glazing stops; factory glazed;
anodized finish.
C. Infill Panel: Internally reinforced, glazing edge sealed permitting internal air movement to glazing space,
outside air barrier line
1. Outer Face: 0.032-inch thick aluminum.
2. Core: Rigid polyurethane insulation core with R-value of 8.
3. Inner Face: 0.032-inch aluminum.
4. Outer and inner faces, anodized finish.
D. Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum finish to match mullion sections where exposed.
2.05
GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As described below:
1. Glass in Exterior Lights: 1" nominal thickness, sealed insulating glass units, factory assembled of
multiple panes (thickness of individual glass panes 0.25"), separated by and sealed to spacers
forming air-tight, dehydrated air spaces; exterior panes bronze-tint fully tempered and inside pane
laminated clear float glass, quality q3, conforming to ASTM C 1048, kind HS, type I, light
transmittance 0.45-0.47; shading coefficient 0.56-0.58; winter "U" value 0.49, summer "U" value
0.56-0.58.
2. Glass in Interior Lights: 0.25" nominal thickness, fully tempered float glass, quality q3, conforming to
ASTM C 1048, kind HS, type I, clear.
2.06
SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Sealant and Backing Materials: One or two part high performance sealant system, as recommended by
glazing manufacturer.
2.07
HARDWARE (As Standard with the Door Manufacturer and Rated for Handicap Accessibility)
A. Weather Stripping:
1. At fixed stops: Replaceable, compression type molded gaskets of neoprene or EPDM rubber
complying with ASTM C864 or polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287.
2. At other edges: Replaceable woven polypropylene, wool, or nylon pile with aluminum or nylon fabric
backing.
3. At door bottom: Adjustable molded EPDM or vinyl sweep continuously contacting threshold,
concealed mounting.
B. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed non-slip surface, 4"(W) x 0.5"(H).
C. Hinges: Center pivots or ball-bearing hinges.
D. Push/Pull: Manufacturer's standard.
E. Panic Device: Push-pad type with rim exit device.
F. Closer: Surface mounted, head rail or frame mount.
08 41 13 - 4
MS0114
G. Removable Cores: Removable cores shall be compatible/interchangeable with Best cores. The supplier
shall provide temporary construction cores, which will be returned upon completion/acceptance of the
project. The Government will provide the permanent cores and keying.
H. Door silencers: Provide neoprene bumpers.
2.08
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet
enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.
F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
2.09
FINISHES
A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 611.
B. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Class I anodized finish, dark bronze color, minimum 0.7 mil thickness,
AA-M12C22A42/44, electrolytically deposited color
C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 to 2.0-oz/sq ft.
D. Apply two coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA – CW-DG-1 Aluminum
Curtain Wall Design Guide.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other
irregularities.
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances,
aligning with adjacent work as required.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F. Install all flashings and associated work.
G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
I.
Install swinging door(s).
08 41 13 - 5
MS0114
J.
Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.
K. Install hardware using templates provided.
L. Install glass and infill panels as required, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to achieve
performance criteria and provide weathertight conditions.
M. Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria, backing materials, and
installation criteria in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inches per 3'-0", non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10'-0",
whichever is less.
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
3.04
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work as per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Adjust operating hardware and door(s) for smooth operation.
3.05
CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping
cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
3.06
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work until final inspection and acceptance by the Contracting
Officer.
END OF SECTION
08 41 13 - 6
MS0114
SECTION 08 71 00
PART 1
DOOR HARDWARE
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Hardware for doors.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
C. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
D. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives
E. SDI - Steel Door Institute.
1.03
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any
internal reinforcement for door hardware.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years
experience.
B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 3 years
documented experience, approved by manufacturer.
C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work
of this Section.
1.05
CERTIFICATIONS
A. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect complete installation and certify that hardware and
installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as
specified herein.
1.06
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, manufacturer's parts list, templates, and product data under provisions
of Section 01 33 00.
B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
C. Provide product data on specified hardware.
08 71 00-1
MS0114
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00. Samples: May be incorporated into the work or
returned to supplier.
1.08
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATE
A. Submit operation and maintenance data. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements,
and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
1.09
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
B. Lock manufacturer shall deliver keys directly to the Contracting Officer, properly tagged as to location and
arranged in sets.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS
A. Locksets/Latchsets:
1. Best, Schlage and Arrow.
2. Provide correct lockset or latchset as required to suite individual door use or as indicated on the door
and hardware schedule.
3. Provide locksets at all offices, mechanical rooms, storage rooms, equipment closets and similar
rooms as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
4. Provide latchsets at interior doors not receiving locksets and as indicated on the door and hardware
schedule.
5. Provide latchset at all fire-rated doors as indicated on the door or hardware schedule.
6. Grade 1, Series 4000, heavy-duty cylindrical lockset or latchset with removable core. (See J. below)
7. Locksets at aluminum entrances (storefront) must be supplied by the door manufacturer and as
indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
B. Deadbolts:
1. Best, Schlage and Arrow.
2. Provide deadbolts at exterior doors not scheduled to receive panic device and as indicated on the
door and hardware schedule.
3. Tubular lock with removable core, 1’ throw with concealed hardened steel roller with inside turning
knob.
4. Deadbolts at aluminum entrance supplied by door manufacturer.
C. Weather-stripping & Threshold:
1. National Guard, Pemko, Zero.
2. Provide thresholds at all exterior doors and other opening as indicated on the door and hardware
schedule.
3. Thresholds shall be ADA accessible, dark bronze anodized aluminum.
4. Thresholds at aluminum entrances supplied by door manufacturer.
5. Provide weather-stripping at all exterior doors and as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
6. Provide acoustical and/or lightproof weather-stripping as indicated on the door and hardware
schedule.
7. Weather-stripping at aluminum entrances supplied by door manufacturer.
D. Hinges:
1. Bommer, Hager, Stanley.
08 71 00-2
MS0114
2. Provide minimum 3 hinges per door opening unless otherwise called for on the door and hardware
schedule. Size of hinges must be sized to accommodate door thickness, weight, width, type, backset,
clearance, and frequency based on building occupancy and use, and as indicated on the door and
hardware schedule.
3. Full mortise steel at interior doors.
4. Full mortise stainless steel at exterior doors with non-removable pins.
5. Hinges at aluminum entrances supplied by the door manufacturer.
E. Closers:
1. Corbin, Dorma, and LCN.
2. Provide closers at all exterior doors, toilet room doors, and fire-rated doors. Provide closers at other
openings as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
3. ADA accessible at principal entry door openings and interior door openings equipped with closers.
Metal covers.
4. Closers at aluminum entrances supplied by the door manufacturer.
F. Surface Bolts:
1. Glynn-Johnson, Hager, Ives, Stanley.
2. Provide bolts at all inactive leaf of pairs of doors other than entry doors. Provide bolts at other
openings as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
3. 8” in length, mount at top and bottom of inactive door leaf. Provide bottom strike or modify threshold
to accept bolt.
4. Bolts at aluminum entrances supplied by the door manufacturer.
G. Push-Pad Panic Devices:
1. Adams-Rite, Dor-O-matic, Von Duprin and Yale.
2. Provide ADA accessible panic devices at principal exterior personnel ingress/egress openings.
Provide panic devices at other door openings as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
3. Panic devices at aluminum entrances supplied by door manufacturer.
H. Pushbutton Access Control:
1. Provide access control at doors indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
2. Simplex Model 1000 series or equal at doors other than those listed above.
3. Simplex Model L1000 series or equal for ADA accessible door openings.
4. Simplex Model LP1000 series or equal at exterior doors for ADA accessible doors. Must be used with
a rim mounted exit device.
5. Exit device at aluminum entrances, equipped with access control device, supplied by door
manufacturer.
I.
Wall and Floor Mounted Stops and Holders:
1. Baldwin hardware, H.B. Ives, Triangle Brass manufacturing.
2. Provide floor and/or door knob/wall mounted type at exterior doors and other doors as indicated on
the door and hardware schedule.
3. Provide door knob/wall type at interior doors or as indicated on the door schedule.
4. Stops and holders at aluminum entrances supplied by door manufacturer.
J.
Removable Cores: Removeable cores shall be compatible and interchangeable with Best 6-pin cores.
The contractor shall provide temporary construction cores, which will be returned to the contractor, upon
completion and acceptance of the project by the government. The government will provide the permanent
cores and keying to the government system.
K. Finishes:
1. Locksets, latchsets, deadbolts, surface bolts, etc, US26D at interior doors, US32D at exterior doors.
2. Thresholds, dark bronze anodized aluminum.
3. Closers, dark bronze finish.
4. Miscellaneous items, depending on availability of specified item, match as close a possible other
finishes used on the door and other hardware.
5. Finish of hardware used on aluminum entrances and storefronts shall be dark bronze.
L. Fasteners:
1. Fasteners, anchors, and similar devices shall be provided by the manufacturer or as recommended
by the manufacturer. Finish to match finish of item being installed.
08 71 00-3
MS0114
M. Fire-Rated Doors:
1. Provide hardware of types and quality listed above and complying with NFPA 80.
2.03
SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. See drawings for Hardware Schedule.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI, NAAMM,
BHMA, and DHI.
B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Coordinate installation of hardware with other trades.
D. Align hardware to be plumb and level, free of warp and twist, flush with adjacent surfaces, etc. Maintain
dimensional tolerances as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Adjust operable hardware for smooth operation free from binding, rubbing or scraping.
3.03
CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from hardware surfaces. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of
mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Remove dirt from crevices, etc. Wipe
surfaces clean and dry.
END OF SECTION
08 71 00-4
MS0114
SECTION 09 21 16:
PART 1
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Gypsum board.
B. Taped and sanded joint treatment.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM C1396 – Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
B. ASTM C475 – Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
C. ASTM A1011 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High
Strength, Low Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra High Strength.
D. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
E. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw
Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
F. ASTM C1002 – Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
G. GA-214 – Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish
H. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
I.
Gypsum Construction Handbook, published by United States Gypsum Board Co.
J.
South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with 3 years documented experience,
and approved by manufacturer.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, including but not limited to, manufacturer's installation instructions, metal
accessories, gypsum board, joint tape, screws, texturing material, drywall compound, etc., under
provisions of Section 01 33 00.
09 21 16 - 1
MS0114
B. Submit one sample of gypsum board panels, 2'x2', illustrating textured finish.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance
with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Domtar, Georgia-Pacific, Gold Bond, Temple-Inland, U.S. Gypsum Co.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Type “X” Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick, maximum
permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.
B. Moisture Resistant and Type “X” Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; 5/8-inch thick, maximum
permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.
C. Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C1396; moisture resistant and fire resistant type; 1/2 inch thick,
maximum permissible length; ends square cut, book tongue and grooved edges; water repellent paper
faces.
D. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping, corrosive-resistant screws as recommended by the gypsum board
manufacturer.
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Beads, Edge Trim, Control Joints, Casing Beads, and Accessories: Metal.
B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; GA 216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on
drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.02
GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 214, GA 216, Gypsum Construction Handbook, and in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Butt all joints loosely with maximum joint of 1/8”.
Maximum joint at outlet box, switch box and other similar devices, 3/8”.
B. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring
over firm bearing.
09 21 16 - 2
MS0114
C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing.
Applies regardless of fire rating of wall.
D. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm
bearing.
E. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.
F. Double Layer Applications: Use fire rated gypsum-backing board for first layer of fire rated partitions.
Tape and mud joints. Place second layer parallel to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of
first layer.
G. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum
board abuts dissimilar materials.
3.03
CONTROL JOINTS
A. Provide control joints at each side of door and window openings from the header to the top of the wall.
Attach control joint to double studs spaced 0.5” apart.
B. Provide control joints:
1. Where partitions or ceilings of dissimilar construction meet and remain in the same plane.
2. Wings of “L”, “U”, & “T” shaped ceiling areas are joined.
3. Where control or expansion joints occur in the base wall construction and/or structure.
C. Maximum control joint spacing:
1. Partitions, 30 feet maximum in either direction.
2. Interior Ceilings with perimeter relief, 50 feet maximum in either direction.
3. Interior Ceilings without perimeter relief, 30 feet maximum in either direction.
4. Exterior Ceilings, 30 feet maximum in either direction.
JOINT MATERIALS/FINISH
3.04
A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive final
finish coat. All walls will be textured with a minimum ‘orange peel’ texture unless otherwise noted.
Provide 12” x 12” sample of texture coat on 5/8” gypsum board for review, approval and record. The
approved sample will serve as the standard of quality the contractor must achieve with the actual final
finish. Minimum finish will be Level 3 for textured walls and Level 5 for untextured walls.
B. Walls with indentations, visible joint lines, ripples, surface defects, etc. will not be accepted.
C. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
D. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
TOLERANCES
3.05
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
09 21 16 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 09 22 16
PART 1
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed metal stud framing at exterior and interior locations.
B. Framing accessories.
REFERENCES
1.02
A. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B. ASTM A879 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for
Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface.
C. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
D. FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc-Chromate, Alkyd Type.
E. GA 216 – Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
F. Green Seal:
1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.03
A. Metal stud framing system for exterior load bearing and non-load bearing walls and infill of existing
exterior walls
B. Metal stud framing system for interior load bearing and non-load bearing walls.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
1.04
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings of prefabricated and panelized work for all exterior and interior load bearing and
non-load bearing walls, including but not limited to, component details, stud layout, framed openings,
headers and jambs, anchorage to structure and track, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or
items required of other related work.
B. Describe method of field construction of all exterior and interior load bearing and non-load bearing walls
including but not limited to, component details, stud layout, framed openings, headers and jambs,
anchorage to structure and track, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of
other related work.
C. Product data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts,
limitations, manufacturer's installation instructions, etc. under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
09 22 16 - 1
MS0114
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with GA 216.
B. Install all anchoring devise in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
1.07
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate work required under this section with other work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC03.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, METAL STUDS, TRACKS AND JOISTS
A. Dale/Incor, Dietrich, Marino, Unimast.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, ANCHORAGE DEVICES
A. Conventional steel anchor bolts with washers/nuts, embedded in the concrete.
B. Mushroom head spike by Powers Fastening, Inc.
C. Dome head powder driven pins by Hilti Anchoring & Powder Actuate Systems.
D. Type, size and spacing of anchoring devices are shown on the drawings.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
STUD FRAMING MATERIALS (See Drawings for location. Gage and weight are minimum acceptable)
A. Exterior Stud walls (Load Bearing), 8" x 16 gage, CEE 1-5/8" flange, galvanized studs, 16" o. c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= 2.313#, Area= .6623 in2; I= 5.6294 in4; S= .1.3470 in3; R = 2.9154 in.
B. Exterior Stud walls (Load Bearing), 6" x 16 gage, CEE 1-5/8" flange, galvanized studs, 16" o. c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= 1.919#, Area= .5487 in2; I= 2.8033 in4; S= .08872 in3; R = 2.2602 in.
C. Interior Stud walls (Load Bearing), 3-5/8" x 16 gage, CEE 1-5/8" flange, galvanized, studs, 16" o.c.
Physical Properties; Wt/ft.= 1.452#, Area= .4138 in2, I= .8549 in4, S= .4388 in3, R= 1.4373 in.
D. Interior Stud walls (Fire-rated), 3-5/8" x 20 gage, DWS 1-1/4" flange, galvanized, studs, 16" o.c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= .611#, Area= .180 in2, I= .342 in4, S= .171 in3, R= 1.595 in.
E. Interior Stud walls (Drywall), 3-5/8" x 22 gage, DWS 1-1/4" flange, galvanized, studs, 24" o.c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= .415#, Area= .122 in2, I= .216 in4, S= .105 in3, R= 1.601 in.
F. Interior Stud walls (Drywall), 1-5/8" x 22 gage, DWS 1-1/4" flange, galvanized, studs, 24" o.c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= .293#, Area= .086 in2, I= .034 in4, S= .035 in3, R= .746 in.
1. Physical Properties about major axis.
in = inches
09 22 16 - 2
MS0114
in2 = inches squared
in3 = inches cubed
in4 = inches foured
G. Runners: Of same material and finish as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs.
H. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material and finish as studs, thickness to suit purpose.
I.
Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws as recommended by manufacturer.
J.
Metal Backing: 20 gage galvanized steel for reinforcement.
K. Anchorage Devices:
1. Powder actuated pins at interior walls.
2. Anchor bolts, mushroom head spikes or dome head powder actuated pins at exterior walls. See 2.03.
above.
L. Primer: FS TT-P-645, for touch-up of galvanized surfaces.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02
ERECTION
A. Align and secure bottom runners (tracks) with approved anchoring devices.
B. Install studs vertically at spacing indicated above. Connect studs to runners using fastener method
recommended by stud manufacturer.
C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs.
D. Install top runner and brace to pre-engineered metal building system and cross-brace to adjacent stud
wall for rigid installation.
E. Splicing of studs is not permissible.
F. Construct corners using minimum three studs.
G. Double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs, and not more than 2 inches each side of
openings.
H. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door and window frame openings, supports and
attachments.
I.
Align stud web openings.
J.
Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, and blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed
in or behind stud framing.
K. Blocking: Secure steel channels to studs.
L. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural
building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs.
M. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch.
09 22 16 - 3
MS0114
B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
09 22 16 - 4
MS0114
SECTION 09 51 13
PART 1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Suspended metal grid-ceiling system and perimeter trim.
B. Acoustical panels.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
B. ASTM C636 – Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panels.
C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
D. Green Seal:
1. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and/or ceiling panels
with 5 years minimum experience.
B. Installer: Company with 3 years minimum documented experience, and approved by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit and indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or
ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system, and product data
including manufacturer's installation instructions, under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00. One 6” x 6” sample of ceiling tile and one 12”-24”
sample of ceiling grid, hanger wire, wall trim.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to
installation. Storage time of materials at the job site shall be as short as possible. Excess humidity during
storage can cause possible warp, sag, or poor fit after installation.
1.07
SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
09 51 13 - 1
MS0114
A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust-generating
activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
1.08
EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide 2 cartons of extra panels upon completion and Government acceptance of work.
1.09
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with
GS-11.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Chicago Metallic Corporation, National Rolling Mill, Inc., Donn.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CEILING PANELS
A. Armstrong, Celotex, United States Gypsum.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
SUSPENSION SYSTEM – CEILING PANEL COMPONENTS
A. See Room Finish and Color Schedule. Provide products that are equal to and match as close as possible
the salient characteristics of the products specified. Match as close as possible, includes but is not limited
to, type of suspension system, color, ceiling panel size, thickness, surface texture, acoustical properties,
etc.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's installation instructions, including #8
galvanized steel hanger wire to rigidly secure the suspension system to the structure above, including
integral mechanical and electrical components with a maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360.
B. Acoustical materials are interior finish products and are designed to be installed in spaces where the
building is enclosed and the HVAC system(s) are functioning and will be in continuous operation after the
acoustical materials are installed. Environmental conditions shall be as near as possible to those
specified for the intended occupancy.
09 51 13 - 2
MS0114
C. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
D. Supply and install hangers, clips, etc. for attachment to the building structural system.
E. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit.
F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected
hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
G. Locate suspension system in room according to reflected ceiling plan.
H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed
deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each
corner or support components independently.
I.
Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
J.
Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter
corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.
K. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
L. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis. Fit border neatly
against abutting surfaces.
M. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
N. Lay sound control insulation, 24" x 48" x 6" batts, on top of ceiling panels maintaining tight fit to adjacent
insulation batts. See drawings, Room Finish Schedule for location of sound control insulation.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
B. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum.
END OF SECTION
09 51 13 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 09 65 00
PART 1
RESILIENT FLOORING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient base.
B. Vinyl composition tile.
C. Rubber tile.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.
C. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
D. Scientific Certification Systems:
1. SCS EC10.2 - Environmental Certification Program Indoor Air Quality Performance.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.
2. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit manufacturer's standard samples, including pre-molded exterior corners, illustrating range of
colors, for Contracting Officer selection.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for 3 days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer 3 days prior to, during, and 24 hours
after installation of materials.
1.06
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide 20 linear feet of base.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
09 65 00 - 1
MS0114
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2. Interior Hard Surface Flooring: FloorScore Certified for VOC content in accordance with SCS EC10.2.
3. Interior Concrete, Wood, Bamboo, and Cork Floor Finishes: Maximum volatile organic compound
content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113, including sealers and stains.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RUBBER BASE
A. Burke, Flexco, Mercer, R.C. Musson, Roppe.
2.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S - RUBBER TILE
A. Azrock, Burke, Flexco, Mercer, R.C. Musson, Roppe.
2.04
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S - VINYL BASE
A. Azrock, Flexco, Johnsonite, Mercer, Roppe.
2.05
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S - VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Azrock, Armstrong, Kentile.
2.06
SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.07
BASE-FLOORING MATERIALS
A. See Room Finish and Color Schedule. Provide products that are equal to and match as close as possible
the salient characteristics of the products specified. Match as close as possible, includes but is not limited
to, type of base and tile, color, size, thickness, surface texture, etc.
2.08
ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by the respective base/vinyl manufacturer.
B. Sub-Floor Filler: As recommended by the floor tile manufacturer.
C. Base Accessories: Pre-molded end stops and external corners, of same material, size, and color as
base.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and are ready to
receive work. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
B. Verify concrete floors are dry to maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity,
carbonization, or dusting.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor
filler.
B. Apply, trowel and float filler to smooth, flat, hard surface.
09 65 00 - 2
MS0114
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum clean substrate.
E. Apply primer to surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
3.03
INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL
A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use pre-molded units. At exposed ends use pre-molded units.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.04
INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent.
C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
E. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned. Alternate pattern grain to produce basket weave
pattern on vinyl composition tile. Joints shall be parallel to building lines, with minimum 1/2 tile width at
room perimeter.
3.05
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Prohibit traffic in the area for 48 hours after installation. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and
wall surfaces without damage. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
09 65 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 09 68 00
PART 1
CARPETING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpeting glue down method
B. Base finish
C. Carpet
D. Accessories
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM E648 – Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source.
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. Carpet and Rug Institute:
1. CRI Green Label Plus Testing Program.
D. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
1.03
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, and direction of carpet.
C. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes,
patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Include maintenance procedures, recommend maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for
cleaning and shampooing.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in carpet with three years minimum experience.
09 68 00 - 1
MS0114
B. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience or approved by manufacturer.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.07
A. Conform to code for carpet flammability requirements in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Conform to ASTM E648.
1.08
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) ambient temperature three days’ prior to, during, and 24
hours after installation of materials.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2. Interior Carpet: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with CRI Green Label
Plus Testing Program.
2.02
CARPET
A. See Room Finish and Color Schedule. Provide products that are equal to and match as close as possible
the salient characteristics of the products specified. Match as close as possible, includes but is not limited
to, type of carpet, backing, pile height, color and pattern, surface texture, total weight, fiber weight, fiber,
etc.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
ACCESSORIES
2.03
A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex or type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Primes and Adhesives: Waterproof of types recommended by carpet manufacturer.
1. Releasable carpet adhesive for carpet tiles.
C. Edge Strips: Rubber type, color to be selected.
D. Base Gripper: A one-piece gripper edging strip, wood or metal type, finish and color to be selected.
E. Base: Rubber or vinyl type, 4 inches by 1/8 inch, colors to be selected.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft and are
ready to receive work.
B. Verify concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.
C. Beginning of the installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
09 68 00 - 2
MS0114
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor
filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface.
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum floor surface.
INSTALLATION
3.03
A. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Lay out rolls of carpet.
C. Verify carpet match before cutting. All carpet shall be from the same dye lot.
D. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
E. Locate seams in area of least traffic.
F. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps.
G. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic.
H. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another
room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
I.
Cut and fit carpet around interruptions.
J.
Fit carpets tight to intersections with vertical surfaces without gaps.
K. Use Releasable Adhesive for Carpet Tile.
CLEANING
3.04
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
3.05
PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
09 68 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 09 69 00:
PART 1
ACCESS FLOORING
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES:
A. ASTM E 648 – Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source
B. CEILINGS AND INTERIOR SYSTEMS CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION (CISCA) - CISCA Access
Floors Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors
C. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) - NFPA 75 Standard for the Protection of
Information Technology Equipment
D. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. Raised flooring shall be installed at the location and elevation and in the arrangement shown on the
drawings. The floor system shall be of the stringer type, complete with all supplemental items, and shall
be the standard product of a manufacturer specializing in the manufacture of raised floor systems.
1. Floor Panels: Floor panel testing shall be conducted in accordance with CISCA Access Floors. When
tested as specified, all deflection and deformation measurements shall be made at the point of load
application on the top surface of the panel. Floor panels shall be capable of supporting 1250 pounds
concentrated load without deflecting more than 0.080 inch and without permanent deformation in
excess of 0.010 inch in any of the specified tests. Floor panels shall be capable of supporting 300
pounds per square foot uniform live load without deflection more than 0.040 inch. Floor panels shall
be capable of supporting 1000 pounds rolling load without deflecting more than 0.040 inch and
without permanent deformation in excess of 0.020 inch. In accordance with CISCA Access Floors,
the permanent deformation limit under rolling load shall be satisfied in all of the specified tests. In the
specified tests, the permanent deformation shall be measured after 10 passes with Wheel 1 and after
10,000 passes with Wheel 2.
2. Stringers: Stringers shall be capable of supporting a 400 pound concentrated load at midspan without
permanent deformation in excess of 0.010 inch.
3. Pedestals: Pedestals shall be capable of supporting a 5000 pound axial load without permanent
deformation.
4. Pedestal Adhesive: Adhesive shall be capable of securing a pedestal in place with sufficient bonding
strength to resist an overturning force of 1000 inch pounds.
5. Grounding: The raised floor system shall be grounded for safety hazard and static suppression.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS:
09 69 00 - 1
MS0114
A. Shop Drawing: Raised Floor System Drawings showing layout of the work, sizes and details of
components, details at floor perimeter, bracing to resist seismic or other lateral loads, typical cutout
details including size and shape limitation, method of grounding, description of shop coating, and
installation height above structural floor.
B. Product Data: Raised Floor System Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalog cuts, and installation
instructions.
C. Raised Floor System Samples: One sample of each panel type and suspension system proposed for use.
D. Testing of Electrical Resistance: Certified copies of test reports from an approved testing laboratory,
attesting that the proposed floor system components meet the performance requirements specified.
E. Certificates: Certificate of compliance attesting that the raised floor system meets specification
requirements.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Materials shall be stored in original protective packaging in a safe, dry, and clean location and shall be
handled in a manner to prevent damage. Panels shall be stored at temperatures between 40 and 90
degrees F, and between 20 percent and 70 percent humidity.
PART 2
PRODUCTS:
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2.02
FLOOR SYSTEM:
A. Floor panel construction: Except for perimeter panels, panel size shall be 24 by 24 inches. Finished
panels shall be within a 0.010 inch tolerance of the nominal size, and shall be square within a tolerance of
0.015 inch measured corner-to-corner. The top surface of panels shall be flat within a 0.020 inch
tolerance measured corner-to-corner. Panels shall be permanently marked to indicate load rating and
model number. Perimeter panels shall be no less than 6" deep.
B. Concrete Panels: Concrete panels shall be of lightweight structural concrete with either structural
reinforcing or a die-formed, electro-galvanized steel bottom pan. All concrete surfaces including those
resulting from field cuts shall be sealed with the manufacturer's standard sealer before covering the
surfaces with other materials.
C. Carpet Tile: Carpet tile surfacing shall be field installed as per Section 09 68 00.
D.
Accessories: Provide cable cutout "F" trim with sponge rubber seal, quantity to be determined. Cutout
locations to be determined at installation. Estimate 16, 2” diameter cutouts minimum.
E. Lifting Device: Each individual room shall be provided with one floor panel lifting device standard with the
floor manufacturer. A minimum of two devices shall be furnished.
FLOOR PANEL SUPPORT SYSTEM:
2.03
A. Pedestals: Pedestals shall be of steel or aluminum or a combination thereof. Ferrous materials shall have
a factory-applied corrosion-resistant finish. Pedestal base plates shall provide a minimum of 16 square
inches of bearing surface and shall be a minimum of 1/8 inch thick. Pedestal shafts shall be threaded to
permit height adjustment within a range of approximately 2inches, to permit overall floor adjustment within
plus or minus 0.10 inch of the required elevation, and to permit leveling of the finished floor surface within
09 69 00 - 2
MS0114
0.062 inch in 10 feet in all directions. Locking devices shall be provided to positively lock the final
pedestal vertical adjustments in place. Pedestal caps shall interlock with stringers to preclude tilting or
rocking of the panels. Perimeter pedestals must be used under corners of all perimeter panels and
should be installed as close to the wall as possible. Provide additional pedestals to support center of cut
panels.
B. Stringers: Stringers shall be of rolled steel or extruded aluminum, and shall interlock with the pedestal
heads to prevent lateral movement.
2.04
TESTS:
A. Floor panel, stringer, and pedestal testing shall be conducted in accordance with CISCA Access Floors.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. The floor system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 75, and with
the approved detail drawings. Areas to receive raised flooring shall be maintained between 60 and 90
degrees F, and between 20 percent and 70 percent humidity for 24 hours prior to and during installation.
B. The area in which the floor system is to be installed shall be cleared of all debris. Structural floor surfaces
shall be thoroughly cleaned and all dust shall be removed. Apply clear sealer to structural floor where
access flooring is installed for dust control. If the sealer coating and pedestal adhesive are not
compatible, the coating shall be applied after the pedestals have been installed and the adhesive has
cured.
C. Pedestals: Pedestals shall be accurately spaced, and shall be set plumb and in true alignment. Base
plates shall be in full and firm contact with the structural floor, and shall be secured to the structural floor
with adhesive. Perimeter pedestals shall be used.
D. Stringers: Stringers shall be interlocked with the pedestal caps to preclude lateral movement, and shall be
spaced uniformly in parallel lines at the indicated elevation.
E. Panels: The panels shall be interlocked with supports in a manner that will preclude lateral movement.
Perimeter panels must be fastened to the supporting components to form a rigid boundary for the interior
panels. Floors shall be level within 1/16 inch measured with a 10 foot straightedge in all directions. Cut
edges of composite panels shall be coated with a silicone rubber sealant or with an adhesive
recommended by the panel manufacturer. Extruded vinyl edging shall be secured in place at all cut edges
of all panel cut-outs to prevent abrasion of cables. Cutouts for conduit and similar penetrations shall be
closed using self-extinguishing sponge rubber.
F. Repair of Zinc Coating: Zinc coating that has been damaged, and cut edges of zinc-coated components
and accessories, shall be repaired by the application of a galvanizing repair paint. Areas to be repaired
shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to application of the paint.
3.02
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Cleaning: The space below the completed floor shall be free of all debris. Before any traffic or other work
on the completed raised floor is started, the completed floor shall be cleaned in accordance with the floor
covering manufacturer's instructions.
B. Protection: Traffic areas of raised floor systems shall be protected with a covering of building paper,
fiberboard, or other suitable material to prevent damage to the surface. Cutouts shall be covered with
material of sufficient strength to support the loads to be encountered. Plywood or similar material shall be
placed on the floor to serve as runways for installation of heavy equipment. Protection shall be
maintained until the raised floor system is accepted.
END OF SECTION
09 69 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 09 90 00
PART 1
PAINTING AND COATING
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Surface preparation
B. Surface finish schedule
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications.
B. ASTM D1653 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films
C. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
D. Green Seal:
1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.
2. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with three years
experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years experience
approved by product manufacturer.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes.
1.06
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00. Paint and primers used shall be the highest
quality, top-of-the-line, professional coatings manufactured by each respective paint manufacturer.
B. Provide product data on all finishing products.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
09 90 00 - 1
MS0114
D. Submit one sample 12” x 12” in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface
finishing product scheduled, for selection.
E. Submit manufacturer's preparation and application recommendations for each type of material to be
painted under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage,
surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of
90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's
instructions.
F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.09
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above
45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 Degrees C) for interiors, 50
Degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with
GS-11.
2. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC03.
3. Interior Clear Wood Finishes, Floor Coatings, Stains, Primers, and Shellacs: Maximum volatile
organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113.
4. Interior Concrete, Wood, Bamboo, and Cork Floor Finishes: Maximum volatile organic compound
content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113, including sealers and stains.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (PRIMER AND PAINT)
2.02
A. Devoe, Glidden, Benjamin Moore, Pittsburgh, Sherwin-Williams.
1. Paint and primers used shall be the highest quality, top-of-the-line, professional coatings
manufactured by each respective paint manufacturer.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
09 90 00 - 2
MS0114
2.03
CLEANER, PRE-SEALERS & WATER REPELLANT SEALER FOR ARCHITECTURAL EXPOSED
CONCRETE & INTEGRALLY COLORED DECORATIVE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. CMU Pre-Sealer: Pre-sealer used on all concrete and CMU surfaces to fill capillaries and large pores
prior to the application of the water repellant sealer. Pre-sealer must be manufactured by and compatible
with the water repellant sealer. Submit test data to substantiate conformance to ASTM D1653, and E96.
B. Water Repellant Sealer: Water based, VOC compliant, deep penetrating clear silane and/or siloxane
blend to protect horizontal and vertical surfaces. Manufacturer must have a minimum of 5 years
experience in the manufacturer of masonry sealer.
C. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent material.
2.04
MATERIALS
A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogenous coating.
B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically
indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
FINISHES
2.05
A. Refer to Room Finish and Color Schedule on drawings for colors.
B. All surfaces exposed to view shall be painted in accordance with the schedule at the end of this Section.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat and ready to receive paint. Correct minor defects and
clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach.
Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of
etching primer.
F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar,
scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a
solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow masonry to dry as per paint
manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Architectural Exposed Concrete Scheduled to Receive Pre-Sealer and Water Repellant Sealer: Remove
dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a
solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of
corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
H. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale
are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint
after repairs.
I.
Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make
touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. (Prime metal
items including shop primed items.)
09 90 00 - 3
MS0114
J.
Mill Finish Aluminum: Clean as per paint manufacturer’s recommendations.
K. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal all surfaces, including top and bottom edges with primer.
L. Existing painted walls to receive new paint shall be repaired to “like new” condition prior to start of
painting. “Like new” means to remove all nails or other devices used for attaching objects to the wall, fill
holes, sand and make ready to receive prime and finish coats.
M. Beginning of painting means acceptance of surface and site conditions.
PROTECTION
3.02
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other
surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
APPLICATION
3.03
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into grain before set. Wipe
excess from surface.
H. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
I.
Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish with gloss varnish
reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
3.04
FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical sections for schedule of color-coding and identification banding of
equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.
B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components
and paint separately.
C. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,
brackets, collars, and supports, except where items are prefinished.
D. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.
E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through
grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind
louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
F. Paint exposed conduits and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before
installing equipment.
09 90 00 - 4
MS0114
H. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with color schedule. Color
band and identify with flow arrows and names.
I.
Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.05
CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment,
surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material, which may constitute a fire hazard and place in closed metal
containers and remove daily from site.
3.06
SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
(Includes, but is not limited to, the following and all conduits, disconnect switches, louvers, condensing
units, roof vents, exhaust fans, masonry, etc. visible when viewing the exterior of the building.)
A. Steel
1.
Organic Zinc Rich Urethane Primer (Primer)
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
Generic Type:
Solids By Volume:
Zinc Content:
Test Criteria:
Organic Zinc Rich Urethane Primer
63%
83% by weight.
Test Criteria
ASTM B 117
Salt Spray (Fog)
Test Duration
50,000 hours
(Scribed Panel)
ASTM G 85
Prohesion
15,000 Hours
ASTM D 4585
Humidity
ASTM 4541
Adhesion
ASTM G8
Cathodic Disbondment
Immersion Service
(Potable Water)
4,000 hours
Average of Three
Tests
30 Days Exposure
Proposed Product Test Results
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rusting:
Blistering:
Report PSI Adhesion
7 years – No Failure
Epoxy Intermediate Coat
1.
2.
3.
Generic Type:
Solids By Volume:
Test Criteria:
Polyamide Epoxy
56%.
Test Criteria
ASTM B 117
Salt Spray (Fog)
Test Duration
10,900 hours
(Scribed Panel)
ASTM G 85
Prohesion
15,000 Hours
ASTM D 4585
Humidity
4,000 hours
ASTM D 4060
CS-17 Wheel
09 90 00 - 5
Proposed Product Test Results
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rusting:
Blistering:
Report mg Loss / Average of three
MS0114
Abrasion
ASTM 4541
Adhesion
ASTM G8
Cathodic Disbondment
Immersion Service
(Potable Water)
3.
8.04
1.
2.
3.
1,000 Gram Load
1,000 Cycles
Average of Three
Tests
30 Days Exposure
tests
Report PSI
7 years – No Failure
Exterior Finish Coat
Generic Type:
Solids By Volume:
Test Criteria:
Fluoropolymer Polyurethane
60%.
Test Criteria
ASTM B 117
Salt Spray (Fog)
Test Duration
10,000 hours
(Scribed Panel)
ASTM D 4585
Humidity
3,000 hours
ASTM D 4060
Abrasion
CS-17 Wheel
1,000 Gram Load
1,000 Cycles
Average of Three
Tests
16,000 hours
ASTM 4541
Adhesion
ASTM D 4587
QUV Exposure
Cycle 4: 8 hours UV –
4 hours condensation
ASTM D 4587
QUV Exposure
Cycle 4: 8 hours UV –
4 hours condensation
ASTM D 4141
(EMMAQUA)
Exterior Exposure
ASTM D 4141
(EMMAQUA)
Exterior Exposure
ASTM D 522
Flexibility
ASTM 2794
Impact
ASTM D 503`1
Weatherometer
AAMA 2604-98
Proposed Product Test Results
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rusting:
Blistering:
Report mg Loss / Average of
three tests
Report PSI
Gloss Retention:
25,000 hours
Gloss Retention:
Color Change: DED FMCII
1,260MJ/m2
Exposure
Gloss Retention:
Color Change:
3,500MJ/m2
Exposure
Gloss Retention:
Color Change:
Method A
Conical Mandrel
Cracking:
% Elongation:
Average of Three
Trials
5,500 hours
Direct Impact:
5 Years Exposure
B. Steel - Galvanized
1. Two coats Acrylic Latex, semi-gloss.
C. Aluminum Mill Finish
09 90 00 - 6
% Gloss Retention:
Color Change: DED
Report:
Color Retention:
Gloss Retention:
Chalking:
Erosion:
MS0114
1. Prime coat as per paint manufacturer’s recommendation.
2. Two coats Acrylic Latex, semi-gloss.
D. Architectural Exposed Concrete
1. Upon completion of the cleaning, allow the concrete to dry as recommended by the manufacturer of
the sealer system. Verify that the surface is cleaned and ready to receive the pre-sealer. The area to
receive the sealer must be cleaned, etc. to the satisfaction of the installer and sealer system
manufacturer and allowed to dry. If not acceptable to the sealer manufacturer's representative, the
area must be re-cleaned, etc. Paint system manufacturer shall certify that the surface is acceptable to
receive the sealer prior to the application of the finish coats. Correction of any surface irregularities or
imperfections will then be the responsibility of the contractor applying the pre-sealer and finish coats.
Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Upon completion of and curing of the pre-sealer, install sufficient number of coats of the sealer as per
the manufacturer’s written instructions. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the written
instructions.
E. Concrete Masonry Units
1. Upon completion of the cleaning, allow the masonry to dry as recommended by the manufacturer of
the paint system. Verify that the surface is cleaned and ready to receive the primer-sealer. The area
to receive the primer-sealer must be cleaned, etc. to the satisfaction of the installer and paint system
manufacturer and allowed to dry. If not acceptable to the paint manufacturer's representative, the
area must be re-cleaned, etc. Paint system manufacturer shall certify that the surface is acceptable to
receive the primer-sealer prior to the application of the finish coats. Correction of any surface
irregularities or imperfections will be the responsibility of the contractor applying the primer sealer and
the finish coats. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Upon completion of and curing of the primer-sealer, paint a minimum two coats Acrylic Latex (flat)
and additional coats as directed by the manufacturer’s written instructions. Installation shall be in
strict accordance with the written instructions.
F.
Existing Painted CMU or EIFS Surfaces:
1. Prepare surface and prime as per paint manufacturer recommendations.
2. Paint two coats Acrylic Latex, or as recommended by manufacturer, flat, on CMU surfaces.
3. Paint two coats 100% Acrylic, or as recommended by manufacturer, flat, on
EIFS surfaces.
G. Factory Finished Items:
1. Prepare surface as per paint manufacturer recommendations and paint two coats Acrylic Latex, semigloss or flat.
H. Miscellaneous Surfaces:
1. One coat primer as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Acrylic Latex, semi-gloss or flat.
3.07
SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A. Steel - Unprimed
1. One coat Latex primer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
B. Steel - Shop Primed
1. Touch-up with original primer or as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
C. Steel - Galvanized
1. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
D. Aluminum Mill Finish
1. One coat as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin.
E. Plaster, Gypsum Board
1. One coat Latex wall primer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, eggshell.
09 90 00 - 7
MS0114
F. Plywood, Wood (Painted)
1. One coat Latex Primer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
G. Plywood, Wood (Clear or Stained)
1. One coat alkyd based, non-masking, penetrating stain.
2. Two coats clear acrylic polyurethane, low luster.
H. Miscellaneous Surfaces
1. One coat primer as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
I.
Factory Finished Items
1. Prepare surface and paint two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
J.
Existing Painted Surfaces:
1. Prepare surface as per paint manufacturer recommendations.
2. Prime as required and paint two coats Acrylic Latex, flat or Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
SCHEDULE
3.08
A. As per Room Finish and Color Schedule.
END OF SECTION
09 90 00 - 8
MS0114
SECTION 10 11 00
PART 1
1.01
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z97.1
(2009; Errata 2010) Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B221
(2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM B221M
(2013) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)
ASTM C1048
(2012; E 2012) Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass
ASTM E84
(2015b) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM F148
(2013) Binder Durability of Cork Composition Gasket Materials
ASTM F152
(1995; R 2009) Tension Testing of Nonmetallic Gasket Materials
ASTM F793
(2010A) Wallcovering by Durability Characteristics
1.02
SUMMARY
The term Visual Display Board when used herein includes presentation boards, marker boards,
tackboards, board cases, display track system and horizontal sliding units; submit manufacturer’s
descriptive data and catalog cuts plus manufacturer’s installation instructions, and cleaning and
maintenance instructions. Visual display boards shall be from manufacturer’s standard product line.
Submit certificate of compliance signed by Contractor attesting that visual display boards conform to the
requirements specified.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a “G” designation; submittals not having a “G”
designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the “G” designation identifies
the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
SD-03 Product Data
Visual Display Board; G
SD-04 Samples
Aluminum; G
Porcelain Enamel; G
Materials; G
SD-07 Certificates
Visual Display Board
10 11 00 – 1
MS0114
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the building site in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers and store them in a
clean dry area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Stack materials according to
manufacturer’s recommendations. Visual display boards shall be allowed to acclimate to the building
temperature for 24 hours prior to installation.
1.05
WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer’s standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a one year
period.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
PRCELAIN ENAMEL
Provide marker board writing surface composed of porcelain enamel fused to a nominal 28-gauge thick
steel, laminated to a minimum ¼ inch thick material with a steel or foil backing sheet. Writing surface
shall be capable of supporting paper by means of magnets. Marker board surface for display track
system may be a powder paint dry erase surface adhered to a nominal 18-gauge thick steel. Submit
section showing porcelain enamel coating, steel, core material and backing.
2.02
MARKERBOARD
Markerboard shall have a porcelain enamel writing surface and a chalktray. Markerboard shall be a
factory assembled unit complete in one piece, without joints whenever possible. When markerboard
dimensions require delivery in separate sections, components shall be prefit at the factory, disassembled
for delivery and jointed at the site. Frame shall be aluminum. Chalktray shall be the same material as
the frame and extend the full length of the liquid markerboard. The markerboard shall have a map rail.
The map rail with a tackable insert shall extend the full length of the liquid chalkboard, and shall have
map hooks with clips for holding sheets of paper. Two map hooks shall be provided for each 4 foot of
map rail. Dry erase markings shall be removable with a felt eraser or dry cloth without ghosting. Each
unit shall come complete with an eraser and four different color compatible dry erase markers. The size
and location as shown on the drawings.
2.03
PROJECTION SCREEN
Wall mounted motorized projection screen shall have 120V motor that is lubricated for life, quick reversal
type, has overload protector, integral gears, and preset accessible limit switches. Recessed mount
projection screens shall have an operable closure door and access panel. Screen shall be flame
retardant, mildew resistant, and white matte with
white masking borders. Bottom of screen fabric
shall be weighted with metal rod. Roller shall be a rigid metal at least 3 inches in diameter mounted on
sound absorbing supports. Motor will be motor in roller design. Screen shall have a 3 position control
switch to stop or reverse screen at any point. The switch shall be installed in a flush electrical box with
cover plate, locations(s) as shown on the electrical drawings. All conduit and wiring from the control
switch to the projection screen shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Screen shall be UL
listed. The size shall be shown on the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PLACEMENT SCHEDULE
Location and mounting height of visual display boards shall be as shown on the drawings. Mounting
height is defined as distance from the finished floor to the top of the display board frame.
3.02
INSTALLATION
Preform installation and assembly in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Use concealed
fasteners. Visual display boards shall be attached to the walls with suitable devices to anchor each unit.
10 11 00 – 2
MS0114
Furnish and install trim items, accessories and miscellaneous items in total, including but not limited to
hardware, grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, and anchorages incidental to or
necessary for a sound, secure, complete and finished installation. Installation shall not be initiated until
completion of room painting and finishing operations. Visual display boards shall be installed in locations
and at mounting heights indicated. Visual display boards shall be installed level and plumb, and if
applicable doors shall be aligned or replaced as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.03
CLEANING
Writing surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
10 11 00 – 3
MS0114
SECTION 10 14 00
PART 1
SIGNAGE
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
ANSI Z97.1
Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
1.02
GENERAL
A. Interior signage shall be of the sizes and types shown on the drawings, shall conform to the requirements
specified herein, and shall be provided at the locations indicated. Signs shall be complete with lettering,
and related components for a complete installation. Signs shall be the standard product of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall essentially duplicate signs
that have been in satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS:
1. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalogs cuts, installation and cleaning instructions.
2. Samples: One sample of each of the following sign types showing typical quality and workmanship.
The samples may be installed in the work, provided each sample is identified and location recorded.
a. Door sign.
b. Wall sign
B. Two samples of manufacturer's standard color chips for each material requiring color verification.
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging and stored in a clean, dry
area.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
COLORS
A. Colors shall be as scheduled.
2.03
ACRYLIC SHEET
A. Acrylic sheet for panels and components shall conform to ANSI Z97.1.
10 14 00 - 1
MS0114
2.04
PLAQUE SIGNS
A. Plaque signs shall be a modular type signage system. Signs shall be fabricated of acrylic plastic
conforming to ANSI Z97.1.
1. Standard Modular Plaque Signs: Plaque signs shall consist of matte finish acrylic plastic, thickness
and size as shown. Corners of signs shall be squared.
2. Type of Mounting For Plaque Signs: Surface mounted signs shall be provided with 1/16 inch thick
vinyl foam tape.
2.05
GRAPHICS
A. Graphics Application: Signage graphics shall conform to the following:
1. Message shall be applied to panel using the silkscreen process. Silk-screened images shall be
executed with photo screens prepared from original art. No hand cut screens will be accepted.
Original art shall be defined as artwork that is a first generation reproduction of the specified art.
Edges and corners shall be clean.
2. Fabricate signs to accept changeable inserts for room number and room name to accommodate
future changes.
B. Messages: See drawings and schedule for message content, Typeface: Helvetica regular as indicated.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Signs shall be installed in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on
the drawings. Signs shall be installed plumb and true at mounting heights indicated, and by method
shown or specified. Signs on doors or other surfaces shall not be installed until finishes on such surfaces
have been installed.
1. Anchorage: Anchorage shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions.
2. Protection and Cleaning: The work shall be protected against damage during construction. Sign
surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions.
END OF SECTION
10 14 00 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 10 44 00
PART 1
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Cabinets.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NFPA 10 – Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B. UL 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers.
C. UL 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details and
cabinet/extinguisher dimensions.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide units conforming to UL 711.
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 10 for requirements for extinguishers.
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
10 44 00 - 1
MS0114
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. J.L. Industries; Larsen's Manufacturing Co.; Potter-Roemer; Watrous.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
EXTINGUISHERS
A. Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, Cast steel tank, with pressure gage;
1. Class 4A-60BC with rechargeable metal heads.
2. Class 2A-10BC for use at dormitory or similar units with rechargeable metal heads.
2.04
EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Metal: Formed sheet steel, white epoxy finish primer; 18 gage thick base metal, size to accommodate
extinguisher.
B. Configuration: Semi-recessed type, sized to accommodate accessories.
C. Extinguisher cabinets recessed within fire-rated walls or partitions shall be fire-rated to match that of the
wall or partition.
D. Trim Type: Rolled edge construction, 2.5" return trim projection.
E. Door:
1. 18 gage thick reinforced for flatness and rigidity; flush pull to meet ADA code and projection
requirements, full glass, non-locking with friction catch or rolling ball latch.
2. Fire extinguishers used at exterior applications shall use doors, hinges, etc. of stainless steel and be
equipped with locks.
F. Door Glazing:
1. Glass, clear, 1/4 inch thick tempered.
2. Fire extinguishers used at exterior applications shall use break-away-acrylic-panel.
G. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet and as recommended by manufacturer.
2.05
FINISHES
A. Extinguisher: Steel, baked enamel to standard red color.
B. Cabinet Interior, Exterior Trim and Door: White baked enamel finish.
2.06
EXTERIOR CABINETS
A. Surface mounted injection molded ABS plastic with brass lock, removable or breakable cover, and labels.
Sized to accommodate required fire extinguisher.
2.07
FABRICATION
A. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles.
B. Pre-drill for anchors.
C. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon roller type catch.
D. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
E. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing.
2.08
BRACKETS
A. Fire extinguishers in mechanical rooms or similar spaces shall be bracket mounted.
PART 3
EXECUTION
10 44 00 - 2
MS0114
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify location of extinguishers in accordance with drawings.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, height above finish floor to conform to ADA code.
C. Secure rigidly in place.
D. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
E. Mounting height shall be 4’-0” to top of cabinets or extinguisher.
3.03
CLEANING
A. Clean glass, interior and exterior of cabinet and extinguisher.
END OF SECTION
10 44 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 21 13 00:
PART 1
WET AND DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Design and install wet and/or dry-pipe sprinkler system as indicated on drawings.
B. Fire sprinkler piping.
C. Fire department connection.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
C. ASME B16.4 - Grey Iron Threaded Fittings.
D. ASME B16.5 - Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
E. ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttweld Fittings.
F. ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welded and Threaded.
G. ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends for Pipe, Valves, Flanges and Fittings.
H. ASME B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
I.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
and Seamless.
J.
ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
K. ASTM A795 – Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and
seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use.
L. ASTM F438 – Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
M. ASTM F439 – Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
N. ASTM F442/F442M – Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chlorinated) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
(SDR-PR)
O. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum).
P. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
Q. NFPA 1963 – Standard for Fire Hose Connections
R. UFC 3-600-01 – Design: Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities.
S. UL 405 - Fire Department Connection Devices
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System to provide coverage for entire building.
B. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. Coordinate with alarm system contractor.
21 13 00 – 1
MS0114
C. Provide system to NFPA 13, UFC 3-600-01, and as required in this section. Where conflicts exist the
most stringent shall apply.
D. Provide dry pipe system in areas subject to freezing.
E. Provide fire department connection.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design and installation to conform to NFPA 13 (latest edition) and UFC 3-600-01.
B. Equipment and Components: All materials used shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual approved, and
bear UL or FM label or marking.
C. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in sprinkler systems with three years experience.
D. Design by or under the supervision of a certified sprinkler designer.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, and Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of certified sprinkler
designer.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, calculations, layout, and product data.
B. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories.
C. Submit shop drawings, product data, installation instructions and hydraulic calculations sealed by a
certified sprinkler designer.
D. Contractor shall prepare shop drawings in AutoCAD format and submit paper copies for approval. Upon
completion of the project the contractor shall submit a digital copy of the as-built shop drawings. The
base shall provide standard border sheet and drawing sheets in digital format as required for the
preparation of the shop drawings. Title block is to be filled out the same as the contract drawings and
numbered FP-1.
E. Submit certification of all individuals involved in preparation of shop drawings and calculations.
Individuals must currently be certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum Level - III certification in Automatic
Sprinkler System program.
F. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
G. The submittals, training, and zoning for the sprinkler system shall be prepared and provided by in-house
personnel employed by the Fire Sprinkler Contractor.
H. The submittals shall be approved by the Hurlburt Fire Department prior to the purchase of materials or
any installation of work is begun.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data.
B. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and record
drawings.
1.08
EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13.
B. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type.
C. Provide metal storage cabinet and located in the mechanical room.
21 13 00 – 2
MS0114
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A. Buried Piping: Cast iron within 5’ of building.
B. Above Ground Inside Building Piping:
1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B or ASTM A795, Schedule 40, black. All pipe and fittings for a
dry pipe sprinkler system shall be Schedule 40, galvanized. No Schedule 10 pipe shall be
acceptable in any system.
a. Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.25, butt weld ends; ASTM
A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings;
ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded.
b. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B16.6, threaded fittings
c. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings.
d. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, “C” shaped
elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
2. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F442/F442M, SDR 13.5, UL listed for wet pipe systems, carrying a rated working
pressure of 175 psi @ 150 Degrees F
a. Fittings: ASTM F438 schedule 40 or ASTM F439 schedule 80, CPVC.
b. Joints: ASTM F493, solvent weld.
2.02
GATE VALVES
A. Up to and Including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid
wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged or grooved
ends.
2.03
CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
C. Iron body; bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or flanged
ends.
2.04
DRAIN VALVES
A. Bronze compression stop with nipple and cap or hose thread.
B. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.
2.05
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Wet Pipe Riser Valve: Check type valve, main drain connection, and inlet and outlet gauge connections.
Ductile iron body, brass seat and rubber-faced clapper assembly hinged to a removable access cover.
B. Fire Department Connection: Standard wall type; ductile iron; chrome plated finish, double clapper type;
thread size to suit fire department hardware; two way threaded dust cap and chain of same material and
finish, 3/4 inch (19 mm) automatic drip connected to drain; marked "Sprinkler - Fire Department
Connection".
C. Water flow switch: Vane type with adjustable delay and two single pole double throw switches (for wet
systems only). Provide type as permitted by NFPA 13 for dry systems.
D. Dry Pipe Valve: U.L. listed latching differential type with associated trim package for system operation,
maintenance, and testing. Provide protection against accumulation of water above the clapper by an
automatic draining device.
E. Air Compressor: Automatically maintained pressure system capable of restoring normal air pressure in
the system within 30 minutes. Provide domestically manufactured assembly. Air compressor shall be
single stage for motors below 1-1/2 hp and two stage for 1-1/2 hp and above, capable of producing air at
150 psi. Sixty gallon tanks and larger shall be ASME stamped. Pumps shall be cast iron with metal belt
guard, intake air filter, pressure switch control, tank gauge, check valve, tank drain, pressure relief valve
21 13 00 – 3
MS0114
and outlet valve. Motor speed shall not exceed 1200 rpm. Magnetic starters and overloads shall be
provided for all three phase motors.
F. Gate Valve and Indicator Post: Gate valves for underground installation shall be of inside screw type with
counter-clockwise rotation to open. Indicating valves shall be gate valves with approved indicator post of
length to permit the top of the post to be located 35" above finished grade. Gate valves and indicator
posts shall be UL or FM listed. Provide BEST paddle lock with removable 6-pin core at each indicator
post. Indicator post will be painted with one coat chromate primer and two coats alkyd enamel – dark
bronze.
G.
Double Check Valve Assemblies: ASSE 1015, AWWA C510-89; stainless steel body with corrosion
resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with test
cocks and two OS&Y shutoff valves. Approved for use in fire protection systems and approved for
installation in the vertical position. All backflow preventors 2 inches and smaller shall be installed with
unions for easy removal and maintenance. All backflow preventors shall access ports for each check
valve, no dual access type services ports shall be allowed. The riser shall be configured with a test
header to allow forward flow testing of backflow preventors at full system demand. Assembly shall
include an isolation valve and exterior wall mounted header with multiple test ports sufficient to
accommodate full system demand gpm.
2.06
SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Standard pendant type with chrome plated finish, with matching escutcheon.
B. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type with chrome plated finish.
C. Sidewall Type: Chrome plated finish with matching escutcheon.
D. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard.
2.07
SPRINKLER GUARDS
A. Sprinkler guards shall be provided in areas where the heads are subject to mechanical damage, including
mechanical.
2.08
YARD-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Standard: UL 405.
B. Type: Exposed, freestanding.
C. Pressure Rating: 15 psig minimum.
D. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.
E. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and threads.
Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.
F. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.
G. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, floor type.
H. Outlet: Bottom, with pipe threads.
I.
Number of Inlets: Two.
J.
Sleeve: Brass.
K. Sleeve Height: 18 inches (460 mm).
L. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to AUTO SPKR.
M. Finish Including Sleeve: Rough brass or bronze.
N. Outlet Size: NPS 4 (DN 100).
21 13 00 – 4
MS0114
O. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping
between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to spill to outside building.
P. Provide valve box at the base of the yard-type FDC to house the check valve and ball drip.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work and reflected ceiling plan.
B. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. Remove burrs.
C. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and out, before assembly.
D. CPVC piping shall be packaged immediately after its manufacture to prevent damage and shall be stored
indoors after production until shipped. Piping shall be protected from damage and sun light on site.
3.02
INSTALLATION - PIPING
A. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator (PIV), if indicated. PIV shall be installed
so that the top of the post is 36 inches above grade. PIV’s shall be protected by bollards when installed 5
feet or less from paved areas. Bollards shall be arranged so that they do not hinder operation of the
valve.
B. Install vertical type double check valve assembly in sprinkler system riser. Provide tamper switches for
each valve and connect to the alarm panel. FDC shall be installed between 36 inches and 48 inches
above grade.
C. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent Siamese
connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.
D. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
E. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. In open areas or areas without suspended
ceilings, install piping as close as possible to structure above to allow maximum clearance below piping.
F. Center heads in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon
spacing and coordination with ceiling elements.
G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at main drain. Where the capacity of trapped sections of piping
is less than 5 gallons, an auxiliary drain consisting of not less than a ½” valve shall be provided. Where
the capacity of trapped sections of piping is more than 5 gallons, an auxiliary drain consisting of two 2”
valves and a 2” by 12” condensate nipple (drum drip) shall be provided. Auxiliary drains shall be
terminated outside the building. Install valves in an accessible location or provide access panel.
H. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb, and parallel to building structure.
I.
Exposed Areas: Paint piping with one coat zinc chromate primer and two coats alkyd enamel to match
wall/ceiling color. Provide stencils or pipe markers in accordance with Section 23 05 53.
J.
Mechanical Rooms and Concealed areas: Paint piping with one coat zinc chromate primer and two coats
red Alkyd enamel.
K. Connect water flow switch and other signaling devices to alarm panel.
L. Inspector’s test station shall be installed in the riser room downstream of the flow switch.
M. Locate outlet of inspectors test outside building 2'-0" above grade with splash block.
N. Piping for inspectors test or auxiliary drains shall not be exposed in finished areas. Install piping
concealed in wall or construct furred out space to conceal piping. Provide access door where needed for
21 13 00 – 5
MS0114
access to valves.
O. CPVC piping shall only be installed when and where indicated on the project drawings. Installation shall
be in accordance with manufactures installation instructions, NFPA 13 and its listing.
P. Provide sleeve at all wall and floor slab pipe penetrations.
Q. All piping joints under building slabs and foundations shall be installed with thrust blocks and joint
restraints.
R. The Contractor shall notify the Hurlburt Fire Department prior to taking an existing sprinkler system out of
service for modification or repair. The Contractor shall perform a function test on the flow switch before
taking the system down. The Contractor (not the Fire Department) shall valve off the system, drain the
system, perform the repair/modifications, and then put the system back in operation. The Contractor
shall perform a function test on the flow switch then notify the Contracting Officer after system is ready for
inspection and operation.
S. When performing repairs or modifications on a fire sprinkler system with a fire pump, the Contractor shall
shut down the fire pump first, and then shut the jockey pumps down second. After work is complete, the
Contractor shall put the jockey pump back in service before the fire pump is put back in service.
T. All fire suppression valves that are put into service shall be monitored by factory supplied switch in the
normal operational position. If the valve is to be closed under normal system operation, then the valve
shall be monitored in the closed position. If the valve is to be open under normal system operation then
the valve shall be monitored by factory supplied switch in the open position. Valves that are monitored
open under normal system operation will not be accepted as closed valves.
U. All fire systems shall have a posted sequence of operation. The Contractor shall provide and post a
laminated sequence of operation near the fire riser.
V. Fire sprinkler systems that protect facilities with multiple floors shall have a flow switch at each floor
control valve. This flow switch shall provide a signal to the fire alarm control panel to indicate which part
of the building has flow to the sprinkler heads.
3.03
CLEANING
A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
3.04
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. System acceptance shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Test shall be witnessed by Government contract inspector.
C. Test control sequence for operation.
D. At time of the systems acceptance the contractor shall fill out the Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate and submit for final approval.
E. Backflow preventer assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the International Plumbing Code at the
time of installation. Use attached inspection form and submit for approval.
END OF SECTION
21 13 00 – 6
Hurlburt Field
PWS ID No. 1460782
MS0612
Device
Backflow Prevention Device Inspection and Maintenance Form
Make:
Model:
Serial #:
Date Installed:
Test Date:
Device Location:
New
Orientation
Use
Existing
Previous Device Serial #:
Testing & Maintenance
Domestic
Containment
Vertical Down
Fire
Isolation
Horizontal
Irrigation
Passed
Annual Test
Failed
Line Pressure:
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY
Check Valve No. 2
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
Shut Off Valve No. 2
Protection
Vertical Up
Initial Test
Check Valve No. 1
Size:
Relief Valve
Failed to Open
Opened At
Closed Tight
Leaked
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
Check Valve No. 1
Check Valve No. 2
Against Flow
With Flow
Against Flow
With Flow
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER
Air Inlet Valve
Opened At
Failed to Open
Check Valve
Leaked
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across Check Valve
Tester
Test Kit
Comments:
Test Kit Make:
Model:
Serial No.
Name of Certified Tester:
Tester Certification Number:
Expiration Date:
PASS
Last Calibration
Date:
FAIL
I Hereby certify I have tested the device in accordance with FAC Rule 62-555.330(6) and FAC Rule 62-555.360(2).
Tester's Signature:
Form must be submitted to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of testing.
Date:
MS0114
SECTION 22 05 03: PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Sanitary sewer piping system.
D. Domestic water piping system.
E. Natural gas piping system.
F. Meters
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping.
B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
E. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
F. ASTM A53/A53M - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
G. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
H. ASTM A234/A234M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperatures Service.
I.
ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
J.
ASTM B42- Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes.
K. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
L. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
M. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
N. ASTM D2241 – Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
O. ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
P. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
Q. ASTM D2665 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
R. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
S. ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
T. ASTM D3139 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
U. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.
22 05 03 – 1
MS0114
V. AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
W. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service
X. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances
Y. AWWA C700 - Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case
Z. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
AA. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. through 12 in., for Water Distribution.
AB. CISPI 301 – Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent
Piping Applications.
AC. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Submittal shall indicate where the different piping materials are to be
used. Indicate valve data and ratings.
B. Submit Backflow preventer inspection report and results disinfection samples.
C. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.04
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of piping and valves.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for water
meters, gas meters and regulators.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
1.07
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with
minimum three years experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.
1.08
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with the International Plumbing Code.
B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
1.09
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the
work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.10
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
22 05 03 – 2
MS0114
2.01
SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system.
C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
2.02
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.03
WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.26, cast bronze.
2. Joints: Flared.
WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
2.04
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
2.05
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type.
2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1.
2.06
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under:
1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches:
1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.
C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:
1. Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection,
contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.
2. Sealing gasket: "C" shape composition sealing gasket.
D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier.
22 05 03 – 3
MS0114
2.07
GATE VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single
wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single wedge, flanged or grooved
ends.
2.08
GATE VALVES, BURIED
A. Up to 3 inches: brass or bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc, with control
rod, extension box and valve key. Provide post indicator, where shown on drawings.
B. 3 inches and over: AWWA C500, Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge,
control rod, extension box and valve key. Provide post indicator where shown on drawings.
2.09
BALL VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box
ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle
or gear drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged.
2.10
PLUG VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded
ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged ends.
2.11
BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Bronze body, stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded ends, extended neck, infinite
position lever handle with memory stop.
B. Cast or ductile iron body, chrome plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer or lug
ends, extended neck, infinite position lever handle with memory stop.
2.12
SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
2.13
SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
A. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged
ends.
2.14
RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME
certified and labeled.
2.15
STRAINERS
A. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32
inch stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch
stainless steel perforated screen.
C. Size 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch
stainless steel perforated screen.
2.16
WATER METERS
A. Meters shall conform to American Water Works Association (AWWA) C700 and meet the following
criteria:
1. Positive displacement, oscillating piston, or oscillating disc type.
22 05 03 – 4
MS0114
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Magnetic drive with magnetic shielding.
Straight reading sealed register graduated in gallons.
All bronze split case.
Integral strainer.
Threaded ends.
With pulse switch initiator.
Water meter shall be located in the mechanical room. If conditions require an alternate location, the
location shall be approved prior to installation by the Contracting Officer
B. Water meters must be capable of accurately measuring and handling water at pressure, temperatures,
and flow rates encountered. The pulse initiator will provide the maximum number of pulses, up to 500 per
minute, obtainable from the manufacturer; and not less than 1 pulse per 100 gallons.
C. Water meters shall be capable of providing pulse or digital signals for remote readout. Water meters shall
be compatible with the existing wireless Sensus FlexNet Advanced Metering Infrastructure (FlexNet)
system to include the existing FlexNet tower gateway base station, regional network interface system
components and set to the approved system operating frequency provided by base personnel. Contractor
shall be responsible for programming the meter and ensuring it is communicating with the FlexNet
system.
2.17
SERVICE GAS METER AND REGULATOR
A. Gas meter shall be to mil spec MIL-M-18294, style B, without resettable counter. Gas meters must be
capable of providing pulse or digital signals for remote readout. Gas meters shall be compatible with the
existing wireless Sensus FlexNet Advanced Metering Infrastructure (FlexNet) system to include the
existing FlexNet tower gateway base station, regional network interface system components and set to
the approved system operating frequency provided by base personnel. Contractor shall be responsible
for programming the meter and ensuring it is communicating with the FlexNet system. Pulse switch
initiators will provide the maximum number of pulses per 2.83 cubic meters (100 cubic feet). Meters will
be calibrated and have local readout capability in volumetric units of 100 cubic feet. Meter shall be pipe
mounted and shall be suitable for gas pressure, temperature, and flow rate.
Meters are to be direct reading without having to apply a multiplication factor.
B. The contractor shall provide and install a gas meter by-pass harness to ensure continuous gas flow from
the utility riser to the building natural gas distribution piping when the meter is removed for future
maintenance and calibration Installation shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local codes and
standards.
C. Regulator shall be sized for pressure, temperature and flow rate as required by local gas vendor. Body of
pressure regulators shall be steel.
D. Meter, by-pass harness, and regulator shall conform to the requirements of Okaloosa Gas District, the
local gas vendor.
E. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
2.18
MARKING TAPE:
A. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with type of
service in large letters.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
22 05 03 – 5
MS0114
3.03
BEDDING
A. Excavate pipe trench for work of this Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to
elevations indicated.
B. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at any change of pipe direction on pressure pipe.
Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Provide thrust restraint bearing on
subsoil.
C. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 8
inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent.
D. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact to 95 percent.
E. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density.
3.04
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
D. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
I.
Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 30 in of cover.
J.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply
one coat of primer to welding.
K. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
L. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. Paint exposed
piping (insulated and uninsulated) and supports to match wall/ceiling color.
M. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
O. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with State of Florida code.
P. Provide 6" dirt leg in gas piping system at all low points equipment connections and at meter.
Q. Paint exterior water piping to match the color of the building. Paint interior water piping exposed in
mechanical rooms or in concealed areas blue. Paint exposed interior water piping to match color of
adjacent surfaces. Label per Section 23 05 53.
R. Paint exterior natural gas piping to match the color of the building. Paint interior natural gas piping
exposed in mechanical rooms or in concealed areas yellow. Paint exposed interior natural gas piping to
match color of adjacent surfaces. Label per Section 23 05 53.
22 05 03 – 6
MS0114
S. Install marking tape continuous over top of non-metallic pipe buried 12 inches below finish grade, above
pipe line. Also install tracer wire on top of pipe.
T. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system.
U. Form and place concrete for thrust restraints at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main.
V. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10
feet.
W. Test all underground piping prior to backfilling trench.
X. Installation of PVC pipe is prohibited in return air plenums. Coordinate with HVAC systems.
3.05
INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS
A. Set valves on solid bearing.
B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.
3.06
APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe.
D. Install gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
E. Install ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
F. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
G. Provide plug valves in Natural gas systems for shut-off service.
3.07
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot (one percent) minimum. Maintain
gradients.
B. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.
3.08
DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or
acid (hydrochloric).
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80
mg/L residual.
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of
outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry,
and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
22 05 03 – 7
MS0114
I.
For any water line replacement/installation requiring water samples, the samples shall be collected by a
qualified individual. A qualified individual is a Water and Wastewater Contract Lab samples specialist,
State licensed water operator, or State licensed water distribution operator.
3.09
SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for
sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for
drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide new water service complete with reduced pressure backflow preventer.
1. Provide 18 gage galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch above floor and 6 feet
minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches of loose batt insulation stuffing.
2. Unless approved otherwise, all connections to existing water mains shall be done using wet tapping
methods.
C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators.
3.10
TESTING
A. Test water distribution systems and drainage systems as required by the International Plumbing Code
and AWWA 600. All tests are to be witnessed by the contract inspector. If piping systems do not pass
the tests, contractor shall make corrections and repeat tests at no additional cost to the government.
Repeat until piping systems pass the tests.
B. Test gas piping systems as required by the International Gas Code. All tests are to be witnessed by the
contract inspector. If piping systems do not pass the tests, contractor shall make corrections and repeat
tests at no additional cost to the government. Repeat until piping systems pass the tests.
END OF SECTION
22 05 03 – 8
MS0114
SECTION 22 07 00:
PART 1
PLUMBING INSULATION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories.
B. Plumbing equipment insulation, jackets and accessories.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,
Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
D. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric).
E. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
F. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
G. ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and
Vessel Lagging.
H. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
I.
ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in
Sheet and Tubular Form.
J.
ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
K. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications.
L. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
M. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal
Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
N. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation.
O. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
P. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
Steel.
Q. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal
Insulation.
R. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal
Insulation.
S. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and
120.
T. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
22 07 00 - 1
MS0114
U. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for
each service, and location.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper
installation procedures.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of not
exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters.
C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum
three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
experience.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including
product density and thickness.
C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in
original wrapping.
1.07
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE INSULATION
A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation. Conform to ASTM C795 for application on
Austenitic stainless steel.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing
adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
B. TYPE P-2: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation. Conform to ASTM C795 for application on
Austenitic stainless steel.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
22 07 00 - 2
MS0114
C. TYPE P-3: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, fibrous glass board noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.
Conform to ASTM C795 for application on Austenitic stainless steel.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 650 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type II, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing
adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
D. TYPE P-4: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, fibrous glass board noncombustible. Conform to ASTM C795 for
application on Austenitic stainless steel.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 650 degrees F.
E. TYPE P-5: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F.
F. TYPE P-6: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.30 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F.
3. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 300 degrees F.
G. TYPE P-7: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, nonhalogen, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 250 degrees F.
H. TYPE P-8: ASTM C547, Type I or II, mineral fiber preformed pipe insulation, noncombustible.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F.
3. Canvas Jacket: UL listed, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton fabric treated with fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
I.
TYPE P-90: ASTM C578, Type XIII, extruded polystyrene insulation, formed into shapes for use as pipe
insulation.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 180 day aged value of 0.259 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 297 to 165 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied film of 6 milsthickness and water vapor
permeance of 0.02 perms.
J.
TYPE P-10: ASTM C533; Type I, hydrous calcium silicate pipe insulation, rigid molded white; asbestos
free.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.45 at 200 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 140 to 1200 degrees F.
2.02
PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
A. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
B. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white
color.
2. Thickness: 15 mil.
3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
C. ABS Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
D. Aluminum Pipe Jacket:
1. ASTM B209.
2. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
22 07 00 - 3
MS0114
3.
4.
5.
6.
Finish: Smooth.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
2.03
PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type
40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.
D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length: not less than 6
inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.
E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single piece
construction with self adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.
F. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
G. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M.
H. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
I.
Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
2.04
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. TYPE E-1: ASTM C553; glass fiber, flexible or semi-rigid, noncombustible.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
3. Density: 1.5 pound per cubic foot.
B. TYPE E-2: ASTM C612; glass fiber, rigid board, noncombustible with factory applied aluminum foil jacket.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
3. Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
C. TYPE E-3: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, fibrous glass board noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 650 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type II, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing
adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
D. TYPE E-4: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, fibrous glass board noncombustible.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 650 degrees F.
E. TYPE E-5: ASTM C533; Type II, hydrous calcium silicate block insulation, asbestos free.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.45 at 200 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 140 to 1200 degrees F.
F. TYPE E-6: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, sheet.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 220 degrees F.
2.05
EQUIPMENT INSULATION JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, sheet material, off-white color.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
22 07 00 - 4
MS0114
3.
4.
5.
6.
Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
Thickness: 15 mil.
Connections: Brush on welding adhesive or pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
B. Aluminum Equipment Jacket:
1. ASTM B209.
2. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
3. Finish: Embossed.
4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
C. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
D. Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System:
1. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
2. Glass Fiber Fabric:
a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
c. Weave: 5 x 5.
3. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish:
a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
2.06
EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M.
E. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02
INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire
resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through
assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of
assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour.
C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump
bodies, and expansion joints.
2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with
pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets
with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent
pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
22 07 00 - 5
MS0114
D. Glass Fiber Board Insulation:
1. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to
equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
3. Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to remove surface irregularities.
E. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation:
1. Wrap elbows and fitting with vapor retarder tape.
2. Seal butt joints with vapor retarder tape.
F. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding
staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or
both.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3. Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such
locations.
G. Hot Piping Systems greater than 140 degrees F:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding
staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or
both.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3. Insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
H. Inserts and Shields:
1. Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe hanger and
insulation.
2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and under finish
jacket.
a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining
insulation; may be factory fabricated.
b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range
and service.
3. Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield between roller and
inserts.
I.
Insulation Terminating Points:
1. Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water piping at union upstream of the coil
control valve.
2. Chilled Water Coil Branch Piping: Insulate chilled water piping and associated components up to coil
connection.
3. Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent condensation.
J.
Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation:
1. Push insulation on to piping.
2. Miter joints at elbows.
3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.
4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.
5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.
K. High Temperature Pipe Insulation:
1. Install in multiple layers to meet thickness scheduled.
2. Attach each layer with bands. Secure first layer with bands before installing next layer.
3. Stagger joints between layers.
4. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
22 07 00 - 6
MS0114
L. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished
floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers, ABS jacket and fitting covers, or aluminum jacket.
M. Piping Exterior to Building: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with
insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor
retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of
horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal piping.
N. Buried Piping: Insulate only where insulation manufacturer recommends insulation product may be
installed in trench, tunnel or direct buried. Install factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose
service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with 1 mil thick
aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with
polyester film.
O. Heat Traced Piping Interior to Building: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,
thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer.
P. Heat Traced Piping Exterior to Building: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,
thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size insulation large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer.
Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with
overlap facing down to shed water.
Q. Prepare pipe insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
3.03
INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
A. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
B. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
D. Equipment Containing Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1. Insulate entire equipment surfaces.
2. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to
equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
3. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with
pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets
with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
4. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
E. Equipment Containing Fluids 140 degrees F Or Less:
1. Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor barrier. Finish with
glass cloth and adhesive.
3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
F. Equipment Containing Fluids Over 140 degrees F:
1. Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets.
2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor barrier. Finish with
glass cloth and adhesive.
3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
G. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting
covers or aluminum jacket.
H. Equipment Located Exterior to Building: Install vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced
vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal
equipment.
I.
Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not cover with insulation.
22 07 00 - 7
MS0114
J.
Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and
replacement without damage.
K. Prepare equipment insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
3.04
SCHEDULES
A. Water Supply Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
INSULATION
INSULATION
THICKNESS
PIPING SYSTEM
TYPE
PIPE SIZE
Domestic Hot Water Supply
and Recirculation
P-1
1-1/4 inches and smaller
0.5
1-1/2 inches and larger
1.0
Domestic Hot Water Supply
and Recirculation systems with
domestic water temperature
maintenance cable
P-1
1 inch and smaller
1.0
1-1/4 inches to 2 inches
1.5
2-1/2 inches and larger
2.0
Domestic Cold Water
P-1 or P-5
1-1/4 inches and smaller
0.5
1-1/2 inches and larger
1.0
All sizes
1.0
Deionized Water
P-1 or P-5
inches
B. Drainage Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
INSULATION
INSULATION
THICKNESS
PIPING SYSTEM
TYPE
PIPE SIZE
inches
Storm Piping (horizontal above
ground within building)
P-1 or P-5
All sizes
1.0
Storm Piping (horizontal and
vertical above ground within
building when PVC pipe is used)
P-1 or P-5
All sizes
1.0
Sanitary Sewer Piping (horizontal
and vertical above ground within
building when PVC piping is used)
P-1 or P-5
All sizes
1.0
C. Equipment Insulation Schedule:
INSULATION
EQUIPMENT
INSULATION
THICKNESS
TYPE
inches
Roof Drain Bodies
E-2 or E-6
1.0
Domestic Hot Water Storage Tanks
E-1 or E-2
1.5
Domestic Water Storage Tanks
E-1, E-2, or E-6
1.0
Domestic Water Booster Pump Bodies
E-6
0.5
Water Softeners and Tanks
E-1, E-2, or E-6
1.0
22 07 00 - 8
MS0114
END OF SECTION
22 07 00 - 9
MS0114
SECTION 22 11 19:
PART 1
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Floor drains.
B. Cleanouts.
C. Hose bibs.
D. Backflow preventers.
E. Water hammer arrestors.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.
B. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Wall Hydrants, Anti-Backflow Types.
C. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
D. ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors.
E. PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements.
D. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.04
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts and backflow preventers.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
FLOOR DRAINS
A. ANSI A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible
clamping collar, trap prime, and 8 inch round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer.
B. Mechanical rooms: ASME A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange,
weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and minimum 8” round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer with
extended anti-splash rim.
2.02
CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
B. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with serrated cover in
service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
22 11 19 – 1
MS0114
C. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed
cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
D. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical
rainwater leaders.
2.03
HOSE BIBS
A. ANSI/ASSE 1011; anti-siphon hose bibb with chrome plated wall plate, hose thread spout, handwheel,
and integral vacuum breaker. Exterior hose bibb shall be provided with a rough brass recessed wall box.
2.04
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal
parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm
type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under
back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves,
strainer, and four test cocks.
2.05
WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, pre-charged suitable for operation in
temperature range -33 to 180 degrees F and maximum 150 psig working pressure.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate cutting and forming of floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of
graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain by means of an approved air gap. Install backflow
preventers in an accessible location (i.e. not greater than 5’ above floor and 12” clear space around
backflow preventer, unless otherwise noted).
E. Install water hammer arrestors in an accessible location, complete with isolation valve on hot and cold
water supply piping. Water hammer arrestors are to be installed between the last two fixtures on each
branch line.
F. Provide access doors to all water hammer arrestors that are not accessible.
G. Provide deep seal "p" trap for all floor drains.
H. Backflow preventer assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the International Plumbing Code at the
time of installation. Use attached inspection form and submit for approval.
END OF SECTION
22 11 19 – 2
Hurlburt Field
PWS ID No. 1460782
MS0612
Device
Backflow Prevention Device Inspection and Maintenance Form
Make:
Model:
Serial #:
Date Installed:
Test Date:
Device Location:
New
Orientation
Use
Existing
Previous Device Serial #:
Testing & Maintenance
Domestic
Containment
Vertical Down
Fire
Isolation
Horizontal
Irrigation
Passed
Annual Test
Failed
Line Pressure:
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY
Check Valve No. 2
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
Shut Off Valve No. 2
Protection
Vertical Up
Initial Test
Check Valve No. 1
Size:
Relief Valve
Failed to Open
Opened At
Closed Tight
Leaked
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
Check Valve No. 1
Check Valve No. 2
Against Flow
With Flow
Against Flow
With Flow
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER
Air Inlet Valve
Opened At
Failed to Open
Check Valve
Leaked
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across Check Valve
Tester
Test Kit
Comments:
Test Kit Make:
Model:
Serial No.
Name of Certified Tester:
Tester Certification Number:
Expiration Date:
PASS
Last Calibration
Date:
FAIL
I Hereby certify I have tested the device in accordance with FAC Rule 62-555.330(6) and FAC Rule 62-555.360(2).
Tester's Signature:
Form must be submitted to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of testing.
Date:
MS0114
SECTION 23 05 00:
PART 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 21, 22, and 23 Sections, in addition to
Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.02
WORK SEQUENCE
A. During the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Prime contractor.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable Building Code for the state of Florida.
B. Fire Protection: Conform to NFPA.
C. Plumbing: Conform to International Plumbing Code.
D. The contractor shall perform all demolition, installation, inspection and maintenance of air conditioning
equipment in accordance with the latest Environmental Protection Agency guidance, specifically Title IV
of the Clean Air Act, Amendments Section 608.
E. All personnel servicing air conditioning equipment shall be certified in refrigerant recovery and recycling
by a State of Florida authorized organization.
F. All equipment used in servicing air conditioning equipment shall be certified for refrigerant recovery and
recycling by a State of Florida authorized organization.
G. Any servicing of air conditioning equipment must recover, and if possible, recycle all refrigerant. The only
alternate to this is to recover and dispose of the refrigerant in accordance with the latest and most
restrictive guidance from the Environmental Protection Agency or the Florida Department of
Environmental Regulation.
1.04
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including
changes to Work specified in other Sections. Submit for approval before proceeding.
C. Where existing equipment (i.e. air handlers, chillers, water heaters, etc.) is to remain, the contractor shall
verify condition of that equipment prior to beginning work. If equipment does not work properly,
contractor shall notify government for that item to be fixed or problem to be noted prior to beginning work.
If contractor does not notify government of any problems it is assumed that all existing equipment to
remain is in perfect working order and will be returned in that condition. Contractor is responsible for
protection of existing equipment to remain, and any operation of equipment required while under
construction.
D. When existing air handling equipment is to remain in service during construction the Contractor shall
place temporary construction filters at all return air grilles. These filters shall be removed when
construction is complete. The Contractor shall replace the filters at the unit for all existing and new air
handlers after construction is complete.
E. Project drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all required turns, elbows, transitions, etc. that may
be required due to existing conditions or work done by other trades. It is the contractors responsibility to
provide all such turns, elbows, transitions, etc. and coordinate with other trades as required to provide a
complete and operational system. This shall be done at no additional cost to the government.
F. All mechanical equipment shall be provided with concrete housekeeping pads.
G. All pumps shall be anchored in place.
23 05 00 – 1
MS0114
H. On all air handling and exhaust systems, the Contractor shall provide approved fixed ladder/platform for
maintenance and repair of new equipment installed.
1.05
GAS SERVICE
A. Where gas services are required it is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with local gas utility
(Okaloosa County Gas District). Any charges associate with gas services are the responsibility of the
contractor.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. All warranties shall begin on the day the government takes beneficial occupancy of the project unless
system is placed in operation in several phases at government’s request. When system is completed the
contractor shall submit letter requesting acceptance of that system. Warranty for that system shall begin
on the date it is accepted by the government.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide operation and maintenance manuals and other info as required to be included in project O & M
Manuals per Section 01 70 00 of this specification. Manuals shall contain written instructions for each
system, shop drawings, as-builts, schematic drawings, catalog cuts (submittal information),
manufacturer’s instructions, warranties, and test and balance report as applicable for every section in this
division.
B. Manuals shall be available for review at the time of the final inspection.
1.08
TEST AND BALANCE/COMMISSIONING
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide the services of a third party, independent firm for Test and
Balance and Commissioning.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
23 05 00 – 2
MS0114
SECTION 23 05 01:
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
SECTION INCLUDES
Removal of designated mechanical items.
B.
Removal of designated construction.
C.
Disposal of materials. Storage of removed materials.
1.02
A.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
Submit work plan for outages and temporary services to areas that remain occupied (see paragraph
3.01E).
1.03
A.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to all applicable codes for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical
disconnection and re-connection.
B.
Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit.
C.
Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without approval by base fire department.
D.
Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.
1.04
A.
B.
PART 2
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Conduct demolition to minimize interference with any adjacent and occupied building areas.
Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Contracting Officer. Do not
resume operations until directed.
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
PREPARATION
Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.
B.
Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued
Owner occupancy.
C.
Protect existing materials and finishes which are not to be demolished.
D.
Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring.
E.
Maintain existing mechanical and plumbing systems to any occupied areas of the building. Where
disruption of systems feeding these areas can not be avoided, contractor shall minimize disruption to the
greatest extent possible. Contractor shall submit for approval a work plan that shows how he intends to
minimize disruption and the duration of any anticipated disruption. Contractor shall notify occupants 48
hours prior to any disruption of services. Work may be required to be done over a weekend. Where
duration of disruption exceeds 2 days (unless noted otherwise) the contractor shall provide temporary
services.
F. Where ductwork systems or air handling equipment is to remain in place during demolition and
construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene over openings to prevent
construction dust from entering. Contractor will be required to clean ductwork, air handlers and coils
where this has not been accomplished.
23 05 01 – 1
MS0114
G. Confirm with Contracting Officer’s Representative about disposition of any systems to be retained by the
Government.
3.02
A.
DEMOLITION
Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members and building
components to remain.
B.
Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury
materials on site.
C.
Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean condition.
D.
Where piping, wiring, ductwork and/or equipment are being removed passes through walls, floors,
ceilings or roofs, patch holes to match adjacent finishes. Patch holes in fire rated walls as required to
maintain fire rating.
E.
Where exposed mechanical items are being removed, finish surfaces behind item to match adjacent
surfaces.
F.
Where removal of mechanical items require demolition of existing building components to remain, make
repairs to match construction that was removed.
G.
Remove all controls and electrical associated with the removal of mechanical items unless they are
shown to remain or required for installation of new equipment. Removal shall be back to any existing
panels or devises that remain in operation.
H.
Remove all hangers, supports, and anchors associated with mechanical items being removed. Patch
surfaces to match adjacent finishes.
END OF SECTION
23 05 01 – 2
MS0114
SECTION 23 05 29: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors.
B. Equipment bases, supports, and curbs.
C. Sleeves, seals, and chases.
D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13.
B. Supports for Ductwork: In conformance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and
Flexible.
C. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is
installed according to specified requirements.
D. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration
firestopping.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
G. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
I.
Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180
degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
J.
Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering protective
saddles.
K. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non-conducting saddles in
90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness.
L. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
23 05 29 – 1
MS0114
2.02
HANGER RODS
A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
2.03
INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral
adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger
rods.
2.04
FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.
B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead for waterproofing; one lb/sq ft sheet lead for soundproofing.
C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.05
SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with
steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing:
Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
F. Stuffing or Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
G. Calk: Acrylic sealant.
H. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to
requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance
rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another,
with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.
2.06
FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for
continuous insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
2.07
CHASES
A. PVC chases/conduit run underground or under slabs for the purpose of running refrigerant piping or other
mechanical services shall have wall thickness equal to schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated.
2.08
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers: Galvanized steel band iron or rolled angle and 3/8" (9 mm) rods.
B. Wall supports: Galvanized steel band iron or fabricated angle bracket.
2.09
EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, 1-1/2 inch thick
insulation, factory installed wood nailer. Color to match color of roofing panels on metal roofs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
23 05 29 – 2
MS0114
3.01
INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
B. Provide inserts for suspended hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and side of reinforced concrete
beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface.
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed
square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
3.02
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Support horizontal piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE
1/2 to 1-1/4 inch
1-1/2 to 2 inch
2-1/2 to 3 inch
4 to 6 inch
8 to 12 inch
PVC (All Sizes)
C.I Bell & Spigot
(or No-Hub)
MAX. HANGER SPACING
6'-6"
10'-0"
10'-0"
10'-0"
14'-0"
6'-0"
5'-0"
and at Joints
HANGER DIAMETER
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
5/8"
7/8"
3/8"
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
E. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
F. Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.
H. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
3.03
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond all
floor supported equipment unless detailed otherwise on drawings.
B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
3.04
FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or
waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Seal floor, shower, mop sink and other drains watertight to adjacent materials.
C. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flexible
sheet flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight.
3.05
SLEEVES
23 05 29 – 3
MS0114
A. Install sleeves at all wall, ceiling, and floor piping and ductwork penetrations. Sleeves shall extend a
minimum of 1 inch beyond building element on both sides. Size sleeve to allow minimum of 1 inch void
between sleeve and building element.
B. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Calk sleeves full depth and provide
floor plate.
D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and
adjacent work with stuffing or fire stopping insulation and calk seal air tight. Install chrome plated steel
escutcheon covers where penetration is located in occupied spaces or below finished ceilings. Install
penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturers written installation instructions.
3.06
CHASES
A. Install chases water tight. Caulk both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to
a firm but pliable mass, or provide a segmented elastomeric seal.
3.07
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Duct up to 30" wide - 1" x 16 gauge at 10' spacing.
B. Horizontal duct on wall supports up to 18" wide - 1-1/2" x 16 gauge or 1" x 1/8" at 8' spacing.
3.08
ROOF CURBS
A. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash and
counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach counterflashing mechanical equipment and lap
base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.
B. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks.
Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
3.09
FIRE STOPPING
A. At penetrations through fire rated walls, ceilings, or floors, install fire stopping materials to achieve fire
ratings of adjacent construction.
3.10
FINISH
A. Prime coat steel hangers and supports. Paint exposed steel hangers and supports to match color of
walls and/or ceilings. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and above suspended
ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
END OF SECTION
23 05 29 – 4
MS0114
SECTION 23 05 53: IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Identification of mechanical products installed under Division 23 00 00.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.
C. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
D. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
E. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF
INSULATION OR PIPE
3/4" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 6"
8" - 10"
Over 10"
Ductwork and Equipment
LENGTH OF
COLOR FIELD
8"
8"
12"
24"
32"
-------
SIZE OF
LETTERS
1/2"
3/4"
1-1/4"
2-1/2"
3-1/2"
2-1/2"
F. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel.
G. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and fluid being conveyed.
H. Plastic Tape Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
I.
Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape of not less than
6 inch wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Identification markers/markings shall be applied after application of insulation and/or final painting.
B. Plastic Nameplates: Install with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
C. Plastic or Metal Tags: Install with corrosive-resistant chain.
D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
23 05 53 – 1
MS0114
E. Plastic Tape Markers: Install complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Install 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.
G. Equipment: Identify air handling units, pumps, condensers, exhaust fans, VAV boxes, chillers, tanks,
water treatment devices and any other equipment with plastic nameplates or stencil painting. Small
devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with plastic or metal tags. Equipment shall be identified
as they are shown and scheduled on drawings(i.e. AHU-1, CWP-1, CH-1).
H. Controls: Identify control panels, thermostats, switches, disconnects and other major control components
outside panels with plastic nameplates. Controls should be identified to indicate the piece of equipment
they control and/or purpose of control component.
I.
Piping/Piping Insulation: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers, plastic tape
markers, or stenciled painting. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align
with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,
adjacent to each valve and "T", at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each
obstruction. See applicable sections for pipe painting requirements on applicable services.
J.
Ductwork/Ductwork Insulation: Identify ductwork with stenciled painting or plastic tape markers. Identify
as to type of air (supply, return or exhaust), piece of equipment serving ductwork, and flow direction.
Locate identification on main trunk lines and branch lines at air handling equipment, at each side of a
structure or enclosure penetration, at each obstruction and at a spacing of not more than 20 feet. See
Section on ductwork for ductwork painting requirements.
K. Valves shall be identified with a metal tag that has the valve identification number and a designation as
“NORMALLY OPEN” or “NORMALLY CLOSED” or “THROTTLING.”
END OF SECTION
23 05 53 – 2
MS0114
SECTION 23 05 93: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.
C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
D. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.
E. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
Systems.
B. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
C. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
D. TABB - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 21 days after award of Contract.
B. Submit test and balance reports prior to the final inspection. Include full size drawing (24” x 36”) with test
report indicating the location of all items tested as required.
C. Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data
required.
D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for
Contracting Officer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
E. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing
tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and
equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
F. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project
Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance.
G. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
H. Upon approval of the test and balance report, submit copy of the report in digital (MS Word or
Excel) format.
1.04
SCHEDULES
A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:
1. HVAC Pumps.
2. Boilers.
3. Forced Air Furnaces.
4. Chillers.
5. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers.
6. Packaged Heating/Cooling Units.
7. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units.
8. Unit Air Conditioners.
9. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units.
23 05 93 – 1
MS0114
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Air Coils.
Terminal Heat Transfer Units.
Unit Ventilators.
Fan Coil Units.
Air Handling Units.
Fans.
Air Terminal Units.
Air Inlets and Outlets.
Heat Exchangers.
1.05
REPORT FORMS
A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance or NEBB forms.
B. Forms shall include the following information:
1. Title Page:
a. Company name (Test and balance contractor)
b. Company address
c. Company telephone number
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Contractor (General contractor and Mechanical sub-contractor)
2. Instrument List:
a. Instrument
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date
3. Air Moving Equipment:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Return air flow, specified and actual
f. Outside air flow, specified and actual
g. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
h. Inlet pressure
i. Discharge pressure
j. Fan RPM
4. Exhaust Fan Data:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
f. Inlet pressure
g. Discharge pressure
h. Fan RPM
5. Return Air/Outside Air Data:
a. Identification/location
b. Design air flow
c. Actual air flow
d. Design return air flow
e. Actual return air flow
f. Design outside air flow
g. Actual outside air flow
h. Return air temperature
i. Outside air temperature
j. Required mixed air temperature
k. Actual mixed air temperature
l. Design outside/return air ratio
m. Actual outside/return air ratio
23 05 93 – 2
MS0114
6. Electric Motors:
a. Manufacturer
b. HP/BHP
c. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.
d. RPM
e. Service factor
f. Starter size, rating, heater elements
7. V-Belt Drive:
a. Identification/location
b. Required driven RPM
c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d. Belt, size and quantity
e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM
f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
8. Duct Traverse:
a. System zone/branch
b. Duct size
c. Area
d. Design velocity
e. Design air flow
f. Test velocity
g. Test air flow
h. Duct static pressure
i. Air temperature
j. Air correction factor
9. Air Monitoring Station Data:
a. Identification/location
b. System
c. Size
d. Area
e. Design velocity
f. Design air flow
g. Test velocity
h. Test air flow
10. Air Distribution Test Sheet:
a. Air terminal number
b. Room number/location
c. Terminal type
d. Terminal size
e. Area factor
f. Design velocity
g. Design air flow
h. Test (final) velocity
i. Test (final) air flow
j. Percent of design air flow
11. Terminal Unit Data:
a. Manufacturer
b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
c. Identification/number
d. Location
e. Model
f. Size
g. Minimum static pressure
h. Minimum design air flow
i. Maximum design air flow
j. Maximum actual air flow
k. Inlet static pressure
12. Pump Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Manufacturer
c. Size/model
d. Impeller
23 05 93 – 3
MS0114
e. Service
f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
h. Discharge pressure
i. Suction pressure
j. Total operating head pressure
k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
l. Shut off, total head pressure
13. Air Cooled Chillers:
a. Identification/number
b. Manufacturer
c. Capacity
d. Model
e. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual
f. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual
g. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual
h. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual
i. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual
j. Condenser leaving water temperature, design and actual
k. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual
l. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual
14. Cooling Coil Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
j. Water flow, design and actual
k. Water pressure drop, design and actual
l. Entering water temperature, design and actual
m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
n. Air pressure drop, design and actual
15. Heating Coil Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
f. Water flow, design and actual
g. Water pressure drop, design and actual
h. Entering water temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j. Entering air temperature, design and actual
k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l. Air pressure drop, design and actual
16. Flow Measuring Station:
a. Identification/station
b. Location
c. Size
d. Manufacturer
e. Model
f. Design flow rate
g. Design pressure drop
h. Actual/final pressure drop
i. Actual/final flow rate
j. Station calibrated setting
17. Duct Leak Test:
a. Description of ductwork under test
23 05 93 – 4
MS0114
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Duct design operating pressure
Duct design test static pressure
Duct capacity, air flow
Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
Test apparatus
1) Blower
2) Orifice, tube size
3) Orifice size
4) Calibrated
g. Test static pressure
h. Test orifice differential pressure
i. Leakage
Combustion Test:
a. Manufacturer
b. Model number
c. Serial number
d. Firing rate
e. Overfire draft
f. Gas meter timing dial size
g. Gas meter time per revolution
h. Gas pressure at meter outlet
i. Gas flow rate
j. Heat input
k. Burner manifold gas pressure
l. Percent carbon monoxide (CO)
m. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2)
n. Percent oxygen (O2)
o. Percent excess air
p. Flue gas temperature at outlet
q. Ambient temperature
r. Net stack temperature
s. Percent stack loss
t. Percent combustion efficiency
u. Heat output
Air Cooled Condenser:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Manufacturer
d. Model number
e. Serial number
f. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
g. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
h. Number of compressors
Electric Heater:
a. Manufacturer
b. Identification/number
c. Location
d. Model number
e. Design kW
f. Number of stages
g. Phase, voltage, amperage
h. Test voltage (each phase)
i. Test amperage (each phase)
j. Air flow, specified and actual
k. Temperature rise, specified and actual
Unit Ventilator and Fan Coil Data:
a. Manufacturer
b. Identification/number
c. Location
d. Model number
e. Size
f. Air flow, design and actual
23 05 93 – 5
MS0114
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Water flow, design and actual
Water pressure drop, design and actual
Entering water temperature, design and actual
Leaving water temperature, design and actual
Entering air temperature, design and actual
Leaving air temperature, design and actual
1.06
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents.
B. Accurately record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and certified by AABC MN-1. Perform Work under
supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and
Adjusting Supervisor. All documentation shall be signed by a registered Professional Engineer.
B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC MN-1 or NEBB Procedural Standards
for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
1.08
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before
Substantial Completion of Project.
B. No modifications shall be performed on any factory supplied systems without written approval of the
Government. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer is system modification is required above
standard procedure and practice.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following:
1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Correct fan rotation.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage has been minimized.
12. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Correct pump rotation.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
15. Service and balance valves are open.
B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Contracting Officer.
C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system balance.
D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed.
E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
23 05 93 – 6
MS0114
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available
to Base Civil Engineering (BCE) to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.03
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent
for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated.
B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated.
3.04
ADJUSTING
A. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed condition.
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be
restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has
been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to
electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as
selected and witnessed by the Owner.
F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.
3.05
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air
quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers
and splitters.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary
branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and
total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.
Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full
heating.
L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required
relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure.
M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm
23 05 93 – 7
MS0114
connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature
control.
3.06
WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages to determine flow
rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on
temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.
C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to
thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air
balancing.
D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.
E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not
use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.
F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in
one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.07
COMMISSIONING
A. The commissioning procedures shall be performed as required.
END OF SECTION
23 05 93 – 8
MS0114
SECTION 23 07 00:
PART 1
HVAC INSULATION
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Ductwork insulation.
B. Insulation jackets.
C. Equipment insulation.
D. Covering.
E. Breeching insulation.
F. Piping insulation.
G. Jackets and accessories.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
C. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
D. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
E. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
F. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in
Sheet and Tubular Form.
G. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
H. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
I.
ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications.
J.
ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
K. ASTM C1290 – Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts.
L. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
M. ASTM E2231 - Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess
Surface Burning Characteristics.
N. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in insulation application with three years minimum experience.
B. Insulation, Coverings, and Linings: UL listed; maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, using specimen procedures and mounting procedures of
ASTM E 2231.
23 07 00 – 1
MS0114
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesive and insulation.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Type A: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C1290; commercial grade; 'k' value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu
ft minimum density; 0.002 inch foil scrim facing. Insulation shall be made of at least 20% post consumer
glass cullet.
B. Type B: Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C612, Class 1; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 0.002 inch foil scrim
facing. Insulation shall be made of at least 20% post consumer glass cullet.
C. Type C: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C553; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density;
coated air side for maximum 4,000 ft/min (20.3 m/sec) air velocity. Insulation shall be made of at least
20% post consumer glass cullet.
D. Adhesives: Waterproof fire-retardant type.
E. Indoor Jacket: 6 oz/sq yd canvas.
F. All exterior ductwork shall be factory double wall ductwork and shall be sealed watertight. All exterior
ductwork shall be finished to match the adjacent building components.
G. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to NFPA 255.
H. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage. Secure with epoxy adhesive as recommend by manufacture.
I.
Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.
J.
Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
K. All ductwork insulation systems shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 requirements in addition to the
requirements of this section.
2.02
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. When factory insulation of HVAC equipment is available or is offered as an option, all HVAC equipment
shall be provided with pre-insulated with factory insulation.
B. Type A: Flexible mineral fiber blanket; ASTM C553; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 2.0 lb/cu ft density.
C. Type B: Rigid mineral fiber board; ASTM C612; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 6.0 lb/cu ft density.
D. Type C: Cellular glass; ASTM C552; 'k' value of 0.35 at 75 degrees F; 8.0 lb/cu ft density.
E. Type D: Calcium silicate; ASTM C533; asbestos free; 'k' value of 0.40 at 250 degrees F; 14 lb/cu ft
density.
2.03
EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Bedding Compounds: Non-shrinking, permanently flexible, compatible with insulation. All bedding
compounds shall contain zero VOC’s.
23 07 00 – 2
MS0114
B. Vapor Barrier Coating: Non-flammable, fire resistant, polymeric resin, compatible with insulation. All vapor
barrier coatings shall contain zero VOC’s
C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral wool. All insulating cement shall contain zero
VOC’s.
D. Wire Mesh: Corrosive resistant metal; hexagonal pattern.
2.04
PIPING INSULATION
A. Type A: Glass fiber insulation; ASTM C547, Type I; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; noncombustible.
Insulation shall be made of at least 20% post consumer glass cullet.
B. Type B: Cellular glass; ASTM C552, Type II, Class 2; maximum water vapor transmission rating of 0.1
perms; 'k' value of 0.40 at 75 degrees F.
C. Type C: Cellular foam; ASTM C534, Type I; tubular form, flexible, plastic; 'k' value of 0.28 at 75 degrees
F. All cellular foam piping insulation shall be provided with a metal jacket.
2.05
PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
A. Interior Applications:
1. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints.
2. PVC Jackets: One piece, premolded type.
3. Canvas Jackets: UL listed treated cotton fabric, 6 oz/sq yd.
B. Exterior Applications:
1. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.020 inch thick; smooth finish.
2. Stainless Steel Jackets: Type 304 stainless steel; 0.010 inch thick; smooth finish.
2.06
PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Bands: 3/4 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick galvanized steel.
B. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting mineral wool. All insulating cement shall contain zero
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s).
D. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M. All finishing cement shall contain zero VOC’s.
E. Fibrous Glass Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
F. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation and containing zero VOC’s..
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Install materials after ductwork /piping has been tested and approved.
B. Clean surfaces for adhesives.
3.02
DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below ambient temperature.
C. Exterior Insulation (Type A or Type B) Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or
tape to match jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent
sagging. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop
23 07 00 – 3
MS0114
and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing
wrapping.
D. Liner (Type C) Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical
fasteners on 15 inch centers maximum on top and side of ductwork with dimension exceeding 20
inches. Seal and smooth joints. Do not use nail-type fasteners. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by
mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
2. Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase ductwork to
allow for insulation thickness.
E. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
F. Exposed insulation or ductwork: Where ductwork or insulation is exposed in mechanical rooms or in
finished spaces, paint jacketing to match color of interior finish as approved by architect. Use paint
suitable for substrate and in accordance with manufactures instructions.
G. Where externally insulated ductwork connects to internally insulated ductwork or internally insulated
pieces of equipment ensure there is a thermal break to prevent condensation on internally insulated
items.
3.03
EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.
C. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation, if
necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires , or bands.
D. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
E. Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of insulating cement.
F. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such.
G. When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install
insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.
H. Select insulation types best suited for the equipment which it is to be installed, as recommended by
insulation manufacturer. Insulation shall have a neat appearance and provide protection against heat
loss or gain and condensation. Provide vapor barriers at all equipment below ambient temperature.
Insulation shall be a minimum 2” thick.
I.
3.04
Equipment shall be provided from the manufacture with insulation which has documentation that the
equipment will not condensate.
PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
C. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
E. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not
insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations.
23 07 00 – 4
MS0114
F. Provide an insert, not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation,
between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on piping 2 inches diameter or larger, to
prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating
material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used.
G. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
H. Install preformed insulation, of the same type and thickness, and aluminum jackets, where aluminum
jackets are required, at elbows, tees, valves, etc.
I.
Jackets:
1. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature shall
have standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field applied. Insulate fittings,
joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass
cloth and adhesive. PVC jackets may be used. Excluding Type C insulation.
2. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated dual-temperature pipes or pipes conveying fluids below
ambient temperature shall have vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied. Insulate
fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe, and
finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. Excluding Type C insulation.
3. Indoor, Exposed Applications: For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished
spaces, insulate as for concealed applications. Finish with canvas jacket; size for finish painting. Do
not use PVC jackets. Include on all types of insulation.
4. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jackets. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located
on bottom side of horizontal piping. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material
and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Include
on all types of insulation.
5. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with selfsealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one mil (0.025 mm) thick
aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a
polyester film. Excluding Type C insulation.
J.
Finish Painting: Finish exterior of pipe jackets on all indoor exposed piping to match color of surface
located behind pipes. Finish exterior of pipe jackets on all exterior piping to match color of surfaces
behind piping.
3.05
SCHEDULES:
A. Ductwork
LOCATION
Ductwork Exposed in Mech Rooms or
other finished areas
Ductwork not Exposed (above ceilings)
Air Transfer Ducts
TYPE
B
THICKNESS (INCH)
2” (unless noted otherwise)
A
C
2” (unless noted otherwise)
2” (unless noted otherwise)
B. Equipment
EQUIPMENT
Domestic Hot Water Storage Tanks
Domestic Cold Water Storage Tanks
Domestic Cold Water Pressure Tanks
Heat Exchangers/Converters
Air Separators
Hot Thermal Storage Tanks
Boiler Feed Water Storage Tanks
Steam Condensate Receivers
Condensate Tanks
Stacks to Roof
Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory Insulated)
Cold Thermal Storage Tanks
Chilled Water Pump Bodies
Expansion Tanks
23 07 00 – 5
MS0114
C. Piping
PIPING
Domestic Hot Water
Tempered Domestic Water
Domestic Cold Water
Roof Drains
Chilled Drinking Water
Heating Water Supply and Return
Low Pressure Steam Piping
Low Pressure Steam Condensate
Boiler Feed Water
Chilled Water
Condenser Water
Cold Condensate Drains
Refrigerant Suction
Refrigerant Hot Gas
TYPE
A
A
A
A
C
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
C
C
C
PIPE SIZE,
INCH
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1/2" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
1/2" - 1-1/4"
-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
1/2" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
1/2" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
END OF SECTION
23 07 00 – 6
THICKNESS,
INCH
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
2"
1"
1"
1"
1"
MS0114
SECTION 23 09 23: DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Direct Digital Control (DDC) Systems for HVAC Systems.
B. Software.
REFERENCES
1.02
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation only.
A. AIR-MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSN, INC (AMCA)
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters
B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE, INC (ANSI)
ANSI B40.1 -Gauges-Pressure Indicating Dial Type-Elastic Element
C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
1. ASTM A 269 -Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service
2. ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube
3. ASTM D 635 Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a
Horizontal Position
3. ASTM D 1693 - Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics
D. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)
FCC Part 15 - (Vol II) Radio Frequency Devices
E. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)
FS GG-T-321 - (Rev D; Am 2) Thermometers, Self-Indicating Liquid-in-Glass for Machinery and Piping
Systems
F. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS, INC (IEEE)
IEEE No. 587 - Guide for Surge Voltage in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits
G. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSN (NEMA)
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Incl Rev 1 (1000 Volts Maximum)
H. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC (UL)
1. UL 94 - Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances
2. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.03
A. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
The standard products shall have been in a satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to
bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product
which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be
acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the
manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. The equipment items shall be supported by a service
organization. The Contractor shall submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations and
qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment on a regular
and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
B. Identical Items: Items of the same classification as specified in PART 2 - PRODUCTS shall be identical,
including equipment, assemblies, parts, and components.
C. Nameplates, Lens Caps, and Tags: Nameplates and lens caps bearing legends as shown and tags
bearing device unique identifiers as shown shall have engraved or stamped characters. Nameplates
23 09 23 – 1
MS0114
shall be mechanically attached to HVAC control panel interior doors. A plastic or metal tag shall be
mechanically attached directly to each field-mounted device or attached by a metal chain or wire. Each
air flow measurement station shall have a tag showing flow rate range for signal output range, duct size,
and identifier as shown.
D. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, shall verify
all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing
any work.
E. Drawings: Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the mechanical, electrical,
and finish conditions that could affect the work to be performed, shall arrange such work accordingly, and
shall furnish all work necessary to meet such conditions.
F. Power-Line Surge Protection: All equipment connected to ac circuits shall be protected from power-line
surges. Equipment protection shall meet the requirements of IEEE No. 587. Fuses shall not be used for
surge protection.
G. System Support: The contractor shall provide 1 year of system support for all hardware in the control
system at no additional cost to the building owner. System support shall include trouble-shooting,
calibration, hardware replacement and other required services to maintain fully functioning, calibrated
HVAC control systems. The system support service shall be available 5 days per week between 9 am
and 4 pm. During the 1 year system support period, the contractor shall maintain a duplicate set of
HVAC control drawings. At the owner's option, control problems will be solved by verbal instruction or
on-site correction by the contractor. The number of system support calls and site visits shall be unlimited
during the 1 year support period.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data.
B. Detail Drawings
1. Detail drawings shall be submitted. Detail drawings shall include: a drawing index; a list of symbols;
a series of drawings for each HVAC control system using abbreviations, symbols, nomenclature and
identifiers as shown on the contract drawings; valve schedules; damper schedules; and a
compressed-air station schematic on 34-inch by 22-inch sheets. Detail drawings shall also include:
equipment data, product specific catalog cuts, and an ASME air-storage tank certificate. All detail
drawings shall be delivered together as a complete submittal. Valve and damper schedules may be
submitted in advance but shall be included in the complete submittal.
2. Each control-system element on a drawing shall have a unique identifier as shown.
3. Each series of drawings for an HVAC control system shall include a schematic as shown, a ladder
diagram as shown, an equipment schedule as shown, a wiring diagram, a list of equipment with
manufacturer and model number, a control-panel arrangement drawing, and an HVAC control-system
sequence of operation.
4. The wiring diagram shall show the interconnection of conductors and cables to HVAC control-panel
terminal blocks and to the identified terminals of starters and packaged equipment, with all necessary
jumpers and ground connections. The wiring diagram shall show the labels of all conductors. All
sources of power required for HVAC control systems and for packaged-equipment control systems
shall be identified back to the panel board circuit breaker number, HVAC system control panel,
magnetic starter, or packaged control equipment circuit. Each power supply and transformer not
integral to a controller, starter, or packaged equipment shall be shown. The connected volt-ampere
load and the power supply volt-ampere rating shall be shown.
5. The HVAC control-panel arrangement drawing shall show nameplate legends, fabrication details, and
enclosure operating temperature-rise calculations. Fabrication details shall include interior door front
and rear views, back panel layout and terminal block layout.
6. The sequence of operation for each HVAC control system shall be in the language and format shown
on the drawings. No operational deviations from specified sequences will be permitted without prior
written approval of the Contracting Officer. The sequence of operation shall refer to each device by
its unique identifier.
7. The valve schedule shall include each valve's unique identifier, size, flow coefficient (Cv), pressure
drop at specified flow rate, spring range, positive-positioner range, and actuator size, supported by
close-off pressure data, dimensions, operation rate, and access and clearance requirements data.
8. The damper schedule shall contain each damper's and each actuator's identifier, nominal and actual
23 09 23 – 2
MS0114
sizes, orientation of axis and frame, direction of blade rotation, spring ranges, operation rate,
positive-positioner ranges, locations of actuators and damper end switches, arrangement of sections
in multi-section dampers, and methods of connecting dampers, actuators, and linkages. The damper
schedule shall include the maximum expected velocity through the damper at the intended location
and the maximum leakage rate at the operating static-pressure differential. The damper schedule
shall contain actuator selection data supported by calculations of the torque required to move and
seal the dampers, access and clearance requirements.
9. The equipment data shall be in booklet form, and indexed to the unique identifiers, and shall consist
of data sheets that document compliance with the specification and a copy of each HVAC control
system bill of materials. Catalog cuts shall be in booklet form indexed by device type. Where
multiple components are show on a catalog cut, the application specific component shall be marked.
C. Test Reports
1. The Contractor shall submit 4 copies of the site testing procedures. The site testing procedures shall
identify each item to be tested and shall clearly describe each test. The test procedures shall include
a list of the test equipment to be used for site testing, manufacturer and model number, and the date
of calibration and accuracy of calibration within 6 months of the test date.
2. The Contractor shall submit 4 copies of the site testing data. Original copies of all data produced
during site testing, including results of each test procedure, shall be turned over to the Government
after Government approval of the site tests.
3. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of the performance verification test plans and procedures. The
test plan and procedures for the performance verification test shall be indexed and submitted in
booklet form 60 days before the Contractor's scheduled test dates.
4. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of the performance verification test report after completion of a
successful test. Documentation of test results for the entire HVAC control system shall be submitted
complete, in booklet form and indexed, within 30 days after each test.
D. Training Data
1. The Contractor shall furnish a training course in the maintenance and operation of the HVAC control
systems specified 60 days prior to the start of training. The training shall be oriented to the specific
systems being installed under this contract. One training manual shall be furnished for each trainee,
plus two additional copies delivered for archival storage at the project site. The manuals shall include
the agenda, the defined objectives for each lesson, and a detailed description of the subject matter
for each lesson. Two copies of audiovisual materials shall be delivered to the Government for
archival storage at the project site, either as a part of the printed training manuals or on the same
media as that to be used during the training session.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1. The Contractor shall furnish 4 complete copies of operation manuals for each HVAC control system,
in booklet form and indexed, outlining the step-by-step procedures required for each HVAC control
system's startup, operation, and shutdown. The manuals shall include all detail drawings, equipment
data, each controller's configuration check sheet and manufacturer supplied operation manuals for all
equipment.
2. The Contractor shall furnish 4 complete copies of maintenance manuals, indexed in booklet form
listing maintenance procedures. The maintenance instructions shall include a maintenance check list
for each HVAC control system. Maintenance manuals shall include spare parts data and
recommended maintenance tool kits for all control devices. Maintenance instructions shall include
recommended repair methods, either field repair, factory repair, or whole-item replacement.
3. If operation and maintenance manuals are provided in a common volume, they shall be clearly
differentiated and separately indexed.
F. Operating Instructions
1. Commissioning Procedures shall be provided for each HVAC control system, and for each type of
terminal-unit control system. The procedures shall reflect the language and format shown. The
commissioning procedures shall refer to the devices by their unique identifiers as shown. The
commissioning procedures shall include step-by-step configuration procedures for each controller.
The configuration procedures shall be product specific and shall include a configuration check sheet
showing all configuration parameters, dip switch settings, initial recommended P, I and D constants.
2. The Contractor shall provide 4 copies of Commissioning Procedures, in booklet form and indexed, for
each type of control device provided, such as controllers, pilot positioners, adjustable relays, and
transmitters. Commissioning procedures shall include general instructions on how to set control
parameters, including: setpoints; proportional, integral, and derivative mode constants; contact
23 09 23 – 3
MS0114
output settings for the specific devices provided. Commissioning procedures shall be specific to each
HVAC system, shall detail the steps involved, and shall refer to the procedures in the booklet for
specific devices. Commissioning procedures shall be submitted 60 days prior to system
commissioning.
G. Records
1. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of the calibration, adjustment and commissioning report which
shall include controller setpoints and proportional, integral and derivative-mode constant settings,
calibration data for all instruments and controls, and all the data resulting from adjusting the controlsystem devices and commissioning HVAC control system.
2. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of a list of service organizations qualified to service the HVAC
control system. The list shall include the service organization name and telephone number.
1.05
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Products shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and
dust, and other contaminants, within the storage-condition limits published by the equipment
manufacturer. Dampers shall be stored so that seal integrity, blade alignment and frame alignment are
maintained.
INTEGRATION OF EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS
1.06
A. Where products provided by others are required to interface to the DDC system the Equipment provider
shall be responsible for providing a Bacnet MSTP interface. The Equipment provider is responsible for
providing a product that will properly interface with all specified points exposed and a table of points and
point names to the DDC contractor. The Equipment provider may provide a demo unit to the DDC
contractor for testing. The DDC contractor shall then test the interface and provide the Equipment
provider with feedback that it works, works with deficiencies, or does not work. It is the Equipment
provider’s responsibility to provide a working system. It is the DDC contractor’s responsibility to make
every effort to help verify compatibility and work with the Equipment provider to accomplish a certification
that it will work. Field installation of the Equipment provider’s interfaces will not be acceptable unless this
is approved by all parties before Equipment delivery.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS: The contractor shall provide a Schneider Electric I/A
Network 8000 Direct Digital Control System as specified below.
A. Schneider Electric I/A Network 8000 Direct Digital Control System: Schneider Electric I/A Network
8000 Direct Digital Control System, hereinafter referred to as I/A DDC, shall consist of a G3 Building
Controller with Web page engineering and graphics, Microzone II, MNL or MNB for air handling units,
Microzone II, MNL or MNB for the boiler and chiller, and Variable Air Volume Box Controllers for variable
air volume terminals. The system shall be set up for connection to the Base's dedicated area network,
VLAN 466, this system as specified is the ONLY system that has undergone the stringent CTO/RTO
process. The system shall be complete with all sensors, wiring, software, and hardware to form a
functional HVAC automation system. Sensors, sensor wiring, gauges, thermometers and other
accessories which are not part of the packaged I/A Network 8000 system shall be as specified
hereinafter. Training shall be provided in accordance with paragraph 3.06 TRAINING. Control system
submittals shall be made in accordance with paragraph 1.04 SUBMITTALS. In addition to the hardware
and software required at the building, the contractor shall also provide the following software
development for the existing I/A Network 8000 Host System located in the Energy Management Control
System (EMCS) section of Base Civil Engineering.
1. Graphical Building Representation: A graphical building representation with room names and room
numbers shall be created for the Web based System. The software shall allow logical routing from
the room to the boiler and/or chiller through all intermediate items of equipment. At each level, the
user shall be able to route to the previous display, the next logical equipment item, or the main
building plan. User interface shall be web based for use with roller mouse or digitizer for this
operation. All building related attributes such as room setpoints, occupied schedules, etc. shall be
displayed real-time and accessible from the graphic screen for modification.
2. Graphical System Schematics: A graphical system schematic for each air handling unit, chiller,
pump, boiler, and variable air volume terminal shall be supplied with all sensed parameters displayed.
In addition to the sensed parameters, system schematics including water coils shall display the
chilled water or hot water supply temperature as measured at the chiller or boiler respectively. All
system related attributes such as equipment control setpoints, throttling ranges, operating schedules,
etc. shall be displayed real-time and accessible from the graphic screen for modification.
23 09 23 – 4
MS0114
3. System Support: The contractor shall provide 1 year system support for all hardware and software in
the control system at no additional cost to the building owner. The system support service shall be
available 5 days per week between 9 am and 4 pm. During the 1 year system support period, the
contractor shall maintain a duplicate set of building software on his support computer. At the owner's
option, software problems will be solved by verbal instruction, or on site correction by the contractor.
The number of system support calls shall be unlimited during the 1 year period.
B. Electrical and Electronic Devices
1. All electrical, electronic, and electro-pneumatic devices not located within an HVAC control panel
shall have an enclosure NEMA 1 in accordance with NEMA 250 unless otherwise shown.
2. Standard Signals: The output of all analog transmitters and the analog input and output of all singleloop controllers and function modules shall be 4-to-20 mAdc signals. The signal shall originate from
current-sourcing devices and shall be received by current-sinking devices.
C. Ambient Temperature Limits
1. Actuators and positive positioners, and transmitters shall operate within temperature limit ratings of
plus 35 to 150 degrees F. All panel-mounted instruments shall operate within limit ratings of 35 to
120 degrees F and 10 percent to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. All devices installed
outdoors shall operate within limit ratings of minus 35 to 150 degrees F.
MATERIALS
2.02
A. Tubing
1. Copper: Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88 and shall have sweat fittings and valves. Plastic
tubing shall have barbed fittings and valves. Plastic tubing shall have the burning characteristics of
linear low-density polyethylene tubing, shall be self-extinguishing when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 635, shall have UL 94 V-2 flammability classification, and shall withstand stress cracking
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1693. Plastic-tubing bundles shall be provided with mylar
barrier and flame-retardant polyethylene jacket.
2. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A 269, and shall have stainless steel
compression fittings.
B. Wiring
1. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be insulated, modular, feed-through, clamp style with
recessed captive screw-type clamping mechanism, shall be suitable for rail mounting, and shall have
end plates and partition plates for separation or shall have enclosed sides.
2. Control Wiring for 24-Volt Circuits: Control wiring for 24-volt circuits shall be 18 AWG minimum and
shall be rated for 300-volt service.
3. Wiring for 120-Volt Circuits: Wiring for 120-volt circuits shall be 14 AWG minimum and shall be rated
for 600-volt service.
4. Analog Signal Wiring Circuits: Analog signal wiring circuits within control panels shall not be less
than 20 AWG and shall be rated for 300-volt service.
5. Instrumentation Cable: Instrumentation cable shall be 18 AWG, stranded copper, single or multipletwisted, minimum 2-inch lay of twist, 100% shielded pairs, and shall have a 300-volt insulation. Each
pair shall have a 20-AWG tinned-copper drain wire and individual overall pair insulation. Cables shall
have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield tape, overall 20-AWG tinnedcopper cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation.
6. Non-conducting Wiring: Non-conducting wiring duct in control panels shall have slotted sides, snapon duct covers, fittings for connecting ducts, mounting clips for securing ducts, and wire-retaining
clips.
ACTUATORS
2.03
A. General Requirements: Actuators shall fail to their spring-return positions as shown on signal or power
failure and shall have a visible position indicator. Actuators shall open or close the devices to which they
are applied within 60 seconds after a full scale input signal change. Electric or electronic actuators
operating in parallel or in sequence shall have an auxiliary actuator driver. Actuators shall be electronic.
1. Damper Actuators: Damper actuators shall be rated for at least 125 percent of the motive power
necessary to operate against the pressure shown. The actuator stroke shall be limited by an
adjustable stop in the direction of power stroke. The actuators shall be provided with mounting and
connecting hardware.
2. Valve Actuators: Valve actuators shall be rated for at least 125 percent of the motive power
necessary to operate the valves over their full range of operation against the total and differential
pressures shown.
23 09 23 – 5
MS0114
2.04
AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
A. Valve Assembly: Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and stuffing boxes with extended necks to clear
the piping insulation. Valve bodies shall be designed for not less than 125 psig working pressure or 150
percent of the system operating pressure, whichever is greater. Valve leakage rating shall be .01
percent of rated Cv.
B. Butterfly-Valve Assembly: Butterfly valves shall be threaded lug type suitable for dead-end service, and
for modulation to the fully-closed position, with carbon-steel bodies and non-corrosive discs, stainless
steel shafts supported by bearings, and EPDM seats suitable for temperatures from minus 20 degrees to
plus 250 degrees F. Valves shall have a manual means of operation independent of the actuator.
C. Two-Way Valves: Two-way modulating valves shall have equal-percentage characteristics.
D. Three-Way Valves: Three-way valves shall provide linear flow control with constant total flow throughout
full plug travel.
E. Duct-Coil and Terminal-Unit-Coil Valves: Control valves with flare-type ends shall be provided for duct or
terminal-unit coils. Flare nuts shall be furnished for each flare-type end valve.
F. Valves for Chilled-Water, Condenser-Water, and Glycol Service:
1. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends.
Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze or iron. Bodies for 2inch valves shall have threaded ends. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches shall have
flanged-end connections. Valve Cv shall be 100 percent to 110 percent of the Cv shown. Internal
valve trim shall be brass or bronze except that valve stems may be type 316 stainless steel.
2. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves.
G. Valves for Hot-Water Service Below 250 Degrees F:
1. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends.
Bodies for 2-inch valves shall have threaded ends. Bodies for valves 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches shall
have flanged-end connections. Valve Cv shall be 100 percent to 110 percent of the Cv shown.
2. Internal trim (including seats, seat rings, modulating plugs, and springs) of valves controlling water
hotter than 210 degrees F shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Internal trim for valves controlling water 210 degrees F or less shall be brass or bronze.
4. Nonmetallic parts of hot-water control valves shall be suitable for a minimum continuous operating
temperature of 250 degrees F or 50 degrees F above the system design temperature, whichever is
higher.
5. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves.
2.05
DAMPERS
A. Damper Assembly
1. A single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inches and shall be no higher than 72
inches. Maximum damper blade width shall be 8 inches. Larger sizes shall be made from a
combination of sections. Dampers shall be steel, or other materials where shown. Flat blades shall
be made rigid by folding the edges. All blade-operating linkages shall be within the frame so that
blade-connecting devices within the same damper section will not be located directly in the air
stream. Damper axles shall be 0.5-inch (minimum) plated steel rods supported in the damper frame
by stainless steel or bronze bearings. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust
bearings. Pressure drop through dampers shall not exceed 0.04 inch water gauge at 1,000 fpm in
the wide-open position. Frames shall not be less than 2 inches in width. Dampers shall be tested in
accordance with AMCA 500.
2. Operating links external to dampers (such as crankarms, connecting rods, and line shafting for
transmitting motion from damper actuators to dampers) shall withstand a load equal to at least twice
the maximum required damper-operating force. Rod lengths shall be adjustable. Links shall be
brass, bronze, zinc-coated steel, or stainless steel. Working parts of joints and clevises shall be
brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
3. Adjustments of crankarms shall control the open and closed positions of dampers.
4. Modulating dampers shall be opposed-blade type and two-position dampers shall be parallel-blade
type.
23 09 23 – 6
MS0114
B. Outside-Air, Return-Air, and Relief-Air Dampers: The dampers shall be as shown. Blades shall have
interlocking edges and shall be provided with compressible seals at points of contact. The channel
frames of the dampers shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air leakage. Dampers shall not leak
in excess of 20 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gauge static pressure when closed. Seals shall be
suitable for an operating temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F. Dampers shall be
rated at not less than 2000 fpm air velocity.
C. Mechanical and Electrical Space Ventilation Dampers: The dampers shall be as shown. Dampers shall
not leak in excess of 80 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gauge static pressure when closed.
Dampers shall be rated at not less than 1500 fpm air velocity.
D. Damper End Switches: Each end switch shall be a hermetically-sealed switch with a trip lever and overtravel mechanism. The switch enclosure shall be suitable for mounting on the duct exterior and shall
permit setting the position of the trip lever that actuates the switch. The trip lever shall be aligned with the
damper blade.
2.06
SMOKE DETECTORS
A. FIRE DETECTING DEVICES: Fire detecting devices shall comply with the applicable requirements of
NFPA 72E, NFPA 90A, UL 268, and UL 521. The detectors shall be provided as indicated. Detector
base shall be detachable and have screw terminals for making connections. No solder connections will
be allowed. Detectors shall be connected into alarm initiating circuits. Installed devices shall conform to
the classification of the area. All fire detecting devices and or detector bases with the exception of flame
detectors shall be addressable and shall be dynamically supervised and uniquely identified in the control
panel.
1. Smoke Detectors: Detectors shall be designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities. Smoke
detectors shall be photoelectric type. Detectors shall contain a visible indicator LED that shows when
the unit is in alarm condition. Detectors shall not be adversely affected by vibration or pressure.
Detectors shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains terminals for making all wiring
connections. Smoke detectors shall be addressable and remotely adjustable from the control panel.
a. Duct Detectors: Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed
where indicated. Units shall consist of a Photoelectric Detectors, mounted in a special housing
fitted with duct sampling tubes. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct
detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and shall be UL listed for use
in air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled
from the fire alarm control panel. All LED'S to indicate the operation and alarm condition and the
test and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in
place. Detector mounted above 6 feet and those mounted below 6 feet shall be readily
accessible. Detectors shall have auxiliary contacts to provide control, interlock, and shutdown
functions by the fire alarm control panel. Duct detector shall be addressable and controlled by
the fire alarm control panel. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm vendor to ensure
complete system compatibility.
2.07
INSTRUMENTATION
A. Measurements: Transmitters shall be calibrated to provide the following measurements, over the
indicated ranges, for an output of 4 to 20 mAdc:
1. Conditioned space temperature, from 50 to 85 degrees F.
2. Duct temperature, from 40 to 140 degrees F except that return-air temperature for economizer
operation shall be minus 30 to plus 130 degrees F.
3. Chilled-water temperature, from 30 to 100 degrees F.
4. Heating hot-water temperature, from 100 to 250 degrees F.
5. Outside-air temperature, from minus 30 to 130 degrees F.
6. Relative humidity, 0 to 100 percent for high-limit applications; from 20 to 80 percent for space
applications.
7. Differential pressure for VAV supply-duct static pressure from 0 to 2.0 inches water gauge.
B. Temperature Instruments
1. Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD): Each RTD shall be platinum with a tolerance of plus or
minus 0.1 percent at 32 degrees F, and shall be encapsulated in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel,
anodized aluminum, or copper. Each RTD shall be furnished with an RTD transmitter as specified,
integrally-mounted unless otherwise shown.
a. Continuous-Averaging RTD: Continuous-averaging RTDs shall have a tolerance of plus or minus
1.0 degree F at the reference temperature, and shall be of sufficient length to ensure that the
23 09 23 – 7
MS0114
resistance represents an average over the cross-section in which it is installed. The sensing
element shall have a bendable copper sheath. Each averaging RTD shall be furnished with an
RTD transmitter as specified, to match the resistance range of the averaging RTD.
b. RTD Transmitter: The RTD transmitter shall be selected to match the resistance range of the
RTD. The transmitter shall be a 2-wire, loop-powered device. The transmitter shall produce a
linear 4-to-20 mAdc output corresponding to the required temperature measurement. The output
error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of the calibrated measurement. The transmitter shall include
offset and span adjustments.
C. Relative-Humidity Instruments: Relative-humidity sensing element shall use non-saturating sensing
elements capable of withstanding a saturated condition without permanently affecting calibration or
sustaining damage. Sensing elements shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent of full scale
within the range of 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. A 2-wire, loop-powered transmitter located at the
sensing elements shall be provided to convert the sensing elements output to a linear 4-to-20 mAdc
output corresponding to the required humidity measurement. The transmitter shall be a 2-wire, looppowered device. The output error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of calibrated measurement. The
transmitter shall include offset and span adjustments.
D. Pressure Instruments: The instrument shall be a pressure transmitter with an integral sensing element.
The instrument over pressure rating shall be 25 psig. The sensing elements accuracy shall be plus or
minus 2 percent of full scale. Transmitter accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.25 percent of the calibrated
measurement. The transmitter shall be a 2-wire, loop-powered device. The transmitter shall produce a
linear 4-to-20 mAdc output corresponding to the required pressure measurement. Each transmitter shall
have offset and span adjustments.
E. Thermowells: Thermowells shall be Series 300 stainless steel with threaded brass plug and chain, 2-inch
lagging neck and extension-type well, and inside diameter and insertion length as required for the
application.
F. Sunshields: Sunshields for outside-air temperature sensing elements shall prevent the sun from directly
striking the temperature sensing elements. The sunshields shall be provided with adequate ventilation so
that the sensing element responds to the ambient temperature of the surroundings. The top of each
sunshield shall have a galvanized-metal rainshield projecting over the face of the sunshield. The
sunshields shall be painted white or shall be unpainted aluminum.
G. Water Flow Meters: Flow meter type shall be magnetic type unless drawings allow turbine or ultrasonic
types. All flow meters shall output a 4-20 ma signal. All meters shall have a flow range of 3 to 30 FPS.
Magnetic flow meters shall have an accuracy of 0.2% at 1.64 FPS velocity and have SCADA ready
outputs. Ultrasonic and turbine type meters shall have a +/- 2% accuracy.
H. Meters: Utility meters shall be provided with BACnet interface and a NIPR drop.
THERMOSTATS
2.08
A. Ranges: Thermostat ranges shall be selected so that the setpoint is adjustable without tools between
plus or minus 10 degrees F of the setpoint shown.
B. Space Low Limit Thermostats: Contacts shall be single-pole double-throw (SPDT), hermetically sealed,
and wired to identified terminals. Maximum differential shall be 2 degrees F unless otherwise specified.
Thermostat covers shall be made of locking metal or heavy-duty plastic, and shall be capable of being
locked by an allen-head wrench or a special tool. Thermostats shall have manual switches as required
by the application.
C. Low-Temperature-Protection Thermostats: Low-temperature-protection thermostats shall be manual
reset, low-temperature safety thermostats, with NO and NC contacts and a 20-foot element which shall
respond to the coldest 18-inch segment.
D. Standard Unit Heater and Exhaust Fan Thermostats: Thermostat contacts shall be SPDT and wired to
identified terminals. Thermostat housing shall be a NEMA 4X waterproof enclosure which will tolerate
continuous spraying with water, high humidity, and airborne contaminants. Temperature scale and
adjusting knob shall be mounted on the face of the thermostat such that setpoint adjustment can be made
without tools. Adjusting knob penetration shall be sealed with a lubricated 0-ring or other positive sealing
method to maintain the integrity of the enclosure. Temperature range of thermostats shall be 40 to 100
23 09 23 – 8
MS0114
degrees F. Temperature differential shall be not greater than 3 degrees F. Contact rating shall be
sufficient to switch the connected load.
2.09
PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SOLENOID VALVES
A. Pressure Switches: Each switch shall have an adjustable setpoint with visible setpoint scale. Range shall
be as shown. Differential adjustment shall span 20 to 40 percent of the range of the device.
B. Differential-Pressure Switches: Each switch shall be an adjustable diaphragm-operated device with 2
SPDT contacts, with taps for sensing lines to be connected to duct pressure fittings designed to sense air
pressure. These fittings shall be of the angled-tip type with tips pointing into the air stream. Range shall
be 0.5 to 6.0 inches water gauge. Differential shall be a maximum of 0.15 inch water gauge at the low
end of the range and 0.35 inch water gauge at the high end of the range.
INDICATING DEVICES
2.10
A. Thermometers
1. Ductwork Insertion and Piping Systems: Thermometers for insertion in ductwork and piping systems
shall have brass, malleable iron, or aluminum alloy case and frame, clear protective face,
permanently stabilized glass tube with indicating-fluid column, white face, black numbers, and a 9inch scale.
2. Thermometers for piping systems shall have rigid stems with straight, angular, or inclined pattern,
and shall conform to FS GG-T-321.
3. Thermometer Stems: All thermometer stems shall have expansion heads as required to prevent
breakage at extreme temperatures. On rigid-stem thermometers, the space between bulb and stem
shall be filled with a heat-transfer medium.
4. Air-Duct Thermometers: Air-duct thermometers shall have perforated stem guards and 45-degree
adjustable duct flanges with locking mechanism.
5. Averaging Thermometers: Averaging thermometers shall have 3-1/2 inch (nominal) dial, with black
legend on white background, and pointer traveling through a 270-degree arc.
6. Accuracy: Thermometers shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
Thermometers shall have the following ranges:
a. Mixed-air temperature: 0 to 100 degrees F in 1-degree F graduations.
b. Return-air temperature: 0 to 100 degrees F in 1-degree F graduations.
c. Cooling-coil-discharge temperature: 0 to 100 degrees F in 1-degree F graduations.
d. Heating-coil-discharge temperature: 30 to 180 degrees F in 2-degree F graduations.
e. Hydronic-heating systems below 220 degrees F: 40 to 240 degrees F in 2-degree graduations.
B. Pressure Gauges: Gauges shall have black legend on white, background, and shall have a pointer
traveling through a 270-degree arc. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 3 percent of scale range. Gauges
shall meet ANSI B40.1.
1. Hydronic-System Applications: Gauges for hydronic-system applications shall be 4-1/2 inch
(nominal) size and have ranges and graduations as shown below.
a. Pump Suction - 30 psi range, 1 psi graduations, 5 psi figure interval.
b. Pump Discharge - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
c. Coil Supply - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
d. Coil Return - 30 psi range, 1 psi graduations, 5 psi figure interval.
e. Chiller Inlet and Outlet - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
f. Boiler Inlet and Outlet - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
2. Low Differential Pressure Gauges: Gauges for low differential-pressure measurements shall be 4-1/2
inch (nominal) size with two sets of pressure taps, and shall have a diaphragm-actuated pointer,
white dial with black figures, and pointer zero adjustment. Gauges shall have ranges and
graduations as shown. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of scale range.
2.11
CONTROL DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Relays: Relays shall be 2-pole, double-throw (2PDT) with a 10-ampere resistive rating at 120 Vac, and
shall have an enclosed 120-Vac coil with 11-pin blade connectors, and a matching rail-mounted socket.
Power consumption shall not be greater than 3 watts.
B. Time-Delay Relays: Time delay relays shall be 2PDT with 8-pin connectors, dust cover, and a matching
rail-mounted socket. Adjustable timing range shall be 0 to 5 minutes. Power consumption shall not be
greater than 3 watts.
C. Regulated Power Supplies: Each power supply shall provide a 24-Vdc linear supply at not less than 2
23 09 23 – 9
MS0114
amperes, with regulation to 0.05 percent of output voltage. Each power supply shall have a fused input,
and shall be protected from voltage surges and power-line transients. The power supply output shall be
protected against overvoltage and short circuits. Power supply loading shall not be greater than 1.2
amperes.
2.12
PILOT LIGHTS AND MANUAL SWITCHES
A. Pilot Lights, Illuminated Switches, and Non-illuminated Switches: Pilot lights, illuminated switches, and
non-illuminated switches shall be rectangular devices arranged in a horizontal matrix as shown. Switch
action shall be as shown. Device illumination shall be by light-emitting diode lamp or by neon lamp.
B. Manual Timed Override Switches: Manual timed override switches shall be spring-wound mechanical
type, with timer range as specified on the drawings. Switches shall be furnished with a faceplate with
time intervals permanently etched or engraved in the faceplate at the time of manufacture. Timer knob
shall have a pointer to indicate setting position. Switches shall be suitable for mounting in a standard 2" x
4" outlet box. Contacts shall be rated for 20 amp resistive load at 125 volts. Switches shall be UL listed.
HVAC SYSTEM CONTROL PANELS
2.13
A. Panel Assembly: The panel shall be fabricated as shown, and the devices shall be mounted as shown.
Each panel shall be fabricated as a bottom-entry connection point for control-system electric power,
control-system main air source, control-system wiring, pneumatic tubing, interconnection of control
systems, interconnection of starters and external shutdown devices, and energy monitoring and control
systems (EMCS) interface. Each panel shall have an operating temperature rise of not greater than 20
degrees F above an ambient temperature of 100 degrees F.
B. Panel Electrical Requirements: Each control panel shall be powered by nominal 120 volts ac terminating
at the panel on terminal blocks. Instrument cases shall be grounded. Interior panel, interior door, and
exterior panel enclosure shall be grounded.
C. Enclosure: The enclosure for each panel shall be a NEMA 12 single-door wall-mounted box conforming
to NEMA 250, with continuous hinged and gasketed exterior door with print pocket and key lock,
continuous hinged interior door, interior back panel, and ventilation louvers in back surface as shown.
Inside finish shall be white enamel, and outside finish shall be gray primer over phosphatized surfaces.
D. Mounting and Labeling: Controllers, pilot lights and switches, shall be mounted on the interior door as
shown. Power conditioner, fuses and duplex outlet shall be mounted on the interior of the cabinet as
shown. All other components housed in the panel shall be mounted on the interior back panel surface of
the enclosure, behind the door on rails as shown. Controllers and gauges shall be identified by a plastic
or metal nameplate that is mechanically attached to the panel. The nameplate shall have the inscription
as shown. Lettering shall be cut or stamped into the nameplate to a depth of not less than 1/64 inch, and
shall show a contrasting color, produced by filling with enamel or lacquer or by the use of a laminated
material. Painting of lettering directly on the surface of the interior door or panel is not permitted.
E. Wiring and Tubing
1. Wiring Interconnections: Wiring shall be installed in wiring ducts in such a way that devices can be
added or replaced without disturbing wiring that is not affected by the change. Wiring to single-loop
controllers shall have a 4-inch wiring loop in the horizontal wiring duct at each wiring connection.
There shall be no wiring splices within the control panel. All interconnections required for power or
signals shall be made on device terminals or panel terminal blocks, with not more than 2 wires
connected to a terminal.
2. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be arranged in groups as shown. Instrument signal grounds
at the same ground reference level shall end at a grounding terminal for connection to a common
ground point. Wiring-shield grounds at the same reference level shall end at a grounding terminal for
connection to a common ground point. Grounding terminal blocks shall be identified by reference
level.
3. Wiring Identification: All wiring connected to controller shall be identified by function and polarity, i.e.,
process variable, input, remote setpoint input and output.
F. EMCS Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be provided for connections to EMCS as shown. Analog
signals shall require only the removal of jumpers to interface to EMCS.
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLS
2.14
A. VAV Terminal Units:
23 09 23 – 10
MS0114
B. Terminal-Unit Controls
1. Vav Box Controller: Controls for pressure-independent boxes shall consist of a velocity- sensing
device in the primary air entering the box, a room temperature sensing element, a damper actuator, a
duct temperature sensor, and an adjustable microprocessor-based VAV box controller. Each
controller shall operate a damper for cooling and, if required, a duct coil valve for heating. Actuators
shall open and close the device to which it is applied within 6 minutes. The controller shall be
compatible with the existing Schneider Electric I/A Network 8000 EMCS system. The controller shall
be capable of reading cfm, duct temperature, room temperature, cooling setpoint, and damper
position. Terminal unit controls shall have the requirements of UL 916 and FCC Part 15.
2. Communication-and-Programming Device: One hand-held communication-and-programming device
with instruction manuals shall be provided. The communication-and-programming device shall
connect to the VAV box controller directly or to a jack at the room temperature sensing element
location. The communication-and-programming device shall be used to read and set minimum
velocity, maximum velocity, cooling setpoint, and space temperature.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION CRITERIA: The HVAC control system shall be completely installed and
ready for operation, as specified and shown. Dielectric isolation shall be provided where dissimilar
metals are used for connection and support. Penetrations through and mounting holes in the building
exterior shall be made watertight. The HVAC control-system installation shall provide clearance for
control-system maintenance by maintaining access space between coils, access space to mixed-air
plenums, and other access space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or replace control-system
devices. The control-system installation shall not interfere with the clearance requirements for
mechanical and electrical system maintenance.
A. Device-Mounting Criteria: Devices mounted in or on piping or ductwork, on building surfaces, in
mechanical/electrical spaces, or in occupied space ceilings shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations and as shown. Control devices to be installed in piping and ductwork
shall be provided with all required gaskets, flanges, thermal compounds, insulation, piping, fittings, and
manual valves for shutoff, equalization, purging, and calibration. Strap-on temperature sensing elements
shall not be used except as specified.
B. Wiring Criteria: Wiring external to control panels, including low-voltage wiring, shall be installed in
metallic raceways. Wiring shall be installed without splices between control devices and HVAC control
panels. Instrumentation grounding shall be installed as necessary to prevent ground loops, noise, and
surges from adversely affecting operation of the system. Cables and conductors wires shall be tagged at
both ends, with the identifier shown on the shop drawings, in accordance with the requirements shown in
the electrical division of this specification. Other electrical work shall be as specified in applicable
sections of the electrical division of this specification
C. Controller Output Loop Impedance Limitation: Controller output loops shall be constructed so that total
circuit impedance connected to the analog output of a single-loop controller shall not exceed 600 ohms.
3.02
CONTROL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Damper Actuators
1. Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream.
2. Multiple actuators operating a common damper shall be connected to a common drive shaft.
3. Actuators shall be installed so that their action shall seal the damper to the extent required to
maintain leakage at or below the specified rate and shall move the blades smoothly.
B. Room-Instrument Mounting: Room instruments shall be mounted so that their sensing elements are 5
feet above the finished floor unless otherwise shown.
C. Low-Temperature-Protection Thermostats: For each 20 square feet of coil-face area, or fraction thereof,
a thermostat shall be provided to sense the temperature at the location shown. The thermostat sensing
element shall be installed in a serpentine pattern.
D. Averaging-Temperature Sensing Elements: Sensing elements shall have a total-element minimum length
equal to one linear foot per square foot of duct cross-sectional area.
23 09 23 – 11
MS0114
E. Duct Static-Pressure Sensing Elements and Transmitters: The duct static-pressure sensing element and
transmitter sensing point shall be located approximately two-thirds of the distance from the supply fan to
the end of the duct with the greatest pressure drop.
F. Indication Devices Installed in Piping and Liquid Systems: Gauges in piping systems subject to pulsation
shall have snubbers. Thermometers and temperature sensing elements installed in liquid systems shall
be installed in thermowells.
G. Tubing
1. Control System Installation: The control system shall be installed so that pneumatic lines are not
exposed to outside-air temperatures. All tubes and tube bundles exposed to view shall be installed
neatly in lines parallel to the lines of the building. Tubing in mechanical/electrical spaces shall be
routed so that the lines are easily traceable.
2. Pneumatic Lines: In mechanical/electrical spaces, pneumatic lines shall be plastic tubing or copper
tubing. Horizontal and vertical runs of plastic tubes or soft copper tubes shall be installed in
raceways dedicated to tubing. The dedicated raceways shall be supported every 6 feet for horizontal
runs and every 8 feet for vertical runs. Tubing not installed in raceways shall be hard-drawn copper
tubing with sweat fittings and valves, supported every 6 feet for horizontal runs and every 8 feet for
vertical runs.
3. Connection to Liquid Lines: Tubing for connection of sensing elements and transmitters to liquid
lines shall be copper with brass compression fittings.
4. Connection to Ductwork: Tubing for connection of sensing elements and transmitters to ductwork
shall be plastic tubing.
5. External Tubing: Tubing external to mechanical/electrical spaces, when run in plenum ceilings, shall
be soft copper with sweat fittings, supported every 8 feet. Tubing not in plenum spaces shall be soft
copper with sweat fittings supported every 8 feet or shall be plastic tubing in raceways dedicated to
tubing.
CONTROL SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
3.03
A. General Requirements: These requirements shall apply to all primary HVAC systems unless modified
herein. The sequences describe the actions of the control system for one direction of change in the
HVAC process analog variable, such as temperature, humidity or pressure. The reverse sequence shall
occur when the direction of change is reversed.
1. HVAC System Sequences of Operation: HVAC system sequences of operation shall be as shown on
the drawings and as specified herein.
3.04
COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
A. General Procedure
1. Evaluations: The Contractor shall make the observations, adjustments, calibrations, measurements,
and tests of the control systems, tune the controllers, set the clock schedule, and make any
necessary control-system corrections to ensure that the systems function as described in the
Sequence of Operation. The Contractor shall permanently record, on system equipment schedule,
the final setting of controller proportional, integral and derivative constant settings, setpoint, manual
reset setting, maximum and minimum controller output, and ratio and bias settings, in units and
terminology specific to the controller.
2. Item Check: An item-by-item check of the Sequence of Operation requirement shall be performed
using Steps 1 through 4 in the specified Control System Commissioning Procedures. Steps 1, 2,
and 3 shall be performed with the HVAC system shut down; Step 4 shall be performed after the
HVAC systems have been started. Signals used to change the mode of operation shall originate
from the actual HVAC control device intended for the purpose, such as the time clock. External input
signals to the HVAC control panel (such as EMCS, starter auxiliary contacts, and external systems)
may be simulated in Steps 1, 2, and 3. With each operational-mode change signal, observe that the
proper pilot lights and HVAC-panel output-relay contacts function. Check all terminals assigned to
EMCS and observe that the proper signals are available.
3. Weather-Dependent Test Procedures: Weather-dependent test procedures that cannot be
performed by simulation shall be performed in the appropriate climatic season. When simulation is
used, the Contractor shall verify the actual results in the appropriate season.
4. Configuration: The Contractor shall configure each controller for its specified service.
5. Two-Point Accuracy Check: A two-point accuracy check of the calibration of each HVAC controlsystem sensing element and transmitter shall be performed by comparing the HVAC control-panel
readout to the actual value of the variable measured at the sensing element and transmitter or air23 09 23 – 12
MS0114
flow measurement station location. Digital indicating test instruments shall be used, such as digital
thermometers, motor-driven psychrometers, and tachometers. The test instruments shall be at least
twice as accurate as the specified sensing element-to-controller readout accuracy. The calibration of
the test instruments shall be traceable to NBS standards. The first check point shall be with the
HVAC system in the shutdown condition, and the second check point shall be with the HVAC system
in an operational condition. Calibration checks shall verify that the sensing element-to-controller
readout accuracies at two points are within the specified product accuracy tolerances. If not,
recalibrate or replace the inaccurate device and repeat the calibration check.
6. Insertion, Immersion Temperature Sensing Element: Insertion-temperature and immersiontemperature sensing element and transmitter-to-controller readout calibration accuracy shall be
checked at one physical location along the axis of the sensing element.
7. Averaging-Temperature: Averaging-temperature-sensing element and transmitter-to-controller
readout calibration accuracy shall be checked every 2 feet along the axis of the sensing element in
the proximity of the sensing element, for a maximum of 10 readings. These readings shall then be
averaged.
TESTING, COMMISSIONING, AND COORDINATION WITH HVAC BALANCING
3.05
A. Site Testing: The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies
necessary to perform all site testing, calibration, adjusting and commissioning. Wiring shall be tested for
continuity and for ground, open, and short circuits. Tubing systems shall be tested for leaks. HVAC
control panels shall be pretested off-site as a functioning assembly ready for field connections,
calibration, adjustment, and commissioning of the operational HVAC control system. The Contractor
shall obtain written Government approval of the specific site-testing procedures prior to any test. Written
notification of any planned site-testing, commissioning or tuning shall be given to the Government at least
14 calendar days prior to any test.
B. Control System Calibration, Adjustments, and Commissioning:
1. Calibrate all instrumentation and controls and verify the specified accuracy using test equipment with
calibration traceable to NIST standards.
2. Mechanical control devices shall be adjusted to operate as specified.
3. Control system commissioning shall be performed for each HVAC system.
C. Performance Verification Test: The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance of the HVAC control
system with the contract documents. Using test plans and procedures previously approved by the
Government, the Contractor shall demonstrate all physical and functional requirements of the project.
The performance verification test procedures shall explain, step-by-step, the actions and expected results
that will demonstrate that the control systems perform in accordance with the sequences of operation.
The performance verification test shall not be started until after receipt by the Contractor of written
permission by the Government, based on the Contractor's written certification of successful completion of
Contractor site testing as specified.
D. Coordination with HVAC System Balancing: The Contractor shall tune the controllers after all air-system
and hydronic-system balancing has been completed, minimum damper positions set and a report has
been issued. Commissioning, except for tuning of controllers, shall be performed simultaneous with
HVAC system balancing. The control subcontractor shall be responsible for placing all systems and
subsystems in the correct mode during the performance of HVAC testing and balancing.
E. Posted Instructions: Instructions on 8-1/2 by 11 inch sheets and half-size plastic laminated drawings for
each system showing the final installed conditions shall be placed in each HVAC control panel. The
posted instructions shall include the control sequence, control schematic, ladder diagram, wiring diagram,
valve schedules, damper schedules, panel arrangement drawings, commissioning procedures, controller
configuration check sheet with final configuration record, preventive maintenance instructions and singleloop controller operators manual. Additionally, half-size drawings showing the mechanical floor plan duct
distribution and VAV box location shall be posted in each mechanical room.
3.06
TRAINING
A. Training-Course Requirements: A training course shall be conducted for 6 operating staff members
designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period, for a total of 32 hours of normal working time,
shall be conducted within 30 days after successful completion of the performance verification test. The
Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all audiovisual equipment and 6 sets of all other training
materials and supplies. A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction, including two 15minute breaks and excluding lunchtime, Monday through Friday, during the daytime shift in effect at the
23 09 23 – 13
MS0114
training facility. The Contractor shall submit an outline for the course, with a proposed time schedule.
Approval of the planned training schedule shall be obtained from the Government at least 30 days prior to
the start of the training.
B. Training-Course Content: For guidance in planning the required instruction, the Contractor should
assume that attendees will have a high school education or equivalent, and are familiar with HVAC
systems. The training course shall cover all of the material contained in the Operating and Maintenance
Instructions, the layout and location of each HVAC control panel, the layout of one of each type of unitary
equipment and the locations of each, the location of each system-control device external to the panels,
preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, calibration, adjustment, commissioning, tuning,
and repair procedures. Typical systems and similar systems may be treated as a group, with instruction
on the physical layout of one such system. The results of the performance verification test and the
calibration, adjustment and commissioning report shall be presented as benchmarks of HVAC controlsystem performance by which to measure operation and maintenance effectiveness.
QUALITY CONTROL
3.07
A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under this section to assure
compliance with contract requirements and maintain records of his quality control for materials,
equipment, and construction operations.
END OF SECTION
23 09 23 – 14
MS0114
SECTION 23 21 13:
PART 1
HYDRONIC PIPING
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Heating water piping system.
D. Chilled water piping system.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300.
D. ASME B16.18 – Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
E. ASME B16.22 – Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
F. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
G. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
H. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
I.
ASTM A 47/A 47M – Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
J.
ASTM A 53/A 53M - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless
K. ASTM A183 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
L. ASTM A 234/A 234M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
Temperatures.
M. ASTM A536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
N. ASTM B 32 - Solder Metal.
O. ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
P. ASTM C 591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation
Q. ASTM D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials For Wire and Cable
R. ASTM D 1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
S. ASTM D 2235 - Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
T. ASTM D 2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
U. ASTM D 2310 - Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe.
V. ASTM D 2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
W. ASTM D 2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
23 21 13 – 1
MS0114
X. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems.
Y. ASTM D 2680 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Composite-Sewer Piping.
Z. ASTM D 2683 - Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe
and Tubing.
AA. ASTM D 2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
AB. ASTM D 2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings.
AC. ASTM F 477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.
AD. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
AE. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
AF. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids.
AG. AWWA C110 - Ductile - Iron and Gray - Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids.
AH. AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
AI. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or
Other Liquids.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ASME B31.9.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC 9.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
C. Include welders certification of compliance with ASME SEC 9.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
HEATING WATER PIPING, BURIED
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black with AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket, or double
layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape.
1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding type with double layer, half-lapped 10 mil
polyethylene tape.
2. Joints: AWS D1.1, welded.
3. Polyurethane insulation with high density polyethylene jacket and heat shrink sleeves.
HEATlNG WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND
2.02
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black.
1. Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings: Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi
23 21 13 – 2
MS0114
service. Welded fittings are not acceptable. Malleable iron conforming to ATM A 47/A 47M, Grade
32510. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket – flush type, fill entire cavity.
Nuts and bolts – heat treated, ASTM A 183, cadmium plated or zinc electroplate. Factory pre-formed
insulation shall be provided for these fittings.
2. Non-Grooved Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel
welding type fittings. Joints: Screwed, or AWS D1.1, welded.
B. Copper tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast, brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper.
2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range of 430 to
535 degrees F.
2.03
A.
CHILLED WATER PIPING, BURIED
Plastic PVC carrier pipe, fittings, and cement: ASTM D 1785 pipe, ASTM D 2466 socket type fittings,
and ASTM D 2564 solvent cement shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Pipe, fittings, flanges,
and couplings shall have solvent cement socket end connections, except piping beyond 5 feet out of
buildings shall have O-ring connections. Plastic PVC piping shall be suitable for working pressure of
125 psig at 75 degrees F.
B.
Flanged connections: Provide flat face flanged connections between plastic piping and metal piping.
Plastic flanges shall be suitable for connecting to ASME Class 150 flanges.
C.
O-rings connections: Provide between straight sections of pipe beyond 5 feet from exterior of building.
D.
Insulation: Factory installed, rigid, 90-95% closed cell polyurethane, foamed in place, with minimum 1.5
inch annular space between pipe jacket completely filled. Foam to comply with ASTM C 591.
Insulation conductivity (K) equals 0.14 (Btu-in/hr/sq. ft/degree F) per inch thickness at 50 degrees F.
Jacketing material shall be high density polyethylene per ASTM D 1248 with a minimum thickness of
0.060 inches. Field joints shall be insulated with polyurethane as specified above and sealed water tight
using fusion welded or heat shrink joint covers. Insulation and jacketing to be factory installed on the
carrier pipe.
CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
2.04
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black.
1. Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings: Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi
service. Welded fittings are not acceptable. Malleable iron conforming to ATM A 47/A 47M, Grade
32510. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket – flush type, fill entire cavity.
Nuts and bolts – heat treated, ASTM A 183, cadmium plated or zinc electroplate. Factory pre-formed
insulation shall be provided for these fittings.
2. Non Grooved Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel
welding type. Joints: Screwed for pipe 2 inch and under; AWS D1.1 welded for pipe over 2 inch.
B. Copper tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast, brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper.
2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range of 430 to
535 degrees F.
2.05
EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 galvanized.
1. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or ASME B16.3 malleable iron.
2. Joints: Screwed, or grooved mechanical couplings.
B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D 2241, SDR 21 or 26.
1. Fittings: ASTM D 2466 or D 2467, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld.
C. ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2680 or ASTM D 2751.
1. Fittings: ASTM D 2751.
2. Joints: ASTM D 2235, solvent weld.
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
2.06
A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions
23 21 13 – 3
MS0114
for copper pipe, soldered joints.
B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping.
C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,
designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; C-shape elastomer composition
sealing gasket for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F; steel bolts, nuts,
and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe.
D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier.
GATE VALVES
2.07
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc,
solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, single wedge, flanged or grooved
ends.
GLOBE VALVES
2.08
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable
composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends,
renewable seat and disc.
BALL VALVES
2.09
A. Up to 2 inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever
handle, solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle,
flanged.
PLUG COCKS
2.10
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends, with
one wrench operator for every ten plug cocks.
B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends, with wrench
operator with set screw.
2.11
BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 180 degrees F, wafer or lug ends,
extended neck, 10 position lever handle.
2.12
SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder or screwed ends.
B. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
2.13
A. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or flanged
ends.
RELIEF VALVES
2.14
A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities
ASME certified and labeled.
PART 3
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
3.01
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
23 21 13 – 4
MS0114
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. After completion, fill, clean, and chemically treat systems. See Section 23 25 00.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. Wherever possible install valves in readily
accessible locations not more than 2 feet above ceilings or 6 feet above floor in mechanical spaces.
D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings.
F. Provide access panels where valves and fittings are not exposed.
G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of
pipe level.
H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply
one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
I.
Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting.
J.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Install valves so they can be accessed from
the floor wherever possible or in an easily accessible location.
K. Install metallic tape buried continuously along the full length of any buried nonmetallic piping, 12 inches
below surface. The tape shall have a metallic center of aluminum foil, coated on both sides with
polyethylene.
L. Paint exterior hot water piping to match the color of the building. Paint exposed interior hot water piping
to match color of adjacent surfaces. To be applied after insulation installation. Label per Section 23 05 53.
M. Paint exterior chilled water piping to match the color of the building. Paint exposed interior chilled water
piping to match color of adjacent surfaces. To be applied after insulation installation. Label per Section 23
05 53.
3.03
APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Provide non-conducting
dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Install gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
D. Install plug cocks for throttling service.
E. Provide 3/4 inch gate drain valves with threaded hose connections at main shut-off valves, low points of
piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment and at isolation valves so that equipment or sections of
piping can be drained without draining complete system.
3.04
TESTING
A. When additions or modifications are made to an existing hydronic system the Contractor shall test the
existing system before modifications are made. Test the existing system as detailed in paragraph B. The
results of the test shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer’s Inspector and any deficiencies shall be
23 21 13 – 5
MS0114
reported in writing to the Contracting Officer.
B. Hydrostatically test all hydronic piping systems by applying a water pressure of not less than 100 psi or 11/2 times the operating pressure whichever is greater. The pressure shall be maintained for 4 hours,
during which all joints shall be inspected for leaks. . All tests are to be witnessed by the contract
inspector. If piping systems do not pass, contractor shall make corrections and repeat tests at no
additional cost to the government. Repeat until piping systems pass the tests.
END OF SECTION
23 21 13 – 6
MS0114
SECTION 23 21 16:
PART 1
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Expansion tanks.
B. Chilled water storage tanks
C. Air vents.
D. Air separators.
E. Strainers.
F. Pump suction fittings.
G. Combination fittings.
H. Flow indicators, controls, meters.
I.
Relief valves.
J.
Pressure reducing valves
K. Flexible connectors
L. Backflow preventer.
M. Water Meters.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASME Section VIII - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Pressure Vessels.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of tanks.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this
project.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions of tanks, materials of construction, tank lining methods, anchors,
attachments, lifting points, taps, and drains.
C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description,
and model.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.06
A. Conform to ASME Section VIII for construction of potable water storage tanks. Provide tanks registered
with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
EXPANSION TANKS
A. Construction: Closed, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ASME Code;
23 21 16 – 1
MS0114
100 psi rating; cleaned, prime coated, and supplied with steel support saddles; with tappings for
installation of accessories.
B. Gage Glass Set: Brass compression stops, guard, and 3/4 inch glass, maximum 24 inches length, long
enough to cover tank for 2 inches above bottom to 2 inches below top.
C. Quick Connect Air Inlet: Automotive tire valve type, manual air vent, tank drain, and pressure relief valve.
D. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double check back flow
preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass.
2.02
DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS
A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code;
supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible Diaphragm
sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.
B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psig.
2.03
CHILLED WATER STORAGE TANK
A. Tank: Welded steel, ASME labeled for working pressure of 125 psig, steel support saddles, taps for
accessories, threaded connections, access manhole.
B. Accessories: Tank drain, water inlet and outlet.
C. Vertical or Horizontal storage tank per drawings, sized as indicated on drawings.
D. Insulation: Factory furnished 3 inch glass fiber insulation with steel or aluminum jacket.
2.04
AIR VENTS
A. Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for
system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.
2.05
AIR SEPARATORS
A. In-line Air Separators: Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch and larger;
tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ASME Code; for 125 psig operating pressure.
2.06
STRAINERS
A. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32
inch stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch
stainless steel perforated screen.
2.07
PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS
A. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 inch and larger,
rated for 175 psig working pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings,
disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet located in flow stream
and removable for cleaning.
B. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side.
2.08
COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES
A. Valves: Straight or angle pattern, flanged cast-iron valve body with bolt-on bonnet for 175 psig operating
pressure, non-slam check valve with spring-loaded bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem, and
calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation.
2.09
CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVES
A. Cast iron or bronze, globe style, balance valve with handwheel with vernier type ring setting and memory
stop, readout valves equipped with integral check valves and gasketed caps.
B. Calibrated, plug type balance valve with precision machined orifice, readout valves equipped with integral
check valves and gasketed caps, calibrated nameplate and indicating pointer.
23 21 16 – 2
MS0114
C. Provide calibrated balancing charts or calculators to determine fluid flow rate for each valve. Submit
copies of each in the O & M manual.
2.10
AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES
A. Ductile-iron body with pressure ports, stainless steel flow control cartridge. Cartridge shall have
segmented ports through which water passes. Cartridge movement shall result in shearing action that will
dislodge or shear any particle that tends to get stuck in port.
B. Valves shall control flow to within plus/minus 5 percent of design. Flow curve shall be smooth over its
entire nominal control range.
2.11
RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities
ASME certified and labeled.
2.12
PRESSURE REDUCING VAVLES
A. Bronze or cast iron body, stainless or chrome steel valve spring, stem, and trim, phosphor bronze
diaphragm, direct acting, threaded 2 inches and smaller, flanged 2 inches and larger.
2.13
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Steel Piping: Stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve.
B. Copper Piping: Bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleave.
C. Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection.
2.14
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal
parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm
type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under
back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves,
strainer, and four test cocks.
2.15
WATER METERS
A. AWWA C700, positive displacement disc type suitable for fluid with bronze case and cast iron bottom
cap, straight reading, hermetically sealed register, magnetic drive with low flow indicator, graduated in
gallons.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance.
B. Support tanks inside building from building structure.
C. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.
D. Provide automatic air vents at system high points and as indicated. Install isolation valves at all automatic
air vent.
E. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest
drain.
F. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank.
G. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.
H. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps. Remove temporary
strainers after cleaning systems.
23 21 16 – 3
MS0114
I.
Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of base mounted centrifugal pumps.
J.
Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.
K. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and
expansion tanks.
L. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity.
Select equipment relief valve capacity not to exceed rating of connected equipment.
M. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.
N. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain by means of an approved air gap. Install backflow
preventers in an accessible location (i.e. not greater than 5’ above floor and 12” clear space around
backflow preventer, unless otherwise noted).
O. Install water meters on all make-up water connections. Meters shall have totalizer register.
P. Backflow preventer assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the International Plumbing Code at the
time of installation. Use attached inspection form and submit for approval.
Q. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation.
R. All make-up water connections shall be equipped with a reduced pressure type backflow preventor.
END OF SECTION
23 21 16 – 4
Hurlburt Field
PWS ID No. 1460782
MS0114
Device
Backflow Prevention Device Inspection and Maintenance Form
Make:
Model:
Serial #:
Date Installed:
Test Date:
Device Location:
New
Orientation
Use
Existing
Previous Device Serial #:
Testing & Maintenance
Domestic
Containment
Vertical Down
Fire
Isolation
Horizontal
Irrigation
Passed
Annual Test
Failed
Line Pressure:
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY
Check Valve No. 2
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
Shut Off Valve No. 2
Protection
Vertical Up
Initial Test
Check Valve No. 1
Size:
Relief Valve
Failed to Open
Opened At
Closed Tight
Leaked
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
Check Valve No. 1
Check Valve No. 2
Against Flow
With Flow
Against Flow
With Flow
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER
Air Inlet Valve
Opened At
Failed to Open
Check Valve
Leaked
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across Check Valve
Tester
Test Kit
Comments:
Test Kit Make:
Model:
Serial No.
Name of Certified Tester:
Tester Certification Number:
Expiration Date:
PASS
Last Calibration
Date:
FAIL
I Hereby certify I have tested the device in accordance with FAC Rule 62-555.330(6) and FAC Rule 62-555.360(2).
Tester's Signature:
Form must be submitted to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of testing.
Date:
MS0114
SECTION 23 31 00:
PART 1
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Ductwork.
B. Casings.
C. Kitchen hood ductwork.
D. Duct cleaning.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE - Handbook Fundamentals; Chapter 34 - Duct Design.
B. ASHRAE - Handbook HVAC Systems and Equipment; Chapter 16 - Duct Construction.
C. ASTM A90/A90M – Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with
Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
D. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
E. ASTM A653/A653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Allow-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
G. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
H. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
I.
NFPA 96 - Standard for the Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooling Operations.
J.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
K. SMACNA – HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
L. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit results of duct leakage testing.
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and NFPA 96 standards.
1.06
QUALTIY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181.
B. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, G90 zinc
coating in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M.
23 31 00 – 1
MS0114
C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock:
Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Polyester film supported by helical-wound spring steel wire; fiberglass
insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film.
1.
Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1 inches wg negative.
2.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3.
Temperature Range: 0 degrees F to 250 degrees F.
4.
Thermal Resistance: 6.0 square feet-hour-degree F per BTU.
E. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 304.
F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
G. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone
or with tape, or heavy mastic.
H. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
2.02
DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and
Flexible and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and
sealing for operating pressures indicated. If not indicated otherwise, supply and return duct and ductwork
downstream of VAV boxes shall be constructed to 1” pressure classification with a seal class C and a
leakage classification of 24 for rectangular ducts and 12 for round ducts. Ductwork upstream of VAV
boxes shall be constructed to 2” pressure classification, unless otherwise noted, with a seal class C and a
leakage classification of 24 for rectangular ducts and 12 for round ducts. Ductwork indicated to be
constructed to a pressure class of 3” shall be constructed with a seal class B and a leakage classification
of 12 for rectangular ducts and 6 for round ducts. Ductwork indicated to be constructed to a pressure
class of 4”, 6” or 10” shall be constructed with a seal class A and a leakage classification of 6 for
rectangular ducts and 3 for round ducts.
B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent
rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written
permission.
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline.
Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical
lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence
upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45
degrees.
E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements
exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.
F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus draw bands.
G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
H. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated
in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inches cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat
welded joints.
I.
Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye
takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.
2.03
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS
A. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lock seam duct constructed of galvanized steel.
23 31 00 – 2
MS0114
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
26
24
22
20
18
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 60 inches
62 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
24
22
20
20
18
16
2.04
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL FLAT OVAL DUCTS
A. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct constructed of galvanized steel;
rated for 10 inches wg pressure.
B. Joints: Either fully welded or bolted flange with gasket material in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. Construct duct with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
7 inches to 24 inches
25 inches to 48 inches
50 inches to 70 inches
72 inches to 82 inches
84 inches and larger
Gauge
24
22
20
18
16
D. Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
Gauge
7 inches to 36 inches
20
37 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches and larger
16
2.05
DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED ROUND DUCTS
A. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct with light reinforcing corrugations,
galvanized steel outer wall, 1 inch thick glass fiber insulation (0.27 Btu/hr/ft2/°F), perforated galvanized
steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
26
24
22
20
18
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 60 inches
62 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
24
22
20
20
18
16
23 31 00 – 3
MS0114
2.06
DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED FLAT OVAL DUCTS
A. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct with light reinforcing corrugations,
galvanized steel outer wall, 1 inch thick glass fiber insulation (0.27 Btu/hr/ft2/°F), perforated galvanized
steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
7 inches to 24 inches
25 inches to 48 inches
50 inches to 70 inches
72 inches to 82 inches
84 inches and larger
Gauge
24
22
20
18
16
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
Gauge
7 inches to 36 inches
20
37 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches and larger
16
2.07
DOUBLE WALL DUCT, EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS
A. All ductwork located outside the building shall be factory doublewall ductwork and it shall be sealed
watertight.
B. The double wall duct shall be 2” thick and internally insulated with a minimum of 2” thick, 1.75 pounds per
cubic foot glass fiber insulation.
C. The ductwork shall be round, flat oval or rectangular as indicated on the drawings.
D. Ductwork interior and exterior wall shall be factory fabricated from aluminum in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards. Ductwork shall be supported in accordance with SMACNA
standards.
2.08
CASINGS
A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and construct for
operating pressures indicated.
B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to
angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal
mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields.
C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install
hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection.
D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back facing and 22 gage
perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches
thick packed with 4.5 lb/cu ft minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.
2.09
KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and NFPA 96.
B. Exposed Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts: Construct of stainless steel ASTM A167, type 304 using
continuous external welded joints.
C. Concealed Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts: Construct of 16 gage carbon steel or 18 gage stainless steel
ASTM A167, type 304 using continuous external welded joints.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide
pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or
23 31 00 – 4
MS0114
screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install
insulation material inside a metal ring.
B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance
activities.
C. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door
in closed position.
D. Connect terminal units directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct
to change direction.
E. Connect diffusers or troffer boots with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or
clamp.
F. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for cleanout.
Use stainless steel or painted galvanized steel for ductwork exposed to view and stainless steel or
galvanized steel for ducts where concealed.
G. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to
prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
H. All exposed spiral round or flat oval duct shall be double wall insulated duct.
I.
Exposed ductwork shall be painted to match ceiling, roof structure, or as otherwise specified.
J.
The ductwork shall have balance dampers where the branch ducts connect to main trunk.
3.02
DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM
MATERIAL
Supply Air
Steel, Aluminum
Return and Relief
Steel, Aluminum
General Exhaust
Steel, Aluminum
Kitchen Hood Exhaust
Steal, Stainless Steel
Dishwasher Exhaust
Stainless Steel
Fume Hood Exhaust
Stainless Steel
Outside Air Intake
Steel
Combustion Air
Steel
Exterior Ductwork
Aluminum
3.03
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain
sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt
with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
3.04
TESTING
A. A leakage test shall be made of ductwork in each pressure classification, to demonstrate adequacy of
construction tightness. Each section shall incorporate at least: 5 transverse joints, typical seams, one
elbow, one fire damper, one access door, and 2 typical branch connections. Leakage testing shall be
performed in accordance with sections 3 and 5 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
Leakage in each type ductwork shall not exceed leakage classes identified in paragraphs 2.02A and
2.03A above. Test shall be witnessed by the contract inspector and test results submitted for approval.
23 31 00 – 5
MS0114
END OF SECTION
23 31 00 – 6
MS0114
SECTION 23 33 00:
PART 1
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Volume control dampers.
B. Fire dampers.
C. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
D. Backdraft dampers.
E. Air turning devices.
F. Flexible duct connections.
G. Duct access doors.
H. Duct test holes.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AMCA 500 – Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
C. NFPA 92A – Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
E. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
F. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
G. UL 555C – Safety for Ceiling Dampers.
H. UL 555S – Safety for Smoke Dampers.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements.
B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two
gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches.
C. Fabricate splitter dampers of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with
continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint
action flanged bushing with set screw.
D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inches.
E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inches.
Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable
hardware.
23 33 00 – 1
MS0114
F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers,
provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.
I.
Outside air damper leakage shall be a maximum of 3 CFM per square foot. Damper leakage shall be
tested in accordance with AMCA 500.
2.02
FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, NFPA 92A, UL 555, UL555S, UL555C and as indicated.
B. Fabricate ceiling firestop flaps of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch
ceramic fiber on top side, and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip.
C. Fabricate ceiling dampers of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and light
weight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket closure.
D. Fabricate curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel
closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for
low pressure ducts up to 12 inches in height.
E. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated
bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed
linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock.
F. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for combination
fire/balancing dampers.
2.03
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18/x/18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be
air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.
B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 16 gage galvanized steel, or
extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked
together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin;
adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.04
AIR TURNING DEVICES
A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with
individually adjustable blades, and mounting straps.
B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum
construction, with push-pull operator strap.
2.05
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz
per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip.
2.06
DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.
B. Duct access doors shall be provided at all fire dampers and duct mounted mechanical equipment.
C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking
devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.
23 33 00 – 2
MS0114
E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two
compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional
hinge for larger sizes.
F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.07
DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded
plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide
extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide balancing dampers where indicated and at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust
systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Contractor shall
provide and install as many balancing dampers as required for proper balancing of the air system
regardless of whether they are shown on the drawings. All dampers shown on the drawings shall be
provided. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
C. Provide balancing dampers on medium and high pressure systems where indicated.
D. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components.
Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant
springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
E. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative.
F. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.
G. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment.
H. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic
dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access,
18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, or as indicated.
I.
Provide duct test holes where indicated or required for testing and balancing purposes.
END OF SECTION
23 33 00 – 3
MS0114
SECTION 23 36 00:
PART 1
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Variable volume terminal units.
B. Variable volume regulators.
C. Integral sound attenuator.
D. Integral heating coils.
E. Integral damper motor operators.
F. Integral controls.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ARI 880 – Air Terminals.
B. ARI 885 – Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets.
C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
D. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication.
C. Submit product data.
D. Submit product data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication.
Include catalog performance ratings which indicate air flow, static pressure, and NC designation.
E. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second through sixth
octave bands at inlet static pressures of one to 4 inch wg.
F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate air terminal units performance for air pressure drop, flow performance, and
acoustical performance in accordance with ARI 880 and ARI 885. Attach ARI seal to each terminal
unit.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and
parts lists.
C. Include directions for resetting constant volume regulators.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with
minimum eight years experience.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
23 36 00 – 1
MS0114
2.01
MANUFACTURED UNITS; VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV)
A. VAV and dual duct terminal units shall be the type, size, and capacity shown and shall be mounted in the
ceiling or wall cavity and shall be suitable for single duct system applications. Actuators and controls
shall be as specified in Section 23 09 23, Direct Digital Control Systems. Unit enclosures shall be
constructed of galvanized steel not lighter than 22 gauge or aluminum sheet not lighter than 18 gauge.
Single or multiple discharge outlets shall be provided as required. Units with flow limiters are not
acceptable. Unit air volume shall be factory preset and readily field adjustable without special tools.
Reheat coils shall be provided as indicated. A flow chart shall be attached to each unit. Acoustic
performance of the terminal units shall be based upon units tested according to ARI 880. Sound power
level shall be as indicated. Discharge sound power shall be shown for minimum and 1-1/2 inches water
gauge inlet static pressure. Lining shall be minimum 1 inch thick neoprene or vinyl coated glass fiber
insulation, 1.5 lb./cu ft density, meeting NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements.
Variable volume, single duct, terminal units shall be provided with a calibrated air volume sensing device,
air valve or damper, actuator, and accessory relays. Units shall control air volume to within plus or minus
5 percent of each air set point volume as determined by the thermostat with variations in inlet pressures
from 3/4 inch to 6 inch water gauge. Internal resistance of units shall not exceed 0.4 inch water gauge at
maximum flow range. External differential pressure taps separate from the control pressure taps shall be
provided for air flow measurement with a 0 to 1 inch water gauge range. Unit volume controller shall be
normally open upon loss of power. Unit shall be pressure independent.
2.02
HEATING COILS
A. Hot Water Heating Coil: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, leak
tested under water to 200 psig pressure, factory installed.
B. Capacity: Refer to schedule on the contract drawings.
2.03
WIRING
A. Factory mount and wire controls. Mount electrical components in control box with removable cover.
Incorporate single point electrical connection to power source.
B. Factory mount transformer for control voltage on electric and electronic control units. Provide terminal
strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source.
2.04
CONTROLS
A. Refer to Section 23 09 23, Direct Digital Control Systems.
2.05
TESTS
A. Provide testing of units.
B. Test run volume dampers and controls. Check sequence of operation and air flow limits at factory prior to
shipment.
C. Automatic flow controller shall be capable of maintaining air flow to within 5 percent of set point with inlet
static pressure variations up to 4 inches.
D. Maximum Casing Leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at rated inlet static pressure.
E. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at one inch.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide ceiling access doors where units are not easily accessible.
C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.
D. Where boxes are installed above suspended ceilings, the air terminal units shall be installed not more
than 2’ (to the bottom of the units) above the ceiling.
23 36 00 – 2
MS0114
3.02
ADJUSTING
A. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation from 100
percent of design flow to 30 percent full flow. Set units with heating coils for minimum 30 percent full
flow.
END OF SECTION
23 36 00 – 3
MS0114
SECTION 23 37 00:
PART 1
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Diffusers.
B. Diffuser boots.
C. Registers/grilles.
D. Door grilles.
E. Louvers.
F. Roof hoods.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
C. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 90A.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Provide product data for items required for this project.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Rectangular, stamped, multi-core type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern.
B. Provide surface mount or inverted T-bar type frame. Face is to be 24"x24" when mounted in suspended
ceilings.
C. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Provide radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from
diffuser face.
2.02
CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille, 4-way
deflection. To be install only where indicated.
23 37 00 – 1
MS0114
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabricate of aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from
face.
2.03
CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.
C. Fabricate of aluminum with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade
dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
2.04
WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch maximum spacing with
spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face, double deflection.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with
20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from
face.
E. In gymnasiums, blades shall be front pivoted, welded in place or securely fastened to be immobile.
2.05
WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch spacing, with spring or other device to set blades,
horizontal face.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting.
C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with
20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade
dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
E. In gymnasiums, blades shall be front pivoted, welded in place, or securely fastened to be immobile.
2.06
DOOR GRILLES
A. V-shaped louvers of 20 gage steel, one inch deep on 1/2 inch centers.
B. Provide 20 gage steel frame with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on both sides of door, with
factory finish. Color to be selected by government from standard manufacturer’s colors (minimum 9
colors).
2.07
LOUVERS
A. Provide 6 inch deep, storm type louvers with blades on 45 degree slope, heavy channel frame, bird
screen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake. Provide insect screens on intake
louvers.
B. Fabricate of 12 gage extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish to facilitate field
painting. Louvers are to be factory painted standard color to match adjacent surfaces as closely as
possible, unless otherwise directed.
2.08
ROOF HOODS
23 37 00 – 2
MS0114
A. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 16 gage base and 20 gage hood, or aluminum, minimum 16 gage
base and 18 gage hood; suitably reinforced; with removable hood; bird screen with 1/2 inch square mesh
for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake, and factory coated to match color of roof panels, unless otherwise
directed. Provide insect screens on intake louvers.
C. Mount unit on minimum 12 inch high curb base with insulation between duct and curb.
D. Make hood outlet area minimum of twice throat area.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and as indicated on drawings.
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, regardless of whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
F. Where louvers and grilles are to be installed in existing openings, contractor shall verify dimensions prior
to ordering.
G. Install louvers and grilles plumb and level.
H. Grilles installed in exterior soffits shall be painted to match the color of soffit.
I.
When diffusers or grilles are cut into a ceiling tile, the diffuser or grille shall be supported independently of
the ceiling tile.
END OF SECTION
23 37 00 – 3
MS0114
SECTION 23 73 00: INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A. Packaged air handling units.
1.02
REFERENCES:
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
C. AMCA 300 – Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
D. AMCA 301 – Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
E. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
F. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
G. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
H. ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
I.
ARI 430 - Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units.
J.
ARI Guideline D – Application and Installation of Central Station Air-Handling Units.
K. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound
Absorbing Material).
L. NEMA MG1 – Motors and Generators.
M. NEMA ICS1 – Standard for Industrial Control and Systems; General Requirements
N. NEMA ICS2 – Standard for Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600V.
O. NEMA ICS6 – Enclosures.
P. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
Q. ASHRAE 52 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by
Particle Size.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fan Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301; tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430.
D. Filter Media: ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II..
E. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410.
F. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues
complete catalog data on total product.
1.04
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit shop drawings and product.
23 73 00 – 1
MS0114
B. Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances,
construction details, and field connection details.
C. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical
characteristics, and gages and finishes of materials.
D. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
E. Submit sound power levels for both fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity.
F. Submit product data of filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames.
G. Submit UVC Emitter Ultraviolet disinfection data.
H. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control
wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field installed wiring.
I.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and
wiring diagrams.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00 in factory fabricated protective containers,
with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid
damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place,
bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.08
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two of each filter.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. Air Systems Equipment
1. Fans: Fans shall be tested and rated according to AMCA 210. Fans may be connected to the
motors either directly or indirectly with V-belt drive. V-belt drives shall be designed for not less than
150 percent of the connected driving capacity. Motor sheaves shall be variable pitch for 15 hp and
below and fixed pitch as defined by ARI Guideline D. Variable pitch sheaves shall be selected to
drive the fan at a speed which will produce the specified capacity when set at the approximate
midpoint of the sheave adjustment. When fixed pitch sheaves are furnished, a replaceable sheave
shall be provided when needed to achieve system air balance. Motors for V-belt drives shall be
provided with adjustable rails or bases. Removable metal guards shall be provided for all exposed
V-belt drives, and speed-test openings shall be provided at the center of all rotating shafts. Fans
shall be provided with personnel screens or guards on both suction and supply ends, except that the
screens need not be provided, unless otherwise indicated, where ducts are connected to the fan.
Fan and motor assemblies shall be provided with vibration-isolation supports or mountings as
indicated. Vibration-isolation units shall be standard products with published loading ratings. Each
fan shall be selected to produce the capacity required at the fan static pressure indicated. Sound
power level shall be as indicated. The sound power level values shall be obtained according to
AMCA 300. Standard AMCA arrangement, rotation, and discharge shall be as indicated.
23 73 00 – 2
MS0114
a. Centrifugal Fans: Centrifugal fans shall be fully enclosed, single-width single-inlet, or
double-width double-inlet, AMCA Pressure Class I, II, or III as required or indicated for the design
system pressure. Impeller wheels shall be rigidly constructed, accurately balanced both statically
and dynamically. Fan blades may be forward curved, backward-inclined or airfoil design in wheel
sizes up to 30 inches. Fan blades for wheels over 30 inches in diameter shall be
backward-inclined or airfoil design. Fan wheels over 36 inches in diameter shall have overhung
pulleys and a bearing on each side of the wheel. Fan wheels 36 inches or less in diameter may
have one or more extra long bearings between the fan wheel and the drive. Bearings shall be
sleeve type, self-aligning and self-oiling with oil reservoirs, or precision self-aligning roller or
ball-type with accessible grease fittings or permanently lubricated type. Grease fittings shall be
connected to tubing and serviceable from a single accessible point. Bearing life shall be L50
rated at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by AFBMA 9 and AFBMA 11. Fan shafts shall be
steel, accurately finished, and shall be provided with key seats and keys for impeller hubs and
fan pulleys. Each fan outlet shall be of ample proportions and shall be designed for the
attachment of angles and bolts for attaching flexible connections. Motors, unless otherwise
indicated, shall not exceed 1800 rpm and shall have drip proof enclosures. Motor starters shall
be magnetic across-the-line type with general-purpose enclosure. Remote manual switch with
pilot indicating light shall be provided where indicated. Fans and motors shall be internally
vibration isolated from the rest of the air handing unit.
2. Coils: Coils shall be fin-and-tube type constructed of seamless copper tubes and aluminum or
copper fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Copper tube wall thickness shall be a
minimum of 0.020 inches. Aluminum fins shall be 0.0075 inch minimum thickness. Copper fins shall
be 0.0045 inch minimum thickness. Casing and tube support sheets shall be not lighter than 16
gauge galvanized steel, formed to provide structural strength. When required, multiple tube supports
shall be provided to prevent tube sag. Each coil shall be tested at the factory under water at not less
than 400 psi air pressure and shall be suitable for 200 psi working pressure. Coils shall be mounted
for counterflow service. Coils shall be rated and certified according to ARI 410. Coils shall have a
maximum of 8 fins per inch. Provide UVC germicidal lamps downstream of the cooling coil.
a. Water Coils: Water coils shall be installed with a pitch of not less than 1/8 inch per foot of the
tube length toward the drain end. Headers shall be constructed of cast iron, welded steel or
copper. Each coil shall be provided with a plugged vent and drain connection extending through
the unit casing.
3. Air Filters: Air filters shall be listed according to requirements of UL 900.
a. Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters: Filter thickness and efficiency shall be as shown on the
drawings.. At minimum filters shall be 2 inch depth, sectional, disposable type of the size
indicated and shall have an average efficiency of 25 to 30 percent when tested according to
ASHRAE 52. Initial resistance at 500 feet per minute shall not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge.
Filters shall be UL Class 2. Media shall be nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat. A wire
support grid bonded to the media shall be attached to a moisture resistant fiberboard frame. All
four edges of the filter media shall be bonded to the inside of the frame to prevent air bypass and
increase rigidity.
b. Holding Frames: Frames shall be fabricated from not lighter than16-gauge sheet steel with
rust-inhibitor coating. Each holding frame shall be equipped with suitable filter holding devices.
Holding frame seats shall be gasketed. All joints shall be airtight.
c. Filter Gauges: Filter gauges shall be dial type, diaphragm actuated draft and shall be provided
for all filter stations, including those filters which are furnished as integral parts of factory
fabricated air handling units. Gauges shall be at least 3-7/8 inches in diameter, shall have white
dials with black figures, and graduations and shall have a minimum range of 1 inch beyond the
specified final resistance for the filter bank on which each gauge is applied. Each gauge shall
incorporate a screw operated zero adjustment and shall be furnished complete with two static
pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two molded plastic vent valves, two 5 foot
minimum lengths of 1/4 inch diameter vinyl tubing, and all hardware and accessories for gauge
mounting.
4. UVC Germicidal Lamps: Provide high output UVC germicidal lamps specifically designed for use in
HVAC Air Handling unit applications. Components shall include a housing, reflector, high efficiency
electronic power source, emitter sockets and emitter tube. The output of the UVC Emitters shall be no
less than 10 µW/cm2 at one meter in a 400 fpm airstream at 45 degrees F as tested in accordance
with the general provisions of IES Lighting Handbook, 1981 Applications Volume. Fixture shall be
field mounted and shall have a warranty for a period of no less than one year.
a. UVC Emitter tube: Emitter tube shall be of high output, hot cathode, T5 (15mm) diameter, and
medium bi-pin type. They shall produce 95% of their energy at 254 nm and be capable of
producing the specified output at airflow velocities to 1000fpm at temperatures of 35 -170
23 73 00 – 3
MS0114
degrees F. UVC emitters shall produce no ozone or secondary contamination.
B. Air Handling Units
1. Factory-Fabricated Air Handling Units: Units shall be single-zone draw-through type as indicated.
Units shall include fans, coils, airtight insulated casing, prefilters, adjustable V-belt drives, belt guards
for externally mounted motors, access sections where indicated, vibration-isolators, and
appurtenances required for specified operation. Vibration isolators shall be as indicated. Each air
handling unit shall have physical dimensions suitable to fit space allotted to the unit and shall have
the capacity indicated. Air handling unit shall have published ratings based on tests performed
according to ARI 430.
a. Casings: Casing sections shall be 2 inch double wall type constructed of a minimum 18 gauge
galvanized steel, or 18-gauge steel outer casing protected with a corrosion resistant paint finish
according to paragraph FACTORY PAINTING. Inner casing of double-wall units shall be
minimum 20 gauge solid galvanized steel. Casing shall be designed and constructed with an
integral structural steel frame such that exterior panels are non-load bearing. Exterior panels
shall be individually removable. Removal shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit.
Casings shall be provided with inspection doors, access sections, and access doors as indicated.
Inspection and access doors shall be insulated, fully gasketed, double-wall type, of a minimum
18-gauge outer and 20-gauge inner panels. Doors shall be rigid and provided with heavy duty
hinges and latches. Inspection doors shall be a minimum 12 inches wide by 12 inches high.
Access doors shall be minimum 24 inches wide and shall be the full height of the unit casing or a
minimum of 6 ft., whichever is less. Access Sections shall be according to paragraph AIR
HANDLING UNITS. Drain pan shall be double-bottom type constructed of 16 gauge stainless
steel, pitched to the drain connection. Drain pans shall be constructed water tight, treated to
prevent corrosion, and designed for positive condensate drainage. When 2 or more cooling coils
are used, with one stacked above the other, condensate from the upper coils shall not flow
across the face of lower coils. Intermediate drain pans or condensate collection channels and
downspouts shall be provided, as required to carry condensate to the unit drain pan out of the air
stream and without moisture carryover. Each casing section handling conditioned air shall be
insulated with 1-1/2 pound density fibrous glass material having a thermal conductivity not
greater than 0.23 Btu/hr-sf-F. Factory applied fibrous glass insulation shall conform to ASTM C
1071 and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A. A latched and hinged inspection door, shall
be provided in the fan and coil sections. Additional inspection doors, access doors and access
sections shall be provided where indicated.
b. Heating and Cooling Coils: Coils shall be provided as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT, for types indicated.
c. Air Filters: Air filters shall be as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT for types
and thickness indicated.
d. Fans: Fans shall be double-inlet, centrifugal type with each fan in a separate scroll. Fans and
shafts shall be dynamically balanced prior to installation into air handling unit, then the entire fan
assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory after it has been installed in
the air handling unit. Fans shall be mounted on steel shafts accurately ground and finished. Fan
bearings shall be sealed against dust and dirt and shall be precision self-aligning ball or roller
type. Bearing life shall be L50 rated at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by AFBMA 9 and
AFBMA 11. Bearings shall be permanently lubricated or lubricated type with lubrication fittings
readily accessible at the drive side of the unit. Bearings shall be supported by structural shapes,
or die formed sheet structural members, or support plates securely attached to the unit casing.
Bearings may not be fastened directly to the unit sheet metal casing. Fans and scrolls shall be
furnished with coating indicated. Fans shall be driven by a unit-mounted or a floor-mounted
motor connected to fans by V-belt drive complete with belt guard for externally mounted motors.
Belt guards shall be the three sided enclosed type with solid or expanded metal face. Belt drives
shall be designed for not less than a 1.3 service factor based on motor nameplate rating. Motor
sheaves shall be variable pitch for 25 hp and below and fixed pitch above 25 hp as defined by
ARI Guideline D. Where fixed sheaves are required, variable pitch sheaves may be used during
air balance, but shall be replaced with an appropriate fixed sheave after air balance is completed.
Variable pitch sheaves shall be selected to drive the fan at a speed that will produce the
specified capacity when set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. Motors for
V-belt drives shall be provided with adjustable bases. Fan motors shall have splashproof
enclosures. Motor starters shall be magnetic across-the-line type with general-purpose
enclosure. Unit fan or fans shall be selected to produce the required capacity at the fan static
23 73 00 – 4
MS0114
pressure.
e. Access Sections and Filter/Mixing Boxes: Access sections shall be provided where indicated
and shall be furnished with access doors as shown. Access sections and filter/mixing boxes shall
be constructed in a manner identical to the remainder of the unit casing and shall be equipped
with access doors. Mixing boxes shall be designed to minimize air stratification and to promote
thorough mixing of the air streams.
f. Dampers: Dampers shall be as specified in Section 23 09 23.
g. AHU’s shall be provided with ultra violet lights in the air handling unit on the discharge side of the
coiling coil and in the mixing box before the coils. The lights shall be wired and switched
separately from the air handling unit. Label switch as the ultra violet light switch.
C. Motors and Starters: NEMA MG 1, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2. Determine specific motor
characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters. Provide motors to
operate at full capacity with a voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of the motor voltage rating.
Motor size shall be sufficient for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed its full load nameplate
current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under the most severe conditions
likely to be encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, the
Contractor shall make the necessary adjustments to the wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit
protection to accommodate equipment actually provided. Provide phase loss protection on all 3 phase
motors. Provide general-purpose type starter enclosures in accordance with NEMA ICS 6.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with ARI Guideline D.
B. Assemble high pressure units by bolting sections together. Isolate fan section with flexible duct
connections.
C. Install unit on vibration isolators if not internally isolated.
D. Install emitters and fixtures downstream of the cooling coil at right angles to the coil fins in sufficient
quantity and in such an arrangement so as to provide an equal distribution of UVC energy on the coil and
in the drain pan. To maintain energy efficiency, the UVC produced shall be of the lowest possible reflected
and shadowed losses. Provide interlock switch on the access to the UVC emitters to turn the light off when
access is opened. Install provided Caution Labels on all accesses to the UVC emitters.
END OF SECTION
23 73 00 – 5
MS0114
SECTION 23 81 23:
PART 1
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units
B. Controls.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ARI 210/240 - Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment
B. ARI 340/360 - Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source
Heat Pump Equipment
C. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General
Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter
D. ASHRAE 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by
Particle Size
E. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature and data indicating water, drain, refrigeration, and
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit procedures for rigging and making service connections.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate conditions at initial start-up including date, and initial set points.
D. Provide P-413 Baked phenolic coating or equivalent on condenser coil.
1.04
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions,
installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Requirements: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 or
as indicated on the drawings, whichever is the most stringent, when used in combination with
compressors and evaporator coils when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240 or ARI 340/360 as
appropriate.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum
three years experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept computer room units on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect units from damage by storing away from computer room until floor and ceiling are installed.
1.08
WARRANTY
A. Section 01 70 00 – Contract Closeout: Product warranties and product bonds.
23 81 23 – 1
MS0114
B. Furnish five year manufacturer’s warranty for refrigeration compressors.
1.09
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of filters for each unit.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Product Description: Packaged, water, glycol, or air cooled as indicated, factory assembled, pre-wired
and pre-piped unit, consisting of cabinet, fans filters, humidifier and controls, reheat and heating coils.
B. Assembly: Up-flow or down-flow air delivery, as indicated, in draw-through or blow-through configuration
as indicated.
C. Cabinet and Frame:
1. Structural Frame: Welded steel suitably braced for rigidity, capable of supporting compressors and
other mechanical equipment and fittings with welded tubular steel floor stand with adjustable legs and
vibration isolation pads.
2. Doors and Access Panels: Galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets, hinges to allow removal of
panels, and concealed fastening devices.
3. Insulation: Thermally and acoustically line cabinet interior with 1 inch thick acoustic duct liner.
4. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Baked-on textured vinyl enamel.
D. Evaporator Fans and Motors:
1. Fans: Double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fans, statically and dynamically balanced.
2. Motor: Drip proof, permanently lubricated ball bearing motor with built-in current and overload
protection. Motor shall be removable from the front of the cabinet.
3. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed, variable and adjustable pitch
motor sheave, minimum of two matched belts, drive rated minimum 2.0 times nameplate rating of
motor.
E. Compressors: As indicated on the drawings.
1. Semi-Hermetic Compressor With Four-Step Unloaders Control: The compressor shall be semihermetic with a suction gas cooled motor, vibration isolators, thermal overloads, oil sight glass,
automatic reset high pressure switch with control lockout after three failures, pump-down low
pressure transducer, suction line strainer, service valves, reversible oil pumps for forced feed
lubrication, a maximum operating speed of 1750 RPM. The system shall include cylinder unloaders
on the semi-hermetic compressors. The unloaders shall be activated by solenoid valves which are
controlled from the microprocessor control. In response to the return air temperature, the
microprocessor control shall activate the unloader solenoids and the liquid line solenoids such that
four stages of refrigeration cooling are obtained. The stages shall be: 1) one compressor, partially
loaded, 2) two compressors partially loaded, 3) one compressor partially loaded, one compressor fully
loaded, 4) two compressors fully loaded. On a call for dehumidification, the microprocessor control
shall insure that at least one compressor is on full for proper humidity control.
2. Digital Scroll Compressors: The compressor shall be scroll-type with a variable capacity operation
capability. Compressor solenoid valve shall unload the compressor and allow for variable capacity
operation. The compressor shall be suction gas cooled motor, vibration isolators, thermal overloads,
automatic reset high pressure switch with lockout after three failures, rotalock service valves, pump
down low pressure transducer, suction line strainer, and a maximum operating speed of 3500 RPM.
Consult factory for 575V availability.
3. Scroll Compressors: The compressor shall be scroll-type. The compressor shall be suction gas
cooled motor, vibration isolators, thermal overloads, automatic reset high pressure switch with lockout
after three failures, rotalock service valves, pump down low pressure transducer, suction line strainer
and a maximum operating speed of 3500 RPM.
F. Evaporator Coils:
1. Independent refrigeration circuits, direct expansion cooling coils of seamless copper tubes expanded
into aluminum fins in A-frame configuration.
2. Mount coil assembly in stainless steel drain pan.
23 81 23 – 2
MS0114
G. Condensers:
1. Water or Glycol Cooled: Shell and tube type ASME Section VIII or coaxial tube in tube type with liquid
line stop valve and head pressure actuated water regulating valve. Terminate outside cabinet for easy
external connections.
2. Air Cooled: Corrosion resistant cabinet, copper tube aluminum fin coils arranged for two circuits,
multiple direct drive propeller fans with permanently lubricated ball bearing single phase motors with
internal overload protection. Furnish capacity control by cycling fans. Provide P-413 Baked phenolic
coating or equivalent on condenser coil.
H. Chilled Water, Hot Water Reheat, Steam Reheat, or Glycol Cooling Coil:
1. Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with valves as indicated.
I.
Filters:
1. Filters, 2" Pre-Filter With 2" Filter: Filters shall be 2" ASHRAE 52.2 MERV7 (40% ASHRAE 52.1) prefilter, with 2" ASHRAE 52.2 MERV11 (60-65% ASHRAE 52.1) efficiency filter.
2. Extra Filter Set: Two (2) extra set(s) of filters shall be provided per system
J.
Refrigerant Reheat Coil:
1. Hot gas refrigerant coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with three-way
solenoid valve on first stage refrigerant circuit.
K. Reheat/heating Coils:
1. Heating Coils: Enclosed fin electrical elements arranged for minimum of three stages.
2. Circuit Protection: Primary and secondary thermal cutouts, differential air pressure switch, and
manual reset overload protection and branch circuit overcurrent protection.
L. Humidifier: A humidifier shall be factory-installed inside the unit. Bypass air slots shall be included to
enable moisture to be absorbed into the air stream. The humidifier capacity shall be as indicated. The
humidifier shall be removable from the front of the cabinet.
1. Infrared Humidifier: The humidifier shall be of the infrared type consisting of high intensity quartz
lamps mounted above and out of the water supply. The humidifier pan shall be stainless steel and
arranged to be removable without disconnecting high voltage electrical connections. The complete
humidifier section shall be pre-piped, ready for field connection to water supply. The humidifier shall
be equipped with an automatic water supply system and shall have an adjustable water-overfeed to
prevent mineral precipitation. A high-water detector shall shut down the humidifier to prevent
overflowing. A factory-provided air-gap shall prevent backflow of the humidifier supply water.
2. Steam Generating Canister Humidifier: A canister-type steam canister shall be factory-installed in the
cooling unit and shall be controlled by the microprocessor control system. It shall be complete with
disposable canister, all supply and drain valves, steam distributor and electronic controls. The need to
change canister shall be indicated on the microprocessor control panel. The humidifier shall be
designed to operate with water conductivity from 200-500 micromhos. An air-gap within the humidifier
assembly shall prevent backflow of the humidifier supply water.
M. Remote Glycol Cooler:
1. Corrosion resistant cabinet with copper tube aluminum fin coils and multiple direct drive propeller fans
with fan guard and single-phase motors with internal overload protection. Furnish capacity control by
cycling fans and modulating one fan.
N. Glycol Pump Package:
1. Cabinet: Weatherproof and vented enclosure of enameled, galvanized steel on structural base frame.
2. Pumps: One centrifugal pumps with mechanical seal.
3. Controls: Electrical control cabinet with starters, disconnects, lead/lag switch, and automatic
switchover and alarm light.
4. Piping: Interconnecting piping, from suction to discharge with shut-off valves, flow switches, check
valves in pump discharge, unions, and pressurized expansion tank with air purge vent and system
charging connection.
O. Electronic Control System:
1. Solid state with start button, stop button, temporary loss of power indicator, manual reset circuit
breakers, temperature control humidity control, and monitor panel.
2. Monitor Panel: Back lighted with no visible indicator lights until operating function is activated;
indicators include cooling, humidification, loss of air flow, change filters, high temperature, low
23 81 23 – 3
MS0114
temperature, high humidity, low humidity, high head pressure (each compressor), and low suction
pressure (each compressor).
3. Temperature and Humidity Control Modules: Solid state plug-in with adjustable set point, "push-totest" calibration check button, and built-in visual indicators to indicate mode of operation.
4. Location: Through hinged door in front of unit; isolated from conditioned air stream to allow service
while system is operating.
5. Control system shall be provided with a BACnet or LON Gateway to allow communication with the
Hurlburt Field Central HVAC monitoring system.
P. Microprocessor Control System:
1. Logic Circuitry: Microprocessor continuously monitors operation of process cooling system;
continuously displays room temperature and room relative humidity; sounds alarm on system
malfunction and simultaneously displays problem. When more than one malfunction occurs, display
fault in sequence with room temperature, capability of remembering alarm even when malfunction is
cleared, and continue to display fault until reset.
2. Malfunctions:
a. Power Loss.
b. Loss of Air Flow.
c. Clogged Air Filter.
d. High Room Temperature.
e. Low Room Temperature.
f. High Humidity.
g. Low Humidity.
h. Smoke/Fire.
i. Compressor No. 1 - Overload.
j. Compressor No. 1 - Low Pressure.
k. Compressor No. 1 - High Pressure.
l. Compressor No. 2 - Overload.
m. Compressor No. 2 - Low Pressure.
n. Compressor No. 2 - High Pressure.
o. Supply Fan Overload.
3. Light Emitting Diodes Display: Control Power On, System On, Humidification, Dehumidification taking
place, Compressor No. 1 operating, Compressor No. 2 operating, Heat or Reheat operating,
Economy Cooling.
4. Push Buttons: To STOP process cooling system, START process cooling system, SILENCE audible
alarm, push-to-test LED indicators, and display room relative humidity.
5. Remote Signaling: Furnish termination for remote signaling of system status and alarms.
Q. Performance: As indicated.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify computer-flooring system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by
manufacturer.
B. Verify ceiling system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by manufacturer.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of computer room air conditioning units with computer room raised floor.
B. Coordinate installation of air conditioning unit with computer room ceiling.
C. Install the following piping accessories on condenser or chilled water piping connections as required.
1. On inlet:
a. Thermometer well and thermometer.
b. Strainer.
c. Flow switch.
d. Flexible pipe connection.
e. Pressure gage.
f. Shut-off valve.
23 81 23 – 4
MS0114
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
On outlet:
Thermometer well and thermometer.
Flexible pipe connection.
Pressure gage.
Shut-off or Balancing valve.
D. Install drainage piping connections for water cooled units or condensate as required and humidifier
flushing system.
E. Install hot water heating piping connections to reheat coils. Install shut-off valves in hot water heating inlet
and outlet piping.
F. Install refrigerant piping connections to air-cooled condensing units. Install accessories furnished loose
for field mounting.
G. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.
H. Install control wiring between control panel and field mounted control devices.
I.
Provide connection to electrical service.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and record for maintenance of room conditions over continuous 24-hour period.
B. Adjust and balance and repeat test when necessary to demonstrate compliance with performance.
3.04
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of one day to start-up, calibrate controls,
and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance.
B. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
3.05
DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate system operations and verify specified performance.
B. Demonstrate alarm conditions.
END OF SECTION
23 81 23 – 5
MS0114
SECTION 26 05 00:
PART 1
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES:
A. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (Current edition and updates)
B. UFC 3-501-01, Electrical Engineering (Current edition and updates)
C. UFC 3-520-01, Interior Electrical Systems (Current edition and updates)
D. UFC 3-530-01 Design: Interior, Exterior Lighting and Controls (Current edition and updates)
E. UFC 3-550-01, Exterior Electrical Power Distribution (Current edition and updates)
F. UFC 3-560-01 Electrical Safety, O & M (Current edition and updates)
G. UFC 3-535-01 Visual Air Navigation Facilities (Current edition and updates) 1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems,
products, and accessories in a single submittal.
C. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A. Electrical: Conform to NFPA 70.
B. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
1.04
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS:
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including
changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Project Engineer before proceeding.
C. Within 30 days of receipt of notice to proceed and prior to starting installation, the Contractor shall submit
to the Contracting Officer for approval a complete set of shop drawings to include all material and
equipment proposed for installation Sealed by a registered electrical engineer or by a registered
professional engineer having at least four years of current experience in the design of electrical systems.
The individual’s name, signature, and professional engineer number shall be included on all final design
documents. All electrical system designs must be reviewed and stamped by an electrical engineer.
PART 2
(NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. New Underground Systems in Project shall conform to the following:
1. Riser Pole (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Shall have as a minimum; 15 kv Fused cutouts rated for the system, 9 kv arresters, and
applicable rated mounting and support hardware.
2. Conduit (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Shall be 5 inch, PVC, schedule 40 or 5 inch red-colored High Density Polyethylene (HDPE. duct
for underground installations.
b. Primary Feeders shall be encased in 3 in concrete minimum or 5 to 6 feet below finished grade if
not encased in concrete.
26 05 00 - 1
MS0114
3. Old / Replaced overhead system shall be removed in total and disposed of by the contractor. (unless
otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
4. New transformers, primary sectionalizing enclosures, bypass switches, and associated hardware
shall be mounted on a concrete base pad. (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Concrete pad shall be 6-inch minimum free concrete surface area at all sides of transformer.
b. 6 inches minimum pad thickness, 4 inches may below grade
c. Concrete to be 3500 psi rated minimum strength
d. Provide opening in concrete slab for primary and secondary in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
5. All areas disturbed by trenching / digging for system installation shall be returned to the original (or
better) condition prior to beginning of project.
a. Under NO circumstances are RUNWAY, AIRCRAFT PARKING APRONS, and TAXIWAYS to be
removed for installation of an underground system.
1. These areas are to be DIRECTIONAL BORED UNDER and nonmetallic flexible raceway
(HDPE) shall be installed for system installation.
b. The Contract Officer may approve otherwise and written authorization must be obtained prior to
beginning project.
6. Handholds or Pull boxes shall be placed at "ALL" underground circuit connections where a device is
used for the connection.
a. Minimum of 18-inch square accessible, covered, opening.
b. Strength of handholes and their frames shall be vehicle load rated at all locations and conform to
the requirements of IEEE C2.
c. Precast concrete handholes shall have the required strength established by ASTM C 478.
d. Frames covers shall be made of grey cast iron and a machine-finished seat shall be provided to
ensure a matching joint between frame and cover. Cast iron shall comply with ASTM A 48, Class
30B, minimum.
e. Handhole shall be provided with sump hole.
f. Provide slack wrap of cable in handhole.
7. Cable fault indicators shall be installed on all cables in primary junction cabinets and 3 and 4 way
switches.
a. Cable fault indicators shall be automatically reset type which will return the indicator to “no fault”
or non-tripped position with inrush current restraint – delayed trip..
b. Unit shall be either single phase or three phase with remote indicator mounting option to provide
convenient mounting on the panel enclosure. Single phase unit shall be provided with a single
current sensing core assembly and a single indicator. Three phase unit shall have three
independent sensing cores and one indicator assembly that contains three flags.
c. Unit shall be voltage powered unit and completely sealed and submersible.
d. Trip Level: set (ampere) to as specified by contracting officer.
8. Finish: All pad-mounted equipment shall be painted to meet ANSI standards for corrosion resistant
coatings. Color of all equipment shall match Federal Standard 595B, color 20095. This coating shall
be a factory finish. All pad-mounted equipment located South of U.S Highway 98 (Soundside) shall
be Stainless Steel.
B. Above Ground Systems in Project
1. New installed utility, light, and/or communication poles shall conform to the following: (unless
otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Pole and Foundation must be certified to withstand a 120 mph wind load with a 1.3 gust factor as
a complete assembly. Calculations shall be provided and certified by a registered Professional
Engineer.
b. Poles will be placed no closer then 125 feet to an aircraft parking apron, runway, or taxiway.
c. The Contract Officer may approve otherwise and written authorization must be obtained prior to
beginning project.
2. All electrical devices shall be rated for outdoor/weather use NEMA-3.
3. All primary connections to the system shall have fused cutouts, arresters, and applicable hardware
rated for the system connection.
4. All external mounted electrical cutout/switch boxes shall be rated NEMA-3, fused, total phase
disconnects.
C. Conductor and conductor sizes shall conform to the following:(unless otherwise specified in drawings or
specs.)
1. Conductors shall be of copper or copper strand
2. Rated for an ambient temperature of no less then 75 degrees C.
26 05 00 - 2
MS0114
3.
4.
5.
6.
Maintain the circuit loads with no more then a 2 percent voltage drop.
Rated to maintain a 1.5 designed circuit load as a minimum.
Conductor and insulation rated for the circuit voltage, with 600 VAC as the minimum standard.
Conductor used on load circuits of voltage 110 VAC or higher shall be of a minimum size no smaller
then #12 AWG, copper.
7. Conductor used on Service Drops, transformer to building, of voltage 110 VAC or higher shall be of a
minimum size no smaller then #000 AWG, copper.
8. Conductor used on all primary circuits, 12.4 KV and higher, shall be of a minimum size no smaller
then #2 AWG, copper.
D. General Standards, minimums (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
1. Control Voltage: 120 VAC
2. Conduit: PVC (schedule 40), EMT, or HDPE.
3. Secondary system voltage: 208/120 VAC, 3 phase, 4 wire
4. Primary system voltage: 12470 VAC, 3 phase
5. Transformers: liquid cooled, DELTA - WYE connected
6. Building interior junction ("J") boxes: 4" metal utility with blank cover.
3.02
A
TRAINING
All training will be accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment installed not by the Installing
Company. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times. All training will be done within
90 days of final acceptance of the project. Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 day on site training for
maintenance personnel and 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility.
Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming,
troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. The contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and
training aids. Room and board costs shall be included for two government personnel. Factory training
shall occur within 3 months of system acceptance. The training days will be Monday through Friday
between 0700 and 1500.
END OF SECTION
26 05 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 26 05 19
PART 1
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building wire and cable.
B. Underground feeder and branch circuit cable.
C. Wiring connectors and connections.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
B.
National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in
Air-Handling Spaces.
C.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional OpticalFiber Members.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
C. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems (Current Addition)
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as
required to meet Project Conditions.
C. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and
lengths required.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
26 05 19 - 1
MS0114
D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN rated at 75 degrees C.
E. Minimum size: no less then Size #12 AWG on any load bearing circuit
2.02
UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT CABLE:
A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type UF.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.03
WIRING METHODS
A. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN in conduit.
B. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings.
3.04
INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.
B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
C. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
D. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
F. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
G. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature
rise.
H. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape un-insulated
conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.
I.
Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG
and smaller.
J.
Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG
and smaller.
3.05
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.
3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's
recommended values.
C. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.
26 05 19 - 2
MS0114
END OF SECTION
26 05 19 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 26 05 26:
PART 1
GROUNDING AND BONDING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B. Equipment grounding conductors.
C. Bonding.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
B. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
C. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
1.03
GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. Rod electrode.
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms except as noted on the drawings.
B. All grounding and bonding shall comply with NFPA 70, section 250.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections.
C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation and installation of exothermic connectors.
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
C. AIR FORCE INSTRUCTION 32-1065 (Current Addition)
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
ROD ELECTRODE
A. Material: Copper.
B. Diameter: 3/4 inch.
C. Length: 20 feet.
2.02
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
26 05 26 - 1
MS0114
A. Material: Bronze.
2.03
WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Foundation Electrodes: 2 AWG.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve
specified resistance to ground.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, ground rod shall be driven into ground until top of rod is approximately 1foot
below finished grade.
D. Install 2 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where indicated.
E. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch
circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
G. Bond all separately derived systems (SDS) including foundation reinforcement steel and building steel to
main electrical ground. Communication, fire, video, etc., systems are considered SDS.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.
B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance
with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. Provide full fall
of potential graph and submit as test result. Resistance shall not exceed 25 Ohms.
END OF SECTION
26 05 26 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 26 05 29:
PART 1
SUPPORTING DEVICES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
B. FM Global:
1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual
Research For Property Conservation.
C. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
1. WH - Certification Listings.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.
B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment
and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
C. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
26 05 29 - 1
MS0114
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head
bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all
nuts.
G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch (25
mm) off wall.
END OF SECTION
26 05 29 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 26 05 33:
PART 1
CONDUIT
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal conduit.
B. Flexible metal conduit.
C. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
D. Electrical metallic tubing.
E. Nonmetal conduit.
F. High Density Polyethylene Nonmetallic Flexible Raceway (HDPE)
G. Fittings and conduit bodies.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
F. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
G. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
H. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit.
I.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.
J.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
K. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
1.03
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal conduit,
metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, fittings, and conduit bodies, HDPE (Red
Colored).
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
C. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems (Current Addition)
26 05 33 - 1
MS0114
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate
covering.
D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required
to complete wiring system. Conceal all conduits within the construction unless noted otherwise.
D. Underground conduit installations under existing aircraft aprons, ramps, taxiways, and runways will be
installed by boring, unless written authorization is received from the contracting officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.
B. Underground Installations:
1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid galvanized steel conduit or thick wall
nonmetallic conduit.
2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall and in or Under Slab on Grade: Use thick wall nonmetallic
conduit.
C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid galvanized steel.
D. In Slab Above Grade:
1. Use thick wall nonmetallic conduit.
E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid galvanized steel, electrical metallic tubing, thick wall nonmetallic
conduit.
F. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing.
2.02
METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): ANSI C80.3.
C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1, aluminum fittings may be used with steel conduit.
2.03
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.04
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
26 05 33 - 2
MS0114
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1, steel setscrew type.
2.05
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.06
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) RACEWAY
A. Description: Red Colored, NEMA TC 7; SDR 13.5.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 6 and TC 8.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers,
and split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel provide space on
each for 25 percent additional conduits.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 05 29.
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
I.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J.
Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
M. Do not cross conduits in slab.
N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
O. Maintain 12-inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F (40 degrees C).
P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry
and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to
cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations.
26 05 33 - 3
MS0114
T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make
sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than
2-inch (50 mm) size.
U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control and
expansion joints.
W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26.
Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
AA. HDPE: Install HDPE by Directional boring, plowing, or open trench.
3.02
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
END OF SECTION
26 05 33 - 4
MS0114
SECTION 26 05 34:
PART 1
BOXES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pull and junction boxes.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.03
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
1.05
SUMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on all boxes to be used.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location
required for box to serve intended purpose.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer.
2.02
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.
C. Support boxes independently of conduit that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported
within 12 inches of box.
D. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
26 05 34 - 1
MS0114
END OF SECTION
26 05 34 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 26 05 53:
PART 1
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Conduit markers.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
C. All Labeling shall comply with UFC 3-560-01 Electrical Safety, O&M(Current Addition)
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.
B. Locations: Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
Example: PANEL A.
C. Letter Size:
1. Use 1/4-inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/2-inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
2.02
WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Tape type wire markers.
B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load
connection.
C. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams and
equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring.
2.03
CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Description: Tape.
B. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet.
C. Spacing: 20 feet on center.
D. Color:
1. 208 Volt System: Gray.
2. Telephone System: Blue.
3. Low Voltage System: Black.
2.04
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
26 05 53 - 1
MS0114
A. Description: 6-inch wide plastic tape, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried
electrical lines; Style No. 210 ELE as manufactured by Seton.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02
APPLICATION
A. Install nameplate and labels parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive.
C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches
below finished grade.
END OF SECTION
26 05 53 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 26 24 16:
PART 1
PANELBOARDS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated
Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
3. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
6. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
C. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
D. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes
2. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards.
3. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
4. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
5. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
6. UL 1699 - Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters.
F. United Facilities Criteria:
1. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems (Current Addition)
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere
rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
1.04
SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish 2 each to Owner.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS:
A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB1; circuit breaker type.
B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 3R.
C. Provide surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge and flush lock all keyed alike.
Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
26 24 16 - 1
MS0114
D. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide copper ground bus in
all panelboards.
E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240-volt panelboards.
F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with
common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits.
Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.
G. All panels to be provided with Main Breakers.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb, in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Height: 4 ft.
C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
D. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting
changes required to balance phase loads.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard
between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads
within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches,
and fuses.
END OF SECTION
26 24 16 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 26 27 26:
PART 1
WIRING DEVICES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.
B. Wall dimmers.
C. Receptacles.
D. Device plates.
E. Occupancy Sensors
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations.
C. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Bryant, Hubbell, and Leviton.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Description: NEMA WD 1, specification grade, general-duty, AC only general-use snap switch.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic with toggle handle.
E. Voltage Rating: 120-277 volts, AC.
F. Current Rating: 20 ampere.
2.02
WALL DIMMERS
A. Manufacturers: Lutron, Prescolite, Hunt.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Description: NEMA WD 1, Type II semiconductor dimmer for incandescent lamps.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic with linear slide.
E. Voltage: 120 volts.
26 27 26 - 1
MS0114
F. Power Rating: 1000 Watts.
2.03
RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers: Bryant, Hubbell, Leviton,
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Description: NEMA WD 1; specification grade, general-duty general-use receptacle.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
E. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; type as specified and indicated.
F. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
G. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory
requirements.
H. AFCI Outlets: Arc Flash Circuit Interrupter. All 20 amp receptacles that are not GFCI protected or stated
otherwise.
2.04 WALL PLATES
A. Cover Plate: Smooth stainless steel.
B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover.
2.05 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Leviton or equivalent.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Description: Passive Infrared (PIR) sensor ceiling mounted or wall mounted. Auto On/Off, 15 seconds to
15 minutes delay Off time setting.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
E. Voltage Rating: Low voltage, 120V, or 277 volts AC.
F. Current Rating: 20 ampere.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install devices plumb and level.
26 27 26 - 2
MS0114
C. Install switches with OFF position down.
D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after de-rating for ganging as instructed
by manufacturer.
E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
G. Connect wiring device-grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
H. Install cover plates on switch, receptacle and blank outlets in finished areas.
I.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
J.
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible
ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
3.04
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33 to obtain mounting heights
specified and indicated on Drawings.
B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter.
E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor.
F. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor.
G. Install telephone jack for wall telephone 48 inches above finished floor.
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational.
3.06
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
END OF SECTION
26 27 26 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 26 28 19:
PART 1
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Disconnect switches.
B. Fuses.
C. Enclosures.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
B. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and
short circuit.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, and load interrupter enclosed knife
switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON
position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
B. Non-fusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, and load interrupter enclosed knife
switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON
position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Enclosures: Type as indicated on Drawings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
END OF SECTION
26 28 19 - 1
MS0114
SECTION 26 35 33
PART 1
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surge Protection Device
1.02
STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
A.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1.
IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
2.
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
3.
IEEE C62.45 - Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
NEMA LS 1 - Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices.
C.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2.
NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
2.
UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Surge Protection Device shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules of metal
oxide varistors (MOV) with each MOV individually fused. The modules shall be designed and constructed
in a manner that ensures MOV surge current sharing. Use of gas tubes, silicon avalanche diodes or
selenium cells are unacceptable unless documentation from a nationally recognized laboratory
demonstrates current sharing of all dissimilar components at all surge current levels.
2.02
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Nominal system operating voltage shall be:
120/240 VAC, 1 Phase, 3Wire Plus Ground
120/208 VAC, 3 Phase, 4 Wire Plus Ground, Wye.
277/480 VAC, 3 Phase, 4 Wire Plus Ground, Wye or as shown on drawings
B. Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV):
The surge suppressor and all components in the suppression path (including all current diversion
components) maximum continuous operating voltage shall be greater than 115% of the nominal system
operating voltage to ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary RMS overvoltage (swell
conditions).
C. Operating Frequency: The operating frequency range of the system shall be at least 47 - 63 Hertz.
2.03
FUSE AND THERMAL DISCONNECT
1. Surge Protection Device shall be internally fused to safely disconnect itself from the electrical system
without damaging itself and rated to allow maximum specified surge current capacity. Surge
Protection Device that utilize a single fuse to protect two or more suppression paths are not
acceptable.
2. Fuse shall be capable of interrupting the AC power line short circuit fault current (KAIC). Short circuit
rms current shall be at least 200KAIC or as shown on drawings.
26 35 33 - 1
MS0114
3. Thermal disconnect device shall be installed on or near each MOV element that responds to
excessive MOV heating by mechanically disconnecting the MOV from the power line.
2.04
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Protection Modes: The SPD shall provide protection as follows: All modes, L-N or L-L, L-G and N-G
(Where applicable)
Note: L = Line, G = Ground, N = Neutral.
B. UL 1449 Ratings: The maximum UL 1449 listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the specified
protection modes shall not exceed the following in any mode of protection:
Nominal System Voltage
120/240 or 120/208 volt
277/480 volt
Surge Voltage Rating
400 volts
800 volts
C. Noise Attenuation: The units shall be UL 1283 Listed as an electromagnetic interference filter. The filter
shall provide insertion loss with a maximum of 60 dB from 100 KHz to 100 MHz per 50-Ohm Insertion
Loss Methodology from MIL 220A.
2.05
PERFORMANCE RATINSG
A. Surge Current Capacity:
Location
Main Distribution Panel
Branch Panels
Surge Rating per Mode
150 kA
80 kA
Surge Rating Per Phase (L-N plus L-G)
300 kA
160 kA
2.06
BASIS OF DESIGN
A. Main panel unit Liebert Interceptor Series.
B. Branch Panel units Liebert Accuvar ACV Series.
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A. Surge suppressor at main distribution panel shall have red and green status indicators, audible alarm,
and transient counter.
B. Surge suppressor at branch panels shall have red and green status indicators.
2.08
TESTING
A. Component Testing and Monitoring: Unit shall include an on-line circuit which tests and redundantly
monitors individual components in all protection modes including neutral to ground (where applicable).
Units that require external test sets or equipment are unacceptable.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. The installing contractor shall install the parallel surge suppressor with short and straight conductors as
practically possible. The contractor shall twist the surge suppressor input conductors together to reduce
input conductor inductance. The contractor shall follow the surge suppressor manufacturer's
recommended installation practices as found in the installation, operation and maintenance manual and
comply with all applicable codes.
END OF SECTION
26 35 33 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 26 41 00:
PART 1
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air terminals and interconnecting conductors.
B. Grounding and bonding for lightning protection.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Lightning Protection Institute:
1. LPI 175 - Standard of Installation
2. LPI 176 – Lightning Protection System Material and Components Standard
3. LPI 177 – Inspection Guide for LPI Certified Systems
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
2. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components.
2. UL 96A - Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems.
D. MIL-HDBK-419 Grounding, Bonding, and Shielding for Electronic Equipment and Facilities, Volume 1 and 2.
E. AIR FORCE INSTRUCTION 32-1065 GROUNDING SYSTEMS (Current Addition)
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Lightning Protection System: Conductor system protecting building, consisting of air terminals on roofs,
roof-mounted mechanical equipment, bonding of structure and other metal objects; grounding electrodes; and
interconnecting conductors.
B. Lightning Protection System : Overhead Ground Wire
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer for approval a complete set of shop drawings to include
all material and equipment proposed for installation Sealed by a registered Lightning Protection engineer. The
individual’s name, signature, and professional engineer number shall be included on all final design
documents. All Lighting Protection system designs must be reviewed and stamped by a Lighting Protection
engineer.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes, and bonding connections to structure
and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, and conductor sizes, and connection and termination
details.
D. Product Data: Provide dimensions and materials of each component, and include indication of listing in
accordance with UL 96.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Submit certificate of compliance from Underwriter's Laboratories indicating approval of lightning protection
systems.
G. Submit qualification of installer per PART 1, Paragraph 1.08.
1.05
PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 – Contract Closeout: Submittals for project closeout.
B. Record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes, bonding connections, and routing of system
conductors in project record documents.
26 41 00 - 1
MS0114
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 780.
B. Perform Work in accordance with UL 96A and provide Master Label.
C. Perform Work in accordance with LPI-175.
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.07
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with minimum three years documented
experience.
B. Installer: Authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum three years documented experience.
1.08
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Listing: UL 96 and LPI-176.
1.09
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.10
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with roofing and exterior and interior finish installations.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
COMPONENTS
A. Air Terminals: Copper, solid , with adhesive bases for single-ply roof installations.
B. Grounding Rods: Solid copper-clad steel 20 feet in length and not less than ¾-inch diameter rod.
C. Down Conductor: Not less than #2 AWG.
D. Earth Electrode System Conductors: Not less than #1/0 AWG bare Copper.
E. Connectors and Splicers: Bronze.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Master Label service listed installer shall install Lightning Protection System.
B. Connect conductors using exothermic welding process. Protect adjacent construction elements and finishes
from damage.
C. Bond exterior metal bodies on building to lightning protection system.
D. Where separate grounding systems are installed such system shall be bonded below grade to any other
independently installed exterior grounding system.
E. All underground connections to grounding electrodes shall have handholes for accessibility. Strength of
handholes and their frames shall be vehicle load rated at all locations and conform to the requirements of
IEEE C2.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 65 00 - Quality Assurance: Field inspection, testing, and adjusting.
B. Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall furnish the “ Master Label issued by Underwriter
Laboratories, Inc.” for the system. Master Label service is available for complete Lightning Protection System
26 41 00 - 2
MS0114
Installations that have been installed using only UL listed or labeled components in accordance with UL
Master Label Installation Requirements.
END OF SECTION
26 41 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 26 51 00:
PART 1
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires and accessories.
B. Emergency lighting units.
C. Exit signs.P
D. Ballasts.
E. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply.
F. Lamps.
G. Luminaire accessories.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp
Ballast.
2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity-Discharge and LowPressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).
B. National Fire Protection Association
1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
2. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminary that is not a standard product of
the manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product
testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
1.04
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum
three years experience.
1.07
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.
C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
26 51 00 - 1
MS0114
D. Conform to the requirement of National Energy Policy Act (EPACT), 1992.
E. ASHREA/IESNA Standard 90.1.
F. UFC 3-530-01 Design: Interior and Exterior Lighting and Controls (Current Addition)
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as specified in schedule on Drawings.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
C. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory.
2.02
EXIT SIGNS
A. Manufacturers: As specified in schedule on Drawings or equal.
B. Description: Universal LED exit unit with self testing.
C. Housing: Extruded aluminum.
D. Face: Open face white on red. Anodized satin aluminum stencil and color permanent fiberglass panels.
E. Directional Arrows: Universal type for field adjustment.
F. Mounting: Ceiling.
G. Lamps: Manufacturers standard.
H. Input Voltage: Per design.
2.03
BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Ballast:
1. Description: High power factor type electronic ballast with total line current harmonic distortion no
greater than 20%.
2. Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified.
3. Voltage: 120 volts.
4. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers,
Inc.
2.04
FLUORESCENT LAMP
A. Lamp Ratings: as specified on drawings
B. Fluorescent lamps shall meet and pass EPA Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TLCP)
requirements, (without additive). (40 Code of Federal Regulations Appendix II to Part 261)
2.05
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of
fluorescent luminaire.
B. Battery: Sealed lead calcium type, rated for 10-year life.
C. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from the outside of an
assembled luminaire.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaires.
26 51 00 - 2
MS0114
B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length
required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaire as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with
each other. Secure to prohibit movement.
E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
F. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements
for fire rating.
G. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
H. Install wall mounted luminaire at height as indicated on Drawings as scheduled.
I.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
J.
Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 05 33 using flexible
conduit.
K. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature
conditions within luminaire.
L. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
M. Install specified lamps in each luminaire and exit signs.
N. Install occupancy sensor lighting switches in all restrooms, small offices, and conference rooms.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.05
DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide systems demonstration.
3.06
SCHEDULE
A. See light fixture schedule on drawings.
3.07
TRAINING
A. All training will be accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment installed not by the Installing
Company. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times. All training will be done within
90 days of final acceptance of the project. Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 day on site training for
maintenance personnel and 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility.
Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming,
troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. The contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and
26 51 00 - 3
MS0114
training aids. Room and board costs shall be included for two government personnel. Factory training
shall occur within 3 months of system acceptance. The training days will be Monday through Friday
between 0700 and 1500.
END OF SECTION
26 51 00 - 4
MS0114
SECTION 26 56 00:
PART 1
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior luminaires, poles and accessories.
B. Recessed soffit lighting.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp
Ballast.
2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity-Discharge and LowPressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).
3. ANSI O5.1 - Wood Poles, Specifications and Dimensions.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire, which is not a standard
product of the manufacturer. Provide signed, sealed and dated drawing by a currently registered
professional engineer in the state of Florida certifying that the system meets or exceeds the required
design conditions.
C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product
testing agency specified under "Regulatory Requirements".
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, installation, and starting of product.
1.04
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for maintaining luminaires.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
C. Conform to requirement of National Energy Policy Act (EPACT), 1992.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept products on site. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect poles from finish damage by handling carefully.
1.07
COORDINATION
A. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations.
1.08
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior luminaires, poles, accessories and foundation systems shall be designed to meet ASCE 7-98
wind speed of 140 mph and for the height and drag factor recommended by AASHTO LTS-4.
1.09
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two of each lamp type and wattage installed.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
26 56 00 - 1
MS0114
2.01
LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as specified in ELECTRICAL FIXTURE SCHEDULE on Electrical Lighting Plan.
B. Area flood type luminaire, rectangular, 8 inch mounting arm.
C. Material: Die-cast aluminum housing, dark bronze color, rectangular shape.
D. Enclosure: Enclosed heavy-duty type. Provide gasketing between enclosure and frame and luminaire
body.
E. Photometric Control: Photocell shall be provided.
F. Installation Conditions: Outdoor use only, enclosed and gasketed.
G. Mounting: Provide pole mount.
H. Ballast: Manufacturer's standard, matched to lamp characteristics, quad tap ballast.
I.
Lamp: High-pressure sodium lamp, wattage as indicated on FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
J.
Pole: Aluminum, round, tapered shaft, dark bronze color, diameter and height in feet as indicated on the
drawings. See 1.08 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.
2.02
RECESSED SOFFIT LIGHTING
A. Furnish products as specified in ELECTRICAL FIXTURE SCHEDULE on Electrical Lighting Plan.
B. Round type, 6"-9" diameter rough-in, pre-painted steel frame with galvanized junction box, pre-wired with
medium base porcelain sockets.
C. Ballast: Manufacturer's standard, matched to lamp characteristics.
D. Lamp: 50W metal-halide lamp.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine excavation and concrete foundation for lighting poles.
B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Install lighting poles at locations indicated.
C. Install poles plumb.
D. Install lamps in each luminaire.
E. Bond luminaires, metal accessories and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole.
F. All lighting poles shall have a handhole located next to the pole with all electrical connections inside.
Strength of handholes and their frames shall be vehicle load rated at all locations and conform to the
requirements of IEEE C2.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation.
3.04
ADJUSTING
26 56 00 - 2
MS0114
A. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution as directed.
3.05
CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
END OF SECTION
26 56 00 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 27 00 00:
PART 1
TELEPHONE AND LAN SYSTEM
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. TELEPHONE WIRING SYSTEMS AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS INCLUDES:
1. Building Service Entrance Ducts; Telephone Backboard Entrance Conduits; Grounding;
Telephone Backboards; Telephone Cables; Telephone Outlets; Cross-connect Blocks;
Auxiliary Devices; Systems Furniture; Testing Requirements.
2. Shall comply with the Electronic Industry and Telecommunication Industry Association Standards and
all test results provided to 1 SOCS/SCX.
B. LAN WIRING SYSTEM AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS INCLUDES:
1. Wiring Closets; Patch Panels; Conduits (Cable Distribution); LAN Outlets; Distribution Cabling;
Distance Limitations; LAN Cable Specifications; LAN Cable Testing; Systems Furniture
C. SIPRNet SYSTEM AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS INCLUDES:
1. General; SIPRNet Wiring Closets; SIPRNet Patch Panels; SIPRNet Conduits; SIPRNet LAN;
Outlets; SIPRNet Distribution Cabling; NIPRNet To SIPRNet LAN Connection; SIPRNet LAN
Cable Specifications; SIPRNet LAN Testing; Systems Furniture; SIPRNet – Qualifications for
System Installer; SIPRNet Floor Plans; SIPRNet Conduit Pictures
D. MISCELLANEOUS:
1. Nameplates; Labels, Wire markers; Conduit markers; Stencils; Underground Warning Tape;
2. Lockout Devices.
1.02
RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS:
A. Section 01000 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.03
REFERENCES:
A. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems.
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for
Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
C. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance:
1. TIA-568-C.0-1 GENERIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING FOR CUSTOMER PREMISES
2. TIA-568-C.1 COMMERCIAL BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD
3. TIA-568-C.2 BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING AND
COMPONENTS STANDARDS
4. TIA-568-C.3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLING COMPONENTS STANDARD
5. TIA TIA-569 COMMERCIAL BUILDING STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS
AND SPACES
6. TIA-607 GENERIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING AND GROUNDING (EARTHING) FOR
CUSTOMER PREMISES
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and their
Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.
E. Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.
1. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling
2. NECA/BICSI 607-2011, Standard for Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and
Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings
F. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
27 00 00 - 1
MS0114
2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).
G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.
7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
8. NEMA FG 1 - Nonmetallic Cable Tray Systems.
9. NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems.
10. NEMA VE 2 - Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
H. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
2. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
I. AIR FORCE INSTRUCTION
1. AFSSI 7703 - COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY: PROTECTED DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (PDS)
2. AFSSI 7700 - Communications and Information: EMISSION SECURITY
3. AFSSI 7702 - EMISSION SECURITY COUNTERMEASURES REVIEWS
4. AFMAN 33-214 – Emission Security Assessments
5. AFSOCI 33-105 1.04
SUBMITTALS:
A. Section 01 33 00: Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: See drawings for requirements.
C. Product Data: Submit for all products to be installed in the construction, including but not limited to;
Flexible metal conduit, Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit, Nonmetallic conduit, Flexible non-metallic
conduit, Non-metallic tubing, Raceway fittings, Conduit bodies, Surface raceway, Wire way, Pull and
junction boxes, Manholes, Handholes, Grounding Electrodes, JB Weld Grey, patch panels, cabinets,
racks, termination blocks, copper wire, fiber optic cabling, building entrance terminals, cable connectors.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
E. As-built Drawings:
1. NIPRNet/data and Telephone Provide as-built drawings showing the location of all outlets and cables
to 1 SOCS/SCX, 515 Cody Ave, Hurlburt Field FL 32544. All outlets should be identified in as built
drawings. Provide in VISIO format.
2. SIPRNET - Contractor must provide a floor plan showing the exact location of all PDS conduits, cable
trays, junction boxes, Crouse Hines FD-22 condulet Multi-Gang Cast Device boxes, lockable Single-Door
Type 12 EMC Enclosures, Krone 50-pair 89D termination blocks, cabling, MDF and IDFs. Floor plans
must show the size of the conduit, location of all mounting hardware (conduit hangers, straps, etc.) and
the location of all joints (couplings, box connectors, etc.). Floor plans must be marked to show where the
Open-Storage and Controlled Access Area boundaries. Floor plans will be labeled as “Protected
Distribution System plan”. Scale AutoCAD and/or Visio drawings shall be provided.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5,
average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m)
when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
B. Provide combustible electrical equipment exposed within plenums with peak rate of heat release
27 00 00 - 2
MS0114
not greater than 100 kW, peak optical density not greater than 0.5, and average optical density
not greater than 0.15 when tested in accordance with UL 2043.
C. Perform Work in accordance with 1SOCS/SCX.
1. Entrance Wiring: By Contractor.
2. Backbone Wiring: Complete from ITN identified by 1 SOCS to the Entrance facility using
optical fiber backbone cables. Complete from first usable manhole identified by 1 SOCS to
the entrance facility using copper cabling.
3. Horizontal Wiring: Complete from telecommunications closet to each outlet using copper or optical
fiber horizontal cables. All cables must be continuous from telecommunications room to customer
service outlet without any splices.
D. Provide grounding, surge protection and lightning protection of telecommunications system in
accordance with latest version of Grounding, Bonding and Electrical Protection chapter of the
NECA/BICSI 607-2011, TIA-607 , and NFPA 70.
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with minimum three
years documented experience, and with service facilities within 50 miles of the project.
C. Testing Agency: Company [member of International Electrical Testing Association and
specializing in testing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
D. Designer: Hold a BICSI RCDD credential
1.07
DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE & ENVIRONMENTAL:
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Accept materials & products on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
Identification. Inspect for damage.
D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original wrapping.
E. Install labels or nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive
are within range recommended by manufacturer.
F. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate
covering.
G. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
A. TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS: Material: 3/4” Plywood with 2 coats fire resistant
insulating varnish.
B. TELEPHONE TERMINATION CABINETS:
1. Product Description: Surface type galvanized steel box with removable end walls & hinged front with
concealed lock, size as required, gray baked enamel finish. Provide plywood backboard inside
cabinet for mounting telephone termination devices.
C. Data Network Cabinets
1. Size and type determined by requirement. Lockable 7 ' tall metal cabinets with fully adjustable 19"
metal rails, front and back doors (back door for free standing application), side panels, top panels,
27 00 00 - 3
MS0114
cooling equipment, cable management, power strips, grounding, shelves, and other accessories
required for the particular application. Must be mounted to floor or wall as required. Wall mounted
units must have front and rear access to cables with piano hinges.
D. Voice CROSS-CONNECT
1. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, wall-mounted 66M1-50-5C block assembly terminals mounted on
89B brackets adequate capacity for active and spare circuits
E. PATCH PANEL
1. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568,
a. rack-mounted 110 block assembly of terminals and accessory patch cords, with adequate capacity
for active and spare circuits.
b. rack-mounted fiber optic patch panel with LC inserts for premise wiring and SC for backbone
cables
F. OUTLET JACKS:
1. Conform to TIA/EIA 568 requirements for cable connectors for specific cable types.
2. The 2-inch x 4-inch wall plate cover will consist of four (4) ports, with Category 6, 8 conductor, RJ-45
jacks. Terminate in 568A configuration.
G. UNSHIELDED BACKBONE CABLE:
1. TIA/EIA 568, 100-ohm, unshielded twisted pair plenum rated noncombustible cable with 100, 50,
or 25 pairs as required, 24 AWG copper conductor.
2. Terminate cable on 66M150-C5 blocks with standoff brackets.
3. Terminate LAN cable in 7-foot lockable cabinet on a 110-patch panel with vertical and horizontal wire
management between patch panels.
H. SHIELDED BACKBONE CABLE:
1. TIA/EIA 568, 150-ohm shielded, twisted-pair plenum rated non-combustible cable with 2 pairs, 22
AWG copper conductor.
2. Terminate cable on 66M150-C5 blocks with standoff brackets.
3. Terminate LAN cable in 7-foot lockable cabinet on a 110-patch panel with vertical and horizontal wire
management between patch panels.
I.
OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLE: TIA/EIA 568, 8-125 um single mode optical fiber plenum rated
noncombustible cable.
J.
UNSHIELDED HORIZONTAL CABLE:
1. TIA/EIA 568, 100-ohm, unshielded twisted pair plenum rated Non-combustible cable with 4 pairs, 24
AWG copper conductor.
2. The 2-inch x 4-inch wall plate cover will consist of four (4) ports, with Category 6, rated, 8
conductor, RJ-45 jacks.
3. Terminate cable on 66M150-C5 blocks with standoff brackets.
4. Terminate LAN cable in 7-foot lockable cabinet on a 110-patch panel with vertical and horizontal wire
management between patch panels.
K. SHIELDED HORIZONTAL CABLE:
1. TIA/EIA 568, 150-ohm shielded, twisted-pair plenum rated noncombustible cable with 2 pairs, 24
AWG copper conductor.
2. Terminate cable on 66M150-C5 blocks with standoff brackets.
3. Terminate LAN cable in 7-foot lockable cabinet on a 110-patch panel with vertical and horizontal wire
management between patch panels.
L. OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLE: Product Description
1. 4 strand 62.5/125 um optical fiber plenum rated noncombustible cable.
2. Cable must not contain a metal carrier of any sort (i.e. shielding, copper carrier, etc.)
3. Terminated with LC connectors at customer premise and Comm room.
27 00 00 - 4
MS0114
M. NAMEPLATES: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting
background color. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads; 1/4 inch high
letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
N. LABELS: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch black letters on white background.
O. WIRE MARKERS: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.
P. CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS: Labels fastened with adhesive.
1. Color:
a. Telephone System: Green lettering on white background.
b. NIPR System: Blue lettering on white background.
c. SIPR System: No Markings.
Q. UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE: Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored
yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
R. WIRE:
1. Material: Stranded copper.
2. Grounding Conductor: Copper conductor bare.
3. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor insulated.
S. MECHANICAL CONNECTORS: Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding
applications, in configurations required for particular installation.
T. EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS: Must be manufactured by a company specializing in exothermic
welding.
U.
METAL CONDUIT:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
2. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
3. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
4. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit
V.
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, FITTINGS: Interlocked steel construction with PVC
jacket. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. Rick
W.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT), FITTINGS & CONDUIT BODIES: ANSI C80.3;
galvanized tubing. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, compression type.
X.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, FITTINGS & CONDUIT BODIES: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 80 PVC.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies, NEMA TC 3.
Y.
NONMETALLIC TUBING, FITTINGS & CONDUIT BODIES: NEMA TC 2. Fittings and Conduit
Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
Z.
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY:
1. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal
raceway. Size as shown on the drawings.
2. Finish: Gray enamel.
3. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on
raceway.
AA.
SURFACE NONMETAL RACEWAY, FITTINGS, & ACCESSORIES: Plastic or Fiberglass channel
with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface raceway. Size as shown on drawings or as required.
Gray Finish. Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories, finish to match raceway.
27 00 00 - 5
MS0114
BB.
WIREWAY: General purpose type wireway. Manufacturers standard knockouts. Size & length as
indicated on Drawings. Hinged cover with full gaskets. Slip-in or flanged connectors. Lay-in type
fittings with removable top; Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish.
CC. PULL, JUNCTION & OUTLET BOXES: (Follow AFSSI 7703 for SIPRNet applications.)
1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
2. Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male
fixture studs where required.
3. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
4. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
5. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy]. Furnish gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs.
6. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type [4] [4X] [6]; flat-flanged, surface mounted
junction box:
a. Material: Galvanized cast iron] [Cast aluminum].
b. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
7. Concrete composite] Handholes: Die-molded, glass-fiber [concrete composite] hand holes:
a. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 inch x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side.
b. Concrete composite, weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.
DD. CABLE TRAYS
1. NEMA VE 1, Class 20C ladder type tray.
a. Material: Aluminum.
b. Inside Width: 24 inches.
c. Inside Depth: 4 inches.
d. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 6 inches.
e. Inside Radius of Fittings: 12 inches.
f. Furnish manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates,
blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps.
g. Covers, as indicated on the drawings; flush, flanged, solid or ventilated.
EE.
WARNING SIGNS:
1. Engraved Nameplates: 1/2 inch black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved
with: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE
ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!
FF.
Inner duct
1. 4" 3-Cell cloth inner duct for use in 4" or larger conduits. Place 3 packs in one 4” conduit run.
GG.
1.
2.
3.
Lock Boxes
Have tamperproof hinges and hasps
Constructed of 16 gauge or better metal
Ability to secure wall plate within
HH. JB Weld
1. opaque (not clear) colored epoxy
II. Auxiliary Voice Backboard Devices
1. D-rings
2. A-rings
3. Mushroom spindles
JJ. Cable organization
1. Tie wraps
2. Cable Velcro Straps
KK. Nylon pull ropes
1. ¼ inch thick strong waterproof polyester
27 00 00 - 6
MS0114
PART 3
EXECUTION
A. EXAMINATION:
1. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements {01300 - Administrative Requirements}:
Coordination and project conditions.
2. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
B. EXISTING WORK:
1. Remove exposed abandoned raceway[, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes].
Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
2. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
3. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is
abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
4. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify
installation or provide access panel.
5. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods [compatible with existing
electrical installations, or] as specified.
6. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.
7. Install identification on existing [equipment to remain in accordance with this section.
8. Install identification on unmarked existing [equipment.
9. Replace lost nameplates, labels, markers.
10. Re-stencil existing equipment.
C. D.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Visually inspect from each bus bar to main grounding electrode service location.
Test in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
When improper grounding is found, check entire project and correct. Perform retest.
Ground and bond raceway and boxes.
Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes except in the case of SIPRNet.
Follow AFSSI 7703 when fastening conduit and boxes used for SIPRNet.
6. Identify raceway and boxes.
7. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
D. GENERAL INSTALLATION - Grounding:
1. Install in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
2. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.
3. Install grounding for each rack and equipment using #6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated,
no smaller than 6 AWG copper stranded conductor to copper communication grounding bus bar located
in COMM room. Install proper grounding lug on cable where connecting to racks and grounding bar.
4. Bond COMM room grounding system to building grounding electrode system at main electrical service
entrance location with #6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, copper stranded conductor.
5. Install routing for grounding conductor as short and direct as practical.
6. Install routing of bonding conductors with minimum number of bends and splices. Use sweeping bends.
7. Install bonding connections with listed bolts, crimp pressure connectors, clamps, or lugs.
8. Position busbars near associated equipment and insulate from supports.
9. Construct busbars of copper, 4 inches x 8 inches by 1/4 inch thick with pilot holes for ground lug.
10. Bond backbone cabling at each sheath opening.
11. Ground data cabinets, racks, cable trays, safes and mounting hardware located COMM room.
12. Label grounding conductors and grounding bus bars in accordance with references found in section 1.03
of this document..
13. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.
14. When improper grounding is found, check entire project and correct. Perform retest.
15. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
16. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch
pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified in Section 07410.
17. Ground and bond pathways, cable shields, and equipment.
E. General Installation – Fiber Optic Cable Horizontal
1. Install in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
27 00 00 - 7
MS0114
2. A minimum of 10 foot maintenance loop will remain at the equipment rack and at the last junction box, at a
minimum. Neatly wire tie maintenance loops.
3. Installed and terminated using LC connectors
4. Hot Splicing of cables will NOT BE ACCEPTED
F. General installation – Fiber Optic Cable Backbone
1. Installed using SC connectors and terminated in a patch panel uniformed to existing Fiber Optic Cable
terminations.
2. Installations shall have a 10 meter/30 foot maintenance loop in each manhole and at the termination end.
3. Hot Splicing of cables will NOT BE ACCEPTED
G. General Installation – Copper Cable Horizontal
1. Install in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
2. A minimum of 10 foot maintenance loop will remain at the Telecommunications room and 3 feet loop at the
last junction box. Neatly wire tie maintenance loops.
3. Install and terminate in RJ45 IAW 568A
4. Hot Splicing of cables will NOT BE ACCEPTED
H. General Installation – Copper Cable Backbone
1. Install in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
2. Installations shall have a 10 meter/30 foot maintenance loop in each manhole and at the termination end,
when possible. Neatly wire tie maintenance loops.
3. Install and terminate in RJ45 IAW 568A
4. If splicing is required the contractor will make all cold splices and SCOW will make finale hot splice into
existing cable.
I.
General Installation – Boxes (Follow AFSSI 7703 for SIPRNet applications.)
1. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings
2. Adjust box location up to 4 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.
3. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices.
4. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
5. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
6. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate
masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
7. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 12 inches separation. Install
with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
8. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface
finish thickness.
9. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
10. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
11. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
12. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
13. Support boxes independently of conduit.
14. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
15. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
16. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
J.
General Installation- testing
1. Inspect and test optical fiber cables in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this
document., except Section 4. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.25.
2. Inspect and test copper cables and terminations in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of
this document.
3. Install pathways in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
4. Install wire and cable in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
5. Install termination backboards and cabinets plumb, and attach securely to building wall or floor at each
corner. Install cabinet trim plumb.
6. Install recessed cabinets flush with wall finishes, and stub 5 1” empty conduits to accessible location
above ceiling at each location.
7. Install polyethylene pulling string in each empty telephone/data conduit over 10 feet in length or
containing bends.
27 00 00 - 8
MS0114
K. IDENTIFICATION – INSTALLATION
1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant
mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with
corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, or adhesive.
5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panels in finished locations.
6. Install label parallel to equipment lines.
7. Install label for identification of individual control device stations.
8. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
9. Install wire marker for each conductor at pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes.
10. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run.
11. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel alpha and numerical port designation and indicated on
as-built Drawings.
12. Install conduit & raceway marker for each conduit & raceway longer than 6 feet.
13. Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center.
14. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8
inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.
L. INSTALLATION – RACEWAY (Follow AFSSI 7703 for SIPRNet Applications)
1. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete
wiring system.
2. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
3. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
4. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel Uni-Strut channel
Sections. Provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.
5. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
Supports
6. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires, ceiling grids, or other piping systems.
7. Construct Wireway supports from steel Uni-Strut channel sections.
8. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
9. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
10. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
11. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.
12. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F.
13. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
14. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
15. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic
conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
16. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal and cast boxes in damp
And wet locations.
17. Install no more than two 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to
make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate
bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch.
18. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
19. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses control and
expansion joints.
20. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
21. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
22. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces;
mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner
fittings.
23. Close ends and unused openings in Wire way.
M. Installation of Conduits for use in NIPRNet and Telephone Applications
1. Install conduits and stub out at cable rack in ceiling.
2. Utilize one 1" conduit for 2 telephone and 2 NIPRNet data cables. (If conduit will only contain 2 cables a
3/4" conduit may be used)
27 00 00 - 9
MS0114
3. Conduit run will contain no more than two 90 degree bends
N. Installation of SIPRNet Conduits
1. Run in EMT conduit of at least ¾” size. (Conduit fill rates must be considered)
2. Conduit will terminate in a GSA approved lock-box in accordance with AFMAN 33-221.
3. All conduit fittings and joints will be covered in opaque (not clear) colored epoxy (i.e. J.B. weld) to a
distance of ½" away from the joint. Epoxy will be neatly applied over the entire joint.
4. Junction boxes with pre-punched knockouts will not be used.
5. Condulets (i.e. LBs, etc.) will not be used.
6. Junction boxes must be large enough to allow a 1” bend radius for the fiber optics.
7. Junction box covers will have epoxy applied around the entire perimeter of the cover.
8. Apply epoxy to all screws, conduit fittings, and covers. Ensure screw slot is filled.
9. Conduits will be mounted in plain view, a minimum of 1” from all other structures (non-SIPRNet conduits,
Drop ceilings, Modular furniture, walls, etc.).
10. If the carrier penetrates a wall, ceiling, or floor ensure the carrier is securely fastened to the wall, ceiling,
or floor (no movement or “play” in the conduit). To ensure the carrier is securely fastened, permanent filler
may be used to seal completely around the carrier. If the carrier is not securely fastened, then there
needs to be a minimum of 2.5 centimeters (1 inch) clearance completely surrounding the PDS at the point
of penetration. A filler (bat insulation for instance) that is easily removed and reinstalled without tools to
facilitate lines route inspections may be used.
11. Conduit will remain bare metal with no paint, wallpaper or any other markings.
O. Installation of SIPRNet Conduits Within certified, approved, classified open secure storage areas (OSSA)
1. Conduits will be marked with 1-inch red tape at least every 1 ½ meters.
2. Red tape will wrap completely around the conduit.
3. Within these rooms, conduit may be installed above drop ceilings or below raised floors.
4. Epoxy is not required on conduit installed within an OSSA.
5. Conduits may not be installed within walls.
P. Installation of Cable Trays intended for SIPRNet Within certified, approved, classified open secure storage
areas (OSSA) and Controlled Access Areas (CAA)
1. Enclosed cable trays may be used.
2. Cable trays must be constructed to allow 1-inch red tape marking at least every 1 ½ meters.
3. Boxes where fiber optic cable terminate at the subscriber end must be permanently mounted to the facility
structure
a. Boxes in OSSA do not need to be lockable
b. Boxes in CAA must be able to be locked with approved lock, have tamperproof hinges and hasps, and
be constructed of 16 gauge or better metal.
Q. Conduit between floors, within certified, approved, classified open-storage areas
1. The contractor must provide a scale floor plan showing the exact location of the conduit, size of the
conduit, material the conduit is made from (i.e. EMT, rigid pipe)
2. Conduit must be a minimum of 2-inches in diameter.
3. must be marked with 1-inch wide red tape at least once every 1 ½ meters. Tape must go completely
around the pipe.
4. Conduit must be located in an area which is inspect able; building occupants must be able to inspect the
entire surface of the conduit without need for special tools.
5. Plexiglas maybe used when transitioning from one secure area to another.
R. DRSN PDS
1. Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) boxes require the use of
lockable Single-Door Type 12 EMC Enclosures having minimum dimension greater than 24 x 24 x 8
inches.
2. Grounding lugs are to be installed in each IDF box and terminated to a local building ground lug.
S. INSTALLATION - METAL CABLE TRAY
1. Install metal cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2.
2. Support trays and fasten to structure using steel Uni-Strut channel Sections. Install supports at
each connection point, at end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing between
supports as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Install expansion connectors where recommended by manufacturer.
4. Install firestopping in accordance with Section 07 84 00 to sustain ratings when passing cable
27 00 00 - 10
MS0114
tray through fire-rated elements.
Ground and bond metal cable tray in accordance with this section.
Provide continuity between tray components.
Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before assembly.
Install 2 #6 AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire length of tray; bond
to each component.
9. Make connections to tray using mechanical, compression or exothermic connectors.
10. Install warning signs at 20 feet centers along cable tray, located to be visible.
5.
6.
7.
8.
T. Comm Installation for System Furniture
1. All systems furniture shall include punch out panels or open bottom panels for maintenance of wall jacks.
2. Provide two (3) 100-OHM Cat 6 UTP type premise cables for 2 for data and 1 for telephone to each
person’s workstation.
3. Provide Fiber optic cables as needed to complete customer requirements. Terminate cables at customer
service area with LC connectors in appropriate outlet fixture.
U. ADJUSTING
1. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
2. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
3. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
V. CLEANING
1. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. Final cleaning.
2. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
3. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
27 00 00 - 11
MS0114
SECTION 27 51 16: PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS
PART 1
GENERAL
Note: This Section does not apply for MNS system that has the notification appliances circuit for the fire alarm
system or ties into the Monaco transceiver for live voice or pre-recorded messages, new or existing. Refer to 28
31 00 for guidance.
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
1.
Factory Mutual System (FM) Publication
a.
ACFM GLOBAL (FM)
b.
FM P7825 Approval Guide
2,
International Electrochemical Commission (IEC)
a.
IEC 60268, Part 16 The Objective Rating of Speech Intelligibility by Speech
Transmission Index
b.
IEC 60849 (Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes
3.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a.
NFPA 170 Fire Safety Symbols
b.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
c.
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
4.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
a.
UL 1480 Standard for Safety Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and
Commercial and Professional Use
b.
UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and General
Utility Signaling
c.
UL 1971 Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired
d.
UL 2017 Standard for Safety for General-Purpose Signaling Devices and
Systems
e.
UL 464 Audible Signal Appliances
f.
UL Fire Prot Dir Fire Protection Equipment Directory
5.
Unified Facility Criteria (UFC) 4-021-01, Design: O&M Mass Notification Systems
6.
National Institute of Certificate in Engineering Technologies (NICET)
SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings showing all system components under provisions of
Section 01 33 00.
B.
Submit manufacturer’s data on all components used in the system under provisions of Section 01 33 00
including availability of parts as per paragraph 2.02.
C.
Submit copies of current certificates and / or licenses as proof of meeting the Qualifications as per
Para. 1.04. Certificates and/or licenses must remain current during the duration of the work and
must not expire before the government accepts the work.
D.
The contractor shall not commence work prior to approval of SUBMITTALS by the 1 SOCES/CEOFC
DDC/Alarm Maintenance Shop.
E.
Any contractor not meeting the above requirements will be prohibited from doing work on Hurlburt Field.
1.03
A.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Scope: This work includes completion of design and providing a new, complete, mass notification
system as described herein and on the contract drawings for Hurlburt AFB. The system shall
include wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control
equipment, alarm notification appliances, and other accessories and miscellaneous items
required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or
described. Provide systems complete and ready for operation. Equipment, materials,
installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing shall be in strict accordance with the required
and advisory provisions of NFPA 72, IEC 60849, IEC 60268, Part 16, except as modified herein.
27 51 16 - 1
MS0114
Provide all components required for interfacing with fire alarm system. See Section 28 31 00:
Fire Detection and Alarm Systems.
1.04
A.
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS
The contractor shall have a minimum of three years documented experience in the installation of mass
notification systems.
B.
The contractor must be approved by the manufacturer of the mass notification equipment.
C.
The qualifier for the contractor shall meet the requirements of NICET level III. The qualifier shall
supervise the NICET level II personnel during the installation, inspection and testing of the fire
alarm system.
D.
Mass notification technician personnel shall meet the requirements of NICET level II and also be state
of Florida FASA Qualified as per the Florida statues.
E.
The Contracting Officer shall reject any contractor who cannot show evidence of such qualifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing station fire alarm system and
shall not impair reliability or operational functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system.
B. Qualifications: The contractor shall have a minimum of three years documented experience in the
installation of mass notification systems.
C. The contractor must be approved by the manufacturer of the mass notification equipment.
D. The qualifier for the contractor shall meet the requirements of NICET level III. The qualifier shall
supervise the NICET level II personnel during the installation, inspection and testing of the fire alarm
system.
E. Mass notification technician personnel shall meet the requirements of NICET level II and also be state of
Florida FASA Qualified as per the Florida statues.
F. The Contracting Officer shall reject any contractor who cannot show evidence of such qualifications.
G. Manufacturer Qualifications: Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and
recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected
premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally
specified herein.
H. Regulatory Requirements: Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by UL Fire Prot
Dir or approved by FM P7825.
1.
Mass Notification System: The equipment furnished shall be compatible and be UL listed, FM
approved, or approved or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended use.
All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published
standard.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature
variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS
A. System and System Equipment: The Mass Notification System Operation and Maintenance Instructions
shall include:
1.
"Manufacturer Data Package 5".
2.
Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and
shutdown. The manual shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual,
parts list, and complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.
27 51 16 - 2
MS0114
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs,
and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall include conduit layout, equipment layout and
simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed.
The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and expansion, detailing both
equipment and software requirements.
Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized.
Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.
Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall be arranged in a
columnar format. The first column shall list all installed devices, the second column shall state
the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state the
frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for additional comments or
reference.
B. Technical Data and Computer Software: Lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures,
and training data, furnished in manual format, for the training courses. The operations training shall
familiarize designated government personnel with proper operation of the installed system. The
maintenance training course shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge
required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system.
1.08
SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Repair Service/Replacement Parts: Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be
available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting
Officer. During guarantee period, the service technician shall be on-site within 24 hours after
notification. All repairs shall be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site.
B. Interchangeable Parts: Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding
components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by
nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of
the final acceptance testing.
C. Special Tools: Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the maintenance,
testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer.
1.09
TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE
A. Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data that relates to computer software) that is
specifically identified in this project, and may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be
delivered, strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Data delivered shall be identified by
reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted
shall include complete system, equipment, and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the
equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract. The data
package shall also include the following:
1.
Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and capabilities.
2.
Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation
detailing both equipment and software requirements.
3.
Library of application software.
4.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
1.10
KEYS
A. Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT
A. All mass notification equipment shall be listed for use under the applicable reference standards.
2.02
SYSTEM OPERATION
A. The Mass Notification System shall be a complete, mass notification system conforming to UL 2017.
The system maybe placed in the alert mode by local microphones or remotely from authorized
locations/users.
27 51 16 - 3
MS0114
2.03
MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
A. Notification Appliance Network: The notification appliance network consists of audio speakers located to
provide intelligible instructions at areas as indicated on the drawings.
B. Strobes: Strobes are also provided to alert hearing-impaired occupants.
C. Voice Notification: An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control the
notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console, personnel in
the building can initiate delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and
instructions, and initiate visual strobe notification appliances.
2.04
MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL PANEL
A. Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein.
Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed
from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete
control panel, the unit enclosures shall match exactly. Control unit shall provide power, supervision,
control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and
arranged for easy access. Control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal
building power supply. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages, strobes and
displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least four pre-recorded
messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a secure
microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to initiate/synchronize
strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local
diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file. Provide all
necessary components to interface with fire alarm and detection system.
B. Cabinet: Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components
and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure
shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall
say "Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be less than one inch high. Provide prominent rigid
plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be
provided in sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and
surface mounting provisions.
C. Voice Notification System: The Voice Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA
72 for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements IEC 60849, IEC 60268, Part 16,
except as specified herein. The system shall be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system
incorporating user selectability of a minimum 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation
of a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Textual audible appliances shall produce a
slow whoop tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is
reset or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers on appropriate floor, but
not in stairs or elevator cabs. A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through
use of a microphone input at the control panel. When using the microphone, live messages shall be
broadcast through speakers throughout the building. The system shall be capable of operating all
speakers at the same time. The digitalized voice message shall consist of a non-volatile (EPROM)
microprocessor based input to the amplifiers. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry,
field wiring, and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored
voice data into the appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other
malfunction that could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow
whoop tone to take over all functions assigned to the failed unit. Class "A" Notification Appliance Circuits
(NAC) shall be provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of the NAC Circuits shall
follow the operation of the speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level (600
ohms), 25, 70.7 or 100 volt output. The audio amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS
output. The strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and
have the ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon
activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or PA microphone operation in
progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation. All outputs and operational modules
shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Form "C" contacts shall
be provided for system alarm and trouble conditions. Circuits shall be provided for operation of auxiliary
appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass Notification event the panel shall not generate nor
cause any trouble alarms to be generated with the Fire Alarm system. Mass Notification functions shall
27 51 16 - 4
MS0114
take precedence over all other function performed by the Voice Notification System. Messages shall be
as follows:
Priority
Type
*Pre-Tone
**Voice
1
Bomb Threat
Continuous
Male
2
Intruder
Continuous
Male
3
Alternate Exit
Continuous
Male
4
Fire
Code 3
Male
5
Continuous
Male
6
Shelter in
Place
Weather
None
Male
7
All Clear
None
Male
8
Test
None
Male
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Message Script (tones and messages repeat a minimum
of three times)
May I have your attention please! A bomb threat has been
reported in or around the building. Please follow the preplan and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! An intruder/hostile
person has been sighted within or around the building.
Please follow the pre-plan and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! Please evacuate the
building-using the designated alternate exists.
May I have your attention please! A fire emergency has
been reported in the building. While this is being verified,
please leave by the nearest exit and report to your
designated assembly area.
May I have your attention please! Please shelter in place
and wait further instruction.
May I have your attention please! The National Weather
Service has issued a severe weather warning for our area.
May I have your attention please! The building
emergency has ended. An all clear has been given.
Please resume normal activities.
May I have your attention please! This is a test of the
mass notification system, this is only a test.
1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "May I have
your attention, please? May I have your attention, please? A fire has been reported that may
affect your floor. Please walk to the nearest exit and evacuate the building." (Provide a 2 second
pause.) "May I have your attention please, (repeat the message)”.
1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "May I have
your attention please? May I have your attention please? A fire emergency has been reported in
the building. Please leave the building by the nearest exit or exit stairway. Do not use the
elevators." (Provide a 2 second pause.) "May I have your attention please, (repeat the
message)".
1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "Alert! This is
the Mass Notification System. There is an emergency situation. DO NOT evacuate the building!
Stay in your current location! Stay tuned for further instructions (repeat message 2 times)”.
1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "Alert, this is
the Mass Notification System. There is a chemical gas emergency. Turn off all HVAC
equipment, seal all doors and windows with wet fabric, Don protective gear. DO NOT evacuate
the building, Act now! Listen to the MNS system for further instructions (repeat message 2
times)”.
1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "Alert, this is
the Mass Notification System. There is an explosive blast risk along the South wall of your
building. Quietly move towards the north side of the building, and exit from the north stairs.
Move away from the building heading north to the north parking area (repeat message 2 times)”.
a.
Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard expansion module to
either expand the number of optional remote microphone stations, or allow a
telephone interface.
D. Memory: Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long
life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile
processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
E. Field Programmability: Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for
control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system
program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be
accomplished using personal computer based equipment.
27 51 16 - 5
MS0114
2.05
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Mass Notification Speakers: Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464.
Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Audible appliances shall generate a
unique audible sound from other devices provided in the building and surrounding area. Surface
mounted audible appliances shall be painted white. Recessed audible appliances shall be installed with
a grill that is painted white with a factory finish to match the surface to which it is mounted.
1.
Speakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers shall have six
different sound output levels and operate with audio line input levels of 100 Vac, 70 Vac, 7 Vac,
and 25 Vac, by means of selectable tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/4, 1/2, 1,
and 2 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum
power across a frequency range of 400Hz to 4000Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction.
Speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 4 inch square electrical boxes. All inputs
shall be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring via
the Voice Notification System.
2.
Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of
16 gauge and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete
installation. Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and
neat appearance for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.
3.
Speakers located in SCIF areas shall be High Gain Buffer Amplifier Speakers in accordance with
DCID 6/9, 7.2.
B. Visual Notification Appliances: Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable
requirements of UL 1971 and conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Mass Notification
Appliances shall have clear high intensity optic lens and xenon flash tubes. The clear optic lens shall
have the special wording “ALERT.” The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and
below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1
flash per second and a minimum of 75 candelas based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be ceiling-flush
mounted. Where more than two appliances are located in the same room or corridor, provide
synchronized operation.
2.06
WIRING
A. Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Division 16 with the additions and
modifications specified herein.
B. Alarm Wiring: The SLC wiring shall be copper cable in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be No. 16 AWG
size conductors at a minimum. Notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm
devices, other than speakers, shall be solid copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum.
Speaker circuits shall be copper No. 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be
sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than
21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of
nominal voltage. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid
copper having similar insulation.
2.07
LOCAL OPERATING CONSOLES (LOC)
A. Provide a LOC to allow emergency response forces and building occupants to access the mass
notification system and originate messages in emergency situations from locations in the building other
than the autonomous control unit. The LOC shall have eight message scripts as shown under
paragraph 2.04 “Mass Notification Control Panel”.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
A. System components shall be securely fastened to their supports independently of the wiring. Runs of
conduit, tubing, wire and cable shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, and parallel or
perpendicular to walls and partitions. Installation of all alarm wiring shall conform to NFPA 70. All wiring
for the system shall be solid wires. Stranded wire is not acceptable. All wiring shall be installed in
conduit. All wire connections, etc., shall be within a box as specified in NFPA 70. The sum of the crosssectional areas of individual conductors shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area
of the conduit. Wiring for alarm zones shall be color-coded by zone with two colors remaining consistent
27 51 16 - 6
MS0114
throughout the zone. No two zones using the same colors shall transit the same junction box. This does
not negate the requirements for numbering wires. Numbers will originate at the control panel and be
used throughout the circuit at all junctions and terminal devices. Wiring for audible visual circuits shall
be color-coded red for positive and black for negative. All junction boxes and their covers will be painted
red. Existing wiring in facilities being renovated shall not be reused.
3.02
DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish two copies of
"as-built" drawings. Drawings shall show equipment configuration, control panel equipment and
subassembly locations, and the location of all connecting Wiring. Drawings shall include all wiring color
codes and terminal numbers and termination points for all wires. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish
two copies of a manual giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing, and
maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. The drawings shall include a detailed wiring
layout showing all junction boxes and all system wiring, including number of wires, with speaker and
strobe circuits identified. The layout shall be done on the building floor plans and combined with fire
detection and alarm system. See section 01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSE OUT.
3.03
SPECIAL TOOLS
A. All special tools or equipment necessary for the operation and maintenance of the equipment including
testing shall be furnished. The items furnished will be new/ unused items with packaging and manuals.
3.04
REPAIR OF EXISTING WORK
A. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls,
partitions, ceilings or other surfaces as necessary for the proper installation, support, or anchorage of the
conduit or other work shall be carefully done. Damage to buildings, piping or equipment shall be
repaired and refinished by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
3.05
TESTS
A. After all equipment for this system has been installed and made operational, and at a time directed by
the Contracting Office, the contractor shall conduct tests to demonstrate that the installation are per
manufacturer’s recommendation and shall verify correct operation of the mass notification system in
accordance with the plans and specifications. All tests shall be combined with the fire alarm system.
Testing of the system shall include all components of the installed system such as initiating devices,
notification appliances, signaling line devices, interfaces and their respective circuits. In addition to the
request letter, the Contractor shall submit a test plan/procedure to the Contracting Officer to indicate his
proposed method to demonstrate compliance with the plans and specifications. The contractor will also
certify in writing that the work accomplished meets all contractual requirements. The government will
provide one retest. Subsequent testing will result in reimbursement of expenses to the Government.
As-built drawings shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer two weeks prior to any initial inspections.
Satisfactory operation of every device shall be demonstrated during the test:
3.06
TRAINING
A. The manufacturer of the equipment shall provide qualified personnel to train the government personnel
in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. The Contracting Officer will approve all training
dates and times. All training will be done Monday through Friday between 0700 and 1500. The
Contractor shall provide training on the operation and use of the system as required. The contractor
shall furnish all literature, materials and training aids. Training will be conducted in the new facility. The
Contractor will supply all training aids, schematics and literature.
3.07
QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under the section to assure
compliance with contract requirements, and maintain records of his quality control for all materials,
equipment, and construction operations, including but not limited to the following:
1.
Preparatory Inspection: (To be conducted prior to commencing work.)
2.
Submittal of all materials and shop drawings necessary for accomplishment.
3.
Have in hand equipment and wiring layout-showing sequence of wiring.
4.
Qualifications of installing firm.
B. Initial inspection: (To be conducted after a representative sample of the work is complete.)
1.
Check mounting heights, supports, accessibility of all items.
27 51 16 - 7
MS0114
C. Follow-Up Inspection: (to be conducted daily to assure compliance with results of initial inspection.)
1.
Determine that noted deficiencies are corrected.
2.
Make corrections for "as-built" mass notification system drawings.
3.
Determine that all installed equipment is functional and in accordance with the contract
requirement.
4.
Operational test performed.
5.
Damages or defects corrected.
D. A copy of these records and Contractor tests as well as records of corrective action taken, shall be
furnished the Government as directed by the Contracting Officer.
END OF SECTION
27 51 16 - 8
MS0114
SECTION 28 31 00:
PART 1
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.01
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. Factory Mutual System (FM) Publication
a) Approval Guide (Equipment, Materials, Services for Conservation of Property) 1989 with
Quarterly Supplements.
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards:
a) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
b) NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.
c) NFPA90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating System.
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
a) Fire Protection Equipment Directory (Jan 1989 with Quarterly Supplements).
b) UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire-Protective Signaling Systems
c) UL 228 Door Closers-Holders, with or without Integral Smoke Detector.
d) UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
(1) e) UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Application
e) UL 464 Audible Signal Appliances.
f) UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective, Signaling Systems.
g) UL 864 Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.
4. Unified Facility Criteria (UFC) 3-600-01, Design: Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities
5. Unified Facility Criteria (UFC) 4-021-01 Design and O&M: Mass Notification Systems (dated 9 April
08, change 1, January 2010)
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in
Air-Handling Spaces.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings showing all system components under provisions of Section 01 33 00. Plans and
calculations must be prepared by a registered professional fire protection engineer or individual that has
obtained National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, Fire Alarm Systems Level IV. All
fire alarm system designs must be reviewed and stamped by a registered professional fire protection
engineer. If the MNS portion is used to notify occupants of fire condition than it to must adhere to this
provision.
B. Submit manufacturer’s data on all components used in the system under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
C. The authority having jurisdiction and the alarm shop 1 SOCES/CEOFA shall be notified prior to
installation or alteration of equipment or wiring. Complete information regarding the system or system
alterations, including specifications, type of system or service, shop drawings, input/output matrix, battery
calculations, and notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations shall be submitted for approval.
D. Under no circumstances will installation begin prior to approval of SUBMITTALS.
E. Submit Qualification of Installer per PART 2, Paragraph 2.05.
1.03
SCOPE
A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed
in accordance to the project specifications and drawings. Only an addressable fire alarm
system shall be accepted.
B. Basic Performance:
1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on
NFPA Style 6 (Class A) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A as part of an addressable device
connected by the SLC Circuit.
28 31 00 - 1
MS0114
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A as part of an addressable
device connected by the SLC Circuit.
4. On Style 6 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the system
Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the
ability to report an alarm.
5. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or
outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
C. Basic System Functional Operation
1. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the
following functions shall immediately occur:
a. The system alarm LED on the system display shall flash.
b. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.
c. A backlit LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition,
including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises.
d. The fire alarm strobe horns shall sound or if MNS, the clear strobe shall flash and the fire
message shall be announced through the fire/MNS speakers.
e. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated each new fire alarm
control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.
f.
All system output programs assigned via control by event interlock programming to be activated
by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (notification
appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
g. An associated signal is sent VIA Monaco transceiver to the fire department.
1.04
Operation
A. Activation of any automatic fire detection device or manual station shall result in the continuous operation
of all fire audio/visual devices in the building, shutdown of air-handling units below 2000CFM, and
activation of the radio transceiver for transmission of a radio signal to central monitor location. The fire
alarm system shall be wired and all associated conduits shall be Class A in accordance with NFPA 72
ch.6.4.2.2.2. All suppression system shall activate a separate zone for each water flow device on the
transceiver for off normal conditions and water flow. Flow, tamper switches and Duct detectors shall not
be on the same zone in the BTXM transceiver. Any alarm or trouble condition silenced at the panel shall
not remove that condition from the radio transceiver inputs.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
General Requirements
A. Materials and equipment shall be new standard products of the manufacturer's latest design, and suitable
to perform the function intended. Components of two or more models will not be combined to form a
single control unit. This equipment shall be in service and supported by the manufacture for five years
after the install date. Where two or more pieces of equipment must perform the same functions, the same
manufacturer shall produce this equipment. The name of the manufacturer shall appear on all major
components. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed the same as the Monaco Radio Transceiver. (CORE
NUMBER C415A). Fire alarm points shall be labeled by device type and location. There shall only be
one central fire alarm panel located in any facility. Heat detectors and all associated conduit and wiring
shall be removed from the facility when a fire sprinkler system is installed.
2.02
Quality Requirements
A. All materials and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the UL, or the FMS for fire-alarm
systems of the type indicated. The Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under this
specification conform to these requirements. The UL label or seal, or listing in the UL Fire Protection
Equipment Directory will be accepted as evidence that the items conform to UL requirements. The FMS
label or seal, or listing in the Factory Mutual Approval Guide will be accepted as sufficient evidence that
the items conform to the FMS requirements.
2.03
Shop Drawing and System Designer Qualifications
A. Within 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed and prior to starting installation, the Contractor shall
submit to the Contracting Officer for approval a complete set of shop drawings to include all material and
equipment proposed for installation Sealed by a registered fire protection engineer, by a registered
professional engineer having at least four years of current experience in the design of fire protection and
detection systems, or by an engineering technologist qualified at NICET Level IV in fire systems. The
28 31 00 - 2
MS0114
individual’s name, signature, and professional engineer number or NICET certification number shall be
included on all final design documents. All fire alarm system designs must be reviewed and
stamped by a registered professional fire protection engineer. Include manufacturer's
name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement,
device addresses, candela ratings, speaker wattage taps settings, complete wiring point to point
diagrams, and conduit layouts. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.
2.04
Spare-Parts Data
A. After submittal of the list of equipment, and no later than 2 months prior to contract scheduled completion,
the Contractor shall furnish two copies of spare parts data for each different item of equipment listed. The
data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies; a list of parts and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment or specified below to be furnished as part of
the contract and a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient operation
for a period of 120 days at the particular installation.
2.05
Qualifications of Installer
A. System Installer: Installation personnel shall be qualified or shall be supervised by persons who are
qualified in the installation, inspection, and testing of fire alarm systems and shall be on-site at all times
during system installation, modification or upgrade. Evidence of qualifications or certification shall be
provided when requested by the authority having jurisdiction. Qualified personnel shall include, but not be
limited to, one or more of the following:
1. Personnel who are factory trained and certified for fire alarm system installation of the specific type
and brand of system being installed
2. Personnel who are certified by a nationally recognized fire alarm certification organization acceptable
to the authority having jurisdiction
3. Personnel who are registered, licensed, or certified by a state or local authority.
The Contracting Officer shall reject any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such
qualifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
Pre-Construction Test
A. Prior to starting any work on existing systems the contractor shall schedule through the contracting office
a fire alarm system pre-test to establish the baseline for the alarm system. Any discrepancies identified
shall be signed off by the contractor, 1 SOCES/CEOFA Alarm Shop, and contracting officer or his/her
representative. Failure to conduct this test will hold the contractor solely responsible for all discrepancies
during final inspection.
3.02
Installation and Wiring
A.
1. The FACP and control units shall be installed in a room directly accessible from the building exterior
and shall be condition as office space.
2. Runs of conduit, tubing, wire and cable shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, red
in color and parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions. Installation of wiring shall conform to
NFPA 70.
NOTE: 300.11
3. Wiring located within the cavity of a non–fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assembly shall not be
secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly, including the ceiling support wires. An independent
means of secure support shall be provided and shall be permitted to be attached to the assembly.
4. All wiring shall be installed in conduit (minimum ¾” EMT). The sum of the cross-sectional areas of
Individual conductors shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the conduit.
5. All wiring for the system shall be solid wires. The fire alarm system wiring shall not share the same
conduit as other low voltage wiring, such as cameras, access control, etc.
6. Wiring for audible visual circuits shall be color-coded red for positive and black for negative.
7. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be
placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29.
8. Conduits shall not enter the Fire Alarm Control Panel, or any other remotely mounted Control Panel
equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.
9. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as
recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.
28 31 00 - 3
MS0114
10. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but
not less than 18 AWG for Initiating Device Circuits and signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG for
Notification Appliance circuits.
11. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20
amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Main Power Distribution Panel as Fire Alarm; circuit
breaker shall be protected from operation by unauthorized personnel by a circuit breaker guard. Fire
Alarm Control Panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be
grounded. Label all wire termination with shrink wrap labels, clearly marked with the circuit information.
12. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by recognized testing agency for use with a protective
signaling system. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and
unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet.
13. System components shall be securely fastened to their supports independently of the wiring.
14. Existing wiring in facilities being renovated shall not be reused and must be removed.
B.
Twist-on connectors (wire nuts) shall not be used. Connections shall be permitted to be made using a
set-screw, pressure-type conductor connector, provided a means is used to prevent the set screw from
bearing directly on the conductor.
C.
Mount the BTXM radio transceiver panels at a height of 60 inches, measured from the
Floor to the top of the panel.
D.
All circuits shall be installed CLASS A, wiring and conduit shall comply with NFPA 72 CH. 6.4.2.2.2.
E.
All modules shall have their address clearly and permanently labeled on the outside of the devices.
F.
All address modules shall be integrated with the device.
G.
Fire circuits shall not be run in the same raceway, cable or conduit as high voltage circuits (120vac).
H.
Fire alarm circuits derived from the fire alarm panel shall not be terminated on the same device with
120VAC power unless it is a relay designed for the use.
3.03
Audible and Visual Alarm Devices
A. Audible and Visual devices shall be furnished to indicate an alarm throughout the building. Devices shall
be ceiling mounted unless waived in writing by the AHJ. All devices shall be supervised and operate on
low voltage D.C. furnished by the control panel. All audible devices shall meet U 464.
B. Where audible appliances are installed to provide signals for sleeping areas, they shall have a sound
level of at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level
having a duration of at least 60 seconds or a sound level of at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater,
measured at the pillow level in the area required to be served by the system using the A-weighted scale
(dBA).
C. If any barrier, such as a door, curtain, or retractable partition, is located between the notification appliance
and the pillow, the sound pressure level shall be measured with the barrier placed between the appliance
and the pillow.
D. Where permitted and if ceiling heights allows, and unless otherwise permitted all wall mounted appliances
shall comply with7.5.4 thru 7.5.4.4.8
E. Install clear/white strobes for the building fire alarm system with a factory applied and none removable
word “FIRE” RED in color to alert the occupants for complete evacuation.
F. Signal for occupants to seek information or instructions shall be amber. Provide amber colored strobes
with a factory applied and none removable word “ALERT” RED in color to alert the hearing impaired.
G. Recessed appliances shall not be permitted.
H. Monitoring Integrity of Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Systems.
28 31 00 - 4
MS0114
1. Speaker Amplifier and Tone-Generating Equipment. If speakers are used to produce audible fire
alarm signals, the required trouble signal for NFPA 72, Ch 4.4.7.2.1.1 through 4.4.7.2.1.3 shall be in
accordance with 4.4.3.5. When primary power is available, failure of any audio amplifier shall result
in a trouble signal. When an alarm is present and primary power is not available (i.e., system is
operating from the secondary power source), failure of any audio amplifier shall result in a trouble
signal.
I.
All ceiling mounted devices shall be securely mounted in an approved box attached to the ceiling grid
using a T bar and the ceiling tile shall have clips installed to prevent movement of tiles.
J.
Any system installed where the audible devices are used for fire evacuation shall comply with all the
requirements of 3.03 A-I and shall be tested for system integrity as a fire alarm system.
K. Devices shall not be mixed.
L. Strobe and speakers shall be mounted in the manufacturers back box. If the manufacturer does not
make a box then use the manufacturers recommended box.
3.04 Mass Notification Systems
A. Mass Notification System Functions
1. Notification Appliance Network: The notification appliance network consists of audio speakers
located to provide intelligible instructions at areas as indicated on the drawings.
2. Strobes: Strobes are also provided to alert hearing-impaired occupants. Provide amber colored
strobes with a factory applied and none removable word “ALERT” RED in color to alert the hearing
impaired. Install clear/white strobes for the building fire alarm system with a factory applied and none
removable word FIRE” RED in color to alert the user.
3. Voice Notification: An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control the
notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console, personnel in
the building can initiate delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and
instructions, and initiate visual strobe notification appliances.
4. Mass notification systems that are integrated with the building fire alarm system shall be consider a
component of the fire alarm system and therefore shall meet all requirements of “Installed Fire Alarm
Systems” subject to the AHJ and inspected as life safety equipment.
5. All power extenders, amplifiers, and control cabinets shall be protected in accordance with NFPA 72
Ch 4.4.5 (2007 Edition)
6. All audio circuits shall be installed in accordance with UFC 4-021-01 chapter 4 (9 April 2008)
Clear/white strobes activated by the fire alarm system shall not operate during those periods when
the amber strobes are in operation, but otherwise shall operate continuously until the fire alarm
system is reset. Switching off the fire alarm strobes shall not cause a trouble at the fire alarm panel.
7. Interface with the FACP to override fire alarm audible and visual notification appliances. The FACP
shall provide supervised circuit integrity of interconnecting wiring between the MNS and FACP.
8. MNS shall temporarily override fire alarm audible messages and visual signals, and provide
intelligible voice commands during simultaneous fire and terrorist events. All other features of the fire
system, including the transmission of signals to the fire department, shall function properly. MNS
messages shall take priority and continue to override fire alarm audible messages until the MNS
message is either manually or automatically ended. If not manually ended, the MNS message will
automatically end after 10 minutes.
9. Provide a supervisory signal if the MNS is used to override fire alarm audible messages and visible
signals during simultaneous fire and terrorist events. The supervisory signal shall be at the FACP and
any remote fire alarm annunciators, and be transmitted to the fire department. The visual
annunciation of the separate supervisory signal shall be distinctly labeled or otherwise clearly
identified.
10. Make general paging or other non-emergency messages available without the activation of strobes.
A separate microphone must be provided for this purpose.
11. Disable use of any microphones intended solely for general paging or other non-emergency
messages upon loss of normal AC power.
12. a. A Local Operating Console (LOC) shall be provided so that the travel distance to the nearest LOC
will not be in excess of 61 m (200 ft) measured horizontally on the same floor. Have a single
switch capable of shutting down all HVAC equipment in the facility in accordance with the
requirements of UFC 4-010-01. The HVAC shutdown switch shall be supervised by the FACP
28 31 00 - 5
MS0114
and have a unique address for each LOC shutdown switch. The LOC shall be clearly marked on
the cabinet with the address information. Label shall be engraved
b. Where MNS is not installed the “AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN” is still required and shall be placed
next to any Fire Alarm Anunciator.
13. AC fail on the MNS system (any component) shall generate a separate trouble to the BTX-M and
transmit to the fire department.
14. No penetration will be made at the top of any control cabinet except as designed by the manufacture
and cannot be altered.
15. The Monaco BTX-M radio shall be capable of receiving Live voice commands and activating the 8
pre-recorded messages from the Monaco D-21 located at Fire Department control room.
3.05
Mass Notification Control Panel
A. Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein.
Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed
from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete
control panel, the unit enclosures shall match exactly. Control unit shall provide power, supervision,
control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and
arranged for easy access. Control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal
building power supply. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages, strobes and
displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least eight pre-recorded
messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a secure
microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to initiate/synchronize
strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local
diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file. Provide all
necessary components to interface with fire alarm and detection system.
B. Cabinet: Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and
also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. No external wires to
pass through cabinet. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin
nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say "Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be less
than one inch high. The cabinet shall be provided in sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged
steel door with cylinder lock keyed to C415A ,and surface mounting provisions. Mount the fire/MNS
panels at a height of no higher than 72 inches, measured from the floor to the TOP of the cabinet.
C. Voice Notification System: The Voice Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72
for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements IEC 60849, IEC 60268, Part 16,
except as specified herein. The system shall be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system
incorporating user selectability of a minimum 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of
a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Textual audible appliances shall produce a slow
whoop tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset
or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers on appropriate floor, but not in
stairs or elevator cabs. A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a
microphone input at the control panel or live voice transmitted from the fire department. When using the
microphone, live messages shall be broadcast through speakers throughout the building. The system
shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The live voice from the ACU shall be
priority 1; live voice from the fire department is priority 2; and the live voice from the LOC shall be
priority 3. The digitalized voice message shall consist of a non-volatile (EPROM) microprocessor based
input to the amplifiers. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and digital
coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the
appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that
could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow whoop tone to
take over all functions assigned to the failed unit. Class "A" Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be
provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of the NAC Circuits shall follow the
operation of the speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level (600 ohms), 25, 70.7
or 100 volt output. The audio amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS output. The
strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the
ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall
take priority over any tone signal, recorded message while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits
activation. All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and
trouble reporting circuits. Form "C" contacts shall be provided for system alarm and trouble conditions.
Circuits shall be provided for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass
28 31 00 - 6
MS0114
Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble signals to be generated at the Fire
Alarm system but shall transmit a supervisory signal via the BTX-M transceiver to the fire department.
Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other function performed by the Voice
Notification System. PA systems and Background music are not authorized. Messages shall be as
follows:
Priority
Type
*Pre-tone
**Voice
1
Bomb
Threat
Continuous
Male
2
Intruder
Continuous
Male
3
Alternate
Exit
Fire
Continuous
Male
Code 3
Male
4
5
Continuous
Male
6
Shelter In
Place
Weather
none
Male
7
All Clear
none
Male
8
Test
none
Male
Message Script (tones and messages repeat a
minimum of three times)
May I have your attention please! A bomb threat has
been reported in or around the building. Please follow the
pre-plan and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! An intruder/hostile
person has been sighted within or around the building.
Please follow the pre-plan and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! Please evacuate the
building – using the designated alternate exits.
May I have your attention please! A fire emergency has
been reported in the building. While this is being verified,
please leave by the nearest exit and report to your
designated assembly area.
May I have your attention please! Please shelter in place,
and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! The National Weather
Service has issued a severe weather warning for our area.
May I have your attention please! The building emergency
has ended. An all clear has been given. Please resume
normal activities
May I have your attention please! This is a test of the
mass notification system, this is only a test.
D.
Memory: Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use
of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal
to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
E.
Field Programmability: Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable
for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The
system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password
protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment.
3.06
Notification Appliances
A. Mass Notification Speakers: Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464.
Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Audible appliances shall generate a
unique audible sound from other devices provided in the building and surrounding area. Surface
mounted audible appliances shall be painted white. Recessed audible appliances shall be installed with a
grill that is painted white with a factory finish to match the surface to which it is mounted.
1. Provide appliances capable of satisfying all Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) and
Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) Speakers shall conform to the
applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and
operate with audio line input levels of 100 Vac, 70 Vac, 7 Vac, and 25 Vac, by means of selectable
tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/4, 1/2, 1, and 2 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a
high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of 400Hz to
4000Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction. Speakers shall be capable of installation on
standard 4 inch square electrical boxes. All inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard
reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring via the Voice Notification System.
2. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of 16
gauges and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation.
Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance
for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.
3. Provide speakers and installation methods compliant with Director of Central Intelligence Directive
(DCID) 6/9 for areas classified as sensitive, compartmented information facilities (SCIF).
28 31 00 - 7
MS0114
4. Verify intelligibility by measurement after installation. Ensure that a Common Intelligibility Scale (CIS)
score greater than .8 is provided in each area where building occupants normally could be found.
Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces (such as metal or concrete) that
are found to cause excessive sound reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than .8 if
approved by the DOD installation, and if building occupants in these areas can determine that a voice
signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 33 ft to find a location with a CIS score of
at least .8. Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally present are
permitted to have a CIS score less than .8 if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being
broadcast and they must walk no more than 50 ft to a location with a CIS score of at least .8.
Measurements should be taken near the head level applicable for most personnel in the space under
normal conditions ( e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping, as appropriate). Commercially available test
instruments shall be used to measure intelligibility as specified by IEC 60849 and IEC 60268-16. The
mean value of at least three readings shall be used to compute the intelligibility score at each test
location. The installer is required to demonstrate these test result at commissioning.
5. Strobe and speakers shall be mounted in the manufacturers back box. If the manufacturer does not
make a box, then the user shall use a manufacturers recommended box, speakers shall be totally
enclose so as not to allow dust or flyings to enter.
6. Ensure speakers in the vicinity of the control panel and LOC will not create acoustical feedback or
otherwise interfere with the ability to deliver live voice messages.
B. Visual Notification Appliances: Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements
of UL 1971 and conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Mass Notification Appliances shall
have clear high intensity optic lens and xenon flash tubes. The clear optic lens shall have the special
wording “FIRE”, the amber lens shall have the special wording “Alert” factory embossed on the device.
The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree
angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 75
candelas based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be ceiling-flush mounted only. Where more than two
appliances are located in the same room or corridor, provide synchronized operation.
3.07
Wiring.
A. 1. The MNS control units shall be installed in a room directly accessible from the building exterior.
2. Runs of conduit, tubing, wire and cable shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, painted
red and parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions. Installation of wiring shall conform to NFPA 70.
NOTE: 300.11
3. Wiring located within the cavity of a non–fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assembly shall not be
secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly, including the ceiling support wires. An independent
means of secure support shall be provided and shall be permitted to be attached to the assembly.
4. All wiring shall be installed in conduit (minimum ¾” EMT). The sum of the cross-sectional areas of
Individual conductors shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the conduit.
5. All wiring for the system shall be solid wires. The fire alarm system wiring shall not share the same
conduit as other low voltage wiring, such as cameras, access control, etc.
6. Wiring for audible visual circuits shall be color-coded red for positive and black for negative.
7. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be
placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29.
8. Conduits shall not enter the MNS Control Panel, or any other remotely mounted Control Panel
equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the manufacturer.
9. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as
recommended by the manufacturer of the MNS system.
10. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but
not less than 18 AWG for Initiating Device Circuits and signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG for
Notification Appliance circuits.
11. The MNS Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20
amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Main Power Distribution Panel as MNS, circuit breaker
shall be protected from operation by unauthorized personnel by a circuit breaker guard. MNS
Control Panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded.
Label all wire termination with shrink wrap labels, clearly marked with the circuit information.
12. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by recognized testing agency for use with a protective
signaling system. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and
unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet.
13. System components shall be securely fastened to their supports independently of the wiring.
14. Existing wiring in facilities being renovated shall not be reused and must be removed.
B. Twist-on connectors (wire nuts) shall not be used. Connections shall be permitted to be made using set
28 31 00 - 8
MS0114
screw, pressure-type conductor connector, provided a means is used to prevent the set screw
from bearing directly on the conductor.
C
Mount the MNS panels at a MAX height of 72 inches, measured from the floor to the top of the cabinet.
D. All circuits shall be installed CLASS A, wiring and conduit shall comply with NFPA 72 CH. 6.4.2.2.2.
E. All modules shall have their address, loop and power supply number clearly and permanently labeled on
the outside of the devices.
F. All address modules shall be integrated with the device.
G. MNS circuits shall not be run in the same raceway, cable or conduit as high voltage circuits (120vac).
H. MNS circuits derived from the MNS panel shall not be terminated on the same device with
120VAC power unless it is a relay designed for the use.
3.08
LCD Alphanumeric Display
A. LCD Alphanumeric Display Annunciator: A minimum of at least one annunciator shall be installed.
1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, back-lit LCD display containing a
minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text.
2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble (Note: must be able to disable trouble
pizo of the annunciator) conditions in the system.
3. Up to 32 LCD annunciators may be connected to a EIA 485 interface. LCD annunciators shall not
reduce the annunciation or point capacity of the system. Each LCD shall include vital system wide
functions such as, System Acknowledge, Silence and Reset.
4. LCD display annunciators shall mimic the main control panel 80 character displays and shall not
require special programming.
5. The LCD annunciator shall have switches which may be programmed for System control such as,
Global Acknowledge, Global Signal Silence and Global System Reset. These switch inputs shall be
capable of being disabled permanently. Mount LCD annunciator at the main entrance to the facility.
3.09
Future Use
3.10
Drawings and Manuals
A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish two copies of
"as-built" drawings. Drawings shall show equipment configuration, control panel equipment and
subassembly locations, and the location of all connecting Wiring. Drawings shall include all wiring color
codes and terminal numbers and termination points for all wires. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish
two copies of a manual giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing, and
maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. The drawings shall include a detailed wiring layout
showing all junction boxes and all system wiring, including number of wires, with speaker and strobe
circuits identified with speaker taps and candela ratings. Show module location and address. The layout
shall be done on the building floor plans and combined with fire detection and alarm system. See section
01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSE OUT.
3.11
Manual and Fire alarm Stations
A. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.
B. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.
C. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided
on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear in the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm)
or larger.
D. The operable part of each manual fire alarm box shall be not less than 1.1 m (3 ft) and not more than
1.37 m (4 ft) above floor level.
E. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be installed so that they are conspicuous, unobstructed, and accessible.
F. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be located within 1.5 m (5 ft) of the exit doorway opening at each exit on
28 31 00 - 9
MS0114
each floor and located on the side of the opening.
G.
Manual fire alarm boxes shall be mounted on both sides of grouped openings over 12.2m (40 ft) in width,
and within 1.5 m (5 ft) of each side of the opening.
H.
Additional manual fire alarm boxes shall be provided so that the travel distance to the nearest fire alarm
box will not be in excess of 61 m (200 ft) measured horizontally on the same floor.
3.12
Fire-Detecting Equipment
A. Fire detecting equipment shall conform to NFPA 72 and shall be of the following types, as indicated on
the drawings and as approved by the AHJ. All devices shall be addressable, no conventional devices
allowed. Detector circuit design shall be suitable for the types and numbers of detectors, as approved,
and shall limit detector circuit current not to exceed ratings of the detectors and associated relays.
Smoke detectors shall not be installed or have protective cover removed until after the construction
cleanup of all trades is complete and final. Furthermore, during renovation projects, existing detectors
shall be removed and reinstalled or covered during construction.
B. Location: Detecting equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings. Should a conflict occur
between the drawings and the NFPA codes, the NFPA codes shall take precedence. Fire alarm
components will not be installed on building exteriors unless expressly required by NFPA codes and then
must be weather proof. Pull stations shall have removable plastic covers without sounders and be sealed
around their mounting surface. Heat detectors shall be placed to provide total (complete) coverage as
required in NFPA 72.
C. Photoelectric Type Smoke Detectors: Ceiling smoke detectors, which operate on the light scattering or
the light obstruction principle, shall be furnished. In sleeping rooms, ceiling mounted smoke detectors
shall be powered by DC circuits from the FACP, sound an audible alarm within the room only, does not
activate or transmit signal to fire department and if removed from mount or disconnected, send a trouble
signal with room location to the fire alarm panel to be transmitted to the fire department. AC powered
detectors shall not be installed. Where combination heat smoke detectors are installed in sleeping areas,
the smoke detector will operate as indicated above and the heat detector side shall announce a general
alarm throughout the facility and transmit and alarm signal to the fire department. Smoke detectors shall
not be located in a direct airflow or closer than 3 feet from an air supply diffuser or return air opening.
1. The area of protection for smoke detection devices permitted by NFPA 72 must be reduced by 50%
where destratification (ceiling) fans are used. UFC 3-600-01 5-43.1
D. Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and
installed in accordance with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Sampling tubes of sufficient length shall be
provided so that the sampling tube can extend out of the opposite side of the duct for inspection. The
sampling tubes must be secured to the duct on both sides of the duct regardless of size. A remote
key/reset/test switch shall be furnished for duct detectors that are at a location that is not easily
accessible for testing the installed duct detector. The detector housing shall be equipped with a
transparent viewing port which shall permit viewing of detector head Alarm/Power-On indicator -at viewing
angles up to 80 degrees off normal and inspection of cleanliness conditions inside the detector head
mounting chamber. The detector shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains terminals
for making all wiring connections. The detector indicator shall blink intermittently during standby
conditions and shall glow red during alarm conditions. All LED's to indicate the operating and alarm
condition and test and reset buttons or test part shall be visible, and accessible, with the unit installed and
the cover in place. Detector operating voltage will be supplied from the DC circuits of the fire alarm panel.
1. Air Handler Units (AHU) with a capacity below 2000CFM shall not have duct smoke detectors
installed but shall be shut down from the fire alarm panel during an alarm activation. AHU’s with
a capacity between 2000 - 15,000 CFM shall have one duct detector installed in the supply air
duct. AHU’s with a capacity greater than 15,000 CFM will have two duct detectors installed, one
in the supply air duct and one in the return air duct. Duct smoke detectors (2000 and larger) will
shut down their respective AHU’s upon activation will initiate a supervisory signal at the fire alarm
panel. The fire alarm panel shall activate a separate zone for duct detectors on the Monaco Radio to
send a supervisory signal to the fire department.
2. A key switch shall be installed to bypass AIR Handler shutdown, for system testing, all other function
shall not be impaired, the switch shall be supervised and send a signal via the Monaco transceiver to
the fire department on a separate and distinct zone.
E. Fixed-Temperature Heat Detectors: Only Addressable Fixed temperature heat detectors shall be
28 31 00 - 10
MS0114
installed. The UL 521 test rating shall be 135 degrees F. or as shown. Heat detectors installed in attics
and mechanical rooms shall be rated at 194 degrees F only. Heat detectors installed in exterior
applications such as open storage units shall be all weather detectors.
3.13
System Components Addressable Devices
A. Addressable Devices General
1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal address switches.
Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 159.
2. Addressable devices, which use a binary coded address setting method, such as a DIP switch,
are not an allowable substitute.
3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire
alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits.
4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both
LEDs shall flash green under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in
regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady red
illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the
LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall
also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.
5. The fire alarm control panel shall provide detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of
the system. The panel on a time of day basis shall automatically adjust sensitivity.
6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and
other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by
UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.
7. The detectors shall be ceiling mount and shall include a separate twist lock base with tamper proof
feature. Bases shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum,
a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 6 applications. (Applies only to sleeping
quarters)
8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report
that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a
magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel.
9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify
the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).
10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed
environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real-time measured
values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing
the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to
view the current analog value of each detector.
11. Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify
the type of device.
12. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall report an
indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold.
13. Addressable modules shall mount in a 4inch square (101.6 mm square), 21/ 8 inch (54 mm) deep
electrical box.
14. All manual pull stations shall be mounted in the manufactures back box. If the manufacture does not
make a box then use the manufactures recommended box.
B. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (manual station)
1. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the
panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status.
They shall use a key operated test reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency
operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.
2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.
3. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions
provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75
inches (44 mm) or larger.
4. All manual pull stations shall be mounted in the manufactures back box. If the manufacture does not
make a box then use the manufactures recommended box.
C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector
1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light scattering) principal to send data to the panel
representing the analog level of smoke density.
28 31 00 - 11
MS0114
D. Intelligent Laser Photo Smoke Detector
1. The intelligent laser photo smoke detector shall be a spot type detector that incorporates an
extremely bright laser diode and an integral lens that focuses the light beam to a very small
volume near a receiving photo sensor. The scattering of smoke particles shall activate the
photo sensor.
2. The laser detector shall have conductive plastic so that dust accumulation is reduced
significantly.
3. The intelligent laser photo detector shall have nine sensitivity levels and be sensitive to a
minimum obscuration of 0.03 percent per foot.
4. The laser detector shall not require expensive conduit, special fittings or PVC pipe.
5. The intelligent laser photo detector shall support standard, relay, isolator and sounder
detector bases.
6. The laser photo detector shall not require other cleaning requirements than those listed in
NFPA 72. Replacement, refurbishment or specialized cleaning of the detector head shall not
be required.
7. The laser photo detector shall include two bicolor LEDs that flash green in normal operation
and turn on steady red in alarm.
E. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
1. The detectors shall use the dual chamber ionization principal to measure products of
combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the analog level of products of combustion.
F. Intelligent Multi Criteria Acclimating Detector
1. The intelligent multi criteria Acclimate detector shall be an addressable device that is
designed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a single
sensing device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its environment by utilizing a
built-in microprocessor to determine its environment and choose the appropriate sensing
settings. The detector design shall allow a wide sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per
foot obscuration. This detector shall utilize advanced electronics that react to slow
smoldering fires and thermal properties all within a single sensing device.
2. The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity levels
based on the environment type it is in (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.) and then have the
ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as walls are moved
or as the occupancy changes).
3. The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signal of
the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort to react hastily in
the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a
fire condition and false alarm condition by examining the characteristics of the thermal and
smoke sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fire and deceptive
phenomena.
G. Intelligent Thermal Detectors
1. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit
(58 degrees Celsius) fix temp.
H. Future Use
I. Hostile Area Smoke Detector
1. The detector shall be designed to provide early warning smoke detection in environments
where traditional smoke detectors are not practical.
2. The detector shall have a filter system to remove particles down to 25 microns.
3. This filter system shall remove unwanted airborne particles and water mist. This shall allow
the detector to operate in environments where traditional smoke detectors would have
nuisance alarms.
4. The filter system shall consist of 2 filters one of which is field replaceable.
5. The filter system shall have an intake fan to draw air and smoke through the filters into the
sensing chamber.
6. The filter system shall be supervised so that if the filter is clogged or the fan fails the control
panel reports trouble.
7. The filter system shall be powered from 24 VDC separate from the SLC communications.
8. The detector shall utilize a photoelectric sensing chamber.
28 31 00 - 12
MS0114
J. Water-flow Indicator:
1. Water-flow Switches shall be an integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative retard type.
2. Water-flow Switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time which is conveniently adjustable from
0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30 to 45 seconds.
3. All water-flow switches shall come from a single manufacturer and series.
4. Water-flow switches shall be provided and connected under this section but installed by the mechanical
contractor.
5. Where possible, locate water-flow switches a minimum of one (1) foot from a fitting which changes the
direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3) feet from a valve.
6. Water flow switches shall be wired to an addressable monitoring module, shall activate a non
silenceable alarm at the FACP and transmit a signal from the BTXM on a dedicated Zone.
K. Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser, zone control valve, and standpipe system riser
control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain
valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.
2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valves shall be secured with a chain and lock.
3. Each valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected as separate addressable points to the
fire alarm system and shall report a separate and distinct supervisory alarm to the fire department
(SPRINKLER TAMPER). Rope type tamper switches are not permitted.
L. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module Note: If approved by AHJ
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm
control panel SLCs.
2. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Class A operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under
normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel.
3. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be
no larger than 2 3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1 1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). This version need not
include Style D or an LED.
M. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional
2wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device).
2. The IDC zone shall be wired for Class A operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under
normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel.
N. Addressable Control Module
1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one
conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered polarized audio/visual notification appliances.
2. The control module NAC may be wired for Class A signal operation.
3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the main fire alarm
control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote power supply.
4. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty and rated for a minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC.
O. Addressable Relay Module
1. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other building functions. The
relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0 Amps inductive. The relay
coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to same time on the
same pair of wires.
3.14
Suppression Systems
A. Control Valve Supervisory Signal-Initiating Device.
1. Two separate and distinct signals shall be initiated: one indicating movement of the valve from
its normal position (off-normal) and the other indicating restoration of the valve to its normal position.
The off-normal signal shall be initiated during the first two revolutions of the wheel or during onefifth of the travel distance of the valve control apparatus from its normal position.
The off-normal signal shall not be restored at any valve position except normal.
28 31 00 - 13
MS0114
Initiating device for supervising the position of a control valve shall not interfere with the
operations of the valve, obstruct the view of its indicator, or prevent access for valve maintenance.
2. Control valve supervisor signals shall be sent to the fire station as a separate supervisor signal via the
Monaco BTX-M radio transceiver.
3. Fire pumps are required to be monitored. Individual supervisory signals shall be provided for the
following conditions:
a. Fire pump running signals are ALARMS
b. Fire pump loss of power of a phase
c. Fire pump phase reversal
d. Activation of a fire pump supervisory signal shall initiate a supervisory alarm at the system control
panel and at the remote annunciators. Each set of contacts in the fire pump controller shall have
address. All fire pump supervisory signals shall be transmitted to Fire Department VIA the BTX-M
radio as a separate supervisory signal.
B. RELEASING SYSTEMS: Testing personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the specific
arrangement and operation of a suppression system(s) and a releasing function(s) and shall be cognizant
of the hazards associated with inadvertent system discharge. Testing shall include verification that the
releasing circuits and components energized or actuated by the fire alarm system are electrically
supervised and operate as intended on alarm.
C.
A complete system discharge test including releasing of suppression agent activated from the overhead
riser shall be required on all new systems and any system that is modified.
Suppression systems and releasing components shall be returned to their functional operating condition
upon completion of system testing.
D. Outside water/Electric gongs shall not be required.
3.15 Kitchen Hood Suppression System
A. Kitchen hood suppression system shall not be installed in a manner that a loss of power would generate
an alarm however; a trouble single would be required. A system test shall be required use air to simulate
agent.
B. All system regardless of size shall be connected to the fire alarm system.
3.16
Access Control
A. Access control shall comply with Life Safety Code 101 para 7.2.1.5.2. Any device or system intended to
actuate the locking or unlocking of exits shall be connected to the fire alarm system serving the protected
premises. All exits connected in accordance with NFPA 72 ch 6.16.7.1 shall unlock upon receipt of any
fire alarm signal by means of the fire alarm system serving the protected premises. Exception: Where
otherwise required or permitted by the authority having jurisdiction or other codes. For all exits connected
in accordance with NFPA 72 ch 6.16.7.1 and where batteries are used in accordance with NFPA 72 ch
4.4.1.5.1(1) as the secondary power supply, the batteries shall not be utilized to maintain these doors in
the locked condition unless the fire alarm control unit is arranged with circuitry and sufficient secondary
power to ensure the exits will unlock within 10 minutes of loss of primary power. If exit doors are unlocked
by the fire alarm system, the unlocking function shall occur prior to or concurrent with activation of any
public-mode notification appliances in the area(s) served by the normally locked exits. All doors that are
required to be unlocked by the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72 ch 6.16.7.1 through
6.16.7.5 shall remain unlocked until the fire alarm condition is manually reset.
3.17
CONTROL UNIT
A. Control unit (Fire alarm panel) shall be addressable and be fully field programmable from the internal
keyboard unless waived by the AHJ in writing. This shall include the addition of points, modification of
points, and deletions. ALL system software required to perform uploads/downloads by base
maintenance personnel shall be supplied. This includes the program for the facility system as well as the
software and computer key that the laptop computer must use to perform these functions. Any
connecting cables required to interface the laptop with the FACP shall be supplied. Installed as part of the
system in each protected building and shall be approved for use with the fire detecting equipment,
manual fire-alarm stations, and alarm-sounding devices. The unit shall operate with 24 volts DC derived
from its internal AC rectifier/power supply. The control unit circuits shall be exclusively solid state. The
control unit shall be housed in a substantial steel cabinet with lock and key C415A. The cabinet shall be
painted inside and out. The control unit shall include light emitting diodes (LED's)(Lamps or neon tubes
28 31 00 - 14
MS0114
not acceptable) to visually indicate the system condition, e.g., alarm and trouble by zone, system trouble
conditions, primary and backup power supply status, etc. The control unit shall include a means to test all
control unit functions. This includes a system test switch, zone disable, system reset, auxiliary disconnect
and audible trouble silence switch, etc. The silence switch shall be provided with an audible resound
feature. The unit shall supervise all alarm initiating circuits and all alarm sounding circuits. It shall also
provide regulated and unregulated DC power for smoke detectors, which do not operate on zone voltage.
With a point disabled the control unit shall repeat the alarm sequence when a second, third, etc., alarm is
initiated on other zones. All LED's shall be plainly visible when the door on the control unit is closed. The
control unit shall operate separate audible and visual signals when a ground fault is detected in any
supervised circuit or device. It shall sound a distinct audible alarm and activate the notification appliance
circuit throughout the building when any manual or automatic device on the system is activated. The fire
alarm panel shall be equipped with at least one alarm, one supervisory and one trouble relay as integral
components of the panel. Add on relays are not acceptable. Alarm relay and the trouble relay dry
contacts shall be used solely to activate a radio transceiver, Monaco BTXM. Only low voltage (24) will be
brought into the panel for auxiliary functions. The use of plug-on units and special devices not supplied by
the manufacturer in conjunction with this feature is unacceptable. The control unit shall meet the
requirements of UL 864 and shall be listed for NFPA 72.
B.
A separate supervisory module will be provided for sprinkler tampers and supervisory circuits.
C.
Main FACP or network node shall be a NOTIFIER Model NFS2640 or equal and shall contain a
microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply in an economical space saving
single board design. The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used
to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable
modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.
D.
Water-flow Operation
An alarm from a water-flow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on
the main panel display, turn on all programmed notification appliance circuits and shall not be
affected by the signal silence switch.
E. Operator Control
1.
Acknowledge Switch:
a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles
shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from
flashing mode to steady ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this
switch shall advance the LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition.
b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo
sounders.
2. Alarm Silence Switch:
a. Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances
and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification
circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the
confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto
silence timers.
F. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch:
1. The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits. The drill function shall latch
until the panel is silenced or reset.
G. System Reset Switch:
1. Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically latched initiating devices,
appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their
normal condition.
H. Future Use.
I.
System Capacity and General Operation
1. The control panel or each network node shall provide, or be capable of expansion to 636
intelligent/addressable devices.
28 31 00 - 15
MS0114
2. The control panel or each network node shall include Form C alarm, trouble, supervisory, and
security relays rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC.
3. It shall also include two Class A (NFPA Style Z) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits.
4. The Notification Appliance Circuits shall be programmable to Synchronize with System Sensor,
Gentex and Wheelock Notification Appliances.
5. The system shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall
include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color coded system status LEDs, and an
alphanumeric keypad with easy touch rubber keys for the field programming and control of the fire
alarm system.
6. The system shall be programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the need for
special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of
memory ICs to facilitate programming changes.
7. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs. The
system shall provide a minimum of 8 programmable form C contacts for triggering zones on the
Monaco transceiver. Systems that have limited programming (such as general alarm), have
complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or require a laptop personal computer are not
considered suitable substitutes. The FACP shall support up to 20 logic equations, including "and,"
"or," and "not," or time delay equations to be used for advanced programming. Logic equations shall
require the use of a PC with a software utility designed for programming. The system shall provide a
minimum of 8 programmable form C contacts triggering zones on the Monaco Transceiver.
8. The FACP or each network node shall provide the following features:
a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation shall also include a
smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out.
b. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 5.
c. Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to warn of excessive
smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation.
d. Nine sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. The alarm level range shall be .5 to 2.35
percent per foot for photoelectric detectors and 0.5 to 2.5 percent per foot for ionization detectors.
The system shall also support sensitive advanced detection laser detectors with an alarm level
range of .03 percent per foot to 1.0 percent per foot. The system shall also include up to nine
levels of Pre-alarm, selected by detector, to indicate impending alarms to maintenance personnel.
e. The ability to display or print system reports.
f. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance personnel when a
detector enters verification 20 times.
g. PAS pre-signal, meeting NFPA 72 6.8.1.3 requirements.
h. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software.
i. Self optimizing pre-alarm for advanced fire warning, which allows each detector to learn its
particular environment and set its pre-alarm level to just above normal peaks.
j. Cross zoning with the capability of counting: two detectors in alarm, two software zones in alarm,
or one smoke detector and one thermal detector.
k. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address.
l. Control by time for non-fire operations, with holiday schedules.
m. Day/night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity.
n. Device blink control for sleeping areas.
9. The FACP shall be capable of coding main panel node notification circuits in March Time (120 PPM),
Temporal, and California Code. The panel shall also provide a coding option that will synchronize
specific strobe lights designed to accept a specific "sync pulse." Notification Appliances shall meet
the requirements specified in chapter 7 of NFPA 72.
J.
Remote LCD annunciator’s will be required. Exact numbers and location will be determined by design and
approved by the AHJ at least one annunciator will be installed. The location of an operated initiating
device shall be annunciated by visible mean and at location accessible to first responders. Visible
annunciation shall be by an alphanumeric display. The visible annunciation of the location of operated
initiating devices shall not be canceled by the means used to deactivate alarm notification appliances.
K. Protection of Fire Alarm System. Automatic smoke detection shall be provided at the location of each fire
alarm control unit(s), notification appliance circuit power extenders, and supervising station transmitting
equipment to provide notification of fire at that location.
L.
Audible Trouble Signal Silencing Means. The panel shall not utilize a key function to control unauthorized
access to the panel.
28 31 00 - 16
MS0114
M.
No penetration will be made at the top of any control cabinet except where provided by manufacture and
shall not be altered.
3.18
TRANSCEIVERS
A. Radio transceiver shall be provided for interface of the building fire alarm system and the existing Base
central monitor receiver.
B. The transceiver required is a Building Transceiver BTX-M with a minimum of one transceiver, one relay
board and one audio board manufactured by Monaco Enterprises, Inc.
C. Wiring used to interface the transceiver alarm and trouble Inputs with the fire alarm control panel shall be
no greater in size than 18 AWG. Mount the radio at a height of 54 inches, measured from the floor.
D. The frequency of operation for the transceiver shall be 163.5375 MHz.
E. The minimum zone shall be as follows:
1, Fire Alarm/trouble
2, Sprinkler Flow
3. Sprinkler Tamper
4. MNS override of a fire alarm signal
5. Duct Detector supervisory
F. No penetration will be made at the top transceiver cabinet.
G. 1SOCES\CEOFA alarm shop will program the BTXM radio.
3.19
ANTENNA
A. Antenna: Antenna Monaco Assembly Part No. 190-400-00. Antenna shall be installed in accordance with
Hurlburt Field Specification 28 31 00 Part 3, section 3.19. Lightning arrestor kit shall be Monaco
Assembly Part No. 190-007-01.
B. Contractor shall provide a radio frequency (RF) power meter to test and verify that the standing wave
ratio (SWR) is within the manufacturer’s specifications.
C. Future Use.
D.
Frequency: Antennas shall be designed to operate on the specified radio frequency of 163.5375 MHZ.
E. Environmental Requirements: All antenna assemblies shall be of corrosion-resistant materials and
designed for reliable operation under adverse conditions including 100-mph winds, ice, snow, and rain.
Antenna mast shall be ¾ inch rigid aluminum and use a ¾ coupling at the top for the pl 259 connector.
Antenna structure to include brackets, lightning arrestor box and all conduits shall be painted in
accordance with Hurlburt Field regulation to match the structure were attached.
F. Antenna Cables: Coaxial cables shall be 50 ohm RG-8x with minimum 95% shield and shall include PL
259 and BNC type fittings or connectors as appropriate. Antenna cable for transmitter shall be RG-8x
coaxial cable if length is under 200 feet, 9913 if over 200 feet. Utilize proper fittings PL259 and BNC.
Cables is excess of 2 feet of the required length are not acceptable with a minimum 10 inches in the
panel. The antenna cable shall be installed in ¾ rigid aluminum conduit from radio to base of antenna
with no cables exposed use a ¾ coupling at the top of mast for the PL259.
G. Grounding of Antenna Systems: Antenna masts and static discharge unit ground terminals shall be
grounded in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70, Article 810-21, AFI 32-1065 and the
manufacturer's instructions, bonded to the facility lighting grid. Static discharge units and their enclosures
shall be located inside the buildings as close as practical to the antenna lead-in point of entry. Ground
rods shall be of copper-clad steel conforming to UL 4561 not less than 5/8 inch in diameter by ten feet in
length. Ground rods shall not protrude above grade, ground wire from rod to equipment shall be protected
in ½ EMT conduit. Ground rod shall be bonded to the building grounding system. Non-current-carrying
metallic parts associated with mass notification equipment shall have maximum resistance to solid earth
ground not to exceed the following values: Antennas/static discharge units 10 ohms; Radio alarm
transceivers 10 ohms.
28 31 00 - 17
MS0114
3.20
Power Supply
A. Primary Power Supply: Primary power supply for ALL control units (this includes but not limited to FACP,
MNS, BTXM transceiver and power supplies. Shall be on a dedicated 20-amp branch circuit and
individually protected by surge protection devices part number EDCO Hsp121bt1r2 the circuit breaker shall
be protected from operation by unauthorized personnel by a circuit breaker guard. At locations where the
circuit breaker is out of sight of the fire alarm control panel, a disconnect switch shall be installed adjacent
to the control panel and clearly marked “FIRE ALARM”. The conductors feeding the control panel shall
be #12 AWG. Stake-on terminal lugs are not acceptable for wire terminations. Id tag will be rigid plastic.
Primary power supply wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing in accordance with the
applicable requirements of the NEC 70.
B. Standby Power Supply: Standby power to insure operation of the fire alarm system in the event of primary
power failure shall be provided by no more than two each maintenance free storage batteries.
C. Power supply shall be provided with an automatic battery charger capable of a high/low charge rate.
D. Battery shall have the capacity to operate the fire system for 24 hours and then be capable of sounding
all general alarms for fifteen minutes for all fire alarm systems.
E. Space for Future Use.
F. The charging circuit for all systems shall be supervised to indicate a low battery condition and be rated to
recharge fully discharged batteries in 24 hours.
3.21
Fire Department Equipment
A. The Contractor shall furnish transceiver that will interface, and be fully compatible with the Government
system installed at fire department. The existing system is a Monaco D21-M Radio Fire ALARM System.
B. Contractor shall supply and install signage displaying the building number meeting base specification.
3.22
A.
Drawing and Manuals
Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish two copies of
"as-built" drawings on CD or DVD and shall be in CAD format. Drawings shall show equipment
configuration, control panel equipment and subassembly locations, and the location of the transceiver and
all connecting Wiring. Drawings shall include all wiring color codes and terminal numbers and termination
points for all wires. They shall include a detailed wiring layout showing all junction boxes, all system
wiring, including number of wires, with zones and alarm sounding circuits, initiating and alarm sounding
devices identified by module number and strobes with candela rating. In addition, the Contractor shall
furnish two copies of a manual giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing, and
maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. The layout shall be done on the building floor
plans. The final inspection cannot take place without the drawings.
3.23
A.
Special Tools
All special tools or equipment necessary for the operation and maintenance of the equipment including
testing shall be furnished this includes but not limited to a laptop, software, cables and hardware keys
(dongle) if required. The items furnished will be new/unused items with packaging and manuals.
3.24
Repair of Existing Work
A. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls,
partitions, ceilings or other surfaces as necessary for the proper installation, support, or anchorage of the
conduit or other work shall be carefully done. Damage to buildings, piping or equipment shall be repaired
and refinished by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
3.25 Tests
A. After all equipment for this system has been installed and made operational, and at a time directed by the
Contracting Office, the contractor shall conduct tests to demonstrate that the installation and the system
operation is in accordance with the plans and specifications. Testing of the system shall include remote
annunciation of alarms and trouble conditions to the fire department. In addition to the request letter, the
Contractor shall submit a test plan/procedure to the Contracting Officer to indicate his proposed method
to demonstrate compliance with the plans and specifications. The contractor will also certify in writing that
the work accomplished meets all contractual requirements. The government will provide one retest.
28 31 00 - 18
MS0114
Subsequent testing will result in reimbursement of expenses to the Government. Satisfactory operation
of each of the following devices shall be demonstrated during the test:
1. Each automatic detector.
2. Each manual fire alarm station.
3. Each transceiver, all functions.
4. Each audible alarm device.
5. Each visual alarm device.
6. Supervision of each device such as; heat detectors, pull stations, smoke detectors, etc; and alarm
zone circuits to include ground faults.
7. Satisfactory operation after loss of primary power supply.
8. Satisfactory operation of each device shut down circuit with correct zone correspondence. This shall
not be simulated but shall actually be demonstrated by actual device/equipment shutdown.
9. All control panel functions, alarm and trouble, audible and visual indicators, silence switches and their
resound function and alarm resound features of the control unit.
10. In each zone containing automatic smoke detectors, each detector will be put into the alarm mode
and stay in that mode for 10 minutes after the last detector goes into alarm, to verify satisfactory
operation of the detectors and the detector power supply module under alarm load. Smoke is
expressly forbidden for this test.
11. Supervision of DC power on each automatic detector circuit.
B. Documentation Required. Every system shall include the following documentation, which shall be
delivered to the contracting officer two weeks prior to any initial inspections the system:
1. An owner’s manual and manufacturer's published instructions covering all system equipment. Provide
all manuals, drawings, technical/programming manual on a DVD disk.
2. Record drawings
3. For software-based systems, provide programming software, database, dongle key and computer
cable to connect to fire panel.
3.26
TRAINING
A. Equipment installer shall provide 1 day on site training for maintenance personnel.
B. 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility. Training shall be
accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment within 90 days. Training shall allow for classroom
instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. The
contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and training aids. Travel, Per Diem and hotel cost will be at
the government’s expense. Factory training shall occur within 3 months of system acceptance. The
training days will be Monday through Friday between 0700 and 1600.
C. Provide 2 days of training onsite for Hurlburt Fire Department.
D. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times.
3.27
Quality Control
A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under the section to assure
compliance with contract requirements, and maintain records of his quality control for all materials,
equipment, and construction operations, including but not limited to the following:
1. Preparatory Inspection: (To be conducted prior to commencing work.)
2. Submittal of all materials and shop drawings necessary for accomplishment.
3. Have in hand equipment and wiring layout-showing sequence of wiring.
4. Qualifications of installing firm.
B. Initial inspection: (To be conducted after a representative sample of the work is complete.)
1. Check mounting heights, supports, accessibility of all items.
2. Check temperature ratings of detection against ceiling temperatures anticipated at detector locations.
3. Check size of conduit, boxes, and wires for proper sizing in accordance with National Electrical Code
and Contracts.
C. Follow-Up Inspection: (to be conducted daily to assure compliance with results of initial inspection.)
1. Determine that noted deficiencies are corrected.
2. Make corrections for "as-built" fire alarm system drawings.
3. Determine that all installed equipment is functional and in accordance with the contract requirement.
28 31 00 - 19
MS0114
4. Operational test performed.
5. Damages or defects corrected.
A copy of these records and Contractor tests as well as records of corrective action taken, shall be
furnished the government as directed by the contracting officer.
3.28
Final Inspection
A. At the final inspection, a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the
major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.
END OF SECTION
28 31 00 - 20
MS0114
SECTION 31 10 00:
PART 1
SITE CLEARING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Remove surface debris.
B. Clear site of plant life and grass.
C. Remove trees and shrubs.
D. Remove root system of trees and shrubs.
E. Topsoil excavation.
F. Site Grading
1.02
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable regulations and local ordinances for disposal of debris off Base.
B. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are
completely familiar with particular requirements of the Project and methods needed to accomplish same.
B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity and numbers to accomplish the Work in a timely manner.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fill Materials, See Section 31 23 23, Fill.
B. Weed Killer: Provide a dry, free-flowing, dust free chemical compound, soluble in water, capable of
inhibiting the growth of weeds and other undesirable vegetation and approved for use on base by
governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
C. Topsoil: Use stockpiled topsoil or provide topsoil consisting of friable, fertile soil of loamy character,
containing an amount of organic material normal to the region. Topsoil shall be capable of sustaining
healthy plant life and be reasonably free from subsoils, roots, heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 2” in
greatest dimension, weeds, sticks, brush and other deleterious material.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified.
B. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions
detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.02
PROTECTION
A. Protection of Person and Property.
1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of this Work and post warning lights or safety
flagging as required.
2. Operate warning lights during the hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.
3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, washout, and other hazards caused by the Work of this Section.
31 10 00 - 1
MS0114
B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that are to remain and protect from damage. If active utility lines are
encountered that are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor,
immediately notify the Contracting Officer and request instructions prior to proceeding with the Work.
C. If existing utility services are interrupted as a result of Work under this Section, immediately restore
service by repairing the damaged utility at no cost to the government.
D.
Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain, as final landscaping.
E. Protect benchmarks, permanent reference monuments and existing structures from damage or
displacement. A Florida Registered Surveyor at no cost to the government shall replace damaged or
destroyed benchmarks or permanent reference monuments. Damage to existing structures shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the government.
3.03
CLEARING
A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work.
B. Remove trees and shrubs within marked areas. Remove stumps and main root ball.
3.04
REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life from site and dispose of properly at an off base location.
3.05
TOPSOIL EXCAVATION
A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated and stockpile for later use, re-landscaping or finish
grading.
B. Excess topsoil, and subsoil, not being reused shall become the property of the Contractor and removed
from the site.
3.06
SITE GRADING AND COMPACTION
A. Grading
1. Uniformly grade those areas within the limits of construction including adjacent transition areas.
2. Smooth the finished surface within specified tolerances with no irregular surface changes.
3. Where a change of slope is indicated on the Drawings, construct a rolled transition section between
the slopes, unless adjacent construction will not permit such a transition or if the transition defeats
positive control of drainage.
4. Grade areas adjacent to buildings to achieve positive drainage away from the buildings and to
prevent ponding.
5. Shape the surface areas to line, grade, and cross-section with finished surface not more than 0.05’
above/below the required subgrade elevation.
B. Compaction: See Section 31 23 23, Fill.
3.07
MAINTENANCE
A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion and keep free from trash weeds.
B. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to the specified grades and tolerances.
END OF SECTION
31 10 00 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 31 23 16:
EXCAVATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Protection of existing utilities.
B. Protection of existing buildings and structures.
C. Excavation for building foundations.
D. Excavation for slabs-on-grade and paving.
E. Excavation for utilities to 5 feet outside of building line.
F. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling requirements for installation, maintenance, repair, and replacement
of storm sewer, sanitary sewer, and water distribution lines and appurtenances to the points of connection
within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the buildings.
1.02
REFERENCES:
A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 422
Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D 1556 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using Modified
Effort
ASTM D 698
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Method
ASTM D 2167 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D 6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density & Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Degree of Compaction shall be expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test
procedure presented in ASTM D 698.
1.04
SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.
A. Field Density Test Reports.
B. Backfill Material Test Reports.
1.05
COMPLETION OF WORK Should the Contractor fail to complete the work as scheduled, the Contracting
Officer may limit the work which has been started but not completed to any such amount as deemed
reasonable. No extension of time will be granted to the Contractor for not being permitted to start on new
streets, alleys or rights-of-way to construction for this reason.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Materials shall consist of any material classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, and SW.
31 23 16 - 1
MS0114
B. Unsatisfactory Materials: Unsatisfactory materials shall be materials that do not comply with the
requirements for satisfactory materials. Unsatisfactory materials include, but are not limited to those
materials containing roots and other organic matter, trash, debris, frozen materials and stones larger than
75 mm (3 inches), and materials classified in ASTM D 2487, as PT, OH, and OL. Unsatisfactory
materials also include man-made fills, refuse, or backfills from previous construction.
C. Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials:
1. Cohesionless materials shall include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP.
Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are
nonplastic.
2. Cohesive materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GC, SC, CL, MH, and CH.
D. Unyielding Material: Unyielding material shall consist of rock and gravelly soils with stones greater than
75 mm (3 inches) in any dimension or as defined by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.
E. Unstable Material shall consist of materials too wet to properly support the utility pipe, conduit, or
appurtenant structure.
F. Select Granular Material: Select granular material shall consist of well-graded sand, gravel, crushed
gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag composed of hard, tough and durable particles, and shall contain
not more than 10 percent by weight of material passing a 0.075 mm (No. 200) mesh sieve and no less
than 95 percent by weight passing the 25 mm (1-inch) sieve. The maximum allowable aggregate size
shall be 100 mm (1 inch per foot) of pipe diameter, or the maximum size recommended by the pipe
manufacturer, whichever is smaller.
G. Initial Backfill Material shall consist of select granular material or satisfactory materials free from rocks 2
mm (3/4 inch) or larger in any dimension or free from rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer, whichever is smaller.
H. Plastic Marking Tape: Plastic marking tape shall be acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene film, 152 mm (6
inches) wide with minimum thickness of 0.102 mm (0.004 inch). Tape shall have a minimum strength of
12.1 MPa (1750 psi) lengthwise and 10.3 MPa (1500 psi) crosswise. The tape shall be manufactured
with integral wires, foil backing or other means to enable detection by metal detector when the tape is
buried up to 3 feet deep. The tape shall be of a type specifically manufactured for marking and locating
underground utilities. The metallic core of the tape shall be encased in a protective jacket or provided
with other means to protect it from corrosion. Tape color shall be as specified in Table 1 and shall bear a
continuous printed inscription describing the specific utility.
Table 1. Tape Color
Red:
Yellow:
Orange:
Blue:
Green:
Electric
Gas, Oil, Dangerous Materials
Telephone, Telegraph, Television, Police, and Fire Communications
Water Systems
Sewer Systems
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Verify the existence and location of underground utilities along the route of work. Omission from, or
inclusion of, utility locations on the Drawings is not to be considered as the nonexistence of, or a definite
location of, existing underground utilities.
1. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
2. Identify known underground, above ground and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations.
3. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.
4. Protect plants, shrubs, trees, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.
5. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation
equipment and vehicular traffic.
31 23 16 - 2
MS0114
3.02
PROTECTION
A. Existing Utilities:
1. Protect existing known utilities from damage due to work required under the scope of this contract.
Any damage to utilities will be repaired at the expense of the Contractor.
2. Before beginning trenching operations, obtain an Air Force Form 103, Civil Engineering Work
Clearance Permit for any underground or overhead utilities which may be on, or in close proximity to,
the trenching areas.
B. Existing Buildings and Structures:
1. Guard against, and be responsible for, any movement, settlement, or collapse of adjacent buildings,
sidewalks, structures, and underground and aboveground utilities. Repair damage done to the
Base's property or any other property, on or off the premises, by reason of required work. Adequately
brace walls during backfilling and compacting operations.
2. Items to be Relocated: Exercise the greatest possible care when items are scheduled for relocation.
Use only skilled labor in the appropriate crafts. Identify items to be relocated, store and protect as
directed.
C. Provide for surface drainage during the period of construction in a manner that protects trenches and
adjacent areas. Take precautions and temporary measures, such as temporary seeding, to prevent
damage from erosion of freshly graded areas. This applies to damage of newly graded areas within
construction limits and damage to adjacent properties by eroded materials.
3.03
EXCAVATION
A. General:
1. Excavation shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated.
2. During excavation, material satisfactory for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner at a
distance from the banks of the trench equal to 1/2 the depth of the excavation, but in no instance
closer than (2 feet).
3. Excavated material not required or not satisfactory for backfill shall be removed from the site.
4. Grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into the
excavation, and any water accumulating therein, regardless of source, shall be removed to maintain
the stability of the bottom and sides of the excavation. Continue to remove and dispose of water until
utility lines, fittings, manholes, and other appurtenances are in place and sealed against the entrance
of water. Water, earth, or any foreign materials shall not be allowed to enter the utility lines.
5. Unauthorized overexcavation shall be backfilled in accordance with section 31 23 23, paragraphs
3.05 & 3.07 at no additional cost to the Government.
6. Correct unauthorized excavation at no extra cost to Government.
7. Remove unused excavated material from site in accordance with the following:
a. The contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer of the estimated or actual quantity of
excess satisfactory soil, defined as those complying with ASTM D2487soil classification
groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP. The excess soil shall be removed and disposed of off
base by the Contractor.
b. All unsatisfactory soil, as defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification
groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, shall be the Contractor's responsibility for
disposal off base.
B. Trench Excavation: The trench shall be excavated as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to
be installed. Trench walls below the top of the pipe shall be sloped, or made vertical, and of such width
as recommended in the manufacturer’s installation manual. Where no manufacturer’s installation manual
is available, trench walls shall be made vertical. Trench walls more than five feet high shall be shored,
cut back to a stable slope, or provided with equivalent means of protection for employees who may be
exposed to moving ground or cave in. Trench walls which are cut back shall be excavated to at least the
angle of repose of the soil. Special attention shall be given to slopes which may be adversely affected by
weather or moisture content. The trench width below the top of pipe shall not exceed 24 inches plus pipe
outside diameter (O.D.) for pipes of less than 24 inches inside diameter and shall not exceed 36 inches
plus pipe outside diameter for sizes larger than 24 inches inside diameter. Where recommended trench
widths are exceeded, redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures shall be utilized by the
Contractor. The cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures shall be borne by the
Contractor without any additional cost to the Government.
31 23 16 - 3
MS0114
1. Bottom Preparation: The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing
and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Bell holes shall be excavated to the
necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Stones of 1.5 inches or greater in
any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, shall be removed
to avoid point bearing.
2. Removal of Unyielding Material: Where unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the
trench, such material shall be removed a minimum of 4 inches below the required grade and
replaced with suitable materials as provided in section 31 23 23, paragraphs 3.05 & 3.07.
3. Removal of Unstable Material: Where unstable material in encountered in the bottom of the trench,
such material shall be removed to the depth directed and replaced to the proper grade with Type “D”
as provided in Section 31 23 23, paragraph 2.02.D. When removal of unstable material is required
due to the fault or neglect of the contractor in his performance of the work, the resulting material shall
be excavated and replaced by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.
4. Jacking, Boring, and Tunneling: Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut except
that sections of a trench may be jacked, bored, or tunneled if, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer,
the pipe, or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly compacted in such
sections.
C. Excavation for Appurtenances: Excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar structures shall
be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear between the outer structure surfaces and the face of the
excavation or support members. Removal of unstable material shall be as specified above. When
concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area special care shall be taken not to disturb the
bottom of the excavation. Excavation to the final grade level shall not be made until just before the
concrete or masonry is to be placed.
3.04
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS: Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the
specific
utilities are as follows:
A. Water Lines: Trenches shall be of a depth to provide a minimum cover of 3-1/2 feet from the existing
ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, to the top of the pipe.
B. Plastic Marking Tape: Warning tapes shall be installed directly above the pipe, at the depth of 12-18
inches below finished grade unless otherwise shown.
3.05
TESTING: Testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed at no additional
cost to the Government.
A. Testing Facilities: Tests shall be performed by an approved commercial testing laboratory or may be
tested by facilities furnished by the Contractor. No work requiring testing will be permitted until the
facilities have been inspected and approved by the Contracting Officer. The first inspection shall be at
the expense of the Government. Cost incurred for any subsequent inspection required because of failure
of the first inspection will be charged to the Contractor.
B. Testing of Backfill Materials: Characteristics of backfill materials shall be determined in accordance with
particle size analysis of soils ASTM D 422 and moisture-density relations of soils ASTM D 1557. A
minimum of one particle size analysis and one moisture-density relation test shall be performed on each
different type of material used for bedding and backfill.
C. Field Density Tests: Tests shall be performed in sufficient numbers to ensure that the specified density is
being obtained. A minimum of one field density test per lift of backfill for every 500 feet of installation
shall be performed. One moisture density relationship shall be determined for every 1500 cubic yards of
material used. Field in-place density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D
6938. When ASTM D 6938 is used, the calibration curves shall be checked and adjusted using the sand
cone method as described in paragraph Calibration of the ASTM publication. ASTM D 6938 results in a
wet unit weight of soil and when using this method, ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the
moisture content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall be checked
along with the density calibration checks as described in ASTM D 6938. The calibration checks of both
the density and moisture gauges shall be made at the beginning of a job, on each different type of
material encountered, at intervals as directed by the Contracting Officer. Copies of calibration curves,
31 23 16 - 4
MS0114
results of calibration tests, and field and laboratory density tests shall be furnished to the Contracting
Officer. Trenches improperly compacted shall be reopened to the depth directed, then refilled and
compacted to the density specified at no additional cost to the Government.
D. Displacement of Sewers: After other required tests have been performed and the trench backfill
compacted to 2 feet above the top of the pipe, the pipe shall be inspected to determine whether
significant displacement has occurred. This inspection shall be conducted in the presence of the
Contracting Officer’s representative. Pipe sizes larger than (36 inches) shall be entered and examined,
while smaller diameter pipe shall be inspected by shining a light or laser between manholes or manhole
locations, or by the use of television cameras passed through the pipe. If, in the judgment of the
Contracting Officer, the interior of the pipe shows poor alignment or any other defects that would cause
improper functioning of the system, the defects shall be remedied as directed at no additional cost to the
Government.
3.06
SETTLEMENT OCCURRING WITHIN THE GUARANTEE PERIOD: Regardless of the type of
compaction or settlement methods used, should settlement occur, refill, compact, and smooth off
trenches until made to conform to the ground surface. Correct settlement under pavements and
sidewalks as required.
3.07
GRADING: Grade to a finish ordinarily obtained from a blade grader, without abrupt changes in grade or
holes that will hold water so that effective drainage is secured at all times. Maintain roadways in an
acceptable condition at all times until final acceptance.
3.08
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01 41 00.
B. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.
3.09
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
A. Maximum length of open trench at any time shall not exceed 165 linear meters (500 linear feet) unless
approved otherwise. When approved, the Contractor may upon request, conduct pipe laying activities at
more than one separate location; with the restrictions on open trenches applying to each location.
B. Move minor structures and restore temporary openings in fences to their original condition. Stockpile and
reset, in original locations, any culverts, pipes, cables, or minor structures which are moved. Determine
actual condition as to structures and miscellaneous obstacles to move for construction purposes.
Removal and placement of these items shall be considered as part of the Contractor's obligation, and no
additional payment shall be made.
C. Make open cuts or excavations in sidewalks without additional compensation. Remove concrete from joint
to joint wherever the trench crosses a sidewalk or sawcut for asphalt driveways, walkways, and jogging
paths. After the pipe is in place and backfilled to the specified density the Contractor shall, at his own
expense, replace or reconstruct sidewalks, walkways, and driveways with like materials and restore to the
original condition in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. All installations under pavements
and slabs will be accomplished by directional boring to a minimum of five feet beyond the pavement or
slab edge. Asphalt settlement or concrete breakage over trenches shall be repaired as directed by the
Contracting Officer.
D. The Contractor shall maintain all the streets he/she is working on until acceptance of the work.
Maintenance shall include grading the streets if they become bumpy or rough and the spraying of water on
the streets to keep the dust down.
E. Re-sod areas disturbed by grading or construction.
F. Cleanup shall proceed directly behind backfilling to accommodate the return to normal conditions. The
amount of work on which complete cleanup has not been accomplished shall be limited to 330 linear
meters (1,000 linear feet) for the entire job should the Contractor fail to diligently pursue job cleanup.
31 23 16 - 5
MS0114
END OF SECTION
31 23 16 - 6
MS0114
SECTION 31 23 23:
PART 1
FILL
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Building perimeter backfilling.
B. Site filling and backfilling.
C. Fill under slabs-on-grade and paving.
D. Consolidation and compaction.
E. Fill for over-excavation.
F. Sheet vapor retardant and fill.
1.02
REFERENCES:
A. ANSI/ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
B. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard
Effort (12,400ft-lb/ft3)
C. ANSI/ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
D. ANSI/ASTM D 6938 – Standard Test Method for In-Place Density & Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
E. State of Florida Department of Transportation (DOT), Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (SSRBC), most current edition.
1.03
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Samples: Submit 10 lb. sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in airtight containers.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
FILL MATERIALS:
A. Type A - Crushed Stone: Pit run or river washed natural stone; free of shale, clay, friable material, sand,
debris; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following limits:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
2 inches (5O mm)
100
One inch (25 mm)
95
3/4 inch (19 mm)
95 to 100
5/8 inch (16 mm)
75 to 100
3/8 inch (09 mm)
55 to 85
No. 4
35 to 60
B. Type B - Pea Gravel: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter; graded in accordance
with ANSI/ASTM C136, to the following:
1. Minimum Size: 1/4 inch.
2. Maximum Size: 5/8 inch.
C. Type C - Sand: Natural river or bank sand; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, or organic
matter; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136, within the following limits:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
No. 4
100
No. 14
10 to 100
No. 50
5 to 90
31 23 23 - 1
MS0114
No. 100
No. 200
4 to 30
0
D. Type D - Structural Fill:
1. Earth for structural fill shall consist of material containing no more than 10 percent by weight finer
than No. 200 US Standard Sieve and shall be inorganic (less than 3% organic material by dry unit
weight) and conform to the following properties:
a. Liquid Limit
= 30 maximum
b. Plasticity Index = 20 maximum
c. Dry Unit Weight = 100 pcf minimum
2. Gravel shall consist of crushed stone or gravel. Size and gradation shall be as specified herein
below: Total Percent Passing Sieve (By Weight)
Square
Sieve
1-1/2
1
3/4
1/2
3/8
#4
#8
Top
100
100
100
904000One-Third 100
70
10
5
(Size #7)
Bottom
100
9590252000Two-Thirds 100
100
60
55
10
5
3. Material, which does not conform to the above classifications, may be used as Site Fill material, only
outside building and pavement lines, provided Site Fill specifications are met.
E. Subsoil: Reused or imported, free of gravel larger than 3-inch size, debris, and organic material.
F. Concrete: Lean concrete with a compressive strength of 1,000 psi.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION:
A. Verify fill materials to be reused are acceptable.
B. Verify foundation perimeter drainage installation has been inspected.
3.02
PREPARATION:
A. Generally, compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.
B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of insitu compaction. Backfill with Type A, B, C, or D fill and
compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.
C. Prior to placement of aggregate base course material at gravel or paved areas, compact subsoil to 98
percent of its maximum dry density in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698.
3.03
BACKFILLING:
A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.
B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet,
frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth.
D. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth.
E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage utilities in trenches.
F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
G. Slope grade away from building a minimum of 6-inches in 10 feet unless noted otherwise.
H. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.
31 23 23 - 2
MS0114
I.
Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
J. Trench Backfill: Trenches shall be backfilled to the grade shown. The trench may be backfilled to 2 feet
above the top of pipe prior to performing the required pressure tests. The joints and couplings shall be
left uncovered during the pressure test. The trench shall not be completely backfilled until all specified
tests are performed.
3.04
TOLERANCES:
A. Top surface of backfilling must be plus or minus one inch from required elevations.
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 41 00.
B. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698 and with
Section 01 41 00.
C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D 1556, ANSI/ASTM D 6938, and
ANSI/ASTM D698 and with Section 01 41 00.
D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest at no cost to
Government.
E. Moisture & Density tests shall be in accordance with applicable sections of the Florida Dept. of
Transportation Standard Specifications for the specific type of paving.
3.06
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK:
A. Re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.07
COMPACTION SCHEDULE:
A. Slab-On-Grade, Footings and Bottom of Trenches:
1. Type D fill, 8 inches thick below bottom of floor slab/footing/trench, compacted to 100 percent.
2. Cover with Type A fill, if called for on the drawings, 4 inches thick, compacted to 100 percent.
3. Frequency of Tests:
a. Slab-On-Grade: One per 1000 square feet of slab area or fraction thereof for each lift.
b. Footings and Bottom of Trenches: One per 50 linear feet or fraction thereof.
B. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls and Under Grass Areas:
1. Subsoil or Type D fill, to 6" below finish grade, compacted to 95 percent.
2. Remainder of 6" fill with topsoil, Compacted to 90 percent.
3. Frequency of Tests:
a. Exterior Areas: One per 1000 square feet or fraction thereof.
C. Fill Under Asphalt Paving (Base):
1. Type A fill, minimum 6" inches thick below bottom of finish paving, compacted to 100 percent; or
2. Minimum 6 inches thick lean concrete to minimum compressive strength of 1,000 psi.
3. Frequency of Tests:
a. Base Course: One per 1000 square feet or fraction thereof.
END OF SECTION
31 23 23 - 3
MS0114
SECTION 31 31 16:
PART l
TERMITE CONTROL
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Soil treatment for termite control below grade.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act.
B. DoDI 4150.07 - Pest Management Program.
C. AFI 32-1053 - Pest Management Program
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Provide product data of each pesticide to be used, manufacturers written installation instructions, MSDS,
composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate and manufacturer's certification
that pesticide meets or exceeds specified requirements.
C. Submit applicator name, qualification, and current Florida license.
D. After application, submit application data to include location of application, common name, EPA
registration number, formulation, percent of active ingredient, source or NSN, quantity used, and
application concentration with finished formulation %, diluent, rate, and method of application/equipment.
Data will be provided to Pest Management for reporting to MAJCOM.
E. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required.
F. Provide sample copy of warranty meeting Section 1.09 requirements.
1.04
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record moisture content of soil before application, date and rate of application, areas of
application, diary of meter readings and corresponding soil coverage.
1.05
MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Indicate re-treatment schedule if required and other information pertinent to warranty.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years
documented experience, approved by manufacturer and licensed by the State of Florida. Submit copy of
current Florida license.
1.07
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable requirements for application in accordance with EPA and Florida Department of
Environmental Regulation.
1.08
SEQUENCING
A. Apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier under slabs-on-grade.
1.09
WARRANTY
A. Provide 2 year written warranty (inclusive with no annual renewal required) against subterranean and
Formosan termite infestation and reinfestation of the building. Warranty shall bind both the contractor
and termite contractor to promptly provide such treatment as may be necessary for the elimination and
control of termite infestation, and repair or replace all damage attributed to termites with no cost
limitations. Warranty shall be in a form acceptable to the Government.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
31 31 16 - 1
MS0114
2.01
ARMED FORCES PEST MANAGEMENT BOARD APPROVED MATERIALS
A. Contact termiticide TERMIDOR 80 WG.
B. Substitutions: Substitutions will not be considered for chemicals other than contact termiticides.
Repellents will not be considered. Approval of deviations from Termidor 80 WG will not be at base level
and will extend the normal approval/disapproval time. Contractor should plan accordingly. Substitutions
must comply with specification section 01 00 00.
2.02
MIX
A. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive treatment.
3.02
APPLICATION
A. Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil penetrations such
as grounding rods or posts.
C. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.
3.03
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit soil grading over treated work.
3.04
LOCATION
A. Under slabs-on-grade and along perimeter of exterior and interior sides of foundation walls, grade beams
and similar structures. Coordinate with final grading operations to prevent disturbance of toxicant barrier.
END OF SECTION
31 31 16 - 2
MS0114
SECTION 32 92 23
PART 1
SODDING
GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of landscape work generally includes:
1. Weed Treatment
2. Soil Preparation
3. Sodding
4. Reconditioning Existing Turf Areas
5. Cleanup and Protection
6. Maintenance
B. Sub-grade Elevations: Excavation, filling and grading required to establish elevations shown on drawings
are not specified in this section. Refer to Earthwork sections. Subcontractors shall coordinate with
contractor on responsibility for earthwork.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. General: Planting materials shall meet or exceed the Specifications of Federal, State and local laws
requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control.
B. Sod shall conform to the following document that is to be considered part of these Specifications:
"Guideline Specifications to Sodding" American Sod Producers Association. (ASPA)
1.03
QUALIFICATIONS
A. The contractor shall have not less than 3 years experience installing sod.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Inspections: All necessary state, federal, and other inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice for
each shipment or order for sod materials as approval at the site or elsewhere.
B. Analysis and Standards: Pack standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. For other
materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by
the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable.
C. Provide the following samples prior to installation:
1. Herbicide: Label from container or supplier's brochure.
2. Fill Sand: One-ounce sample of sand.
3. Soil Amendments: Labels from all bags.
4. Sod: Submit sod grower's certification of grass species. Identify source location.
5. Soil Test: Contractor will have existing soil tested by an approved soil laboratory. Results of test shall
be forwarded to the Contracting Officer in accordance with Section 01 41 00 of the specifications.
The samples tested shall consist of a representative mixture from the site. Cost of the soil test and all
additives at rates recommended by the laboratory shall be included in the base bid. Soil Test shall
include these items and amendment rates of each needed for the specified sod: pH factor,
Potassium, Phosphorus, Calcium, Magnesium, N-P-K, and a nematode count.
1.06
JOB CONDITIONS
32 92 23 - 1
MS0114
A. Basic Regulations: Sodding operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during the
seasons, which are normal for such work as determined by acceptable practice in the locality. Contractor
is hereby notified of active utilities and caution shall be exercised to avoid interruption of services.
Contractor is responsible for replacement of any existing buried utilities, irrigation lines, etc., if they are
broken during the planting operations. Contractor shall obtain a digging permit and contact the
appropriate utility to have their location marked. If not, any damage to utilities will be repaired at the
contractor's expense. Contractor shall protect existing paved areas, curb/gutters, walks, etc. The
contractor will repair any damage.
B. When conditions detrimental to sod growth are encountered during soil preparation or planting, such as
rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Contracting Officer and correct before
planting.
C. Sequence of Work: Sod after irrigation and final grades are established unless otherwise acceptable to
Contracting Officer. Protect existing lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from
operations.
1.07
WARRANTY & REPLACEMENT
A. Contractor shall guarantee that at the end of 60 days following final building acceptance, all sod areas
shall have established grass that is uniform in color and quality, and is reasonably free from visible
imperfections. Any sod areas not in this condition will be replaced at no expense to the government.
Inspection to determine the condition of the sod areas will be made by the Contracting Officer upon
receiving such a request from contractor.
B. Contractor shall not be held responsible for damages to sod areas due to government neglect,
hurricanes, tornadoes, or for damage caused by theft or vandalism, other contractor's work on the site,
application of fertilizers, and pesticides or other materials not applied by him. The cost to repair damage
caused by another contractor shall be paid for by the contractor responsible for the damage. This
contractor shall immediately notify the prime contractor of the damage, etc.
C. Repair: When any portion of the surface becomes gullied or otherwise damaged due to drainage
conditions, the affected portion shall be repaired to reestablish condition and grade of soil to as it was
prior to injury as directed. Repair work required shall be performed without cost to the government.
Repair shall be made within 10 days or as soon as weather conditions are satisfactory for planting.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
2.02
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original containers showing weight, analysis and
name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.
B.
Deliver sod on pallets after preparations for sodding have been completed and lay immediately. Protect
sod from drying out. Use all means necessary to protect sod materials before, during and after
installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
C. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid in 24 hours. Sod not laid within 24 hours of delivery will
be rejected.
2.03
SOD
A. Sod Schedules: Contractor shall furnish the sod required to accomplish the work and leave no bare
areas.
1. General lawn use at buildings: Argentine Bahia, Paspalum Notatum or Common Bermuda grass,
Cynodon dactylon.
2. Large areas, airfield. etc.: Common Bermuda grass, Cynodon dactylon.
3. Playing fields; baseball, soccer, football, etc.: "Tifway" Bermuda, Cynodon dactylon.
32 92 23 - 2
MS0114
4. General lawn use Soundside area: Floratam St. Augustine, Stenotaphrum secundatum.
B. Provide strongly rooted sod of the type indicated on the drawings, ASPA approved field grown grade. All
sod shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project for a
minimum of two (2) years and machine cut and harvested to pad thickness of 3/4" to 1 1/4", excluding top
growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted with
maximum five percent (5%) deviation in either length, width, or pad thickness. Broken pads or pads with
uneven ends will not be acceptable.
C. Sod shall have root development, which will support its own weight, without tearing, when suspended
vertically by its two upper corners.
D. Sod shall be clear of non-specified grasses and weeds with not more than 3 weeds per pallet (500 SF).
E. Contracting Officer reserves the right to inspect grass areas from time of installation to Final Acceptance.
The time of inspection shall be after the grass has gone not mowed for a minimum of two weeks. Any
evidence of non-specified grasses or weeds will be cause for rejection and replacement of the
unacceptable lawn areas.
2.04
SOIL AMENDMENT
A. Fill Sand: Clean yellow fill, No. 4 to 200 Sand, pH 5.5 - 6.5.
B. Soil Amendment for All Sod (See 3.04 A for ratios):
1. Gro-Tone Bed Mix.
2. Black Kow Cow manure.
2.05
MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS
A. Water: Furnished by government or provided by the project irrigation system. Contractor shall provide
hose and other watering equipment.
B. Edging (if indicated on the drawings): Black Aluminum, 1/8" x 4" with stakes. Curve-Rite Aluminum
Edging (800) 366-2878, Sure-Loc (800) 787-3562, PermaLoc (800) 356-9660 or approved equal.
C. Mulch: Longleaf Pine Straw. Freshly baled, dry, and free of debris, leaves, insects, and briars.
D. Wood Pegs: Softwood, sufficient size and length to ensure anchorage of sod on slopes.
E. Herbicide (For Pre-Sod Treatment of Weeds, Etc.): Round-Up by Monsanto or approved equal.
F. Herbicide (During Maintenance Period): Submit Label / Manufacturer's instructions.
G. Fertilizer (for maintenance period): Gro-Tone Lawn Special 16-4-8 or approved equal. For winter
applications use approved winterizer.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
WEED TREATMENT
A. All site locations disturbed by site construction and to receive sod where weeds exist shall receive an
initial treatment of post-emergent herbicide. Planting areas shall not be disturbed for fourteen (14) days
following each application of herbicide. This treatment shall be repeated as required so that no weeds
are present at the date of final inspection of the Project and at the conclusion of the 60-day maintenance
period.
B. Post-emergent weed treatment includes removal of weeds and other undesirable ground cover vegetation
and shall be accomplished a minimum of fourteen (14) days prior to soil preparation for sodding
operations.
C. Care shall be taken not to affect existing trees or shrubs to be saved on the site. Also care will be taken
not to affect plants on adjacent site.
3.02
WEED TREATMENT PROCEDURE
32 92 23 - 3
MS0114
A. Mow grass and/or existing weeds in designated areas to 3" height.
B. Spray herbicide on a day that is not rainy or windy or below 65 degrees F.
C. Do not disturb soil for 14 days.
D. After 14 days, mechanically rake soil when the soil is not excessively hard or dry (water the soil if
necessary).
E. Remaining dead material shall be allowed to accumulate in place and shall be incorporated into the soil
through the roto-tilling of the soil preparation work.
3.03
SOIL PREPARATION AND BED LAYOUT
A. Contractor shall report immediately upon his awareness, any site condition or situation of the contiguous
landscape that would cause flooding, washing or concentration of excess surface water to the areas
receiving planting or lawn.
B. Prior to placement of any required fill sand, cultivate sub-grade to a minimum of four inches (4"). Remove
stones over one-half inch diameter (1/2") and sticks, roots, rubbish and other extraneous debris of any
dimension.
C. Fill sand is to be placed to obtain uniform site grade and proper drainage. Compact to a minimum
standard density of 80%.
D. Prior to fine grading install Edging and Stakes per manufacturer's instructions. Layout of Edging is as
indicated on the drawings. Straight runs are to be straight to within 1/2" and arcs are to be round to within
1/2" of plan dimensions. All Edging shall be truly square to other Edging or Sidewalks, etc. where shown.
E. Irrigation work, if included, shall be completed after roto-tilling and compaction, but prior to fine grading.
F. Fine Grading: The entire area shall be raked smooth after removing all rocks, roots and debris one-half
inch (1/2") in diameter or larger. Make changes to grade gradual and blend slopes into level areas. The
site shall be free from irregular surface changes and shall vary uniformly between fixed elevations.
G. Fine grade grass areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake and drag
lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grade. Limit fine grading to
areas which can be planted immediately after grading.
H. Allow for grass thickness in areas to be sodded and mulch thickness in shrub beds. Finish grade of soil
shall be two inches (2") below top of pavement in all areas.
3.04
SOIL MIXTURE
A. Mix specified soil amendment (see Section 2.02 A) by roto-tilling to a depth of four (4) inches:
1. Fifty (50) LBS of Bed Mix per One Thousand (1000) SF of Sod.
2. One Hundred (100) LBS of Cow Manure per One Thousand (1000) SF of Sod.
B. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, lumps, existing irrigation materials, and other
extraneous materials harmful or toxic to sod growth. (maximum acceptable lump size is 1/2".)
C. Contractor may be required to mix all ingredients of the planting soil mix in the presence of the project
inspector. All ingredients shall be thoroughly blended to provide a homogeneous mixture.
3.05
PREPARATION OF SOD AREAS
A. Bed preparation shall be done by hand within the drip-line of existing trees to protect the tree's roots.
B. Planting beds with weed growth shall be treated as necessary to remove weeds and re-inspected. No
beds shall be accepted with weeds or unspecified grass.
3.06
SODDING NEW LAWNS
A. Soil shall be prepared prior to sodding. See Sections 3.01 - 3.05.
32 92 23 - 4
MS0114
B. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen. Do not
use any piece of sod less than .5 SF (one-half square foot). Do not harvest or transport sod when
moisture content may adversely affect sod survival. Protect sod from sun, wind, and dehydration prior to
installation. Do not tear, stretch, or drop sod during handling and installation.
C. Prior to placement of sod, water soil thoroughly to obtain at least 6" (six) inches penetration into the soil
below the sod. Do not lay sod on dry or frozen ground.
D. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Tightly butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not
overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Continuously rake soil in area of installation to
assure a smooth finish grade. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with sub-grade. Work sifted soil into
minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass.
E. Neatly and cleanly edge sod with a sharpened instrument so as not to fray edges of sod. Continuously
re-sharpen during edging process.
F. Sod indicated areas within contract limits and areas adjoining contract limits disturbed as a result of
construction operations.
G. On slopes of 3:1 and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs at a
maximum of two (2) feet on center. Drive pegs flush with top of sod pad.
H.
Firmly press sod into contact with soil with roller weighing 100-150 pounds per lineal foot.
I.
Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting to obtain at least six inches (6")
penetration into the soil below the sod.
3.07
RECONDITIONING EXISTING TURF AREAS
A. Provide soil amendments, sod, fill sand and all other materials necessary to return turf to its original
condition before the start of the contract.
B. Recondition existing turf areas damaged by contractor's operations including storage for materials and
equipment and movement of vehicles. Re-grade as required. Fill low spots and meet new finish grades.
Cultivate bare and compacted areas thoroughly to provide a suitable soil for sod.
C.
Water newly reconditioned turf areas as required to establish turf. (60 Days Minimum).
3.08
MULCHING
A. Dress Mulching: Within two days after planting not less than three inches (3") of mulch shall be placed on
entire area of planting beds, and not less than four inches (4") over shrub and tree pits.
B. Edge mulch with a round-point shovel where beds are next to turf or walkways so that mulch is pushed
into soil and is kept in beds.
3.09
MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting and continue until sixty (60) days after final acceptance of
the project, or longer as required to establish the turf.
B. Maintain newly sodded lawn areas by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other
operations such as rolling, re-grading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn,
free of eroded or bare areas. Immediately replace sod in areas showing deterioration.
C. Apply herbicides and insecticides that will not inhibit growth but will prevent weed and insect damage to
turf. Comply with State of Florida and manufacturer's requirements for application of herbicides and
insecticides.
D. After sod is rooted, apply Fertilizer at the rate of Ten (10) Lbs. per 1000 SF. If winter apply the approved
winterizer at the medium rate listed on the bag.
E. Watering Schedule: Watering schedule is to include the duration and frequency each irrigation zone will
run per week; or, if there is no irrigation system the schedule of the watering truck or hand watering. This
will be worked out jointly with the irrigation contractor and shall be programmed on to the controller after
32 92 23 - 5
MS0114
review by BCE. Program shall be submitted to Contracting Officer as part of the final acceptance
process.
3.10
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During landscape work, all pallets, sod pieces, debris, and sand on pavement, shall be removed daily.
B. Any excess excavated subsoil or topsoil shall be removed from the site.
C. After sodding operations are finished, all paved areas which may have become strewn with soil or other
material shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping, and if necessary, power washing.
D. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other
contractors and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
3.11
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. The completed sod will be inspected at the time of the final inspection. Sod will also be inspected at